Home

86A243JX02-AIX 4.3 - Commands Reference

1. draftfolder Folder Uses the header information from the draft message in the specified folder If you specify a draft folder that doesn t exist the system creates one for you draftmessage Message Uses the header information from the specified draft message help Lists the command syntax available switches toggles and version information Note For MH the name of this flag must be fully spelled out Message Specifies the message draft Use the following to specify messages Number Number of the message cur or period whom Command 93 Commands Reference Volume 6 Current message This is the default Jirst First message in a folder last Last message in a folder next Message following the current message prev Message preceding the current message nodraftfolder Undoes the last occurrence of the draftfolder Folder flag Note Two other flags check and nocheck are also available These flags have no effect on how the whom command performs verification The check and nocheck flags are provided for compatibility only Profile Entries The following entries are entered in the UserMhDirectory mh_profile file Draft Folder Sets your default folder for drafts postproc Specifies the program used to post messages Examples To list and verify the addresses of the proposed recipients of a message enter the addressees and subject of the message at the respective prompt as follows To d77 n
2. Lists all folders and messages in mail directory Forwards messages Incorporates new mail into a folder Sets up mailbox directories Creates modifies and displays message sequences Produces formatted listings of messages Sends or receives mail Prints full path names of messages and folders Checks for messages Creates an MH shell Commands List Message Handler 357 packf pick post prev prompter revdist revpack rcevstore revtty refile repl rmf rmm scan send sendbug show slocal sortm spost vmh whatnow Commands Reference Volume 6 Shows the next message Compresses the contents of a folder into a file Selects messages by content and creates and modifies sequences Routes a message Shows the previous message Invokes a prompting editor Sends a copy of incoming messages to additional recipients Saves incoming messages in a packed file Incorporates new mail from standard input into a folder Notifies the user of incoming messages Moves files between folders Replies to a message Removes folders and the messages they contain Removes messages from active status Produces a one line per message scan listing Sends a message Mails a system bug report to a specified address Shows messages Processes incoming mail Sorts messages Routes a message Invokes a visual interface for use with MH commands
3. Network Information Services NIS Overview for System Management in AIX Version 4 3 Network Information Services NIS and NIS Guide NIS Reference ypbind Daemon 320 Commands Reference Volume 6 ypcat Command Purpose Prints out a Network Information Services NIS map Syntax To Display the Network Information Services Database yeom Command Displays the NIS Date gt ese sr in ypcat 1 MapWarve k r d Domainname usr bin ypcat k t dDomainName MapName To Display the Nickname Translation Table Diapisya the Nickname Translation Teie Usrbiniypcent x usr bin ypcat x Description The ypcat command prints out the Network Information Services NIS map you specify with the MapName parameter You can specify either a map name or a map nickname Since the ypeat command uses the NIS service you do not need to specify a server Flags k Displays the keys for those maps in which the values are null or for which the key is not part of the value None of the maps derived from files that have an ASCII version in the letc directory fall into this class t Indicates that the name specified by the MapName parameter is not a nickname This flag causes the ypcat command to bypass the nickname translation table and search only for the map specified by the MapName parameter d DomainName Searches the specified domain for the specified map x Displays the nickname translation t
4. Setup Program The Xsetup file is run after the server is reset but before the login window is offered The file is typically a shell script It is run as root so you should be careful about security This is the place to change the root background or bring up other windows that should appear on the screen along with the Login widget Note that since xdm grabs the keyboard other windows will not be able to receive keyboard input They will be able to interact with the mouse however beware of potential security holes here If DisplayManager DISPLAY grabServer is set Xsetup will not be able to connect to the display at all Resources for this program can be put into the file named by DisplayManager DISPLAY resources In addition to any specified by DisplayManager exportList the following environment variables are passed DISPLAY Specifies the associated display name PATH Specifies the value of DisplayManager DISPLAY systemPath SHELL Specifies the value of DisplayManager DISPLA Y systemShell XAUTHORITY Specifies that it may be set to an authority file Authentication Client The MIT authentication widget has been replaced by an authentication client composed of standard Motif widgets The following is a list of the widget names and their widget class outframe xmFrameWidget inframe xmFrameWidget main XmFormWidget tframe xmFrameWidget greeting xmLabelGadget logoline xmFormWidget dpyname xmLabelWidget userline xmRo
5. Specifies that access is unlimited Access control is turned off Turns access control on The complete Name has a the following family name syntax inet xhost Command 217 Commands Reference Volume 6 Internet host local Contains only one name the empty string Note The family is case sensitive The format of the name varies with the family xhost Command 218 Commands Reference Volume 6 xinit Command Purpose Initializes the X Window System Syntax Dana RS Command CH Ly Optews Server Dispwy xinit Client Options Server Display Options Description The xinit command starts the AIXwindows server and a first client program on systems that cannot start X directly from etc init or in environments that use multiple window systems When this first client exits the xinit command stops the X server and then ends If no specific client program is given on the command line the xinit command looks for a file to run to start up client programs The xinit command looks for the XINITRC environment variable If the file is not there it then looks for the SHOME xinitre file If it still does not find the file it follows these steps 1 The xinit command looks next to usr lib X11 LANG xinitre 2 Next it looks to usr lpp X11 defaults LANG xinitrc 3 And finally it looks to usr Ipp X11 defaults xinitrce If no such file exists xinit uses the following as a default ai
6. mb mc Milliseconds ms Color nb Number rw aw S xterm Command Commands Reference Volume 6 cursor motion package Indicates that xterm should not work around the more function bug previously mentioned Specifies the program and its command line arguments to be run in the xterm window It also sets the window title and icon name to be the base name of the program being run if neither the T nor the n option is given on the command line Note This must be the last option on the command line Specifies a font to be used when displaying bold text This font must be the same height and width as the normal font If only one of the normal or bold fonts is specified it will be used as the normal font and the bold font will be produced by overstriking this font The default is to do overstriking of the normal font Turns on the uselnsertMode resource Turns off the useInsertMode resource Indicates that the xterm command should do jump scrolling Normally text is scrolled one line at a time this option allows the xterm command to move multiple lines at a time so that it does not fall as far behind Its use is strongly recommended since it makes the xterm command much faster when scanning through large amounts of text The VT100 escape sequences for enabling and disabling smooth scrolling as well as the VT Options menu can be used to turn this feature on or off Indicates that the xterm command should not
7. Draft Folder Sets the default folder for drafts Editor Sets the default editor fileproc Specifies the program used to refile messages LastEditor next Specifies the editor used after exiting the editor specified by the LastEditor variable lproc Specifies the program used to list the contents of a message Path Specifies the UserMhDirectory sendproc Specifies the program used to send messages whomproc Specifies the program used to determine the users to whom a message would be sent Examples 1 To display the original message when you are replying to a message enter the following at the What now prompt display The system displays the original message If you enter the display subcommand from a command other than the dist or rep command you will receive a system message stating that there is no alternate message to display 2 To edit the draft message with the vi editor enter the following at the What now prompt edit vi 3 To edit the draft message with the default editor specified in your mh_profile file enter the following at the What now prompt edit 4 To list the contents of the draft message you have composed enter the following at the What now prompt list The draft message you are composing is displayed 5 To send the draft message in the background and get a shell prompt immediately enter the following at the What now prompt push The draft message is sent and you i
8. Examples 1 The following command yacc grammar y draws yacc rules from the grammar y file and places the output in y tab c 2 The following command yacc Command 315 Commands Reference Volume 6 yacc d grammar y functions the same as example 1 but it also produces the y tab h file which would contain C style define statements for each of the tokens defined in the grammar y file Files y output Contains a readable description of the parsing tables and a report on conflicts generated by grammar ambiguities y tab c Contains an output file y tab h Contains definitions for token names yacc tmp Temporary file yacc debug Temporary file yacc acts Temporary file usr ccs lib yaccpar Contains parser prototype for C programs Jusr ccs lib liby a Contains a run time library Related Information The lex command Creating an Input Language with the lex and yacc Commands in AIX General Programming Concepts Writing and Debugging Programs The Example program for the lex and yacc programs in AIX General Programming Concepts Writing and Debugging Programs yacc Command 316 Commands Reference Volume 6 yes Command Purpose Outputs an affirmative response repetitively Syntax yee Command yes lt l E potire yes Expletive Description The yes command outputs an affirmative response repetitively Use the yes command as piped input to another command that requires an affirmative respo
9. F i Description The whatnow command provides an interface for the disposition of messages By default the interface operates on the current draft message When you enter the whatnow command the system places you in the interface and returns the following prompt What now Within the interface you can manipulate message drafts using the whatnow subcommands To see a listing of the subcommands press the Enter key at the what now prompt To exit the interface press q If you do not specify the draftfolder flag or if the Draft Folder entry in the HOME mh_ profile file is undefined the whatnow command searches your MH directory for a draft file Specifying a message after the draftfolder Folder flag is the same as specifying the draftmessage flag To change the default editor for the whatnow command use the editor flag or define the Editor entry in the UserMhDirectoryl mh_ profile file Note The comp dist forw or repl commands use the same interface as the whatnow command Flags draftfolder Folder Specifies the folder containing the message By default the system uses the UserMhdirectory draft file Specifying a message after the draftfolder Folder is the same as using the draftmessage flag draftmessage Message Specifies the draft message editor Editor Specifies that the value of the Editor variable is the initial editor for composing or revising the message help Lists the command synt
10. Use the following subcommands in command mode An incomplete subcommand can be canceled by pressing the Esc key If you need information about the format of vi subcommands see vi General Subcommand Syntax u Undoes the last change Note After an undo the cursor moves to the first non blank character on the updated current line U Restores the current line if the cursor has not left the line since the last change Repeats the last change or increments the np command Notes 1 This subcommand will repeat the last change including an undo Therefore after an undo repeat performs an undo rather than repeat the last change 2 This subcommand is not meant for use with a macro Enter two at signs to repeat a macro np Retrieves the nth last delete of a complete line or block of lines Manipulating Files The subcommands for manipulating files allow you to do the tasks outlined in the following sections e Saving changes to a file e Editing a second file e Editing a list of files e Finding file information Saving Changes to a File Use the following subcommands in command mode If you need information about the format of vi subcommands see vi General Subcommand Syntax W Writes the edit buffer contents to the original file If you are using this subcommand within the ex editor you do not need to type the colon w File Writes the edit buffer contents to the file specified by the File parameter If you are using th
11. query broadcast or indirect flags Normally the server starts sessions one after another This flag causes the server to exit after the first session ends The port flag is for use with XDMCP Sets the value for an additional display qualifier used by XDMCP in resource lookup for display specific options The class flag is for use with XDMCP Specifies a private key to be shared between the server 119 Commands Reference Volume 6 and the manager when testing XDM AUTHENTICATION 1 The cookie flag is for use with XDMCP displayID DisplayID Allows the display manager to identify each display so that it can locate the shared key specified by the cookie flag The displayID flag is for use with XDMCP Related Information The aixterm command xclock command xhost command xinit command xlsfonts command xwd command xwud command The Isdisp shell command X Command 120 Commands Reference Volume 6 x_add fs fpe Command Purpose Adds a network font server to a font path Syntax x_add_is_ pe Command s_edd_fs_ipe Host Pon Poston Typellane 1 x_add_fs_fpe Host Port Position TypeName Description The x_add_fs_fpe command adds a font path element to the font path of the selected network type name for a font server to access fonts Host Specifies the name of the system where the font server resides Port Specifies the number of the font server port This number
12. x_add_xst_tpe Command 12_0dd ksi ipe Hos m Pon Obesity Poston TypeName 4 x_add_xst_fpe Host Port Directory Position TypeName Description The x_add_xst_fpe command adds an Xstation Manager accessed font directory to a font path Parameters Host Specifies the name of the system to access for the font directory Port Specifies the number of the x_st_mgrd server port This number must be in the etc services file and is specified in decimal Directory Specifies the complete path to the directory that contains the fonts Position Specifies where to insert this element in the font path TypeName Specifies the name of the network type Each network type has a font path consisting of one or more font path elements To see a list of the network types and their font path elements press F4 in SMIT at the Xstation Network TYPE Name option Specify the name of the network type to which the font path element will be added or choose to have it added to all network type names by specifying A11 If a font path element is added to A11 network types it will be placed at the end of each font path Security Access Control Only the root user should have execute x access to this command Example To add the fonts in usr lib X11 fonts 75dpi to the font path for network type x_st_mgr ether enter x_add_xst_fpe waco 9000 usr lib X11 fonts 75dpi Last x_st_mgr ether In this example the font path element usr 1lib X11 fonts
13. Compares three files Compares two directories and the contents of their common files Searches a file for a pattern Writes to standard output with tabs changed to spaces Formats a text paragraph Searches a file for a literal string Folds long lines for finite width output device Generates a code set conversion table for use by the Iconv library Searches a file for a pattern Display the first few lines or bytes of a file or files Converts the encoding of characters from one code page encoding scheme to another Joins the data fields of two files 372 look more paste pecat pack page rev rpl sdiff sort spell spellin spellout tab tail tr trbsd tsort uncompress unexpand uniq unpack Files and Directories Commands Reference Volume 6 Processes locales and character map files to produce a locale database Finds lines in a sorted file Displays continuous text one screen at a time on a display screen Merges the lines of several files or subsequent lines in one file Unpacks files and writes them to standard output Compresses files Displays continuous text one screen at a time on a display screen Reverse characters in each line of a file Replaces all occurrences of a string in a file Compares two files and displays the differences in a side by side format Sorts files merges files that are already sorted and checks file
14. Digests attribute values for a virtual printer definition into memory image and stores the memory image in a file Copies fonts from a multilingual font diskette Drives a printer formatter Converts certain control characters destined for PostScript printers Printer backend s device driver interface program Creates a predefined printer data stream definition Allows one TTY stream monitor to attach to another TTY stream target and monitor the user session that is taking place on that stream Writes a file to standard output Enables or reports the availability of shared login ports Enables or reports the availability of login ports normal shared and delayed Interprets the contents of the various system tables and writes it to standard output Initializes terminals Removes a device from the system Allows remote access to magnetic tape devices Makes a typescript of a terminal session Sets terminal maps or code setmaps Changes or displays printer driver settings Sets resets and reports workstation operating parameters Sends and reports the terminal options for 128 port asynchronous controllers Specifies additional devices for paging and swapping 381 Commands Reference Volume 6 Redirects temporarily the system console output to a specified device or file sysdumpdev Changes the primary or secondary dump device designation in a running system tabs Sets tab stops on termi
15. Formats diskettes Sets the characteristics of ports Post processes the troff command output for the HP LaserJet Series printers Post processes the troff command output for the 3816 Pageprinter and the 3812 Model 2 Pageprinter Post processes the troff command output for the 3816 Pageprinter and the 3812 Model 2 Pageprinter Post processes troff command output for the 5587G printer with the 32x32 24x24 cartridge installed Converts the encoding of characters from one code page encoding scheme to another Manages terminfo descriptions Reports Central Processing Unit CPU statistics and input output statistics for tty disks and CD ROMs Compiles a keyboard mapping file into an input method keymap file Displays INed command key layout for all keyboards Sends requests to a line printer Enqueues print jobs Displays line printer status information Generates the line printer ripple pattern Displays attribute characteristics and possible values of attributes for devices in the system Displays diagnostic information about a device 379 Iscons Isdev Isdisp Isdsmitd Isdsmitm Isfont Iskbd Isparent mkdev mkfont mknod mt BSD panel20 pdelay pdisable penable phold pioattred piobe pioburst piocnvt General Operations Commands Reference Volume 6 Displays the connections a given device or kind of device can accept Writes the name of the cons
16. Indicates that the operation should only be performed on the SCREEN_RESOURCES property of the default screen of the display This option is specific to X11R5 Indicates that the operation should be performed on the SCREEN_RESOURCES property 268 Commands Reference Volume 6 of each screen of the display For load and merge the input file is processed once for each screen This option is specific to X11R5 symbols Indicates that the symbols defined for the preprocessor should be printed onto the standard output UName Passes through to the preprocessor and removes any definitions of this symbol Examples 1 To load a file into the database xrdb load myfile 2 To take the contents of the database just loaded and edit or put it into newfile xrdb edit newfile Files The xrdb command generalizes the Xdefaults files Related Information The XGetDefault function xrdb Command 269 Commands Reference Volume 6 xrx Command Purpose RX helper program Syntax xrx toolkitoption filename Description The helper program may be used with any Web browser to interpret documents in the RX MIME type format and start remote applications xrx reads in the RX document specified by its filename from which it gets the list of services the application wants to use Based on this information xrx sets the various requested services including creating authorization keys if your X server supports the SECU
17. Keyid Version prefer Adds a configured peer association operating in symmetric active mode at the specified address You may delete an existing association with the same peer or simply convert an existing association to conform to the new configuration when using this subcommand If the Keyid is a nonzero integer all outgoing packets to the remote server xntpdc Command 251 Commands Reference Volume 6 will have an authentication field attached encrypted with this key To specify no authentication enter Keyid as 0 or leave blank The values for Version can be 1 2 or 3 with 3 as the default The prefer option indicates a preferred peer used primarily for clock synchronisation if possible The preferred peer also determines the validity of the PPS signal If the preferred peer is suitable for synchronization so is the PPS signal addserverPeerAddress Keyid Version prefer Same as the addpeer subcommand except that the operating mode is client addtrapAddress Port Interface Sets a trap for asynchronous messages at the specified address and port number for sending messages with the specified local interface address If you do not specify the port number the value defaults to 18447 If you do not specify the interface address the value defaults to the source address of the local interface authinfo Displays information concerning the authentication module including known keys and counts of encrypti
18. Technical publication remark form Titre Title Bull AIX Commands Reference Vol 6 X to zcat N Ref rence Reference N 86 A2 43JX 02 Dat Dated April 2000 ERREURS DETECTEES ERRORS IN PUBLICATION AMELIORATIONS SUGGEREES SUGGESTIONS FOR IMPROVEMENT TO PUBLICATION Vos remarques et suggestions seront examin es attentivement Si vous d sirez une r ponse crite veuillez indiquer ci apr s votre adresse postale compl te Your comments will be promptly investigated by qualified technical personnel and action will be taken as required If you require a written reply please furnish your complete mailing address below NOM NAME Date SOCIETE COMPANY ADRESSE ADDRESS Remettez cet imprim a un responsable BULL ou envoyez le directement a Please give this technical publication remark form to your BULL representative or mail to BULL ELECTRONICS ANGERS CEDOC 34 Rue du Nid de Pie BP 428 49004 ANGERS CEDEX 01 FRANCE Technical Publications Ordering Form Bon de Commande de Documents Techniques To order additional publications please fill up a copy of this form and send it via mail to Pour commander des documents techniques remplissez une copie de ce formulaire et envoyez la BULL ELECTRONICS ANGERS Managers Gestionnaires CEDOC Mrs Mme C DUMOULIN 33 0 2 41 73 76 65 ATTN MME DUMOULIN Mr M L CHERUBIN 33 0 2 41 73 63 96 34 Rue du Nid de Pie BP 428 4900
19. The login window in the upper left corner of the screen No LPF keys A key repeat rate of 20 characters per second 2 To add an Xstation 140 named taylor with customizing performed on the local Xstation enter the following x_add_trm_140 n taylor t x_st_mgr ether ha 10005ac38e9 s n w 20 d mouse 1 English United States IBM 850 xdm broadcast This entry adds Xstation taylor to the current host with the following characteristics x_add trm 140 Command 134 Commands Reference Volume 6 Model 140 A network type of ethernet A hardware address of 10005ac38e9 Primary server status No delay time Input from a mouse United States English LANG variable United States English keyboard layout Standard keyboard file Broadcast xdm mode Files fusr Ipp x_st_mgr bin x_add_trm_140 Contains the x_add_trm_140 command etc x_st_mgr x_st_mgrd cf Contains the Xstation Manager configuration file etc x_st_mgr x_st_mgrd tmty Contains the terminal type file etc bootptab Contains the Boot Protocol table Related Information The aixterm command bootpd daemon login command pclient command x_add_nfs_fpe command x_add_trm_120 command x_add_trm_130 command x_add_trm_150 command x_add_trm_160 command x_chg_net command x_chg_trm_120 command x_chg_trm_130 command x_chg_trm_140 command x_chg_trm_150 command x_chg_trm_160 command x_def_net command x_Is_net command x_Is_net_fp command x_Is_trm co
20. To activate the volume group use the varyonvg command Note To use this command you must either have root user authority or be a member of the system group You can use the System Management Interface Tool SMIT to run this command To use SMIT enter smit varyoffvg Note A volume group that has a paging space volume on it cannot be varied off while the paging space is active Before deactivating a volume group with an active paging space volume ensure that the paging space is not activated automatically at system initialization and then reboot the system Flag s Puts the volume group into System Management mode so that only logical volume commands can be used on the volume group In this mode no logical volume can be opened or accessed by users Examples 1 To deactivate volume group vg03 enter varyoffvg vg03 2 To deactivate volume group vg02 but allow logical volume commands to continue to take effect enter varyoffvg s vg02 Logical volumes within the volume group cannot be opened but logical volume commands continue to take effect varyoffvg Command 20 Commands Reference Volume 6 File usr sbin varyoffvg Contains the varyoffvg command Related Information The exportvg command mount command umount command varyonvg command The System Management Interface Tool SMIT Overview in AIX Version 4 3 System Management Concepts Operating System and Devices explains the structure main menus and tas
21. etc x_st_mgr x_st_megrd tmty file Parameters Mandatory parameters are 160 Specifies that this command is used only for an Xstation 160 Name Specifies the name of the Xstation The Name parameter can be up to eight characters long and include the uppercase or lowercase letters a through z the numbers 0 through 9 the dash and the period Name can be a user name such as taylor or a group name with a number appended such as graphs 2 The terminal name must be known to the host system Note Name should not start with a uppercase or lowercase o or x followed by an octal or hexadecimal numeric These characters are interpreted as octal or hexadecimal numbers instead of as a terminal name In the examples x3 and xE4 the 3 and the E4 are hexadecimal numerics TypeName Specifies the name you defined for this network Xstation model subnet combination with the Define an Xstation Network Type option in SMIT or with the x_def_net command Press the F4 key in SMIT to select the network type An example is x_st_mgr ether160 for Ethernet and an Xstation 160 Address Specifies the Local Area Network LAN hardware address of the Xstation This address appears on the LAN Statistics screen when you power on the Xstation Each Xstation has a unique 6 byte hexadecimal hardware address in XXXXXXXXXXXX format that cannot be changed by the user Server Specifies whether or not the host system is a primary boot server A primary boo
22. old This command sequence renames all files in the current directory by adding old to the end of each name The I flag tells the xargs command to insert each line of the Is directory listing where braces appear If the current directory contains the files chap1 chap2 and chap3 this constructs the following commands mv chapl chapl old mv chap2 chap2 old mv chap3 chap3 old 4 To run a command on files that you select individually enter ls xargs p n 1 ar r lib a This command sequence allows you to select files to add to the Lib a library The p flag tells the xargs command to display each ar command it constructs and to ask if you want to run it Enter y to run the command Press the any other key if you do not want to run the command Something similar to the following displays ar r lib a chapl ar r lib a chap2 ar libsa chaps Pras 5 To construct a command that contains a specific number of arguments and to insert those arguments into the middle of a command line enter ls xargs n6 xargs I echo some files in the directory If the current directory contains files chap1 through chap10 the output constructed will be the following chapl chap2 chap3 chap4 chap5 chap6 some files in the directory chap7 chap8 chap9 chap10 some file in the directory xargs Command 181 Commands Reference Volume 6 File usr bin xargs Contains the xargs command Related Information The ar com
23. 6 Here is an example of a message sent by the qdaemon daemon Message from mary on trek tty10 Aug 17 10 03 34 Use write h 6398492 reply to reply Please insert tape number 5 into rmt0 lt EOT gt To reply in the affirmative enter write h 6398492 0k Then press the Ctrl D key sequence To reply in the negative enter write h 6398492 cancel Then press the Ctrl D key sequence With the h flag there is no need to supply the host name or user ID This information is tracked with the handle Files etc hosts Contains TCP IP host information etc utmp Contains user and accounting information for the who write and login commands Related Information The mesg command wall command who command writesrv command Shells Overview in AIX Version 4 3 System User s Guide Operating System and Devices write Command 104 Commands Reference Volume 6 writesrv Daemon Purpose Allows users to send messages to and receive messages from a remote system Syntax writeary Comand writesry writesrv Description The writesrv daemon allows users to send messages to users on a remote system and receive responses from users on a remote system with the write command The writesrv utility receives incoming requests from a write command and creates a server process to handle the request This server process communicates with the client process write and provides whatever services are requested
24. End text input mode by pressing the Esc key IText Inserts text specified by the Text parameter before the first nonblank character in the line End text input mode by pressing the Esc key o Adds an empty line below the current line End text input mode by pressing the Esc key O Adds an empty line above the current line End text input mode by pressing the Esc key Changing Text While in Input Mode Use the following subcommands only while in text input mode These commands have different meanings in command mode If you need information about the format of vi subcommands see vi General Subcommand Syntax Ctrl D Goes back to previous autoindent stop Ctrl D Ends autoindent for this line only OCtri D Moves cursor back to left margin Esc Ends insertion and returns to command state Ctrl H Frases the last character Ctrl Q Enters any character if xon is disabled Ctrl V Enters any character Ctrl W_Erases the last small word Quotes the erase and kill characters Ctrl Interrupts and ends insert or the Ctrl D key sequence Changing Text from Command Mode Use the following subcommands in command mode An incomplete subcommand can be canceled by pressing the Esc key If you need information about the format of vi subcommands see vi General Subcommand Syntax C Changes the rest of the line same as c ce Changes a line cw Changes a word cwText Changes a word to the text specified by the Text parameter D Del
25. If the image characteristics match those of the display this flag can display the image on the screen faster xwud Command 312 noclick planeNumber raw std MapType visvisual_type visual_id Commands Reference Volume 6 but at the cost of using a new color map which on most terminals causes other windows to go technicolor Prevents the application from ending when a button in the window is clicked You can end the application by typing a q or Q character or the Ctrl C key sequence Selects a single bit plane of the image to display Planes are numbered with 0 zero being the least significant bit Use this flag to determine which plane to pass to the xpr command for printing Displays the dumped image in whatever color values currently exist on the screen This flag is useful when undumping an image back onto the same screen that the image originally came from while the original windows are still on the screen This results in getting the image on the screen faster Swaps the foreground and background colors if a bitmap image or a single plane of an image displays This flag is useful when displaying a bitmap image that has the color sense of pixel values 0 and 1 reversed from what they are on the display Uses the specified Standard Colormap to display the image You can obtain the map type by converting the type to uppercase letters prepending RGB_ and appending _ MAP Typical map types are best de
26. Invokes a prompting interface for draft disposition Commands List Message Handler 358 Commands Reference Volume 6 whom Manipulates Message Handler MH addresses Commands List Network File System automount Mounts NFS file systems automatically biod Handles client requests for files bootparamd Provides information for booting to diskless clients chnfs Changes the configuration of the system to invoke a specified number of biod and nfsd daemons chnfsexp Changes the options used to export a directory to NFS clients chnfsmnt Changes the options used to mount a directory from an NFS server exportfs Exports and unexports directories to NFS clients lockd Processes lock requests mknfs Configures the system to run NFS mknfsexp Exports a directory to NFS clients mknfsmnt Mounts a directory from an NFS server mountd Answers requests from clients for file system mounts nfsd Starts client requests for file system operations nfso Configures Network File System NFS network options nfsstat Displays statistical information about the Network File System NFS and Remote Procedure Call RPC calls on Executes commands on remote systems portmap Converts RPC program numbers into Internet port numbers rexd Executes programs for remote machines rmnfs Changes the configuration of the system to stop invoking the NFS daemons Commands List Message Handler 359 Commands Reference Volume 6 rmnfsexp Unexports
27. Related Information The date command mesg command whoami command su command The wait subroutine who Command Commands Reference Volume 6 whoami Command Purpose Displays your login name Syntax mh emi Command whoeni whoami Description The whoami command displays your login name Unlike using the command who and specifying am i the whoami command also works when you have root authority since it does not examine the etc utmp file Files etc passwd Contains user IDs Related Information The who command whoami Command 90 Commands Reference Volume 6 whois Command Purpose Identifies a user by user ID or alias Syntax wacis Command Request User Information tom the ARPANET Most h nies cet won If U ane I h HostName p Request Heip trom Se ARPANET Most whos whois h HostName Name whois Description The usr bin whois command searches a user name directory and displays information about the user ID or nickname specified in the Name parameter The whois command tries to reach ARPANET host internic net where it examines a user name database to obtain information The whois command should be used only by users on ARPANET Refer to RFC 812 for more complete information and recent changes to the whois command Note If your network is on a national network such as ARPANET the host name is hard coded as internic net The Name
28. Specifies the input device Device must be mouse or tablet In SMIT press the F4 button to select the input device The default option is mouse You can attach a 6093 tablet device Model 11 or Model 12 to the Xstation serial port A tablet uses absolute positioning as opposed to the relative positioning of a mouse and cannot change the initial cursor location The threshold and acceleration parameters of the xset command apply only to the mouse X Windows protocol supports five button signals from a mouse or tablet Buttons 1 2 and 3 correspond to the left middle and right buttons respectively Button 4 is used as an event generating button If required by specific application programs button 5 sends the required messages Buttons 6 through 16 if present are disabled Specifies the serial port on an Xstation 150 to which the tablet is attached In SMIT press the F4 key to select an option The valid options are T1 T2 S1 or S2 The default option is T1 Specifies the way to access the font files In SMIT press the F4 key to select an option Valid options are e Base FLASH e Network e NFS e Optional FLASH The default option is Base FLASH Specifies the way to access the Xserver file list In SMIT press the F4 key to select an option Valid options are e Base FLASH e Network e NFS e Optional FLASH The default option is Base FLASH Specifies how the hardware pan feature is to be used Valid options are none
29. The Number parameter is used by programs to communicate with a specific X server For example the command Xeon els specifies that communication to the activated X server takes place by unix 18 or by Hostname 18 Disables backing store support on all screens This is the default Turns off the X Window System logo display in the screen saver There is currently no way to change this from a client Instructs the server to exit after the first session ends Normally the server starts sessions automatically Specifies the physical positioning of the displays in a multihead configuration The Row parameter indicates the row in which the display is located The Column parameter indicates the column in which the display is located The Display parameter is the device name of the display as shown in the first column of output from the Isdisp command The first PRowColumnDisplay occurrence on the command line describes screen 0 to the X server the second describes screen 1 and so on The P flag is for use with multiple head support Specifies the pbuffer memory allocation level for the screen specified by display This flag is only useful when used in conjunction with the GLX extention The level parameter indicates the relative amount of frame buffer memory to be reserved for pbuffers Specified values must be in the range of 0 2 A value of 0 indicates that no memory should be reserved for pbuffers A value of 1 in
30. The Xstation uses the subnet mask to determine if the destination address is on the local network If the destination address is not local then the Xstation directs the packet to the gateway The gateway then forwards the packet For more information refer to Subnet Masks in TCP IP Addressing in AIX Version 4 3 System Management Guide Communications and Networks nTypeName Specifies the name you choose to identify a network type for a specific network Xstation model subnet combination The TypeName parameter must begin with the prefix x_st_mgr and have a unique postfix which can include the uppercase and lowercase letters a through z the numbers 0 through 9 the _ underscore the dash and the period An example is x_st_mgr ether130 for an Ethernet Xstation 130 combination sNumber Specifies the number of the server port The default value is 9000 This value must match the value in etc services file uAddress Specifies the full Internet address of the machine that performs name resolution for the Xstation Security Access Control Only the root user should have execute x access to this command Example To add a network type named x_st_mgr ether enter a command like the following x_def_net nx_st_mgr ether bbootfile4 d etc x_st_mgr hethernet s9000 In this example the characteristics include the following the bootfile name is boot file4 the home directory is etc x_st_mgr the network type i
31. The we command displays the number of lines words and characters in standard input Files usr bin we bin we Contains the we command usr ucb we Contains the symbolic link to the we command wc Command 70 Commands Reference Volume 6 Related Information Files Overview and Input and Output Redirection Overview in AIX Version 4 3 System User s Guide Operating System and Devices National Language Support Overview for System Management in AIX Version 4 3 System Management Concepts Operating System and Devices wc Command 71 Commands Reference Volume 6 what Command Purpose Displays identifying information in files Syntax what Command what s File Description The what command searches specified files for all occurrences of the pattern that the get command substitutes for the Z keyletter see the get or prs command for a description of identification keywords By convention the value substituted is double quotation marks at sign left parenthesis pound sign right parenthesis double quotation marks If no file is specified the what command reads from standard input The what command writes to standard output whatever follows the pattern up to but not including the first double quotation mark greater than symbol gt new line character backslash or null character The what command should be used in conjunction with the get command which automatically inserts the
32. To perform these services the writesrv daemon creates a socket that is attached to the port defined in the letc services file All requests for service are sent as messages to this socket Note If the writesrv daemon terminates abnormally such as a system crash power failure or the kill 9 command the var spool writesrv directory must be manually cleaned out to remove any files left behind by the writesrv daemon Examples 1 To start the writesrv daemon from the etc rc script enter usr sbin writesrv The writesrv daemon is started from the etc re script This is the usual way the daemon is started 2 To start the writesrv daemon using the System Resource Controller SRC enter startsrce s writesrv amp The writesrv daemon is started using SRC Files etc services Contains the Network Services directory writesrv Daemon 105 Commands Reference Volume 6 Related Information The kill command write command Using Remote Host Access for Printing Printer Overview for System Management and Remote Printing Overview in AIX Version 4 3 Guide to Printers and Printing System Resource Controller Overview in AIX Version 4 3 System Management Concepts Operating System and Devices writesrv Daemon 106 Commands Reference Volume 6 wsmserver Command Purpose Configures the functionality of the Web based System Manager servers Syntax wsmserver Command lusrwebsmybin wsmserver enable 4
33. base usr lib X11 Xcms txt and a device color characterization file usr lib X11 XcemsIBM5081 dcc are provided as unsupported samples Flags displayDisplay Specifies the server to which you are converting query Reads or attempts to read the XDCCC properties off the screen s root window If xcmsdb Command 190 remove color format 32 1618 Parameter Commands Reference Volume 6 successful it transforms the data into a more readable format and then sends the data to standard output Removes or attempts to remove the XDCCC properties on the screen s root window Sets the query and remove options to only check for the XDCCC_LINEAR_RGB_MATRICES and XDCCC_LINEAR_RGB_CORRECTION properties If the color option is not set the query and remove options check for all the properties Specifies the property format 32 16 or 8 bits per entry for the XDCCC_LINEAR_RGB_CORRECTION property Precision of encoded floating point values increases with the increase in bits per entry The default is 32 bits per entry FileName Specifies the ASCII readable contents of a Screen Color Characterization Data file Examples 1 Use the following example to put Screen Color Characterization Data on the root window by telling the xemsdb command to read it from a file xcmsdb usr lib X11 XcmsIBM5081 dcc 2 Use the following example after you have already put Screen Color Characterization Data on the root window to tell
34. digest dscreen enable fdformat General Operations Provides the capability to merge Micro Channel information for PS 2 adapters with the AIX Version 3 Configuration Database Emulates terminals in bidirectional bus BIDI mode Cancels requests to a line printer Converts a termcap file to a terminfo descriptor file Configures devices by running the programs specified in the Configuration Rules object class Redirects the system console to a specified device or file to be effective on the next start of the system Changes the characteristics of a device Changes the display used by the low function terminal LFT subsystem Changes the default font for a display Changes the default keyboard map used by the high function terminal Subsystem at system startup Clears the terminal screen Names a device Performs hardware problem determination Converts the ASCII form of the etc qconfig file into the etc qconfig bin file a binary version of the queue configuration used by the qdaemon command Starts the Dynamic Screen utility Enables a printer queue 378 flcopy fold format getty hplj ibm3812 ibm3816 ibm5587G iconv infocmp iostat keycomp keymaps Ip Ipr Ipstat Iptest Isattr Iscfg Isconn General Operations Commands Reference Volume 6 Formats diskettes Copies to and from diskettes Folds long lines for finite width output device
35. follows 0x80 Missing file argument 0x40 Unknown or duplicate option 0x20 Corrupted SCCS file 0x10 Cannot open file or file not SCCS 0x08 SID is invalid or ambiguous 0x04 SID does not exist 0x02 y mismatch val Command SCCS 18 Commands Reference Volume 6 0x01 31 m mismatch Note The val command can process two or more files on a given command line and can process multiple command lines when reading standard input In these cases an aggregate code is returned a logical OR of the codes generated for each command line and file processes Example To determine if file s test c is an SCCS text file enter val ytext s test c Related Information List of SCCS Commands in AIX General Programming Concepts Writing and Debugging Programs The admin command delta command get command prs command The scesfile file format Source Code Control System SCCS Overview in AIX General Programming Concepts Writing and Debugging Programs val Command SCCS 19 Commands Reference Volume 6 varyoffvg Command Purpose Deactivates a volume group Syntax veryotirg Command veryottyg J VoureGroup varyoffvg s VolumeGroup Description The varyoffvg command deactivates the volume group specified by the VolumeGroup parameter along with its associated logical volumes The logical volumes first must be closed For example if the logical volume contains a file system it must be unmounted
36. keyboard Roml4 Upper left none Xstation taylor is added to the current host as defined by the parameters Model 130 a network type of ethernet a hardware address of 10005ac38e9 primary server status no delay time input from a mouse tablet port is ignored no fixed disk default fixed disk configuration no hardware pan feature xdmcp mode off no host name United States English LANG environment variable United States English keyboard layout standard keyboard file login window font Rom14 the login window in the upper left corner of the screen and no LPF keys x_add_trm_130 Command 130 Commands Reference Volume 6 Files fusr Ipp x_st_mgr bin x_add_trm_130 Contains the x_add_trm_130 command etc x_st_mgr x_st_mgrd cf Contains the Xstation Manager configuration file etc x_st_mgr x_st_mgrd tmty Contains the terminal type file etc bootptab Contains the boot protocol table Related Information The aixterm command bootpd daemon login command pclient command x_add_nfs_fpe command x_add_trm_120 command x_add_trm_140 command x_add_trm_150 command x_add_trm_160 command x_add_xst_fpe command x_chg_net command x_chg_trm_120 command x_chg_trm_130 command x_chg_trm_140 command x_chg_trm_150 command x_chg_trm_160 command x_def_net command x_Is_net command x_Is_net_fp command x_ls_trm command x_rm_fpe command x_rm_net command x_rm_trm command x_add_trm_130 Command 131 Commands Reference Volum
37. located on the host named thor 2 To look at a map on a domain enter usr sbin yppoll d atlantis hosts byname In this example the ypoll command displays the order number for the hosts byname map located in the domain atlantis yppoll Command 331 Commands Reference Volume 6 Related Information The domainname command ypwhich command The ypserv daemon Network Information Services NIS Overview for System Management in AIX Version 4 3 Network Information Services NIS and NIS Guide NIS Reference yppoll Command 332 Commands Reference Volume 6 yppush Command Purpose Prompts the Network Information Services NIS slave servers to copy updated NIS maps Syntax yepush Command Muersbin Ay ppu sh MapName 1 usr sbin yppush v dDomain MapName Description The yppush command which is issued from the usr etc yp directory prompts the Network Information Services NIS slave servers to make copies of updated NIS maps The MapName variable specifies that map to be transferred to the slave servers of the master servers To get a list of the servers it needs to prompt the yppush command reads the ypservers map specified by the Domain parameter or the current default domain Once prompted each slave server uses the ypxfr command to copy and transfer the map back to its own database You can use the System Management Interface Tool SMIT to run this command To use SMIT enter smit yppush
38. lusriwebenvbinwsmserver disable iusriwebsmbiniwsmserver stat fusriwebsnvbin wsmserver nabntss r port_nowber lusriwebsmybin wsmserver disablehttps lusriwebsmybinwsmserver starthttps lusriwebsmbin wsmserver sslalways lusriwebsnvbiniwsmserver ssioptional 4 usr websm bin wsmserver enable usr websm bin wsmserver disable usr websm bin wsmserver start usr websm bin wsmserver enablehttps port_number usr websm bin wsmserver disablehttps usr websm bin wsmserver starthttps usr websm bin wsmserver sslalways usr websm bin wsmserver ssloptional Description The wsmserver command is used to control the server processes used by the Web based System Manager The servers are used to enable applet and client server modes of execution In addition if the security functionality is installed the SMGate utility can be configured Note The full pathname of this command usr websm bin wsmserver must be specified Flags enable Enables the applet and client server modes disable Disable the applet and client server modes start Start a session of the Web based System Manager server This is normally only used by inetd wsmserver Command 107 Commands Reference Volume 6 The following flags can only be used if the security functionality has been installed enablehttps pStartsithe SMIGate utility An optional port_number for
39. s Makes the volume group available in System Management mode only Logical volume commands can operate on the volume group but no logical volumes can be opened for input or output Note Logical volume commands also cannot read or write to or from logical volumes in a volume group varied on with the s flag Logical volumes that attempt to write to a logical volume in a volume group varied on with the s flag such as chvg or mklvcopy may display error messages indicating that they were unable to write to and or read from the logical volume u Varies on a volume group but leaves the disks that make up the volume group in an unlocked state Use this flag as part of the initial varyon of a dormant volume group This flag only applies to AIX Version 4 2 or later Attention AIX Version 4 2 or later provides the flags b and u for developers who use n tailed DASD systems The base design of LVM assumes that only one initiator can access a volume group The HACMP product does work with LVM in order to synchronize multi node accesses of a shared volume group However multi initiator nodes can easily access a volume group with the b and u flags without the use of HACMP Your must be aware that volume group status information may be compromised or inexplicably altered as a result of disk protect locking being bypassed with these two flags If you use the b and u flags data and status output cannot be guaranteed to be consistent
40. square horizontal and vertical The default value is none With the hardware pan feature enabled the physical screen shows a portion of a larger base window whose size is dependent on the amount of video memory VRAM installed on the Xstation When the cursor is moved past the edge of the display the screen will automatically scroll in that direction provided it has not already reached the edge of the base window Note The window size for panning is always a power of 2 With 2MB VRAM expanding the window dimensions to a power of 2 may not leave enough memory for the shape selected Specifies the mode used by X Display Manager Control Protocol XDMCP XDMCP uses the xdm program to facilitate the connection of an Xstation to a remote host XDMCP allows the user to turn an Xstation off and on again and maintain an established connection to the remote host Valid options are broadcast x_chg_trm_150 Command 159 Commands Reference Volume 6 Sends a message to the network and waits for an xdmcp host to respond direct Directs a request to an xdmcp manager known to the Xstation indirect Sends an indirect request to an xdmcp manager that maintains a list of xdmcp hosts The manager assigns an xdmcp host to respond to the Xstation off No X Display Manager Control Protocol XDMCP The default option is off Host Specifies the name of the xdmcp host used for direct or indirect communication with the Xstation Valid options are none o
41. swtch start stop brk susp dsusp rprnt flush weras and Inext Control characters may be specified as Character for example c or u and may be used to indicate Delete This is very useful for overriding the default terminal settings without having run an stty program every time an xterm window is started useInsertMode class useInsertMode Forces the use of insert mode by adding appropriate entries to the TERMCAP environment variable This is useful if the system termcap is broken The default is false utmpInhibit class UtmpInhibit Specifies whether xterm should try to record the user s terminal in etc utmp sunFunctionKeys class SunFunctionKeys Specifies whether Sun Function Key escape codes should be generated for function keys instead of standard escape sequences waitForMap class WaitForMap Specifies whether the xterm command should wait for the initial window map before starting the subprocess The default is False The following resources are specified as part of the vt100 widget class VT100 allowSendEvents class AllowSendEvents Specifies whether synthetic key and button events generated using the X protocol SendEvent request should be interpreted or discarded The default is False meaning they are discarded Note that allowing such events creates a large security hole alwaysHighlight class AlwaysHighlight Specifies whether xterm should always display a highlighted text cursor By default a hol
42. until one is found Commonly used selections include PRIMARY SECONDARY and CLIPBOARD Cut buffers are typically named CUT_BUFFERO through CUT_BUFFER7 This action dynamically defines a new translation table whose resource name is Name with the suffix Keymap case is significant The name None restores the original translation table This action displays the specified popup menu Valid names case is significant include mainMenu vtMenu fontMenu and tekMenu This action toggles the Secure Keyboard mode described in the section named Security and is invoked from the securekbd entry in mainMenu This action begins text selection at the current pointer location See the section entitled Pointer Usage for information on making selections This action tracks the pointer and extends the selection It should only be bound to Motion events This action puts the currently selected text into all of the selections or cutbuffers specified by DestName This action is similar to select start except that it begins the selection at the current text cursor position D This action is similar to select end except that it should be used with select cursor start set vt font d 1 2 3 4 5 6 e s NormalF ont BoldFont start extend start cursor extend string String scroll back Count Units xterm Command This action sets the font or fonts currently being used in the VT102 window The first argument is a single c
43. xrxHasFirewallProxy is True Its value is a comma separated list of mask value pairs to be used to filter internal web servers based on their address The mask part specifies which segments of the address are to be considered and the value part specifies what the result should match For instance the following list 255 255 255 0 198 112 45 0 255 255 255 0 198 112 46 0 matches the address sets 198 112 45 and 198 112 46 More precisely the test is address mask value xrxFastWebServers class XrxFastWebServers The web servers for which LBX should not be used The resource value is a list of address mask value pairs as previously described xrxTrustedWebServers class XrxTrustedWebServers The web servers from which remote applications should be run as trusted clients The default is to run remote applications as untrusted clients The resource value is a list of address mask value pairs as previously described Environment The xrx helper program uses the standard X environment variables such as DISPLAY to get the default X server host and display number If the RX document requests X UI LBxX service and the default X server does not advertise the LBX extension xrx will look for the environment variable XREALDISPLAY to geta second address for your X server and look for the LBX extension there When running your browser through Ibxproxy you will need to set XREALDISPLAY to the actual address of your server if you wish r
44. 4 Tum On Margn Bett Pai 4 5 Reverse Wraparound Mode Paj 4 7 gt Use Alternate Screen Bufor unless Cheabled by Ine iiteinhibit resource Ref To it is Send Mouse X amp Y on buton press See Mouse Tracking 305 Commands Reference Volume 6 ESC I 7 jii UEL Pevete Mode Heeet UELHST P 1 Normal Gursor Keys DECCKND Ps 3 00 Cokmn Mode DECCOLM Pa 4 gt Jump Fast Scrol DECSCLAN P 5 gt Normal Video DECSCNM P 6 gt Normal Cursor Moda DECOM P 7 gt No Wraparound Mode DECAWM P amp gt No Auto repoat Keys OECARM Pam 9 Do not Send Mouse X 8 Y on buton press P 4 O gt Disalow 80 lt gt 132 Mode P t 1 gt No curses function fk P 4 4 gt Tum Of Margin Bali P 5 gt No Reverso Wraparound P 4 7 gt Use Normal Soven Buffer P 1 6 Do not Send Mouse X 4 Y on button press and release Pa 1 0 Q 1 gt Do not Use Hille Mouse Tracking ESC I Pal f Fesiore DEC Private Mode Values The value of P pre Saved is restored P values are the same as for DECSET ESC 7 98 Save DEC Private Mode Values P values are he s me ss for DECSET ESC 11 A BEL Set Text Parameters Cange bon Name and Window Ps m g Tale P Poel 1 gt Change icon News to A P 2 gt Grange Window Tite to P P e 5 O gt Set Fomor ESC P ESC i Privacy Message PM xterm implements no FM functors A is ignored P r
45. 6 Commands Reference Volume 6 Commands Reference Volume 6 Commands Reference Volume 6 Trademarks and Acknowledgements The following trademarks and acknowledgements apply to this book ADM is a trademark of Lear Siegler Inc AIX is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation Connect is a trademark of INTERACTIVE Systems Corporation DEC is a trademark of Digital Equipment Corporation DEC VT100 VT220 VT320 and VT330 are trademarks of Digital Equipment Corporation GL is a trademark of Silicon Graphics Inc HP is a trademark of Hewlett Packard Company IBM is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation INed is a trademark of INTERACTIVE Systems Corporation InfoExplorer is a trademark of International Business Machines Corporation Intel is a trademark of Intel Corporation Interleaf is a trademark of Interleaf Inc LaserJet Series II is a trademark of Hewlett Packard Company Micro Channel is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation NetView is a trademark of International Business Machines Corporation Network Computing System is a trademark of Apollo Computer Inc OSF and OSF Motif are trademarks of Open Software Foundation Inc Personal Computer AT and AT is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation Personal System 2 is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation PS 2 is a reg
46. 75dpi is added to the end of the font path for network type x_st_mgr ether It is on host waco which is accessed using the Xstation Manager daemon on port 9000 x_add_xst_fpe Command 144 Commands Reference Volume 6 Files fusr Ipp x_st_mgr bin x_add_xst_fpe Contains the x_add_xst_fpe command letc x_st_mgr ether cf Contains the network type x_st_mgr ether configuration file sample Related Information The aixterm command bootpd daemon login command pclient command x_add_nfs_fpe command x_add_trm_120 command x_add_trm_130 command x_add_trm_140 command x_add_trm_150 command x_add_trm_160 command x_add_xst_fpe command x_chg_net command x_chg_trm_120 command x_chg_trm_130 command x_chg_trm_140 command x_chg_trm_150 command x_chg_trm_160 command x_def_net command x_Is_net command x_Is_net_fp command x_Is_trm command x_rm_fpe command x_rm_net command x_rm_trm command x_add_xst_fpe Command 145 Commands Reference Volume 6 x_chg_net Command Purpose Changes an existing Xstation network type Syntax KORAM Commaw x chg net pb Fie d Directory Type nTypeName gt QD Fe x_chg_ net bFile dDirectory gAddress hType mMask nTypeName sNumber uAddress Description The x_chg_net command changes for the current host the characteristics of the Xstation network type specified by the TypeName parameter and stores the changed definition in the etc bootptab file The
47. Basic Networking Utilities BNU remote command requests 354 Commands Reference Volume 6 Commands List General AIX Communications Facilities confer Provides an online conferencing system connect Connects to a remote computer enroll Sets up a password used to implement a secure communication channel getty Sets the characteristics of ports joinconf Provides an online conferencing system mesg Permits or refuses write messages no Configures network options pdelay Enables or reports the availability of delayed login ports pdisable Disables login ports penable Enables or reports the availability of login ports phold Disables or reports the availability of login ports on hold pshare Enables or reports the availability of shared login ports rdist Maintains identical copies of files on multiple hosts rdump Backs up files onto a remote machine s device wall Writes a message to all users that are logged in write Sends messages to other users on the system writesrv Allows users to send messages to and receive messages from a remote system Commands List Mail Facilities bellmail Sends messages to system users and displays messages from system users bffcreate Creates installation image files in backup format biff Communications 355 comsat from imapd Mail or mail mailq mailstats mailx msgs newaliases pop3d rmail sendmail smdemon cleanu xget xsend Communicat
48. COPYyy MM dd hh mm ss where yy MM dd hh mm and ss are the year month day hour minute and second when the copy is performed the file is created in the directory that the xterm command is started in or the home directory for a login xterm Other Features The xterm command automatically highlights the text cursor when the pointer enters the window selected and unhighlights it when the pointer leaves the window unselected If the window is the focus window the text cursor is highlighted no matter where the pointer is located In VT102 mode there are escape sequences to activate and deactivate an alternate screen buffer which is the same size as the display area of the window When activated the current screen is saved and replaced with the alternate screen Saving of lines scrolled off the top of the window is disabled until the normal screen is restored The termcap file entry for the xterm command allows the vi command editor to switch to the alternate screen for editing and to restore the screen on exit In either VT102 or Tektronix mode there are escape sequences to change the name of the windows Options The xterm terminal emulator accepts all of the standard X Toolkit command line options as well as the following if the option begins with a instead of a the option is restored to its default value help Causes the xterm command to print out a message describing its options 132 Normally the VT102 DECCOL
49. Converts a pointer to an mbuf structure to a pointer to the head of an attached cluster Converts a pointer to an mbuf structure to a pointer to the data stored in the mbuf structure Returns the address of an mbuf cross memory descriptor Provides a formatting facility for manual pages Returns the maximum number of color maps supported by the specified screen Creates a copy of all or part of a list of mbuf structures Allocates a page sized mbuf structure cluster Provides a formatting facility for creating technical papers in various styles Allocates an mbuf structure from the mbuf buffer pool and attaches a page sized cluster Returns the minimum number of color maps supported by the specified screen Provides a formatting facility for business documents such as memos letters and reports Formats a permuted index produced by the ptx command Provides a formatting facility for various styles of articles theses and books Simplifies typesetting of view graphs and projection slides Extracts the full serial number to be used for the next request Returns the number of planes depth in the specified screen Returns the minor protocol revision number Returns the major version number Returns the length of the event queue for the display Returns the root window Returns the root window of the specified screen Returns the number of available screens Returns a pointer to the screen of the specified display R
50. Creates an ASCII report of the previous day s accounting data Formats and displays files in tacct format Deletes files from var adm acct subdirectories Runs daily accounting Turns off processing accounting Turns on accounting functions at system startup Provides an interface to the accton command to turn process accounting on or off Manipulates connect time accounting records to change formats and to make corrections in the records Commands List System Resources chps chserver chssys compress Islicense Isps Issrc mknotify mkps mkserver Changes attributes of a paging space Changes a subserver definition in the subserver object class Changes a subsystem definition in the subsystem object class Compresses and expands data Displays the range of users that can be logged in concurrently Displays the characteristics of paging spaces Gets status of a subsystem a group of subsystems or a subserver Adds a notify method definition to the Notify object class Add an additional paging space to the system Adds a subserver definition to the subserver object class Commands List Performance Tuning 395 Commands Reference Volume 6 mkssys Adds a subsystem definition to the subsystem object class pack Compresses files pagesize Displays the system page size peat Unpacks files and writes them to standard output rmnotify Removes a notify method definition from the Notify object class rmps Removes a pagin
51. FontAccess BootFile PanShape Commands Reference Volume 6 Specifies the number of seconds a secondary boot server must wait before answering a boot protocol broadcast request The valid number for a primary server is 0 because there is no delay time In SMIT press the F4 key to see the recommended range of values Generally a value less than the minimum value does not distinguish between a primary and secondary server and a secondary server may be selected even when the primary server is available A value greater than the maximum value may lead to a time out Specifies the input device Device must be mouse or tablet In SMIT press the F4 button to select the input device The default option is mouse You can attach a 6093 tablet device Model 11 or Model 12 to the Xstation serial port A tablet uses absolute positioning as opposed to the relative positioning of a mouse and cannot change the initial cursor location The threshold and acceleration parameters of the xset command apply only to the mouse X Windows protocol supports five button signals from a mouse or tablet Buttons 1 2 and 3 correspond to the left middle and right buttons respectively Button 4 is used as an event generating button If required by specific application programs button 5 sends the required messages Buttons 6 through 16 if present are disabled Specifies the serial port on an Xstation 130 to which the tablet is attached In SMIT press the F4
52. Guide Operating System and Devices Order Number SC23 4126 e AIX Version 4 3 System User s Guide Operating System and Devices Order Number SC23 4121 AIX Version 4 3 System User s Guide Communications and Networks Order Number SC23 4122 e AIX Versions 3 2 and 4 Performance Tuning Guide Order Number SC23 2365 e AIX Version 4 3 Guide to Printers and Printing Order Number SC23 4130 e AIX Version 4 3 Kernel Extensions and Device Support Programming Concepts Order Number SC23 4125 e 5080 Graphics System Installation Operation and Problem Determination Order Number GA23 2063 e AIX Version 4 3 Technical Reference Base Operating System and Extensions Volume I Order Number SC23 4159 e AIX Version 4 3 Technical Reference Base Operating System and Extensions Volume 2 Order Number SC23 4160 e AIX Version 4 3 Technical Reference Communications Volume 1 Order Number SC23 4161 AIX Version 4 3 Technical Reference Communications Volume 2 Order Number SC23 4162 o AIX Version 4 3 Technical Reference Kernel and Subsystems Volume 1 Order Number SC23 4163 e AIX Version 4 3 Technical Reference Kernel and Subsystems Volume 2 Order Number SC23 4164 e AIX Version 4 Keyboard Technical Reference Order Number SC23 2631 e Distributed SMIT 2 2 for AIX Guide and Reference Order Number SC23 2667 3270 Host Connection Program 2 1 and 1 3 3 for AIX Guide and Reference Order Number SC23 2563 The following books also may be h
53. MH directory mshproc Specifies the program used for the MH shell Files HOME mh_profile Contains the MH user profile usr bin vmh Contains the vmh command Related Information The msh command The mh_alias file format mh_profile file format Mail Overview in AIX Version 4 3 System User s Guide Communications and Networks Peek Jerry MH and xmh E mail for Users and Programmers Sebastopol CA O Reilly amp Associates 1992 vmh Command 57 Commands Reference Volume 6 vmstat Command Purpose Reports virtual memory statistics Syntax vn sitet Command we Phic oime H ineerv a 4 J Covet vmstat f i s PhysicalVolume Interval Count Description The vmstat command reports statistics about kernel threads virtual memory disks traps and CPU activity Reports generated by the vmstat command can be used to balance system load activity These system wide statistics among all processors are calculated as averages for values expressed as percentages and as sums otherwise If the vmstat command is invoked without flags the report contains a summary of the virtual memory activity since system startup If the f flag is specified the vmstat command reports the number of forks since system startup The PhysicalVolume parameter specifies the name of the physical volume The nterval parameter specifies the amount of time in seconds between each report The first report co
54. Note If your system uses version 1 of the NIS protocol the ypxfr command is not the transfer agent Flags dDomain Specifies a domain other than the default domain The maps for the specified domain must exist y Displays messages as each server is called and then displays one message for each server s response if you are using the version 2 protocol If this flag is omitted the command displays error messages only Note Version 1 of the NIS protocol does not display messages If your system uses version 1 use the yppoll command to verify that the transfer took place Examples 1 To copy a map from another domain to the slave servers enter usr sbin yppush d atlantis netgroup In this example the yppush command copies the netgroup map from the atlantis domain 2 To display the in progress status of the yppush command as it calls each slave server enter usr sbin yppush v d atlantis netgroup yppush Command 333 Commands Reference Volume 6 In this example the yppush command displays in progress messages as it copies the net group map from the atlantis domain onto each of the network s slave servers File var yp DomainName ypservers dir pag Lists servers that the yppush command prompts to make copies of updated NIS maps Related Information The yppoll command ypxfr command The ypserv daemon System Management Interface Tool SMIT Overview in AIX Version 4 3 System Management Concepts Operatin
55. Pitch Duration bl bon b off bel be c Volume cl con c off l fp 1 1 Path Path fp default fp rehash JL L led Integer led on led off m Accelelator Threshold m ouse default p Pixel Color r ron roff s Length Period s blank s noblank s expose s noexpose s on soff s activate s reset s default q xset Command 274 Commands Reference Volume 6 Description The xset command customizes your X Windows environment Flags displayHost Display Specifies the X server to use For more information about servers see the X command b or b on Turns the bell on This is the default setting Note Not all hardware is able to vary the bell characteristics but for that which can all of the b flag permutations and its variables are available b Volume Pitch Duration Specifies the bell volume pitch and duration This flag accepts up to three numeric values Volume If only one numeric is given then it is assumed to be Volume The bell volume is set to that numeric as a percentage of the bell s maximum possible volume dependent on current hardware capabilities Pitch The second numeric in hertz values is the tonal sound of the bell Duration The third numeric in milliseconds is the length of time that the bell rings b or b off Turns the bell off be or be Controls bug compatibility mode i
56. Press the F4 key in SMIT to select an option Sets the position of the login window on the display Press the F4 key in SMIT to select an option Valid entries are Upper left Upper right Lower left and Lower right x_chg_trm_120 Command 149 Commands Reference Volume 6 LPFkeyport Specifies the serial port on an Xstation to which the LPF keys are attached Press the F4 key to select an option The valid options are none and com1 Security Access Control Only the root user should have execute x access to this command Example To change the characteristics of Xstation xor1 for the current host so the new hardware address is 10005ac9999 but the other characteristics remain unchanged from those defined with the x_add_trm_120 command enter x_chg_trm_120 120 taylor x_st_mgr ether 10005ac9999 y 00 mouse none off none English All parameters must be entered Files fusr Ipp x_st_mgr bin x_chg_trm_120 Contains the x_chg_trm_120 command etc x_st_mgr x_st_megrd cf Contains the Xstation Manager configuration file etc x_st_mgr x_st_mgrd tmty Contains the terminal type file etc bootptab Contains the boot protocol table Related Information The aixterm command bootpd daemon login command pclient command x_add_nfs_fpe command x_add_trm_120 command x_add_trm_130 command x_add_trm_140 command x_add_trm_150 command x_add_trm_160 command x_add_xst_fpe command x_chg_net command x_chg_trm_130 command x_chg_trm
57. Reference Volume 6 xmkmf Command Purpose Creates a Makefile from an Imakefile Syntax znimi Command Toe0r wD xmkmf a TopDir CurDir Description The xmkmf command creates a Makefile from an Imakefile shipped with third party software When invoked with no arguments or variables in a directory containing an Imakefile file the imake command runs with arguments appropriate for your system configured into xmkmf when X was built and generates a Makefile Flag a First builds the Makefile in the current directory then automatically executes makeMakefiles makeincludes and make depend This is how to configure software that is outside of the MIT X build tree Variables Specify TopDir and CurDir if you are working inside the MIT X build tree highly unlikely unless you are an X developer TopDir Specify as the relative path name from the current directory to the top of the build tree CurDir Specify as a relative path name from the top of the build tree to the current directory The CurDir variable is required if the current directory has subdirectories otherwise the Makefile will not be able to build the subdirectories If a TopDir variable is given in its place xmkmf assumes nothing is installed on your system and searches for files in the build tree instead of using the installed versions Related Information The imake command make command xmkmf Command 233 Commands Reference Volume 6
58. Related Information The aixterm command bootpd daemon login command pclient command x_add_nfs_fpe command x_add_trm_120 command x_add_trm_130 command x_add_trm_140 command x_add_trm_150 command x_add_trm_160 command x_add_xst_fpe command x_chg_net command x_chg_trm_120 command x_chg_trm_130 command x_chg_trm_140 command x_chg_trm_150 command x_chg_trm_160 command x_def_net command x_Is_net command x_Is_net_fp command x_Is_trm command x_rm_fpe command x_rm_net command x_rm_net Command 175 Commands Reference Volume 6 x_rm_trm command x rm_net Command 176 Commands Reference Volume 6 x_rm_trm Command Purpose Removes an Xstation Syntax zm wm Command Le In Name x_rm_trmName Description The x_rm_trm command removes from the current host the Xstation specified by the Name parameter To do this the command removes the Name entry from the etc x_st_mgr xs150 cfg directory letc x_st_mgr x_st_mgrd cf file etc x_st_mgr x_st_mgrd tmty file and the etc bootptab file Security Access Control Only the root user should have execute x access to this command Examples To remove the taylor Xstation from the current bootserver host enter x_rm_trm taylor Files letc x_st_mgr x_st_mgrd cf Contains the Xstation Manager daemon configuration file etc x_st_mgr x_st_mgrd tmty Contains the terminal type file fusr Ipp x_st_mgr bin x_rm_trm Contains the x_rm_trm command etc bootptab Co
59. Specifies key click volume Specifies the type of visual to use for the root window of the screen specified by the display name Not all visual types are available on all adapters at all depths The Display parameter is optional but useful when using the multihead option The Display parameter is the name of the display as shown in the Isdisp command If no display number or name is supplied the specified visual is selected for all screens To specify the visual type and depth for the default visual use the cc and d flags respectively Values for the VisualType parameter are specified as a string or a number as follows StringNumeric equivalent StaticGray 0 GrayScale 1 StaticColor 2 PseudoColor 3 TrueColor 4 DirectColor 5 Sets the name of the red green and blue RGB color database This is the default flag for the color database Specifies the full path name of the color definition database file The default is usr lib X11 rgb Specifies the root depth for the screen specified by the display name Not all visual types will be available on all adapters at all depths The Display parameter is optional but useful when using the multihead option and must correspond to the values passed with the P flag The Display parameter is the name of the display as shown in the Isdisp command In the absence of the Display parameter the specified depth is selected for all the selected displays in the multihead opti
60. Specifies the color to use for displaying text The default is black geometry Geometry Specifies the preferred size and position of the window display Host Display Specifies the X server to contact xrmResourceString Specifies a resource string to be used File Specifies the file to be printed Examples 1 To build files output by the troff command into files that are suitable for use with the xpreview command enter the following commands troff TX100 troff input xpreview pic TX100 pic troff input tbl troff man TX100 xpreview 2 To build files output by the troff command into files that are suitable for use with the Japanese language version of the xpreview command enter the following commands LANG ja_JdP troff TX100 troff input xpreview pic TX100 pic troff input tbl troff man TX100 xpreview Files usr lib X11 app defaults XPreview Contains user configurable applications defaults file usr lib X11 Ja_JP app defaults XPreview Contains user configurable applications default file for the Japanese IBM 932 locale usr lib X11 ja_JP app defaults XPreview Contains user configurable applications default file for the Japanese IBM eucJP locale usr lib X11 ko_KR app defaults XPreview Contains user configurable applications default file for the Korean locale usr lib X11 zh_TW app defaults XPreview Contains user configurable applications default file for the Traditional Ch
61. Syntax z add fre 120 Command edd tm 120 120 Name T ppeName Addrese Sarve b Tine Devce Fanshape Mode Hoat Language gt b Acy oad Fi Form Location lL Pf kayport x_add_trm_120 120NameTypeName Address ServerTime Device PanShape Mode Host Language Keyboard File Font Location LPFkeyport Description The x_add_trm_120 command adds the Xstation 120 specified by the Name parameter to the current host and stores the configuration in the etc x_st_mgr x_st_mgrd cf file the etc x_st_mgr x_st_mgrd tmty file and the etc bootptab file Parameters Mandatory parameters are 120 Specifies that this command is used only for an Xstation 120 Name Specifies the name of the Xstation The Name parameter can be up to eight characters long and include the uppercase or lowercase letters a through z the numbers 0 through 9 the dash and the period Name can be a user name such as taylor or a group name with a number appended such as graphs 2 The terminal name must be known to the host system Note Name should not start with a uppercase or lowercase o or x followed by an octal or hexadecimal numeric These characters are interpreted as octal or hexadecimal numbers instead of as a terminal name In the examples x3 and xE4 the 3 and the E4 are hexadecimal numerics TypeName Specifies the name you defined for this network Xstation model subnet combination with the Define an Xstation Netwo
62. System User s Guide Operating System and Devices vacation Command 17 Commands Reference Volume 6 val Command SCCS Purpose Validates SCCS files Syntax val s rS7D mName yType File Description The val command reads the specified file to determine if it is a Source Code Control System SCCS file meeting the characteristics specified by the accompanying flags If you specify a minus for the File value the val program reads standard input and interprets each line of standard input as val flags and the name of an SCCS file An end of file character terminates input The val command displays messages to standard output for each file processed Flags Each flag or group of flags applies independently to each named file The flags can appear in any order mName Compares the Name value with the SCCS 31 identification keyword in the specified file For identification keyword information see the get command r SID Specifies the SID of the file to be validated The SID must be valid and unambiguous s Suppresses the error message normally written to standard output yType Specifies a type to compare with the SCCS identification keyword in the specified file Exit Status The val command returns 0 if successful for all files otherwise it returns an 8 bit code that is a disjunction of the possible errors It is interpreted as a bit string in which set bits from left to right are interpreted as
63. TID Program IPAddress Port S MapName Description The ypxfr command transfers a Network Information Services NIS map from an NIS server to the local host as follows 1 Creates a temporary map in the var yp Domain directory which must already exist on the client 2 Fetches the map entries from the server and fills in the map on the client one at a time 3 Gets and loads the map parameters order number and server 4 Deletes any old versions of the map 5 Moves the temporary map to the real map name If the var yp securenets file exists the ypxfr command only responds to hosts that are listed in this file The MapName variable specifies the name of a map that will be transferred from an NIS server If run interactively the ypxfr command sends output to the user s terminal If invoked without a controlling terminal the ypxfr command appends its output to the var yp ypxfr log file if the file already exists This file records each transfer attempt and its results The ypxfr command is most often invoked from the root user s crontab file or by the ypserv daemon To maintain consistent information between servers use the ypxfr command to update every map in the NIS database periodically Be aware though that some maps change more frequently than others and therefore need to be updated more frequently For instance maps that change infrequently such as every few months should be updated at least once a month Maps that
64. Volume 6 cancel cat chmod chown cmp comm compress csplit ctags cut aa oo lpstat Is make move qdaemon qstatus rdist restore tab tee test trbsd unlink virscan Limitations The printer commands support files larger than 2 gigabytes on the printer frontend only The default AIX printer backend the piobe command does not support files of this size This applies to the following commands neti pe e e fo ek fous in tenon on CROIRE The shells support I O redirection of files that are larger than 2 GB No other support for files larger than 2 Appendix A Command Support for Files Larger than 2Gigabytes 349 Commands Reference Volume 6 gigabytes is offered in the shells This applies to the commands bsh csh ksh Rsh and tsh Note The sh command is a link to the ksh command The awk and nawk commands are able to handle data files larger than 2 gigabytes However awk and nawk scripts themselves may not be this large The find command will process files larger than 2 gigabytes but it will not allow the use of the sizeNumber flag where Number is larger than 2 gigabytes The make command will operate with targets and dependencies that are larger than 2 gigabytes but a makefile itself may not be this large The audit commands auditcat auditconv and auditselect support trail files that are larger than 2 gigabytes but they do not support bin files larger than 2 gigabytes Attention DO NOT atte
65. a display that should constantly be managed and that is not using XDMCP Each consists of at least three parts e Display name e Display class e Display type e For local servers a command line to start the server A typical entry for local display number 0 would be 0 IBM GT local usr bin X11 X 0 The display types are local local display fIxdm fP must run the server foreign remote display fIxdm fP opens an X connection to a running server The display name must be something that can be passed in the display option to an X program This string is used to generate the display specific resource names so be careful to match the names for example use 0 local usr bin X11 X 0O instead of localhost 0 local usr bin X11 X 0 if your other resources are specified as DisplayManager _0 session The display class portion is also used in the display specific resources as the class of the resource This is useful if you have a large collection of similar displays like a corral of X terminals and would like to set resources for groups of them xdm Command 203 Commands Reference Volume 6 When using XDMCP the display is required to specify the display class so the manual for your particular X terminal should document the display class string for your device If it does not you can run the xdm command in debug mode and look at the resource strings that it generates for that device which will include the class string
66. a name from the access list by using the Host parameter Do not remove the current name from the access list If you do log off the system before making any corrections Entering the xhost command with no variables shows the current host names with access your X Server and a message indicating whether or not access is enabled For security options that affect access control may only be run from the controlling host For workstations this is the same machine as the server For X terminals it is the login host To enable a remote name by default the name can be defined in the etc X hosts file where is the display number to which you enable access For example the display jeanne 0 can be accessed by systems defined in the etc X0 hosts file on a system that uses the default host name of jeanne In both the display name and the file name 0 indicates the display number that the defined remote systems are allowed to access through Enhanced X Windows Flags Name Defines the host name the plus sign is optional to be added to the X Server access list Name Defines the host name to be removed from the X Server access list Existing connections are not broken but new connection attempts will be denied Note that you can remove the current machine however further connections including attempts to add it back are not permitted The only way to allow local connections again is to reset the server thereby breaking all connections
67. about the usage of virtual and real memory Virtual pages are considered active if they have been accessed A page is 4096 bytes avm Active virtual pages fre Size of the free list Note A large portion of real memory is utilized as a cache for file system data It is not unusual for the size of the free list to remain small Page information about page faults and paging activity These are averaged over the interval and given in units per second re Pager input output list pi Pages paged in from paging space po Pages paged out to paging space fr Pages freed page replacement sr Pages scanned by page replacement algorithm cy Clock cycles by page replacement algorithm Faults trap and interrupt rate averages per second over the sampling interval in Device interrupts sy System calls cs Kernel thread context switches Cpu breakdown of percentage usage of CPU time us User time sy System time id CPU idle time wa CPU cycles to determine that the current process is wait and there is pending disk input output Disk Provides the number of transfers per second to the specified physical volumes that occurred in the sample interval The PhysicalVolume parameter can be used to specify one to four names Transfer statistics are given for each specified drive in the order specified This count represents requests to the physical device It does not imply an amount of data that was read or written Several logical requests
68. additional 60 seconds to ensure that the invalidation is propagated to other routers Every 30 seconds hosts acting as internetwork routers supply their routing tables to all directly connected hosts and networks The LogFile parameter interprets the name of the file in which the XNSrouted daemon s actions should be logged This log contains information about any changes to the routing tables and a history of recently sent and received messages that are related to the changed route The XNSrouted daemon does not run as a background process unless an amp ampersand is specified on the command line Interrupts from the keyboard kill the process Flags s Forces the XNSrouted daemon to supply routing information whether it is acting as an internetwork router or not q Processes all incoming XNS packets but does not supply any XNS routing information t Specifies that all packets sent or received are printed to standard output Related Information The netstat command route command XNSquery command Xerox Network Systems XNS Overview for Programming in AIX Version 4 3 Communications Programming Concepts XNSrouted Daemon 243 Commands Reference Volume 6 xntpd Daemon Purpose Starts the Network Time Protocol NTP daemon This command only applies to AIX Version 4 2 or later Syntax xaipd Duomon xatpd Contig We 0 Awthentcstongelsy 152 Le Der de E E L L p pif de Key le Loge Br
69. an individual command use the Islpp command with the w flag For example to list the fileset that owns the installp command enter lslpp w usr sbin installp Output similar to the following displays File Fileset Type usr sbin installp bos rte install File To list the fileset that owns all file names that contain instal1p enter lslpp w installp Output similar to the following displays File Fileset Type usr sbin installp bos rte install File usr clvm sbin linstallpv prpq clvm File usr 1lpp bos sysmgt nim methods c_installp bos sysmgt nim client File Syntax Diagrams AIX command syntax is represented by syntax diagrams and usage statements Syntax diagrams are designed to provide information about how to enter the command on the command line A syntax diagram can tell you e Which flags can be entered on the command line e Which flags must take a parameter e Which flags have optional parameters e Default values of flags and parameters if any e Which flags can and cannot be entered together e Which flags and parameters are optional e When you can repeat flag and parameter sequences AIX commands use the following conventions in their syntax diagrams e Diagram items that must be entered literally on the command line are in bold These items include About This Book Commands Reference Volume 6 the command name flags and literal characters e Diagram items representing variables that mu
70. be displayed at the same time one of them is considered the activewindow for receiving keyboard input and terminal output This is the window that contains the text cursor The active window can be chosen through escape sequences the VT Options menu in the VT102 window and the Tek Options menu in the 4014 window Emulations The VT102 emulation is fairly complete but does not support smooth scrolling VT52 mode the blinking character attribute or the double wide and double size character sets The termcap file entries that work with the xterm command include xterm vt102 vt100 and ansi and the xterm command automatically searches the termcap file in this order for these entries and then sets the TERM and the TERMCAP environment variables Many of the special xterm features may be modified under program control through a set of escape sequences different from the standard VT102 escape sequences The Tektronix 4014 emulation is also fairly good It supports 12 bit graphics addressing scaled to the window size Four different font sizes and five different lines types are supported There is no write thru or defocused mode support xterm Command 285 Commands Reference Volume 6 The Tektronix text and graphics commands are recorded internally by the xterm command and may be written to a file by sending the COPY escape sequence or through the Tektronix menu as described in the following sections The name of the file will be
71. but did not recognize jeanne as a correct address Files HOME mh_profile Specifies the MH user profile UserMhDirectory draft Contains the current message draft usr bin whatnow Contains the whatnow command Related Information The comp command dist command forw command prompter command refile command repl command rmm command scan command send command whom command The mh_alias file format mh_ profile file format whatnow Command 79 Commands Reference Volume 6 Mail Overview in AIX Version 4 3 System User s Guide Communications and Networks Peek Jerry MH and xmh E mail for Users and Programmers Sebastopol CA O Reilly amp Associates 1992 whatnow Command 80 Commands Reference Volume 6 whereis Command Purpose Locates source binary or manual for program Syntax whereis Command whereis maximum of 2 whereis s b m u S B M Directory File Description The whereis command locates the source binary and manuals sections for specified files The supplied names are first stripped of leading path name components and any single trailing extension of the form ext for example c Prefixes of s resulting from use of the Source Code Control System see SCCS are also dealt with The command then attempts to find the desired program from a list of standard locations A usage message is returned if a bad option is entered In other cases no di
72. but not written to a file The default is warn Sets the number of lines displayed in one window of text The default depends on the baud rate at which you are operating 600 baud or less 8 lines 1200 baud 16 lines higher speeds full screen minus 1 line Sets the margin for automatic word wrapping from one line to the next The default is wm 0 A value of 0 turns off word wrapping Allows string searches to wrap from the end of the editing buffer to the 35 Commands Reference Volume 6 beginning The default is ws wraptype wt Indicates the method used to wrap words at the end of a line The default value is general You can specify one of the following four values general Allows wraps on word breaks as white space between two characters This setting is the default word Allows wraps on words rigid Allows wraps on columns and before closing punctuation flexible Allows wraps on columns but one character of punctuation can extend past the margin writeany wa Turns off the checks usually made before a write subcommand The default is nowa To see a list of the vi editor settings that have changed from the default settings enter set and press the spacebar Press the Enter key to return to the command mode To see a complete list of the vi editor settings enter set all Press the Enter key to return to the command mode To turn on a vi editor option enter set Option This command automatically returns you to th
73. by forking and leaving the parent process to exit and then closing file descriptors and releasing the controlling terminal In some environments this is not desired in particular when debugging Setting this resource to False disables this feature Display Manager pidFile The file name specified is created to contain an ASCII representation of the process ID of the main xdm process The xdm command also uses file locking on this file to attempt to eliminate multiple daemons running on the same machine which would have unpredictable results DisplayManager lockPidFile Controls whether the xdm command uses file locking to keep multiple display managers from running simultaneously System V and AIX use the lockf library call while BSD uses flock DisplayManager authDir Names a directory in which the xdm command stores authorization files while initializing the session The default value is usr lib X11 xdm xdm Command 197 Commands Reference Volume 6 DisplayManager autoRescan DisplayManager removeDomainname DisplayManager key File Display Manager accessFile Display Manager exportList Display Manager randomFile DisplayManager choiceTimeout DisplayManager DISPLAY resources DisplayManager DISPLAY chooser DisplayManager DISPLAY xrdb xdm Command A Boolean value that controls whether the xdm command rescans the configuration servers access control and authentication keys files after a session ends and the fil
74. can be combined into one physical request Flags Note Both the f and s flags can be entered on the command line but the system will only accept the first flag specified and override the second flag f Reports the number of forks since system startup i Displays the number of interrupts taken by each device since system startup s Writes to standard output the contents of the sum structure which contains an absolute count of paging events since system initialization The s option is exclusive of the other vmstat command options These events are described as follows address translation faults Incremented for each occurrence of an address translation page fault I O may or may not be required to resolve the page fault Storage protection page faults lock misses are not included in this count page ins vmstat Command 59 Commands Reference Volume 6 Incremented for each page read in by the virtual memory manager The count is incremented for page ins from page space and file space Along with the page out statistic this represents the total amount of real I O initiated by the virtual memory manager page outs Incremented for each page written out by the virtual memory manager The count is incremented for page outs to page space and for page outs to file space Along with the page in statistic this represents the total amount of real I O initiated by the virtual memory manager paging space page ins Incremented for VMM
75. clients that this font server will support before refusing service This is useful for tuning the load on each individual font server clone self Boolean Whether this font server should attempt to clone itself when it reaches the client limit default point size Cardinal The default point size in decipoints for fonts that do not specify default resolutions List of resolutions Resolutions the server supports by default This information may be xfs Command 211 Commands Reference Volume 6 used as a hint for pre rendering and substituted for scaled fonts which do not specify a resolution A resolution is a comma separated pair of x and y resolutions in pixels per inch Multiple resolutions are separted by commas error file String Filename of the error file All warnings and errors are logged here port Cardinal TCP port on which the server will listen for connections The default is 7100 use syslog Boolean Whether the syslog function on supported systems is to be used for errors deferglyphs String Set the mode for delayed fetching and caching of glyphs Value is none meaning defered glyphs is disabled al1 meaning defered glyphs is enabled for all fonts and 16 meaning defered glyphs is enabled only for 16 bit fonts One of the following forms can be used to name a font server that accepts TCP connections tcp hostname port tcp hostname port cataloguelist The hostname specifies the name or decimal nu
76. command is also used by the qdaemon daemon to send messages to users on other hosts and to wait for replies There are only three valid replies ok The original write exits with a status of 0 cancel The original write exits with a status of 1 query The message associated with the given handle is displayed Parameters User Specifies the user ID of the person to receive the message text User Host Specifies the user ID and remote host of the person to receive the message text Line Contacts the target user at another location tt y00 for example Flags h Handle Reply Replies to a message sent by a utility or shell script using write with the reply option The value to be used for the Handle variable is generated internally and supplied to the user in the text of the original message The reply can be ok cancel or query nHost Specifies a remote host The Host variable may be a nickname or an internet address q Queries all messages awaiting replies from users on a host and displays them with their handles r Generates a message handle places it in the message header sends the message and waits for a reply This flag is used by the qdaemon daemon for operator messages and can be put in shell scripts It is not used for interactive conversations An exit status of 0 indicates that the reply was ok a status of 1 indicates that the reply was cance1 and an exit status write Command 101 Commands Reference Volume 6 of
77. curses function should be worked around The default is False If false triple clicking to select a line does not include the Newline at the end of the line If true the Newline is selected The default is true cutToBeginningofLines class CutToBeginningOfLine background class Background foreground class Foreground cursorColor class Foreground eightBitInput class EightBitInput eightBitOutput class EightBitOutput font class Font font1 class Font1 font2 class Font2 font3 class Font3 font4 class Font4 font5 class Font5 font6 class Font6 geometry class Geometry If false triple clicking to select a line selects only from the current word forward If true the entire line is selected The default is true Specifies the color to use for the background of the window The default is white Specifies the color to use for displaying text in the window Setting the class name instead of the instance name is an easy way to have everything that would normally appear in the text color change color The default is black Specifies the color to use for the text cursor The default is black If True meta characters input from the keyboard are presented as a single character with the eighth bit turned on If False meta characters are converted into a 2 character sequence with the character itself preceded by ESC The default is True Specifies whether 8 bit characters sent from the host shou
78. ethers Contains the Ethernet addresses of hosts on the Internet network etc publickey Contains public or secret keys for NIS maps Related Information The chmaster command chslave command Ismaster command makedbm command mkmaster command mkslave command yppush command ypxfr command The ypserv daemon Network Information Services NIS Overview for System Management in AIX Version 4 3 Network Information Services NIS and NIS Guide NIS Reference ypinit Command 324 Commands Reference Volume 6 ypmatch Command Purpose Displays the values of given keys within a Network Information Services NIS map Syntax To Display Key Values for an NIS Map yerasich Command Diseieys Key Values for an NIS Map usrbin ypmaetch usr bin ypmatch d Domain k t Key MapName To Display the NIS Map Nickname Table Disp sya the NIS Mee Nickname Table Verdin ypmateh x A usr bin ypmatch x Description The ypmatch command displays the values associated with one or more keys within a Network Information Services NIS map Use the MapName parameter to specify either the name or nickname of the map you want to search When you specify multiple keys in the Key parameter the system searches the same map for all of the keys Since pattern matching is not available match the capitalization and length of each key exactly If the system does not find a match for the key or keys you speci
79. files appended when you run a SMIT session The commands built and run by Users amp Groups Manager are added to the end of the smit log file along with the command output The time name of the task and the command flags and parameters included are added to the end of the smit script file in a format that can easily be used to create executable shell scripts Example To start Users amp Groups Manager enter xuserm To see a list tasks you can perform for an object or area press the right mouse button to display its pop up menu Read the text in the Information Area for help on the objects and areas Files smit log Specifies detailed information on your session with time stamps smit script Specifies the task commands run during your session with time stamps xuserm Command 309 Commands Reference Volume 6 xwd Command Purpose Dumps the image of an Enhanced X Windows window Syntax twd Command xwd add Value frame display Display help nobdrs xy out File root id id name Name icmap screen Description The xwd command is an Enhanced X Windows window dumping utility The xwd command allows you to store window images in a specially formatted dump file This file can then be read by various other X utilities that perform functions such as redisplaying printing editing formatting archiving and image processing Select the target window by clicking the mou
80. generates a MappingNotify event on every client All of the changes should be batched together and done at once Clients that receive keyboard input and ignore MappingNotify events will not notice any changes made to keyboard mappings The FileName parameter specifies a file containing the xmodmap command expressions to be run This file is usually kept in the home directory of the user with a name like xmodmapre If no file is specified input is taken from stdin The xmodmap command program reads a list of expressions and parses them all before attempting to run any of them This makes it possible to refer to key symbols that are being naturally redefined without having to worry as much about name conflicts add The key symbol names are evaluated as the line is read This permits you to remove keys from a modifier without worrying about whether they were reassigned add ModifierName KeySymbolName Adds the given key symbols to the indicated modifier map The key symbol names are evaluated after all input expressions are read to make it easy to write expressions to swap keys clear ModifierName Removes all entries in the modifier map for the given modifier where xmodmap Command 236 Commands Reference Volume 6 the valid names are Shift Lock Control Mod1 Mod2 Mod3 Mod4 and Mod5 case does not matter in modifier names although it does matter for all other names For example clear Lock removes all keys bound to the shift
81. getty and login commands on character terminals prompting for login name and password authenticating the user and running a session A session is defined by the lifetime of a particular process in the traditional character based terminal world it is the user s login shell In the xdm context it is an arbitrary session manager This is because in a windowing environment a user s login shell process does not necessarily have any terminal like interface with which to connect When a real session manager is not available a window manager or terminal emulator is typically used as the session manager meaning that ending this process ends the user s session When the session is ended xdm resets the X server and optionally restarts the whole process When the xdm command receives an Indirect query by way of XDMCP it can run a chooser process to perform an XDMCP BroadcastQuery or an XDMCP Query to specified hosts on behalf of the display and offer a menu of possible hosts that offer XDMCP display management This feature is useful with X terminals that do not offer a host menu themselves Because the xdm command provides the first interface that users see it is designed to be simple to use and easy to customize to the needs of a particular site Typical Usage The xdm command is designed to operate in a wide variety of environments First the xdm configuration file should be set up Make a directory usually usr lib X11 xdm to contain a
82. gt f forward character n Ctrl lt Key gt d kill next character n Ctrl lt Key gt k kill to end of line n Ctrl lt Key gt u kill to start of line n You may setup XDM to use the standard XDM translations by replacing the XmText translations as defined in Xresources Note Use lt Key gt osfHelp instead of lt Key gt F1 due to the Motif default virtual bindings Xlogin XmText translations override n lt Key gt osfHelp set session arqument failsafe finish field n Ctrl lt Key gt Return set session argument failsafe finish field n Ctrl lt Key gt H delete previous character n Ctrl lt Key gt D delete character n Ctrl lt Key gt B move backward character n Ctrl lt Key gt F move forward character n Ctrl lt Key gt A move to beginning n Ctrl lt Key gt E move to end n Ctrl lt Key gt K rase to end of line n Ctrl lt Key gt U erase line n Ctrl lt Key gt X erase line n lt Key gt Return finish field n lt Key gt BackSpace delete previous character n lt Key gt Delete delete previous character n 205 Commands Reference Volume 6 In addition to the normal XmText actions the following actions are also supported by the client in order to be compatible with the standard XDM translations delete previous character Erases the character before the cursor delete character Erases the character after the cursor mov
83. have the trusted computing base attribute Files Accessed Mode File r dev audit x usr sbin auditstream x usr sbin auditselect watch Command 67 Commands Reference Volume 6 x usr sbin auditpr Examples 1 To watch all files opened by the bar command enter watch e FILE Open usr lpp foo bar x This command opens the audit device and executes the usr Ipp foo bar command It then reads all records and selects and formats those with the event type of FILE_Open 2 To watch the installation of the xyzproduct program that may be untrustworthy enter watch usr sbin installp xyzproduct This command opens the audit device and executes the usr sbin installp command It then reads all records and formats them Files usr sbin watch Contains the watch command dev audit Specifies the audit device from which the audit records are read Related Information The audit command auditbin daemon auditcat command auditpr command auditselect command auditstream command login command logout command su command The auditread subroutine To see the steps you must take to establish an Auditing System refer to Setting Up Auditing in AIX Version 4 3 System Management Guide Operating System and Devices For more information about the identification and authentication of users discretionary access control the trusted computing base and auditing refer to Security Administration in AIX Version 4 3 Syst
84. hopalong pixels qix lines life generations image bits and swarm motions In the blank mode it is important to set this to a small number because the keyboard and mouse are only checked after each delay A delay of zero would needlessly consume the processing unit while checking for mouse and keyboard input in a tight loop since the blank mode has no work to do display Display Sets the X11 display to lock The xlock command locks all available screens on the server and restricts you to locking only a local server such as unix 0 localhost 0 or 0 unless you set the remote flag fg Color Sets the color of the text on the password screen font FontName Sets the font to be used on the prompt screen help Prints a brief description of available options info TextString Defines an informational message The defaultis Enter password to unlock select icon to lock invalid TextString Specifies an password message The default is Invalid login mode ModeName Specifies one the following six display modes blank Displays a black screen hop Displays the real plane fractals from the September 1986 issue of Scientific American image Displays several randomly appearing sun logos life Displays Conway s game of life qix Displays spinning lines xlock Command 225 nice NiceLevel Commands Reference Volume 6 swarm Displays a swarm of bees following a wasp Sets system nicelevel of the xlock proc
85. identifying information You can also use the what command on files where the information is inserted manually Note The what command may fail to find SCCS identification strings in executable files Flags s Searches for only the first occurrence of the Z pattern Exit Status This command returns the following exit values 0 Any matches were found 1 Otherwise Examples Suppose that the file test c contains a C program that includes the line char ident Test Program If you compile test c to produce test o then the command what Command 72 Commands Reference Volume 6 what test c test o displays test c Test Program testo Test Program Files usr bin what Contains the what command Related Information The get command sccshelp command The scesfile file format List of SCCS Commands in AIX General Programming Concepts Writing and Debugging Programs Source Code Control System SCCS Overview in AIX General Programming Concepts Writing and Debugging Programs what Command 73 Commands Reference Volume 6 whatis Command Purpose Describes what function a command performs Syntax whets Commard whats d I Command T H PathName whatis MPathName Command Description The whatis command looks up a given command system call library function or special file name as specified by the Command parameter from a database you create using the catman w comma
86. initiated page ins from paging space only paging space page outs Incremented for VMM initiated page outs to paging space only total reclaims Incremented when an address translation fault can be satisfied without initiating a new I O request This can occur if the page has been previously requested by VMM but the I O has not yet completed or if the page was pre fetched by VMM s read ahead algorithm but was hidden from the faulting segment or if the page has been put on the free list and has not yet been reused zero filled page faults Incremented if the page fault is to working storage and can be satisfied by assigning a frame and zero filling it executable filled page faults Incremented for each instruction page fault pages examined by the clock VMM uses a clock algorithm to implement a pseudo least recently used lru page replacement scheme Pages are aged by being examined by the clock This count is incremented for each page examined by the clock revolutions of the clock hand Incremented for each VMM clock revolution that is after each complete scan of memory pages freed by the clock Incremented for each page the clock algorithm selects to free from real memory backtracks Incremented for each page fault that occurs while resolving a previous page fault The new page fault must be resolved first and then initial page faults can be backtracked lock misses VMM enforces locks for concurrency by removing addressability to a
87. into a grid of a specified size For example each bit might translate into a 3 x 3 grid To specify a3 x 3 grid enter scale 3 By default a window prints with the largest scale that fits on the page for the specified orientation If you do not specify a device the aspect ratio can vary Splits a window into several pages This might be necessary for very large windows that would otherwise cause the printer to overload and print the page in an obscure manner This flag is not supported on PostScript or HP Laserjet printers Specifies the top margin for the window in inches Fractions are acceptable By default this flag prints the window on the center of the page Specifies a trailer string to print below the window Specifies the maximum width of the page Note The 4207 5201 and 5202 printers images must be recorded by the xwd utility in XYPixmap or XYBitmap format X YPixmap images are converted into bitmaps using a thresholding algorithm For the HP Laserjet printer multiplane images must be recorded in ZPixmap format Single plane images may be either XYPixmap XYBitmap or ZPixmap formats Related Information The X command xwd command xwud command xpr Command 260 Commands Reference Volume 6 xpreview Command Purpose Displays troff files on an X display Syntax Lprevion Command preview page Nombey BaskingStore Aackngstore ypa a Toont og y CH xpreview BackingStore BackingS
88. is no RESOURCE_MANAGER property defined either because the xrdb command was not run or if the property was removed the resource manager looks for a file called Xdefaults in your home directory The file name or the standard input if or no file name is given is optionally passed through the C preprocessor with the following symbols defined based on the capabilities of the server being used xrdb Command 266 SERVERHOST Hostname SRVR_name HOST Hostname DISPLAY_NUM num CLIENTHOST Hostname CLNT_name WIDTH Number HEIGHT Number X_RESOLUTION Number Y_RESOLUTION Number PLANES Number RELEASE Number REVISION Number VERSION Number VENDOR Vendor VNDR_name EXT_name NUM_SCREENS num SCREEN_NUM num BITS_PER_RGB Number CLASS VisualClass CLASS_visualclass visualid CLASS_visualclass_depth num COLOR Commands Reference Volume 6 Specifies the hostname portion of the display to which you are connected Turns the SERVERHOST hostname string into a legal identifier For example my dpy lcs mit edu becomes SRVR_my_dpy_lcs_mit_edu Specifies the hostname portion of the display to which you are connected Specifies the number of the display on the server host Specifies the name of the host on which xrdb is running Turns the CLIENTHOST hostname string into a legal identifier For example expo lcs mit edu becomes CLNT_expo_lcs_mit_edu Specifies the width of the default screen in pixels Specifies the hei
89. key you must also remove it from the appropriate modifier map Flags display Display Specifies the host and display to use e Expression Specifies an expression to be run You can specify any number of expressions from the command line grammar Prints a help message describing the expression grammar used in files and with the eExpressions flag prints to standard error help Prints a brief description of the command line arguments to standard error This is done whenever an unhandled argument is given to the xmodmap command n Indicates that the xmodmap command should not change the mappings but should display what it would do when given this flag pk Indicates that the current keymap table should print on the standard output pke Indicates that the current keymap table should be printed on the standard output in the form of expressions that can be fed back to xmodmap This flag is specific to X11R5 pm Indicates that the current modifier map should print on the standard output pp Indicates that the current pointer map should print on the standard output quiet Turns off the verbose logging This is the default verbose Indicates that the xmodmap command should print logging information as it parses its xmodmap Command 237 Commands Reference Volume 6 input Examples 1 The following command reverses the button codes that get generated so that the primary button is pressed using the index finger
90. key to select an option The valid options are com1 com2 com3 and com4 The default option is com1 Specifies whether or not an Xstation 130 has a fixed disk installed Two options are valid y if there is a fixed disk and n if there is no fixed disk The default option is n Specifies whether or not the PIXMAPS are paged to the fixed disk Two options are valid y for yes and n for no The default option is n Specifies the way to access the font files In SMIT press the F4 key to select an option Valid options are e Use network only Use disk only e Try disk first try network second e Try network first try disk second e Try disk first try network second and store to disk e Use most recent copy and update disk The default option is Use network only Specifies the way to access the boot file In SMIT press the F4 key to select an option Valid options are e Use network only Use disk only e Try disk first try network second e Try network first try disk second e Try disk first try network second and store to disk e Use most recent copy and update disk The default option is Use network only Specifies how the hardware pan feature is to be used Valid options are none square horizontal and vertical The default value is none With the hardware pan feature enabled the physical screen shows a portion of a larger base window whose size is dependent on the amount of video memory VRAM install
91. language definitions file default is the usr share lib vgrindefs file h Header Specifies a particular header to put on every output page default is the file name Note A blank space is required after the h flag before the Header variable ILanguage Specifies the language to use Currently known languages are c C the default Function names can be preceded on a line only by spaces tabs or an asterisk The parenthetical options must also be on the same line csh CSH P PASCAL Function names must be displayed on the same line as the function or procedure keywords m MODEL Function names must be displayed on the same line as the isbeginproc keyword phrase sh SHELL R RATFOR mod2 MODULA2 yacc YACC isp ISP I ICON s Size Specifies a point size to use on output exactly the same as a ps request Files index Contains the file the where source for the index is created usr bin vgrind Contains the vgrind command usr share lib tmac tmac vgrind Contains the macro package usr share lib vfontedpr Contains the preprocessor usr share lib vgrindefs Contains the language descriptions Related Information The qprt command tbl command troff command vgrind Command 30 The vgrindefs File Format vgrind Command Commands Reference Volume 6 31 Commands Reference Volume 6 vi or vedit Command Purpose Edits files with a full screen display Syntax vi ovesi Command RER Su
92. last application Assuming that the window manager has been configured properly the user then chooses the Exit menu item to end the AIXwindows session xrdb load SHOME Xresources xsetroot solid gray amp xclock g 50x50 0 0 bw 0 amp xload g 50x50 50 0 bw 0 amp xterm g 80x24 0 0 amp xterm g 80x24 0 0 amp mwm 7 Sites that want to create a common startup environment could simply create a default xinitre script that references a site wide startup file bin sh usr local lib site xinitre 8 Another approach is to write a script that starts the xinit command with a specific shell script Such scripts are usually named x11 xstart or startx and are a convenient way to provide a simple interface for novice users bin sh xinit usr local lib site xinitre usr bin X11 X be Files xinitre Contains the default client script files aixterm Contains the command the client runs if xinitre does not exist xserverre Contains the default server script X Contains the command the server runs if xserverre does not exist Related Information The startx command X command xinit Command 221 Commands Reference Volume 6 xinstallm Command Purpose Starts Install and Update Software Manager or Easy Install two of the Visual System Management VSM applications Syntax xinstatm Cotes xinstallm ez Description The xinstallm command starts Install and Update Software Manager one of the Vi
93. moo command number command quiz command ttt command turnoff command turnon command wump Command 112 Commands Reference Volume 6 X Command Purpose Starts the X server Syntax UTE aan Er ap Cda rasdast 4 VOUT ass Deroy ioe LL lt eoke Drm hapigi an reip X a Number auth FileName be bc bp Color broadcast bs nobs c Volume cc VisualType Display class DisplayClass co File cookie XDMAuthenticationBit D File d Depth Display displayID DisplayID f Number fe Font fn Font fp Font help I indirect HostName layer Display logo nologo n Number once P RowColumn Display pbufferlevel displayname displaynumber p Number port PortNumber query HostName r Ir s Number secIP PermissionCode secLocal PermissionCode secSMT PermissionCode stereo Display su T t Number to Number v wm wp Color wrap wrapx wrapy x ExtensionName Description The X command starts the X server a display server that runs on bitmapped terminals The X server distributes input and output requests to or from programs located on either the host system or systems connected to it through a network End an Enhanced X Windows session by using the Ctrl Alt Backspace key
94. must be in the etc services file and specified in decimal Position Specifies where to insert this element in the font path TypeName Specifies the name of the network type Each network type has a font path consisting of one or more font path elements To see a list of the network types and their font path elements press F4 in SMIT at the Xstation Network TYPE Name option Specify the name of the network type to which the font path element will be added or choose to have it added to all network type names by specifying A11 If a font path element is added to A11 network types will be placed at the end of each font path Security Access Control Only the root user should have execute x access to this command Example To add the font server to the start of the font path for network type x_st_mgr ether enter x_add_fs_fpe winter 7500 1 x_st_mgr ether In this example the font server on host winter has been added to the start of the font path for network type x_st_mgr ether The font server port is 7500 Files fusr Ipp x_st_mgr bin x_add_fs_fpe Contains the x_add_fs_fpe command etc x_st_mgr ether cf Contains the network type x_st_mgr ether configuration file sample x_ add fs foe Command 121 Commands Reference Volume 6 Related Information The aixterm command bootpd daemon login command pclient command x_add_nfs_fpe command x_add_trm_120 command x_add_trm_130 command x_add_trm_140 command x_add_trm_150 comm
95. or macros to which indirect queries should be sent A macro definition contains a macro name and a list of host names and other macros that the macro expands to To distinguish macros from host names macro names start with a percent character Macros may be nested Indirect entries may also specify to have the xdm command run the chooser command to offer a menu of hosts to which to connect See the section Chooser on the next page When checking access for a particular display host each entry is scanned in turn and the first matching entry determines the response For example a Direct query entry is ignored when scanning for an Indirect entry A Broadcast query entry is ignored when scanning for a Direct entry Blank lines are ignored The number symbol is treated as a comment delimiter causing the rest of that line to be ignored and a backslash at the end of the line causes the new line to be ignored allowing indirect host lists to span multiple lines The following is an example Xaccess file Xaccess XDMCP access control file Direct Broadcast query entries lxtra lcs mit edu disallow direct broadcast service for xtra bambi ogi edu allow access from this particular display lcs mit edu allow access from any display in LCS Indirect query entries SHOSTS expo lcs mit edu xenon lcs mit edu xdm Command 202 Commands Reference Volume 6 excess lcs mit edu kanga lcs mit edu extract
96. pixel color values The root background colors may be changed on some servers by altering the entries for BlackPixel and WhitePixel Although these values are often 0 and 1 they need not be Also a server may choose to allocate those colors privately in which case the xset command generates an error The xset command also generates an error if the map entry is a read only color Valid parameters are Pixel Specifies the color map entry number in decimal Color Specifies a color Enables autorepeat Disables autorepeat Sets screen saver parameters to the default screen saver characteristics Specifies the length of time the server must be inactive for the screen saver to activate Period specifies the period in which the background 276 Commands Reference Volume 6 pattern must be changed to avoid burn in The values of Length and Period are specified in seconds If only one numerical parameter is given it is read as a Length parameter s on or s off Turns the screen saver functions on and off respectively s activate Causes the screen saver to activate even if it has been turned off s reset Causes the screen saver to deactivate if it was activated s blank Sets the preference to blank the video if the hardware can do so rather than display a background pattern s noblank Sets the preference to display a pattern rather than blank the video s expose Sets the preference to allow window exposures the server ca
97. preprocessor if any macro definitions yield strings or if there is conditional code which contains strings which may not in fact be needed xstr Command 283 Commands Reference Volume 6 The xstr command reads from its standard input when the minus sign flag is given and does not alter the strings file unless the c flag is specified also An appropriate command sequence for running the xstr command after the C preprocessor is cc E name c xstr c CO SC KG mv x o name o The xstr command does not touch the file strings unless new items are added thus the make command can avoid remaking the xs o file unless truly necessary Flags c Extracts strings from the specified file and places them in the strings file v Verbose mode Tells when strings are found or new in the strings file Reads from standard input Examples 1 To extract the strings from the C source in the File c parameter replacing string references by expressions of the form amp xstr number xstr c File c An appropriate declaration of the xstr array is prepended to the file The resulting C text is placed in the file x c to then be compiled 2 To declare the common xstr array space in the xs c file xstr Files strings File which contains the extracted strings X C Massaged C source XS C C source for definition of array xstr tmp xs Temporary file when xstr command does not touch the strings file usr ces bi
98. prevented from stealing or tampering with data belonging to trusted clients See the SECURITY extension specification for full details on the restrictions imposed on untrusted clients The default is untrusted The timeout option specifies how long in seconds this authorization will be valid If the authorization remains unused no clients are connected with it for longer than this time period the server purges the authorization and future attempts to connect using it will fail Note that the purging done by the server does not delete the authorization entry from the authorization file The default timeout is 60 seconds The group option specifies the application group that clients connecting with this authorization should belong to See the application group extension specification for more details The default is to not belong to an application group The data option specifies data that the server should use to generate the authorization Note that this is not the same data that gets written to the authorization file The interpretation of this data depends on the authorization protocol The hexdata is in the same format as the hexkey described in the add command The default is to send no data list DisplayName Authorization entries for each of the specified displays or all displays if none are named are printed on the standard output in a textual format Key data is always displayed in the hexadecimal format given in th
99. reading by the troff command and its preprocessors Provides the user with a simple menu based interface to update or change the set of installed font families on the system Typesets manual pages Prints documents formatted with memorandum macros Typesets documents 375 ndx neqn newform nl nroff pic proff ps630 ps4014 psc psdit psplot psrev psroff ptx refer roffbib soelim sortbib spell spellin spellout Files and Directories Commands Reference Volume 6 Typesets English language view graphs and slides Creates a subject page index for a document Formats mathematical text for the nroff command Changes the format of a text file Numbers lines in a file Formats text for printing on typewriter like devices and line printers Preprocesses troff command input for the purpose of drawing pictures Formats text for printers with personal printer data streams Converts Diablo 630 print files to PostScript format Converts a Tektronix 4014 files to PostScript format Converts troff intermediate format to PostScript format Converts troff intermediate format to PostScript format Converts files in plot format to PostScript format Reverses the page order of a PostScript file and selects a page range for printing Converts files from troff format to PostScript format Generates a permuted index Finds and inserts literature references in d
100. s q t LogFile Description The usr sbin XNSrouted daemon is invoked during system startup to manage the Network Systems NS routing tables This daemon uses the Xerox NS Routing Information Protocol RIP to maintain up to date kernel routing table entries In normal operation the XNSrouted daemon listens for routing information packets If the host is connected to multiple NS networks it can periodically supply copies of its routing tables to any directly connected hosts and networks When the XNSrouted daemon is started it uses the ioctl SIOGIFCONF subroutine to find those directly connected interfaces configured into the system and marked up the software loopback interface is ignored If multiple interfaces are present it is assumed the host forwards packets between networks The XNSrouted daemon then transmits a request packet on each interface using a broadcast packet if the interface supports it and enters a loop listening for request and response packets from other hosts When a request packet is received the XNSrouted daemon formulates a reply based on the information maintained in its internal tables The generated response packet contains a list of known routes each marked with a hop count metric a count of 16 or greater is considered infinite The metric associated with each route returned provides a metric relative to the sender Response packets received by the XNSrouted daemon are used to update the
101. s Size flag 2 The last iteration has fewer than Number but not zero arguments remaining Note The L I Lowercase L and n flags are mutually exclusive the last flag specified takes effect Asks whether to run the Command parameter It displays the constructed command line followed by a question mark ellipsis prompt Enter an affirmative response specific to the locale to run the Command parameter Any other response causes the xargs command to skip that particular invocation of the parameter You are asked about each invocation The p flag also turns on the t flag Sets the maximum total size of the constructed Command line The Size parameter must be a positive intege Fewer arguments are used if 1 The total number of arguments exceeds those specified by the n flag 2 The total number of lines exceeds those specified by the L or I Lowercase L flags 3 EOF is reached before the number of bytes specified by the Size parameter are accumulated Enables the trace mode and echoes the constructed Command line to standard error before running Stops running the xargs command if any Command line is greater than the number of bytes specified by the sSize flag This x flag is turned on if you specify either the 179 Commands Reference Volume 6 I Uppercase i or l Lowercase L flag If you do not specify the i I Uppercase i I Lowercase L L or n flag the total length of the Command
102. sendmail bos compat links 4 2 0 0 usr lib nls msg Ca_ES sendmail87 cat bos msg Ca_Es net tcp client 4 2 0 0 usr lib nls msg ca_ES sendmail87 cat bos msg ca_Es net tcp client 4 2 0 0 usr lib nls msg cs_CZ sendmail87 cat bos msg cs_CZ net tcp client 4 2 0 0 usr lib nls msg De DE sendmail87 cat bos msg De_DE net tcp client 4 2 0 0 usr lib nls msg de DE sendmail87 cat bos msg de_DE net tcp client 4 2 0 0 usr lib nls msg En_US sendmail87 cat bos msg En_US net tcp client 4 2 0 0 usr lib nls msg en_US sendmail87 cat bos msg en_US net tcp client 4 2 0 0 usr lib nls msg Es_ES sendmail87 cat bos msg Es_ES net tcp client 4 2 0 0 usr lib nls msg es_ES sendmail87 cat bos msg es_ES net tcp client 4 2 0 0 which_fileset Command 84 Commands Reference Volume 6 usr lib nls msg Fr_FR sendmail87 cat bos msg Fr_FR net tcp cl usr lib nls msg fr_FR sendmail87 cat bos msg fr_FR net tcp cl usr lib nls msg hu_HU sendmail87 cat bos msg hu_HU net tcp cl usr lib nls msg It_IT sendmail87 cat bos msg It_IT net tcp cl usr lib nls msg it_IT sendmail87 cat bos msg it_IT net tcp cl usr lib nls msg Ja_JP sendmail87 cat bos msg Ja_JP net tcp cl usr lib nls msg ja_JP sendmail87 cat bos msg ja_JP net tcp cl usr lib nls msg ko_KR sendmail87 cat bos msg ko_KR net tcp cl usr lib nls msg pl_PL sendmail87 cat bos msg pl_PL net tcp cl usr lib nls msg ru_RU sendmail87 cat bos msg ru_RU net tcp cl usr lib nls msg Sv_SE sendmail87 cat bos msg Sv_SE net tcp
103. sequence You can specify one or more display devices If none are specified the default is all The default configuration order is determined by the adapter slot order The adapter in the first slot is initialized as the left X Command 113 Commands Reference Volume 6 most screen the adapter in the second slot is the next screen to the right To rearrange the layout of the screens use the P flag The P flag associates the row and column of the device with the device name You can determine the device name by using the Isdisp command The two displays are arranged either vertically or horizontally The following example shows P flags specifying a horizontal arrangement P11 ppr0 P12 pprl The 2 in the right position of the second P flag indicates that the second monitor view is along the x axis This produces the horizontal arrangement Display Display 1 2 To see two monitors in a vertical arrangement the P flags should read P11 ppr0 P21 pprl The 2 in the first position indicates that the monitors are in a vertical configuration along the y axis Display 1 Display 2 In the horizontal configuration when a mouse is traveling from left to right in Display 1 and reaches the border of Display 1 and 2 the cursor continues into Display 2 at the same y axis position When it reaches the edge of Display 2 and the wrapx flag is set it appears at the leftmost edge of Display 1 in the same y axis p
104. set autolinefeed On Off Toggle This action toggles automatic insertion of linefeeds and is also invoked by the autolinefeed entry in vtMenu set appcursor On Off Toggle This action toggles the handling Application Cursor Key mode and is also invoked by the appcursor entry in vtMenu set appkeypad On Off Toggle This action toggles the handling of Application Keypad mode and is also invoked by the appkeypad entry in vtMenu set scroll on key On Off Toggle This action toggles the scrollKey resource and is also invoked from the scrollkey entry in vtMenu set scroll on tty output On Off Toggle This action toggles the scrollTtyOutput resource and is also invoked from the scrollttyoutput entry in vtMenu set allow132 On Off Toggle This action toggles the c132 resource and is also invoked from the allow132 entry in vtMenu set cursesemul On Off Toggle This action toggles the curses resource and is also invoked from the cursesemul entry in vtMenu xterm Command 300 set visual bell On Off Toggle set marginbell On Off Toggle set altscreen On Off Toggle soft reset hard reset clear saved lines set terminal type Type set visibility vt tek On Off Toggle set tek text arge 2 3 small tek page tek reset tek copy visual bell Commands Reference Volume 6 This action toggles the visualBell resource and is also invoked by the visualbell entry in vtMenu This acti
105. shells the different types and how they affect the way commands are interpreted Commands Overview in AIX Version 4 3 System User s Guide Operating System and Devices which Command 83 Commands Reference Volume 6 which _fileset Command Purpose Searches the usr lpp bos ATX_file_list file for a specified file name or command This command only applies to AIX Version 4 2 1 or later Syntax mhich_flenet Comment which fliese L Fie which_fileset File Description The which_fileset command searches the usr Ipp bos ATX_file_list file for a specified file name or command name and prints out the name of the fileset that the file or command is shipped in The usr lpp bos AIX_file_list file is large and not installed automatically You must install the bos content_list fileset to receive this file The File parameter can be the command name the full path name or a regular expression search pattern Examples 1 To display which fileset the dbx command is shipped in enter which_fileset dbx The screen displays the following usr bin dbx gt usr ccs bin dbx bos adt debug 4 2 1 0 usr ccs bin dbx bos adt debug 4 2 1 0 2 To display all commands and paths containing the sendmail string enter which_fileset sendmail T he screen displays the following usr ucb mailq gt usr sbin sendmail bos compat links 4 2 0 0 usr ucb newaliases gt usr sbin
106. support Specifies the behavior of the mouse when its hotspot reaches the top or bottom border of any root window If this flag is set and the hotspot of the mouse reaches the top border of the topmost root window the mouse is positioned at the bottom border of the bottommost root window at the same x position Conversely if this flag is set and the hotspot of the mouse reaches the bottom border of the bottommost root window the mouse is positioned at the top border of the topmost root window at the same x position If this flag is not set the mouse stops at the top or bottom border of any root window The wrapy flag is for use with multiple head support Specifies that the extension name should be loaded when the server is initialized This is particularly useful for large extensions such as the Display PostScript Level 2 dps This flag can be specified more than once with multiple extension names Enables Enhanced X Windows Display Manager Control Protocol XDMCP and sends a Query packet to the specified host The query flag is for use with XDMCP Enables XDMCP and broadcasts BroadcastQuery packets to the network The first responding display manager is chosen for the session The broadcast flag is for use with XDMCP Enables XDMCP and sends IndirectQuery packets to the specified host The indirect flag is for use with XDMCP Specifies an alternative port number for XDMCP This flag must be specified before any
107. the yppasswdd Daemon 329 Commands Reference Volume 6 database files are large several thousand entries or more Note The System Resource Controller SRC starts the yppasswdd daemon with the m flag specified by default Use the chssys command to change the default to the r flag Example To propagate updated passwords immediately invoke the yppasswdd daemon as follows startsrc s yppasswdd Files etc inetd conf Defines how the inetd daemon handles Internet service requests var yp Makefile Contains rules for making NIS maps etc re nfs Contains the startup script for the NFS and NIS daemons etc security passwd Stores password information Related Information The chssys command domainname command make command passwd command startsre command yppasswd command The inetd daemon The etc security passwd file System Resource Controller Overview in AIX Version 4 3 System Management Concepts Operating System and Devices Network File System NFS Overview for System Management in AIX Version 4 3 System Management Guide Communications and Networks Remote Procedure Call RPC Overview for Programming in AIX Version 4 3 Communications Programming Concepts Network Information Services NIS Overview for System Management in AIX Version 4 3 Network Information Services NIS and NIS Guide NIS Reference yppasswdd Daemon 330 Commands Reference Volume 6 yppoll Command Purpose Displays the or
108. the F e parametor virscan a m nmut q qq sFile v w String p File File tFile Directory Description The virscan command is used to detect the presence of computer viruses in a file system The virscan command scans the directory and all of its subdirectories indicated by the Directory variable if specified The virscan command does not attempt to remove viral infections from a system If the command discovers a virus seek competent technical assistance to clean up the infection safely and prevent it from spreading to other systems The virscan command cannot find virus signatures in files that are compressed or encrypted This includes files that have been compressed by archiving programs To scan such files unpack them first and then scan their constituent files On systems with damaged directory trees the virscan command terminates with an error Though not caused by the virscan command this condition will prevent the virscan command from scanning the disk correctly Run the fsck command to diagnose any error conditions The virscan command was originally developed to detect the presence of known computer viruses in MS DOS or PC DOS systems It was adapted for use in an AIX environment but at this time contains no known AIX virus signatures The virus signature file contains only known DOS based virus signatures Flags a Scans all files on the indicated path This is use
109. the SMGate server can be specified If specified the SMGate server listens on that port instead of the default of 9092 disablehttps Disables the SMGate utility starthttps Starts the SMGate utility This is normally started by the init process sslalways Allows only secure connections This flag is for a system with security configured ssloptional Allows both secure and non secure connections to the Web based System Manager Examples 1 To enable Web based System Manager for applet and client server mode enter usr websm bin wsmserver enable 2 To enable the SMGate utility enter usr websm bin wsmserver enablehttps Related Information Setting up and Running Web based System Manager in AIX Version 4 3 System Management Guide Operating System and Devices wsmserver Command 108 Commands Reference Volume 6 wtmpfix Command Purpose Manipulates connect time accounting records by correcting date and time stamp inconsistencies Syntax winpfx Command Jusrishin ecctiwom pix Fe usr sbin acct wtmpfix File Description The wtmpfix command is called by the runacct procedure to examine standard input or Files that contain records in wtmp format and correct problems that could make the acctcon1 or acctcon2 commands fail The wtmpfix command corrects date and time stamp inconsistencies and writes the corrected records to standard output If the date and time stamps are not consistent when the acctc
110. the at command batch Runs jobs when the system load level permits chprtsv Changes a print service configuration on a client or server machine chque Changes the queue name chquedev Changes the printer or plotter queue device names chvirprt Changes the attribute values of a virtual printer digest Converts the ASCII form of the etc qconfig file into the etc qconfig bin file a binary version of the queue configuration used by the qdaemon command disable Disables a printer queue enq Enqueues a file Ipq Examines the spool queue Ipr Enqueues print jobs Iprm Removes jobs from the line printer spooling queue Isallq Lists the names of all configured queues Isallqdev Lists all configured printer and plotter queue device names within a specified queue Isprtsv Shows print service information stored in the database Isque Displays the queue stanza name Isquedev Displays the device stanza name Isvirprt Displays the attribute values of a virtual printer mkprtsv Configures TCP IP based print service on a host Commands List Performance Tuning 390 Commands Reference Volume 6 mkque Adds a printer queue to the system mkquedev Adds a printer queue device to the system mkvirprt Makes a virtual printer piodmgr Compacts the Object Data Manager ODM database in the var spool Ipd pio local smit directory piolpx Provides printer backend support for Xstation attached printers piolsvp Lists virtual printers on a sy
111. the description of environment variables in the environment file The exre file can contain subcommands of the form setOption Value for example set cp 3 vi or vedit Command 36 Commands Reference Volume 6 To include a comment in the exrc file use a double quotation mark as the first character in the line Defining Macros If you use a subcommand or sequence of subcommands frequently you can use the vi editor to define a macro that issues that subcommand or sequence To define a macro enter the sequence of subcommands into a buffer named with a letter of the alphabet The lowercase letters a through z overlay the contents of the buffer and the uppercase letters A through Z append text to the previous contents of the buffer allowing you to build a macro piece by piece For example to define a buffer macro named c that searches for the word corner and makes the third line after the word corner the current line enter the following command o corner 3 Then press the Esc key and enter the following command do where c is the name of the buffer macro To add text to the previous contents of the defined buffer enter the o viSubcommand press the Esc key and enter CapitalLetter where the CapitalLetter variable specifies an uppercase letter A through Z For example to build a buffer macro named T that searches for the word corner and allows you to add more commands enter the following command O corner Then pr
112. the minimum value does not distinguish between a primary and secondary server and a secondary server may be selected even when the primary server is available A value greater than the maximum value may lead to a time out Specifies the input device Device must be mouse or tablet In SMIT press the F4 button to select the input device The default option is mouse You can attach a 6093 tablet device Model 11 or Model 12 to the Xstation serial port A tablet uses absolute positioning as opposed to the relative positioning of a mouse and cannot change the initial cursor location The threshold and acceleration parameters of the xset command apply only to the mouse X Windows protocol supports five button signals from a mouse or tablet Buttons 1 2 and 3 correspond to the left middle and right buttons respectively Button 4 is used as an event generating button If required by specific application programs button 5 sends the required messages Buttons 6 through 16 if present are disabled Specifies the serial port on an Xstation 160 to which the tablet is attached In SMIT press the F4 key to select an option The valid options are T1 T2 S1 or S2 The default option is T1 Specifies the way to access the font files In SMIT press the F4 key to select an option Valid options are e Base FLASH e Network e NFS e Optional FLASH The default option is Base FLASH Specifies the way to access the Xserver file list In SMIT p
113. the vi editor it reads this file The mapping remains in effect for every editing session To map keys for the current editing session only from the command mode start the subcommand during the vi editor session To map keys for the current editing session only from the text input mode enter the subcommand on the command line during the vi editor session The mapping remains in effect only for the current editing session Attention If you use an IBM 3161 ASCII display station IBM 3163 ASCII display station or IBM 3101 ASCII display station the default key mapping of the vi editor can cause you to lose data To see the default mapping issue a map subcommand Specific problems arise with the Esc J or Shift J key sequence These key sequences delete all information from the current position of the cursor to the end of the file To avoid problems change this key sequence using a exrc file The map map and ab subcommands are defined and used as follows map Defines macros in the command mode The map subcommand allows you to run a specified command or sequence of commands by pressing a single key while in the vi editor To map keys in the command mode start the vi editor with an empty editing buffer and do not name a vi file using the vi command or type anything into the buffer after the vi editor starts You can use the map subcommand to do the following e To map a character to a sequence of editing commands enter
114. the xcmsdb command to read the data back if it exists xcmsdb query xcmsdb Command 191 Commands Reference Volume 6 xdat Command Purpose Starts Set Date and Time Schedule a Job or Remove or View Scheduled Jobs three of the Visual System Management VSM applications Syntax To start Set Date and Time zdi Command Starts Set Date and Time dmt xdat To start Schedule a Job xdat Command Slarts Sobedele Job on Operation xdat c Operation To start Remove or View Scheduled Jobs dsi Command Sterts Hemove or View Scheduled Jobe zdat m xdat m Description The xdat command starts Set Date and Time Schedule a Job or Remove or View Scheduled Jobs three of the Visual System Management VSM applications Set Date and Time and Remove or View Scheduled Jobs can also be started from the AIX Common Desktop Environment From the Front Panel select the Application Manager Within Application Manager select the System_Admin directory Within System_Admin select the desired application icon Set Date Time enables you to view or change your system date time or time zone Much of the system processing depends on accurate date and time settings For example accuracy is important if you schedule jobs to run at a later time or if your system communicates with other systems Schedule a Job enables you to schedule operations for future processing You can specify what s
115. tier number or assignment rules of the running classes Update can be used to switch to an alternate configuration provided that the alternate configuration has the same classes as the current configuration Classes cannot be added or removed in this way 0 Stops the Workload Manager p Starts the WLM in passive mode or switches from active to passive mode q Queries the WLM state Returns 0 if the WLM is running in active mode 1 if the WLM is not wlmcntrl Command 96 Commands Reference Volume 6 started or 2 if the WLM is running in passive mode A message indicating the current state of the WLM is printed on STDOUT Files letc wlm current classes Contains the names and definitions of the classes for the current Workload Manager configuration letc wlm current limits Contains the resource limits enforced on the classes for the current Workload Manager configuration letc wlm current rules Contains the automatic assignment rules for the current Workload Manager configuration letc wim current shares Contains the resource shares allocated to the classes for the current Workload Manager configuration letc wlm current description Contains the description text for each configuration Related Information The chclass command Isclass command mkclass command and rmclass command wlmcntrl Command 97 Commands Reference Volume 6 wimstat Command Purpose Shows wlm class status Syntax wimstat 1 class c m i
116. toggle action The following resources are useful when specified for the AthenaScrollbar widget thickness class Thickness Specifies the width in pixels of the scrollbar background class Background Specifies the color to use for the background of the scrollbar foreground class Foreground Specifies the color to use for the foreground of the scrollbar The thumb of the scrollbar is a simple checkerboard pattern with alternating pixels for foreground and background colors Pointer Usage Once the VT102 window is created the xterm command allows you to select text and copy it within the same or other windows The selection functions are invoked when the pointer buttons are used with no modifiers and when they are used with the Shift key The assignment of the functions to keys and buttons may be changed through the resource database Pointer button 1 usually left is used to save text into the cut buffer Move the cursor to beginning of the text and then hold the button down while moving the cursor to the end of the region and releasing the button The selected text is highlighted and is saved in the global cut buffer and made the PRIMARY selection when the button is released Double clicking selects by words triple clicking selects by lines and quadruple clicking goes back to characters Multiple click is determined by the amount of time from button up to button down so you can change the selection unit in the middle of a se
117. ve command replaces user declared keywords with the value assigned on the command line Keywords can be replaced both in text and in control statements Control Statements A control statement is a single line beginning with a control character the default control character is a colon Control statements provide conditional processing of the input The allowable types of control statements are if Condition Text end Writes all the lines between the if statement and the matching end to standard output only if the condition is true You can nest if and end statements However once a condition is false all remaining nested if and end statements are ignored See the Condition Syntax section for the syntax of conditions and allowable operators dcl Keyword Keyword Declares specified keywords All keywords must be declared asg Keyword Value Assigns the specified value to the specified keyword An asg statement takes precedence over keyword assignment on the ve command line A later asg statement overrides all earlier assignments of the associated keyword The keywords that are declared but not assigned Values have null values 3 Text Removes the two leading control characters replaces keywords with their respective values and then copies the line to standard output on or off Turns on or off keyword replacement on all lines ctl Character Changes the control character to the Character value msg Messag
118. vi or vedit Command 39 Commands Reference Volume 6 using the vi command or type anything into the buffer after the vi editor starts You can use the map subcommand to do the following e To map a letter to one or more vi strings in text input mode enter map Letter String e To unmap a letter previously mapped in text input mode enter unmap Letter e To display a list of existing strings that are mapped to specific keys in text input mode enter map Typing the mapped key while in text input mode produces the specified string The Ctrl V and Esc key sequence puts you into command mode backs up to the beginning of the current word bbw and starts the cw change word subcommand For example map lt Ctrl V gt lt Esc gt bbwcw When typing text if you realize that you have mistyped a word you can change it by pressing the percent key and retyping the word You are automatically returned to insert mode Note Be careful when choosing keys to be used for the map subcommand Once keys have been mapped they can no longer be input as text without first issuing the unmap subcommand ab Maps a key or sequence of keys to a string of characters for use in the text input mode The ab subcommand is useful when inputting text that possesses several repetitive phrases names or titles The following example replaces the word city with the phrase Austin Texas 78759 whenever it is typed in text input mode an
119. volume Displaying adding and deleting maximum transfer unit MTU values used for path MTU discovery netpmon Monitors activity and reports statistics on network usage netstat nfsstat nice no nulladm ps renice reorgvg rmss sar stem stripnm svmon time timex tprof trenm trerpt trestop vmstat Shows network status Displays statistical information about the Network File System NFS and Remote Procedure Call RPC calls Runs a command at a specified priority Configures network options Creates the file specified with read and write permissions to the file owner and group and read permissions to other users Shows current status of processes Alters priority of running processes Reorganizes the physical partition allocation for a volume group Simulates system with various sizes of real memory Collects reports or saves system activity information Allows insertion of user supplied instrumentation code at the entry and exit points of existing program and library subroutines Displays the symbol information of a specified object file Captures and analyzes a snapshot of virtual memory Prints the time of the execution of a command Reports in seconds the elapsed time user time and system execution time for a command Specifies the user program to be profiled executes it and produces reports Generates a kernel name list Formats a report from the trace log Stops the trace function R
120. when y is specified are changed to Prefix tab c Prefix tab h and Prefix output respectively yacc Command 314 C l NnNumber NmNumber NrNumber p Prefix s t y y Path Commands Reference Volume 6 Produces the y tab C file instead of the y tab c file for use with a C compiler To use the T O Stream Library for input and output define the macro CPP_IOSTREAMS Produces the file y tab h This contains the define statements that associate the yacc assigned token codes with your token names This allows source files other than y tab c to access the token codes by including this header file Does not include any line constructs in y tab c Use this only after the grammar and associated actions are fully debugged Changes the size of the token and nonterminal names array to Number The default value is 8000 Valid values are only those greater than 8000 Changes the size of the memory states array to Number Default value is 40000 Valid values are only those greater than 40000 Changes the internal buffer sizes to handle large grammars The default value is 2000 Valid values are only those greater than 2000 Use Prefix instead of yy as the prefix for all external names created by the yace command External names affected include yychar yylval yydebug yyparse yylex and yyerror Previously p was used to specify an alternate parser now yPath can be used to specify
121. which at the vacation message is sent The Number parameter is an integer value and the Unit parameter specifies a time unit The Unit parameter can be one of the following Ss Seconds m Minutes h Hours vacation Command 15 Commands Reference Volume 6 Days Weeks Note The f flag cannot be used with the I flag Examples 1 Files Before you use the vacation command to return a message to the sender saying that you are on vacation you must initialize the SHOME vacation pag and HOME vacation dir files To initialize these files enter vacation I Modify the forward file For example Mark enters the following statement in the forward file mark usr bin vacation mark The sender receives the message that is in the HOME vacation msg file or if the file does not exist the default message found in the usr share lib vacation def file If neither of these files exist no automatic replies are sent to the sender of the mail message and no error message is generated If either of these files exist the sender receives one vacation message from mark per week regardless of how many messages are sent to mark from the sender If the following entry is contained in your forward file mark usr bin vacation f 10d mark The sender receives one vacation message from mark every ten days regardless of how many messages are sent to mark from the sender To create a vacation message that is different f
122. xmodem Command Purpose Transfers files with the xmodem protocol detecting data transmission errors during asynchronous transmission Syntax noden Command xmoder aa a Fhatiarrs xmodem s r FileName Description The xmodem shell command is used with the Asynchronous Terminal Emulation ATE program to transfer a file designated by the FileName parameter using the xmodem protocol The xmodem protocol is an 8 bit transfer protocol to detect data transmission errors and retransmit the data The workstation sending data waits until the remote system sends a signal indicating it is ready to receive data After the receiving system get data it returns an acknowledgment to the sending system In the ATE program the receiving system times out if data is not received within 90 seconds after the file transfer is initiated Sending and receiving with the xmodem command are complementary operations One system must be set to send while the other is set to receive Use the xmodem command on the remote system in combination with the send subcommand or the receive subcommand from the ATE Connected Main Menu on the local system To interrupt an xmodem file transfer press the Ctrl X key sequence Flags r Receives data from the local workstation s Sends data to the local workstation Examples Sending a File with the xmodem Protocol To send the file my file with the xmodem protocol use the ate command and t
123. xmodmap Commandement ntm vs ces Pete nt nt ee 236 RMIMsCOMMAN Gs 52828 rien tee nt nain doses st does dico ere ste ETE 239 XNSquery Command Mn Hertha LR at ot hed da eee meet due te 241 XNSrouted Daemon Mn Me eee Ses RAO nn nor sn 242 xntpd Daemon uit tennis nn ain ein seein aed de ee ees 244 Xntpdc Command ee nes deseo Ro RE aaa E e aaao n n e saben de CN nn 247 Xpcmicia Command esse Len en ct se nn dr dde tn ter e Meee oats 255 Xpowerm Command sissen free nn trente been abies firent ie elas 256 xp Command ste tin nine ln E E ne RO MNT ie ten E ne 258 Xpreview Commandes tisse eieae hes sletacewastacdeitlesdeessesestesceeuses tagel Lssigestelescebaleacauadesed slates 261 Xprintin COMMANDE Gaede tl ed en Len 265 xrdb Comimand s seeds tin M Me ee A BE en dr re 266 REX Command ohne A ek Leaks od ead OO EAS EAB Rs 270 xSend Eommand ssss us danse dE re ls E an Babee ati one 272 XSL COMMANTE 0 nn A Mn nette ee div ne tar ee 274 xsetroot Command sites his tire oe ves Sena ttes nee US uA Tae 279 RSS ComMmand 8 OAE E E E E E EEE EAE E er or se te er E E 281 SLIn COMMMANA PAREPARE AEE AEE E TE EA EEEE 283 Xe COMMAN PAEA EAEE EE A AA EEE EA ce A E EE ET E ET 285 xusern COMMAM GS 3350 5 Ries aad e sess thw ren te LA norte LE 309 KW A Commande dre mate esa Oe he ee A eno 310 KWUG C OMAN EEA E A en nd Mets a tt hoes bale dE ete lt da ne ce bade bas bole Gavia te dE 312 yace Commandes nes kts Lee Monnet nee normale mes Men ee Beate 314 Command
124. 1 2 and 3 correspond to the left middle and right buttons respectively Button 4 is used as an even generating button If required by specific application programs button 5 sends the required messages Buttons 6 through 16 if present are disabled Specifies the serial port on an Xstation 160 to which the tablet is attached In SMIT press the F4 key to select an option The valid options are T1 T2 S1 or S2 The default option is T1 Specifies the way to access the font files In SMIT press the F4 key to select an option Valid options are e Base FLASH e Network e NFS e Optional FLASH The default option is Base FLASH Specifies the way to access the Xserver file list In SMIT press the F4 key to select a option Valid options are e Base FLASH e Network e NFS e Optional FLASH The default option is Base FLASH Specifies how the hardware pan feature is to be used Valid options are none square horizontal and vertical The default value is none With the hardware pan feature enabled the physical screen shows a portion of a larger base window whose size is dependent on the amount of video memory VRAM installed on the Xstation When the cursor is moved past the edge of the display the screen will automatically scroll in that direction provided it has not already reached the edge of the base window Note The window size for panning is always a power of 2 With 2MB VRAM expanding the window dimensions to a pow
125. 2 dot RomanKn23 Kanji23 and IBM_JPN23 or RomanKn23G Kanji23G and IBM_JPN23G Korean support currently includes the following font sets e In 16 dot EnglHg16 and Hangul16 e In 24 dot EnglHg24 and Hangul24 Flags The xpreview command accepts the standard X Toolkit command line flags as well as the following flags Requires input to be read from standard input help Indicates that a brief summary of the allowed command line flags should be printed BackingStoreBackingStoreType The BackingStore flag causes the server to save the window contents so that when it is scrolled around the viewport the window is painted from contents saved in server backing store Redisplays of the drawing window can take up to a second or so The BackingStoreType parameter can have one of the following values Always WhenMapped or NotUseful Notes 1 Enter a space between the BackingStore flag and its BackingStoreType parameter 2 Use of this flag requires that the server be started with backing store enabled pageNumber Specifies the page number of the document to be first displayed ToolKitFlag The following standard X Toolkit flags are commonly used with the xpreview command bgColor Specifies the color to use for the background of the window The default is white xpreview Command 262 Commands Reference Volume 6 bgColor Specifies the color to use for the background of the window The default is white fgColor
126. 2 indicates that the user could not be contacted Notes 1 The writesrv daemon must be running on the target host in order for any of the flags to work If you are not using either the n flag or Host but using h q or r the writesrv daemon must be running on your host 2 If TCP IP is not installed on your machine but the HostName is set in order to converse with users on the local host using the write command with the h q or r flag you must append your host name to the end of the loopback entry in the etc hosts file The original entry should read 127 0 0 1 loopback LocalHostName The new entry should read 127 0 0 1 loopback LocalHostName HostName Exit Status This command returns the following exit values 0 Successful completion gt 0 The addressed user either is not logged on or denies permission Examples 1 To write a message to a user who is logged in enter write june Press the Enter key and type I need to see you Meet me in the computer room at 12 30 Then press the Ctrl D key sequence to terminate the write command mode If your user ID is karen and you are using workstation tt y3 june s workstation displays Message from karen on trek tty3 Aug 17 11 55 24 I need to see you Meet me in the computer room at 12 30 lt EOT gt 2 To hold a conversation enter write june Press the Enter key and type Meet me in the computer room at 12 30 fe This starts the conv
127. 4 ANGERS CEDEX 01 FAX 33 0 2 41 73 60 19 FRANCE E Mail Courrier Electronique srv Cedoc franp bull fr Or visit our web site at Ou visitez notre site web http www frec bull com PUBLICATIONS Technical Literature Ordering Form CEDOC Reference Qty CEDOC Reference Qty CEDOC Reference Qty N R f rence CEDOC Qt N R f rence CEDOC Qt N R f rence CEDOC Qt ___ no revision number means latest revision pas de num ro de r vision signifie r vision la plus r cente NOM NAME Date SOCIETE COMPANY ADRESSE ADDRESS PHONE TELEPHONE FAX E MAIL For Bull Subsidiaries Pour les Filiales Bull Identification For Bull Affiliated Customers Pour les Clients Affili s Bull Customer Code Code Client For Bull Internal Customers Pour les Clients Internes Bull Budgetary Section Section Budg taire For Others Pour les Autres Please ask your Bull representative Merci de demander votre contact Bull BULL ELECTRONICS ANGERS CEDOC 34 Rue du Nid de Pie BP 428 49004 ANGERS CEDEX 01 FRANCE ORDER REFERENCE 86 A2 43JX 02 ac Ww z O oul z Ww o on EZ LX mo wO OH tu aw ao Utiliser les marques de d coupe pour obtenir les tiquettes Use the cut marks to get the labels AIX AIX Commands Reference Vol 6 X to zcat 86 A2 43JX 02 AIX
128. AIX Commands Reference Vol 6 X to zcat 86 A2 43JX 02 AIX AIX Commands Reference Vol 6 X to zcat 86 A2 43JX 02
129. AY grabTimeout DisplayManager DISPLAY authorize DisplayManager DISPLA Y authName DisplayManager DISPLA Y authFile To improve security the xdm command grabs the server and keyboard while reading the login name and password The grabServer resource specifies if the server should be held for the duration of the name password reading When set to False the server is ungrabbed after the keyboard grab succeeds otherwise the server is grabbed until just before the session begins The default value is False The grabTimeout resource specifies the maximum time that the xdm command waits for the grab to succeed The grab may fail if some other client has the server grabbed or possibly if the network latencies are very high This resource has a default value of 3 seconds you should be cautious when raising it as a user may be confused by a look alike window on the display If the grab fails the xdm command becomes inactive and restarts the server if possible and the session authorize is a Boolean resource that controls whether the xdm command generates and uses authorization for the local server connections If authorization is used the xdm command uses the authorization mechanisms indicated as a whitespace separated list as the value of the authName resource XDMCP connections dynamically specify which authorization mechanisms are supported so the authName resource is ignored in this case When the authorize resource is set for a dis
130. Also identifies graphical objects such as buttons labels and icons that the user selects Italics Identifies parameters whose actual names or values are to be supplied by the user Monospace Identifies examples of specific data values examples of text similar to what you might see displayed examples of portions of program code similar to what you might write as a programmer messages from the system or information you should actually type Format Each command may include any of the following sections Purpose A description of the major function of each command Syntax A syntax diagram showing command line options Description A discussion of the command describing in detail its function and use About This Book Commands Reference Volume 6 Flags A list of command line flags and associated variables with an explanation of how the flags modify the action of the command Parameters A list of command line parameters and their descriptions Subcommands A list of subcommands for interactive commands that explains their use Exit Status A description of the exit values the command returns Security Specifies any permissions needed to run the command Examples Specific examples of how you can use the command Files A list of files used by the command Related Information A list of related commands in this book and related discussions in other books Implementation Specifics To list the installable software package fileset of
131. Bull AIX Commands Reference Vol 6 X to zcat AIX ORDER REFERENCE 86 A2 43UX 02 Bull AIX Commands Reference Vol 6 X to zcat AIX Software April 2000 BULL ELECTRONICS ANGERS CEDOC 34 Rue du Nid de Pie BP 428 49004 ANGERS CEDEX 01 FRANCE ORDER REFERENCE 86 A2 43JX 02 The following copyright notice protects this book under the Copyright laws of the United States of America and other countries which prohibit such actions as but not limited to copying distributing modifying and making derivative works Copyright Bull S A 1992 2000 Printed in France Suggestions and criticisms concerning the form content and presentation of this book are invited A form is provided at the end of this book for this purpose To order additional copies of this book or other Bull Technical Publications you are invited to use the Ordering Form also provided at the end of this book Trademarks and Acknowledgements We acknowledge the right of proprietors of trademarks mentioned in this book AIX is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation and is being used under licence UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States of America and other countries licensed exclusively through the Open Group Year 2000 The product documented in this manual is Year 2000 Ready The information in this document is subject to change without notice Groupe Bull will not be liable for errors c
132. E EE EIEE ENE iia ai inertie 121 z add nts fp Command emnene eaea a nie n on ancient A iii use 123 x add ttm 120 Command s se ds e a aaae tn a E E a a ee a ts R 125 X add tr 130 Command ess ete ne an nn E e a dec Date Sa 128 x add trim 140 Command isie titine nm tin E a won segs weeaseyy ease 132 x_ add ttm 150 Command 5 M ane eire ste rare ee Ta no ren ne eee een ttes 136 X add ttm 160 Command isis is accesssisesesbooessbsanesabesanaedvacasanavaagesseecobescsdeeantacaee suacagees sedges sabacacasssavevavaies 140 Kad d_ XSt fpe Command vs sexsezecceeee Matec sente ae e dm enter tes NeiR 144 Ke che net Command neiss ra s T das ehan nement nant mien anim 146 Rchg trin 120 Command erein ns ni ed MERA a Bae 148 Xach trm 130 Command omei ariii ne nt nt seeds E ce PN ieee aban lee ten 151 x Cho trm 140 Command as dites rene nine rare ie te aa A aa 155 Commands Reference Volume 6 Table of Contents x che trm 150 Command aiena sep sena en as tn etaient nn tirent 158 x Che trim 160 Command isis ini icc mine tee lak alien advo AR hn ne 162 Kodef Met Command sin ne ed Mt trente dolls done dote da een bon ad bas seceshscadeuerands 166 X21S n t COMMMAMG PETEERE EN Ni nt tete lp tire tes ie nn ne rite en eee nt ere 168 K ls net fp COmman nement nat teen ral ler tee TA ete AR a anne nec NAT net 170 Kgs tm Commandes en MR Re RS ne nd rires Tertre 171 xrm fp Commande erene title triste ENEA E NEEE nt cite sets tte ses val sl
133. ELL Specifies the value of DisplayManager DISPLA Y systemShell XAUTHORITY May be set to an authority file No arguments are passed to the script The xdm command waits until this script exits before starting the user session If the exit value of this script is nonzero the xdm command discontinues the session and starts another authentication cycle xdm Command 206 Commands Reference Volume 6 Session Program The Xsession program establishes the style of the user s session It is run with the permissions of the authorized user In addition to any specified by DisplayManager exportList the following environment variables are passed DISPLAY Specifies the associated display name HOME Specifies the initial working directory of the user USER Specifies the user name PATH Specifies the value of DisplayManager DISPLAY userPath SHELL Specifies the user s default shell from getpwnam XAUTHORITY May be set to a nonstandard authority file At most installations the Xsession program should look in the user s home directory HOME for a file xsession which contains the commands that the user would like to use as a session The Xsession program should also implement a system default session if no user specified session exists See the section Typical Usage An argument may be passed to this program from the authentication widget using the set session argument action This can be used to select different styles of session Usua
134. Examples 1 To activate volume group vg03 enter varyonvg vg03 2 To activate volume group vg03 without synchronizing partitions that are not current enter varyonvg n vg03 varyonvg Command 23 Commands Reference Volume 6 Files usr sbin Contains the varyonvg command directory tmp Stores the temporary files while the command is running Related Information Thechvgcommand Ispv command Islv command Isvg command varyoffvg command The lvm_varyonvg subroutine The System Management Interface Tool SMIT Overview in AIX Version 4 3 System Management Concepts Operating System and Devices explains the structure main menus and tasks that are done with SMIT The Logical Volume Storage Overview in AIX Version 4 3 System Management Concepts Operating System and Devices explains the Logical Volume Manager physical volumes logical volumes volume groups organization ensuring data integrity and allocation characteristics AIX HACMP 6000 Concepts and Facilities varyonvg Command 24 Commands Reference Volume 6 vc Command Purpose Substitutes assigned values for identification keywords Syntax ve Command Keyword Vawe oC Aaracter s t ve a t s eCharacter Keyword Value Description The ve command copies lines from standard input to standard output The flags and keywords on the command line and control statements in the input modify the resulting output The
135. FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMED This disclaimer does not apply to the United Kingdom or elsewhere if inconsistent with local law A reader s comment form is provided at the back of this publication If the form has been removed address comments to Publications Department Internal Zip 9561 11400 Burnet Road Austin Texas 78758 3493 To send comments electronically use this commercial internet address aix6kpub austin ibm com Any information that you supply may be used without incurring any obligation to you c Copyright AT amp T 1984 1985 1986 1987 1988 1989 All rights reserved c Copyright KnowledgeSet Corporation Mountainview California 1990 Copyright c 1993 1994 Hewlett Packard Company Copyright c 1993 1994 International Business Machines Corp Copyright c 1993 1994 Sun Microsystems Inc Commands Reference Volume 6 1 Commands Reference Volume 6 Copyright c 1993 1994 Novell Inc All rights reserved This product and related documentation are protected by copyright and distributed under licenses restricting its use copying distribution and decompilation No part of this product or related documentation may be reproduced in any form by any means without prior written authorization RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGEND Use duplication or disclosure by the United States Government is subject to the restrictions set forth in DFARS 252 227 7013 c 1 i1 and FAR 52 227 19 THIS PUBL
136. Files ar backup cat chgrp chlang chmod chtz cksum copy cp cpio dd defragfs del delete dosdel dosread Files and Directories Commands Reference Volume 6 Edits files with a full screen display Prints the modification dates of an INed structured file Edits files with a full screen display Starts the vi editor in read only mode Maintains the indexed libraries used by the linkage editor Backs up files and filesystems Concatenates or displays files Changes the group ownership of a file or directory Changes the language LANG environment variable in the etc environment file Changes permission modes Changes the language TZ environment variable in the etc profile file Changes the checksum and byte count of a file Copies files Copies files Copies files into and out of archive storage and directories Converts and copies a file Increases a file system s contiguous free space Deletes files if the request is confirmed Removes unlinks files or directories Deletes DOS Files 370 Commands Reference Volume 6 Copies DOS files to AIX files doswrite Copies AIX files to DOS files file Determines the file type find Finds files with a matching expression link Performs a link subroutine In Links files mv Moves files nulladm Creates the file specified with read and write permissions to the file owner and group and read perm
137. ICATION IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON INFRINGEMENT THIS PUBLICATION COULD INCLUDE TECHNICAL INACCURACIES OR TYPOGRAPHICAL ERRORS CHANGES ARE PERIODICALLY ADDED TO THE INFORMATION HEREIN THESE CHANGES WILL BE INCORPORATED IN NEW EDITIONS OF THE PUBLICATION HEWLETT PACKARD COMPANY INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORP SUN MICROSYSTEMS INC AND UNIX SYSTEMS LABORATORIES INC MAY MAKE IMPROVEMENTS AND OR CHANGES IN THE PRODUCT S AND OR THE PROGRAM S DESCRIBED IN THIS PUBLICATION AT ANY TIME c Copyright Graphic Software Systems Incorporated 1984 1990 All rights reserved c Cornell University 1989 1990 c Copyright Carnegie Mellon 1988 All rights reserved c Copyright Stanford University 1988 All rights reserved Permission to use copy modify and distribute this program for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted provided that this copyright and permission notice appear on all copies and supporting documentation the name of Carnegie Mellon and Stanford University not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the program without specific prior permission and notice be given in supporting documentation that copying and distribution is by permission of Carnegie Mellon and Stanford University Carnegie Mellon and Stanford University ma
138. M The classes their limits and shares are described respectively in the files classes limits and shares The automatic assignment rules are taken from the rules file These files are normally located in a subdirectory of etc wlm The standard configuration shipped with the operating system is in etc wlm standard The current configuration is the one in the directory pointed to by the symbolic link etc wlm current When the dConfig_dir flag is not used wlmentrl uses the configuration files in the directory pointed to by the symbolic link ete whm current When the dConfig_dir flag is used wlmentrl uses the configuration files in etc wlm Config_dir and updates the etc wlm current symbolic link to point to etc wlm Config_dir making etc wlm Config_dir the current configuration This is the recommended way to make etc wlm Config_dir the current configuration Flags a Starts the WLM in active mode or switches from passive to active mode This is the default when no flag other than d is specified dConjig_dir Uses etc wlm Config_dir as an alternate directory for the classes limits shares and rules files and makes etc wlm Config_dir the current configuration This flag is effective when starting the WLM in active or passive mode or when updating the WLM This flag is ignored if used with the o and q flags or when switching from active to passive mode or vice versa u Updates the WLM request to change the limits shares
139. M installed on the Xstation When the cursor is moved past the edge of the display the screen will automatically scroll in the direction of the cursor provided it has not already reached the edge of the base window Note The window size for panning is always a power of two With 2MB of VRAM expanding the window dimensions to a power of two may not leave enough memory for the shape selected Sets the map for the keyboard layout Press the F4 key in SMIT to select an option Sets the name of the keyboard file The default is the keyboard option Some countries have a second keyboard file usually named keyboard alt Sets the LANG environment variable which specifies system messages Press the F4 key in SMIT to select a value Sets the rate in characters per second of automatically transmitted duplicate characters A prolonged stay on any character key will activate the typematic operation and continue to transmit duplicate characters until the key is released The arrow keys will move at twice the speed of character keys up to 30 characters per second The default rate is 28 Specifies whether the host system is a primary boot server A primary boot server responds immediately to a boot protocol broadcast request from an Xstation for other secondary boot servers a delay time is imposed see the wTime flag below Two values are valid y if the server is a primary server and n if the server is not a primary server The default value
140. M escape sequence that switches between 80 and 132 column mode is ignored This option causes the DECCOLM escape sequence to be recognized and the xterm window will resize appropriately ah Indicates that the xterm command should always highlight the text cursor By default the xterm command will display a hollow text cursor whenever the focus is lost or the pointer leaves the window ah Indicates that the xterm command should do text cursor highlighting based on focus b Number Specifies the size of the inner border the distance between the outer edge of the characters and the window border in pixels The default is 2 cceCharacterClassRange Value Sets classes indicated by the given ranges for use in selecting by words cn Indicates that newlines should not be cut in line mode selections cn Indicates that newlines should be cut in line mode selections crColor Specifies the color to use for the text cursor The default is to use the same foreground color that is used for text cu Indicates that the xterm command should work around a bug in the more program that causes it to incorrectly display lines that are exactly the width of the window and are followed by a line beginning with a tab the leading tabs are not displayed This option is so named because it was originally thought to be a bug in the curses function xterm Command 286 cu eProgram Arguments fbFont i i j j
141. Maintain Installed Software is a graphical interface that enables you to perform installation maintence tasks through direct manipulation of objects icons freeing you from entering complex command syntax or from searching through menus The Maintain Installed Software session creates or adds to the smit log and smit script files in your home directory These are the same files appended when you run a SMIT session The commands built and run by Maintain Installed Software are added to the end of the smit log file along with the command output The time name of the task and the command flags and parameters included are added to the end of the smit script file in a format that can easily be used to create executable shell scripts Example To start Maintain Installed Software enter xmaintm To see a list tasks you can perform on an object or area press the right mouse button to display its pop up menu Read the text in the Information Area for help on the objects and areas Files smit log Specifies detailed information on your session with time stamps smit script Specifies the task commands run during your session with time stamps Related Information Maintaining Optional Software in AIX Installation Guide xmaintm Command 230 Commands Reference Volume 6 xmbind Command Purpose Configures virtual key bindings Syntax Imena Comr me mbind Lf i dieplay t pis i an xmbind displayHost Display Sc
142. Name Uses the bitmap specified in the file to set the window pattern You can make your own bitmap files little pictures using the bitmap program The entire background is made of repeated tiles of the bitmap cursorCursorFileMaskFile Changes the pointer cursor to what you want when it is outside of any window Cursor and mask files are bitmaps little pictures that can be made with the bitmap program You probably want the mask file to be all black until you get used to the way masks work cursor_nameCursorName Changes the pointer cursor to one of the standard cursors from the cursor font def Resets unspecified attributes to the default values Restores the background to the familiar gray mesh and the cursor to the hollow x shape displayDisplay Specifies the server connection See the X command fgColor Uses the Color parameter as the foreground color Foreground and background colors are meaningful only with the cursor bitmap or mod flags gray Makes the entire background gray grey Makes the entire background grey xsetroot Command 279 Commands Reference Volume 6 help Prints a usage message and exits modxY Makes a plaid like grid pattern on your screen The X and Y parameters are integers ranging from 1 to 16 Zero and negative numbers are taken as 1 nameString Sets the name of the root window to the String parameter There is no default value Usually a name is assigned to a window so that th
143. Note The xcmsdb command is only supported in X11R5 AIXwindows Version 1 2 3 Syntax zomed gt Command gemaedb A le display Oispuy xcmsdb display Display query remove color format 3211618 FileName Description The xcmsdb command is used to load query or remove Screen Color Characterization Data stored in properties on the root window of the screen Screen Color Characterization Data is an integral part of Xlib which is necessary for proper conversion between device independent and device dependent color specifications Xlib uses the XDCCC_LINEAR_RGB_MATRICES and XDCCC_LINEAR_RGB_CORRECTION properties to store color characterization data for color monitors It uses XDCCC_GRAY_SCREENWWHITEPOINT and XDCCC_GRAY_CORRECTION properties for gray scale monitors Because Xlib allows the addition of Screen Color Characterization Function Sets added function sets may place their Screen Color Characterization Data on other properties This utility is unaware of these other properties therefore you will need to use a similar utility provided with the function set or use the example xprop utility The ASCII readable contents of the FileName parameter or the standard input if no input file is given are appropriately transformed for storage in properties provided the query or remove flag options are not specified Note The Xcms API in libX11 a is supported however the client side color name data
144. RITY extension It then passes the relevant data such as the X display name to the application through an HTTP GET request of the associated CGI script The Web server then executes the CGI script to start the application The client runs on the web server host connected to your X server Installation You need to configure your web browser to use xrx for RX documents Generally the following line in your HOME mailcap is enough application x rx xrx s However you may need to refer to your web browser s documentation for exact instructions on configuring helper applications Once correctly configured your browser will activate the helper program whenever you retrieve any document of the MIME type application x rx Flags The xrx helper program accepts all of the standard X Toolkit command line options such as xrm This option specifies a resource string to be used There may be several instances of this resourcestring option on the command line Resources The application class name of the xrx program is Xrx and it understands the following application resource names and classes xrxHasFirewallProxy class XrxHasFirewallProxy Specifies whether an X server firewall proxy is running and should be used Default is False xrxInternalWebServers class XrxInternalWebServers The web servers for which the X server firewall proxy should not be used only relevant when xrx Command 2 0 Commands Reference Volume 6
145. Server b Time Device ParShepe Mode Nice Langrage gt D Kepybomd Fie Fom Location LPFheypon x_chg_trm_120 120NameTypeName Address ServerTime Device PanShape Mode Host Language Keyboard File Font Location LPFkeyport Description The x_chg_trm_120 command changes for the current host the characteristics of the Xstation specified by the Name parameter and stores the changed configuration in the etc x_st_mgr x_st_mgrd cf file the etc x_st_mgr x_st_mgrd tmty file and the etc bootptab file Parameters Parameters that can be changed are 120 Specifies that this command is used only for an Xstation 120 Name Specifies the name of the Xstation The Name parameter can be up to eight characters long and include the uppercase or lowercase letters a through z the numbers 0 through 9 the dash and the period Name can be a user name such as taylor ora group name with a number appended such as graphs 2 and should identify an Xstation by its location in the work place or by the primary user s name Name is stored in the etc hosts file Note Name should not start with a uppercase or an lowercase o or x followed by an octal or hexadecimal numeric These characters are interpreted as octal or hexadecimal numbers instead of as a terminal name In the examples x3 and xE4 the 3 and the E4 are hexadecimal numerics TypeName Specifies a name you defined for this network Xstation model combinat
146. StaticColor StaticGray TrueColor A symbol is defined for each visual supported for the screen The symbol includes the class of the visual and its depth the value is the numeric id of the visual If more than one visual has the same class and depth the numeric id of the first one reported by the server is used S Defined only if CLASS is one of StaticColor PseudoColor TrueColor or DirectColor Comment lines begin with an exclamation mark and are ignored Since xrdb can be read from standard input use it to change the contents of properties directly from a terminal or from a shell script xrdb Command 267 Flags all backup String cpp FileName DName Value Commands Reference Volume 6 Indicates that operation is performed on the screen independent resource property RESOURCE_MANAGER as well as the screen specific property SCREEN_RESOURCES on every screen of the display For example when used in conjunction with query the contents of all properties are output For load and merge the input file is processed once for each screen The resources that occur in common in the output for every screen are collected and applied as the screen independent resources The remaining resources are applied for each individual per screen property This is the default mode of operation This option is specific to X11R5 Specifies a suffix to append to the file name Use it with edit to generate a ba
147. System Management Guide Communications and Networks whois Command 92 Commands Reference Volume 6 whom Command Purpose Manipulates Message Handler MH addresses Syntax whom Command ect Aissos whom aiias File nochack check au nochech dra Itf s dratin essage Message whom alias File nocheck check draftfolder Folder nodraftholder File draftmessage Message draftFile Description The whom command does the following e Expands the headers of a message into a set of addresses e Lists the addresses of the proposed recipients of a message e Verifies that the addresses are deliverable to the transport service Note The whom command does not guarantee that addresses listed as being deliverable will actually be delivered A message can reside in a draft folder or in a file To specify where a message resides use the draft draftfolder or draftmessage flag If you do not specify the draftfolder flag or if the Draft Folder entry in the HOME mh_profile file is undefined the whom command searches your MH directory for a draft file Specifying a message after the draftfolder Folder flag is the same as specifying the draftmessage flag Flags alias File Specifies a file to search for mail aliases By default the system searches the etc mh MailAliases file draft Uses the header information in the UserMhDirectory draft file if it exists
148. TypeName parameter must contain x_st_mgr as a prefix for example x_st_mgr ether and be used with the n flag Flags bFile Specifies the name of the bootfile Because the bootfile program is downloaded into the Xstation the bootfile entry differs for each Xstation model Press the F4 key in SMIT to select a bootfile The valid option for an Xstation 120 is bootfile3 The valid option for an Xstation 130 is bootfile4 dDirectory Specifies the directory where the Xstation Network Type configuration files reside This directory must exist with root having write permission The default home directory is etc x_st_mgr gAddress This optional parameter specifies the gateway address The default option is the Internet address of the host system that establishes a communication connection to another Ethernet IEEE 802 3 or token ring system This address is an Internet address unique to the gateway in dotted decimal format ddd ddd ddd ddd where 0 lt ddd lt 255 To designate a default gateway select a gateway that is on the same local network as the Xstation If the Xstation has more than one network connection you can set a gateway for each network When multiple gateways are defined for an Xstation only one default gateway can be used The configured gateway is determined during the boot process for the Xstation If the Xstation is booted from a token ring network the token ring gateway is selected otherwise the Ethernet gatewa
149. UTH_DES authentication This disables programmatic updating of NIS maps unless the network supports these calls i Accepts RPC calls with the insecure AUTH_UNIX credentials This allows programmatic updating of NIS maps in all networks Examples To start the ypupdated daemon from the command line enter startsrc s ypupdated File var yp updaters A makefile for updating NIS maps ypupdated Daemon 339 Commands Reference Volume 6 Related Information The startsre command The keyserv daemon System Resource Controller Overview in AIX Version 4 3 System Management Guide Operating System and Devices Remote Procedure Call Overview for Programming in AIX Version 4 3 Communications Programming Concepts Network Information Services NIS Overview for System Management in AIX Version 4 3 Network Information Services NIS and NIS Guide NIS Reference ypupdated Daemon 340 Commands Reference Volume 6 ypwhich Command Purpose Identifies either the Network Information Services NIS server or the server that is the master for a given map Syntax To Identify the NIS Server yewhich Command identifies the NIS Berver for Nap uerbiniyp which usr bin ypwhich dDomain V1 V2 HostName To Identify the Master NIS Server for a Map identifies the Master NIS Server for a Nee fusrbindyp which L l li t d Doman na _ MapName usr bin ypwhich t dDomain
150. _140 command x_chg_trm_150 command x_chg_trm_160 command x_def_net command x_Is_net command x_Is_net_fp command x_Is_trm command x_rm_fpe command x_rm_net command x_rm_trm command x_chg_trm_120 Command 150 Commands Reference Volume 6 x_chg_trm 130 Command Purpose Changes the characteristics of an Xstation 130 Syntax K ahg tm 13t Commana x shg_trm_138 138 Nane TypeName Address Sener gt b Time Dorio PonWame 7 Dik Pismaps FomAcosss gt bn Boor ee PanSkape Mogae Most Langage gt Kerptoard File Font Locarvon CPFhepport x_chg_trm_130 130NameTypeName Address ServerTime Device PortName Disk Pixmaps FontAccess BootFile PanShape Mode Host Language Keyboard File Font Location LPFkeyport Description The x_chg_trm_130 command changes for the current host the characteristics of the Xstation specified by the Name parameter and stores the changed configuration in the etc x_st_mgr x_st_mgrd cf file the etc x_st_mgr x_st_mgrd tmty file and the etc bootptab file Parameters Parameters that can be changed are 130 Specifies that this command is used only for an Xstation 130 Name Specifies the name of the Xstation The Name parameter can be up to eight characters long and include the uppercase or lowercase letters a through z the numbers 0 through 9 the dash and the period Name can be a user name such as taylor ora group name with a number appended such as grap
151. a directory from NFS clients rmnfsmnt Removes an NFS mount rpcgen Generates C code to implement an RPC protocol rpcinfo Reports the status of Remote Procedure Call RPC servers rpc penfsd Handles service requests from PC NEFS Personal Computers Network File System clients rstatd Returns performance statistics obtained from the kernel rup Shows the status of a remote host on the local network rusers Reports a list of users logged in remote machines rusersd Responds to queries from the rusers command rwall Sends messages to all users on the network rwalld Handles requests from the rwall command showmount Displays a list of all clients that have remotely mounted file systems spray Sends a specified number of packets to a host and reports performance statistics sprayd Receives packets sent by the spray command statd Provides crash and recovery functions for the locking services on NFS Commands List Network Information Service chkey Changes your encryption key chmaster Executes the ypinit command and restarts the NIS daemons to change a master server chslave Re executes the ypinit command to retrieve maps from a master server and restarts the ypserv daemon to change the slave server chypdom Changes the current domainname of the system domainname Commands List Message Handler 360 Commands Reference Volume 6 Displays or sets the name of the current NIS domain keyenvoy Acts as an intermediary betwe
152. a random fortune from a database of fortunes Starts the hangman word guessing game Starts the number guessing game Displays the written form of a number Tests your knowledge Starts the tic tac toe game Sets the permission codes off for files in the usr games directory Sets the permission codes on for the files in the usr games directory Starts the hunt the wumpus game Commands List License Use Management drm_admin glbd Ib_admin General Operations Administers servers based on the Data Replication Manager DRM such as glbd the replicated version of the global location broker GLB Manages the global location broker database 384 Commands Reference Volume 6 Monitors and administers Location Broker registrations Ib_ find Gets a list of global location broker GLB server daemons and their attributes Ilbd Manages the information in the Local Location Broker database Is_admin Displays and edits the license server database Is_dpass Create passwords for License Use Management licensed software from compound licenses Is_rpt Reports on network license server events Is_stat Displays the status of the license server system Is_tv Verifies that license servers are working monitord Communicates with the License Use Management server and requests an AIX Version 4 concurrent use license for each countable login netlsd Starts the license server nrglbd Manages the Global Location Broke
153. a summary of the statistics since boot including statistics for logical disks scdisk13 and scdisk14 enter vmstat scdisk13 scdisk14 4 To display fork statistics enter vmstat f 5 To display the count of various events enter vmstat s Files unix Symbolic link to the kernel boot image usr bin vmstat Contains the vmstat command Related Information The iostat command The knlist subroutine The dev kmem special file Monitoring and Tuning Memory Use in AIX Versions 3 2 and 4 Performance Tuning Guide vmstat Command 61 Commands Reference Volume 6 w Command Purpose Prints a summary of current system activity Syntax w h u w ll s User Description The w command prints a summary of the current activity on the system The summary includes the following User Who is logged on tty Name of the tty the user is on login Time of day the user logged on idle Number of minutes since a program last attempted to read from the terminal JCPU System unit time used by all processes and their children on that terminal PCPU System unit time used by the currently active process What Name and arguments of the current process The heading line of the summary shows the current time of day how long the system has been up the number of users logged into the system and the load average The load average is the number of runnable processes over the preceding 1 5 15 minute intervals The fol
154. aaeebecetes 173 Xe Tin net Command TE E ee M one T Saad ad Les nan de ut eR 175 KT Em COMMANT ES Pecks sees RAS LR ee ER Re CA EU Ve toe Sag A LE So Net 177 xargs Command one mona nent dt ennemie een nn tend eeeds eee 178 Xauth Command ss ere eR E AEE a ee a EE 183 xClocK Command et ln nr ni entier tan ot Bo Raha dd ere te 187 XCMSAG Command ile nine etienne AOA esa EE 190 Rat OIDA Daa Faaa PEE EEEE E nn en cates re ere sans ste vip E EE EEI 192 xdevicem Commandes nt tie duree te lotte etes trente te sav ovesboranasasesdesbavdeas 194 X AA COMIMNANTE ARR AEE Dr a E E esse tente crane M taie idem ee taste ee 195 xfindproxy Command arsenal ne Vani che MAR 210 KAS Command le ME LO a Ss RE a a etn st 211 Xeet Commande tad eae ne te decen e ea e ria Ga On ne UNE aa ae e ta 214 PARIA 0301110121019 RRR RR a rr A A N A E A ERE AEE ERA este 217 xmitComma nd rs tir ne iese et te ln annee Ea Eaa EA Leese 219 xinstalim ComMANd aes e e a a a a e ape Gk nn nn tre 222 lock Command Ssscsssississessdicesssascessabasesardeswarscacceastaceeansedsorsaacacesaes adesasaddseesscagsoentioevonvsiwevasaderasdeassrecacst 224 xISfonts Command ss EAEE T EE A AIE E E E TA EE E E EIE E 227 xl vin Commandes nine RER Mn hentai RO ice 229 RMAC C O Ra a one A Rien hd 230 mbind Command 48880 AE destin ta ee seGec o E dont e et ne re st tentes ee dant 231 E O O See rs e een te lo dt late tas de cd 233 xmodem Command 26 ns nine den Boeke vasa la nie tintin nd nets 234
155. able This table lists the map nicknames the command knows of and indicates the map name as specified by the MapName parameter associated with each nickname Examples 1 To look at the networkwide password map passwd byname enter ypcat passwd ypcat Command 321 Commands Reference Volume 6 In this example pas swd is the nickname for the passwd byname map 2 To locate a map enter ypcat t passwd In this example the ypcat command bypasses any maps with the nickname of passwd and searches for a map with the full name of passwd 3 To display a map in another domain enter ypcat d polaris passwd In this example the ypcat command locates the map named passwd in the domain named polaris 4 To display the map nickname translation table enter ypcat x In this example the ypcat command displays a list of map nicknames and their associated map names Related Information The domainname command ypmatch command The ypserv daemon Network File System NFS Overview for System Management in AIX Version 4 3 System Management Guide Communications and Networks Network Information Services NIS Overview for System Management in AIX Version 4 3 Network Information Services NIS and NIS Guide NIS Reference ypcat Command 322 Commands Reference Volume 6 ypinit Command Purpose Sets up NIS maps on a Network Information Services NIS server Syntax To Set up NIS on an NIS Master Server voten
156. add_trm_120 command x_add_trm_130 command x_add_trm_140 command x_add_trm_150 command x_add_trm_160 command x_add_xst_fpe command x_chg_net command x_chg_trm_120 command x_chg_trm_130 command x_chg_trm_140 command x_chg_trm_150 command x_chg_trm_160 command x_def_net command x_Is_net command x_Is_net_fp command x_Is_trm command x_rm_fpe command x_rm_net command x_rm_trm command x_ rm_fpe Command 174 Commands Reference Volume 6 x_rm_net Command Purpose Removes an Xstation network type Syntax Lam net Name A x_rm_netName Description The x_rm_net command removes from the current host the Xstation network type specified by the Name parameter and defined in the etc bootptab file Before you enter the x_rm_net command make sure that no Xstation definitions use that network type To see a list of the currently defined network types use the x_Is_net command Security Access Control Only the root user should have execute x access to this command Examples To remove the x_st_mgr ether network type from those defined for the current Xstation host enter x_rm net x_st_mgr ether The x_st_mgr ether network type is removed from the etc bootptab file The etc x_st_mgr ether cf file is removed Files fusr Ipp x_st_mgr bin x_rm_net Contains the x_rm_net command etc bootptab Contains the boot protocol table etc x_st_mgr lt typename gt cf Contains the network configuration file
157. aemons usr sbin ypxfr_2perday Contains the script to run two transfers each day usr sbin ypxfr_1perhour Contains the script for hourly transfers of volatile maps Related Information The crontab command yppush command The cron daemon ypserv daemon System Management Interface Tool SMIT Overview in AIX Version 4 3 System Management Concepts Operating System and Devices Network File System NFS Overview for System Management in AIX Version 4 3 System Management Guide Communications and Networks NIS Maps in AIX Version 4 3 Network Information Services NIS and NIS Guide Network Information Services NIS Overview for System Management in AIX Version 4 3 Network Information Services NIS and NIS Guide NIS Reference ypxfr Command 345 Commands Reference Volume 6 zcat Command Purpose Expands a compressed file to standard output Syntax zcat n V File Description The zcat command allows the user to expand and view a compressed file without uncompressing that file The zcat command does not rename the expanded file or remove the Z extension The zcat command writes the expanded output to standard output Flags n Omits the compressed file header from the compressed file V Writes the current version and compile options to standard error Parameters File Specifies the compressed files to expand Return Values If the zeat command exits with a status of 1 if any of the following eve
158. agement parameter button Battery Indicator If your system has an inner battery an indicator showing approximate battery time remaining and the current power source AC or DC is displayed You can discharge the inner battery by clicking the right mouse button on the battery indicator area A popup menu appears from which you can select discharge Security Access Control Any User Files Accessed None xpowerm Command 256 Commands Reference Volume 6 Examples To start Power Management GUI utility enter xpowerm Files fusr Ipp X11 bin xpowerm Contains the xpowerm command xpowerm Command 257 Commands Reference Volume 6 xpr Command Purpose Formats a window dump file for output to a printer Syntax zr Command end portrait append Fame Jandecape output FN arme E 1 compact ps g outi Lever report density Op rV header Smg sowe Scab height inches split Number ef inches tp inches Nepos lon Faber String plane PhaneWumber width inches SES DER device Device imager ve 1 Use as many optional Nags as meaded Do not use a 163 more Pan oe Ime per Command nenc xpr append FileName noff output FileName landscape portrait compact cutoff Level density Dpi gray 21314 header String height nches left Inches noposition plane PlaneNumber psfig report ry scale Scale split Number
159. ager that maintains a list of xdmcp hosts The manager assigns an xdmcp host to respond to the Xstation off No X Display Manager Control Protocol XDMCP The default option is off Host Specifies the name of the xdmcp host used for direct or indirect communication with the Xstation Valid options are none or the name of an xdmcp host If XDMCP is not used or if broadcast mode is used the value of Host is none The name of an xdmcp host must be specified if Mode is direct or indirect The default option is none Language Sets the language used for system messages the LANG environment variable Press the F4 key in SMIT to select an option Keyboard Sets the map for the keyboard layout Press the F4 key in SMIT to select an option File Sets the name of the keyboard file The default is keyboard Some countries have a second keyboard file usually named keyboard alt Font Sets the font used in the login window Press the F4 key in SMIT to select an option Location Sets the position of the login window on the display Press the F4 key in SMIT to select an option Valid entries are Upper left Lower left Upperright and Lower right LPFkeyport Specifies the serial port on an Xstation to which the LPF keys are attached Press the F4 key to select an option The valid options are none T1 T2 S1 or S2 KeyRepeatRate Sets the rate in characters per second of automatically transmitted duplicate characters A prolonged stay on any charac
160. agnostics are provided Flags If any of the b s m or u flags are given the whereis command searches only for binary source manual or unusual sections respectively or any two thereof b Searches for binary sections of a file m Searches for manual sections of a file s Searches for source sections of a file u Searches for unusual files A file is said to be unusual if it does not have one entry of each requested type The B M and S flags can be used to change or otherwise limit the places where the whereis command searches Since the program uses the chdir subroutine to run faster path names given with the M S and B flag directory list must be full for example they must begin with a slash B Like b but adds a directory to search M Like m but adds a directory to search S Like s but adds a directory to search f Terminates the last M S or B directory list and signal the start of file names Examples To find all of the files in the usr ucb directory that either are not documented in the usr man man1 directory or do not have source in the usr sre emd directory enter whereis Command 81 Commands Reference Volume 6 cd usr ucb whereis u M usr man manl S usr src cmd f Files usr share man Directories containing manual files sbin etc usr lib bin ucb Ipp Directories containing binary files usr sre Directories containing source code files R
161. al system to receive infile from the remote system After transferring the file the ATE Connected Main Menu displays File ate def Contains ATE default values Related Information The ate command The connect subcommand directory subcommand modify subcommand send subcommand receive subcommand How to Edit the ATE Default File in AIX Version 4 3 System User s Guide Communications and Networks explains how to permanently change ATE defaults ATE Overview in AIX Version 4 3 System User s Guide Communications and Networks introduces the ATE program its menus and its control keys ATE Overview for System Management in AIX Version 4 3 System Management Guide Communications and Networks discusses tasks involved in managing ATE xmodem Command 235 Commands Reference Volume 6 xmodmap Command Purpose Modifies keymaps in the X Server Syntax xmodmap Command f display Display xmodmap que Le a FiteName verbose xmodmap display Display e Expression grammar help n pk pke pm pp quiet verbose FileName Description The xmodmap command edits and displays the keyboard modifier map and keymap table that client applications use to convert event keycodes into key symbols It is usually run from the session startup script to configure the keyboard according to the personal tastes of the user Every time a keycode expression is evaluated the server
162. al type file etc bootptab Contains the boot protocol table x_chg_trm_130 Command 153 Commands Reference Volume 6 Related Information The aixterm command bootpd daemon login command pclient command x_add_nfs_fpe command x_add_trm_120 command x_add_trm_130 command x_add_trm_140 command x_add_trm_150 command x_add_trm_160 command x_add_xst_fpe command x_chg_net command x_chg_trm_120 command x_chg_trm_140 command x_chg_trm_150 command x_chg_trm_160 command x_def_net command x_Is_net command x_Is_net_fp command x_ls_trm command x_rm_fpe command x_rm_net command x_rm_trm command x_chg_trm_130 Command 154 Commands Reference Volume 6 x_chg_trm 140 Command Purpose Changes the characteristics of an Xstation140 Syntax x ahg tm 168 Command ohg ym 140 ha NariwereAddress n Name 17 ypeName Language r XeyFepeahave s Server wTime hp PasShage x Neever k Koysoard xdm Mode ki Fie x_chg_trm_140 nName t TypeName ha HardwareAddress s Server w Time a FileAccess x Xserver hp PanShape xdm Mode h Host l Language k Keyboard kf File fn Font g Location r KeyRepeatRate Description The x_chg_trm_140 command changes the characteristics of the Xstation140 for the current host using the Name variable of the n flag The x_chg_trm_140 command then stores the changed configuration in the etc x_st_mgr xs140 cfg IPaddress file the etc x_st_mgr x_st_mgrd
163. alternate font servers for clients to use alternate servers hansen 7101 hansen 7102 where to look for fonts the first is a set of Speedo outlines the second is a set of misc bitmaps and the last is a set of 100dpi bitmaps catalogue usr lib fonts typel usr lib X11 ncd fonts misc usr lib X11 ncd fonts 100dpi in 12 points decipoints default point siz 120 100 x 100 and 75 x 75 default resolutions 100 100 75 75 Files usr lib X11 fs config The default configuration file xfs Command 213 Commands Reference Volume 6 xget Command Purpose Receives secret mail in a secure communication channel Syntax put xget Description The xget command is used to receive secret mail in a secure communication channel The messages can be read only by the intended recipient The xget command asks for your password and enables you to read your secret mail The xget command is used with the enroll command and the xsend command to send and receive secret mail The enroll command sets up the password used to receive secret mail The xsend command sends mail that can be read only by the intended recipient When you issue the xget command you are prompted for your encryption key Enter the password you previously set up using the enroll command The prompt for the xget command is a question mark The following subcommands control message disposition q quit Writes any mail not yet delete
164. an Files positive vir Contains a list of files that tested positive This file is created in the current directory usr bin virscan Contains the virscan command usr lib security scan virsig Ist Contains signatures of known computer viruses These are the viruses known about when this version of the program was distributed The file currently includes only known PC DOS based virus signatures usr lib security scan addenda st A user created file containing signatures of additional viruses Related Information The fsck command Testing Files for Viruses virscan Command in AIX Version 4 3 System User s Guide Operating System and Devices Security Administration in AIX Version 4 3 System Management Guide Operating System and Devices virscan Command 55 Commands Reference Volume 6 vmh Command Purpose Starts a visual interface for use with MH commands Syntax nh Command rompt vent Thos mah vah T vmhproc Commmasvmg prompt String aovnhprot vmh prompt String vmhproc CommandString novmhproc Description The vmh command starts a visual interface for use with MH commands The vmh command implements the server side of the MH window management protocol and maintains a split screen interface to any program that implements the client side of the protocol The vmh command prompts for commands and sends them to the client side of the protocol If the command produces a window with more tha
165. an alternate parser Breaks the yyparse function into several smaller functions Since its size is somewhat proportional to that of the grammar it is possible for the yyparse function to become too large to compile optimize or execute efficiently Compiles run time debugging code By default this code is not included when y tab c is compiled However the run time debugging code is under the control of the preprocessor macro YYDEBUG If YYDEBUG has a nonzero value the C compiler cc includes the debugging code regardless of whether the t flag is used YYDEBUG should have a value of 0 if you don t want the debugging code included by the compiler Without compiling this code the yyparse subroutine will have a faster operating speed The t flag causes compilation of the debugging code but it does not actually turn on the debug mode To get debug output the yydebug variable must be set either by adding the C language declaration int yydebug 1 to the declaration section of the yace grammar file or by setting yydebug through dbx Prepares the file y output It contains a readable description of the parsing tables and a report on conflicts generated by grammar ambiguities Uses the parser prototype specified by Path instead of the default usr lib yaccpar file Previously p was used to specify an alternate parser Exit Status This command returns the following exit values 0 Successful completion gt 0 An error occurred
166. and x_add_trm_160 command x_chg_net command x_chg_trm_120 command x_chg_trm_130 command x_chg_trm_140 command x_chg_trm_150 command x_chg_trm_160 command x_def_net command x_Is_net command x_Is_net_fp command x_Is_trm command x_rm_fpe command x_rm_net command x_rm_trm command x_add_fs_fpe Command 122 Commands Reference Volume 6 x_ add nfs fpe Command Purpose Adds a NFS TFTP accessed font directory to a font path Syntax z_add_nfs_fpe Corman xedd nis Ipe West Oweerory Mearhod Poston TypeName i x_add_nfs_fpe Host Directory Method Position TypeName Description The x_add_nfs_fpe command adds a font path element to the font path of the selected network type name This font directory will be accessed using Network File System NFS or Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP Host Specifies the system name to access for the font directory Directory Specifies the complete path to the directory that contains the fonts Method Specifies either nfs or t ftp to be used to access the fonts Position Specifies where to insert this element in the font path TypeName Specifies the name of the network type Each network type has a font path consisting of one or more font path elements To see a list of the network types and their font path elements press F4 in SMIT at the Xstation Network TYPE Name option Specify the name of the network type to which the font path element will be added or choose to have it added to all ne
167. and eqn command constructs from files diction Highlights unclear or wordy sentences diffmk Marks differences between files enscript Converts text files to PostScript format for printing eqn Formats mathematical text for the troff command Files and Directories 374 expand explain fmt grap greek hp hplj hyphen ibm3812 ibm3816 ibm5587G indxbib lookbib macref makedev managefonts mant mmt mvt Files and Directories Commands Reference Volume 6 Writes to standard output with tabs changed to spaces Provides an interactive thesaurus Formats mail messages prior to sending Typesets graphs to be processed by the pic command Converts English language output from a Teletype 37 workstation to output for other workstations Handles special functions for the HP2640 and HP2621 series terminals Post processes the troff command output for the HP LaserJet Series printers Finds hyphenated words Post processes the troff command output for the 3818 Pageprinter and the 3812 Model 2 Pageprinter Post processes the troff command output for the 3816 Pageprinter and the 3812 Model 2 Pageprinter Post processes troff command output for the 5587G printer with the 32x32 24x24 cartridge installed Builds an inverted index for a bibliography Finds references in a bibliography Produces cross reference listing of macro files Creates binary description files suitable for
168. and to the shell for example or take output from a program and insert it into your favorite editor Since the cut buffer is globally shared among different applications you should regard it as a file whose contents you know The terminal emulator and other text programs should be treating it as if it were a text file in other words the text is delimited by new lines The scroll region displays the position and amount of text currently showing in the window highlighted relative to the amount of text actually saved As more text is saved up to the maximum the size of the highlighted area decreases Clicking button 1 with the pointer in the scroll region moves the adjacent line to the top of the display window Clicking button 3 moves the top line of the display window down to the pointer position Clicking button 2 moves the display to a position in the saved text that corresponds to the pointer s position in the scrollbar Unlike the VT102 window the Tektronix window does not allow the copying of text It does allow Tektronix GIN mode and in this mode the cursor will change from an arrow to a cross Pressing any key will send that key and the current coordinates of the cross cursor Pressing button one two or three will return the letters 1 m and r respectively If the Shift key is pressed when a pointer button is pressed the corresponding uppercase letter is sent To distinguish a pointer button from a key the high bit of the
169. another attempt to bind for the same domain Specify either a name or an Internet Protocol IP address in the Server parameter If you specify a name the ypset command attempts to resolve the name to an IP address through the use of the NIS service This works only if your machine has a current valid binding for the domain in question In most cases you should specify the server as an IP address In cases where several hosts on the local network are supplying NIS services the ypbind daemon can rebind to another host For instance if a server is down or is not running the ypserv daemon the ypbind daemon rebinds the client to another server In this way the network information service balances the load among the available NIS servers Use the ypset command if the network e Does not support broadcasting e Supports broadcasting but does not have an NIS server e Accesses a map that exists only on a particular NIS server Flags dDomain Specifies a domain other than the default domain h Host Sets the binding for the ypbind daemon on the specified host instead of on the local host The host can be specified as a name or as an IP address V1 Binds the specified server for the old version 1 NIS protocol ypset Command 337 Commands Reference Volume 6 Example To set a server to bind on a host in a particular domain enter ypset d ibm h venus mars In this example the ypset command causes the host named venus to bi
170. as an even generating button If required by specific application programs button 5 sends the required messages Buttons 6 through 16 if present are disabled Specifies the serial port on an Xstation 130 to which the tablet is attached In SMIT press the F4 key to select an option The valid options are com1 com2 com3 and com4 The default option is com1 Specifies whether or not an Xstation 130 has a fixed disk installed Valid options are y if there is a fixed disk and n if there is no fixed disk The default option is n Specifies whether or not the PIXMAPS are paged to the fixed disk Two options are valid y for yes and n for no The default option is n Specifies the way to access the font files In SMIT press the F4 key to select an option Valid options are e Use network only Use disk only e Try disk first try network second e Try network first try disk second e Try disk first try network second and store to disk e Use most recent copy and update disk The default option is Use network only Specifies the way to access the boot file In SMIT press the F4 key to select a option Valid options are e Use network only Use disk only e Try disk first try network second e Try network first try disk second e Try disk first try network second and store to disk e Use most recent copy and update disk The default option is Use network only Specifies how the hardware pan feature is to be u
171. ase L Specifies the use of a log file instead of logging to syslog Listens for multicast messages and synchronizes to them if available Assumes mulitcast address 224 0 1 1 Specifies the name of the file to record the daemon s process id There is no default Specifies the default delay in seconds if the calibration procedure fails Normally the xntpd daemon automatically compensates for the network delay between the broadcast multicast server and the client Specifies the directory to use for creating statistics files Adds the specified key number to the trusted key list Adds the specifed system variable Adds the specifed system variable listed by default Reference Clock Support For the purposes of configuration the xntpd daemon treats reference clocks in a manner analogous to normal NTP peers as much as possible It refers to reference clocks by address same as a normal peer is though it uses an invalid IP address to distinguish them from normal peers AIX Version 4 2 supports one type of reference clock based on the system clock type 1 Reference clock addresses are of the form 127 127 Type Unit where Type is an integer denoting the clock type and Unit indicates the type specific unit number You configure reference clocks by using a server statement in the configuration file where the HostAddress is the clock address The key version and ttl options are not used for reference clock support Reference clock support prov
172. assword is entered xlsfonts Displays the font list for X xmodmap Modifies keymaps in the X server xpr Formats a window dump file for output to a printer xrdb Performs X server resource database utilities Commands List Performance Tuning 397 xset X Windows xsetroot xterm xwd xwud Commands Reference Volume 6 Sets options for your X Windows environment The root window parameter setting utility for the x command Provides a terminal emulator for the X Window System Dumps the image of an Enhanced X Window Retrieves the dumped image of an Exhanced X Windows window Commands List Macros add_netopt AllPlanes assert auth_destroy BitmapBitOrder BitmapPad BitmapUnit BlackPixel BlackPixelOfScreen CellsOfScreen cint_call cint_control cint_destroy cint_freeres clnt_geterr ConnectionNumber DTOM DefaultColormap DefaultColormapOfScreen DefaultDepth DefaultDepthOfScreen DefaultGC DefaultGCofScreen DefaultRootWindow DefaultScreen DefaultScreenOfDisplay DefaultVisual Default VisualOfScreen DisplayCells Display Height DisplayOfScreen DisplayPlanes DisplayString Display Width DisplayWidthMM Adds a network option structure to the list of network options Returns a plane mask with all bits set Verifies a program assertion Destroys authentication information Returns the ordering of bits in a bit map Returns the scan line pad unit of the server Returns the size of a bitmap unit Retu
173. at this command is used only for an Xstation 130 Name Specifies the name of the Xstation The Name parameter can be up to eight characters long and include the uppercase or lowercase letters a through z the numbers 0 through 9 the dash and the period Name can be a user name such as taylor ora group name with a number appended such as graphs 2 The terminal name must be known to the host system Note Name should not start with a uppercase or lowercase o or x followed by an octal or hexadecimal numeric These characters are interpreted as octal or hexadecimal numbers instead of as a terminal name In the examples x3 and xE4 the 3 and the E4 are hexadecimal numerics TypeName Specifies the name you defined for this network Xstation model subnet combination with the Define an Xstation Network Type option in SMIT or with the x_def_net command Press the F4 key in SMIT to select the network type An example is x_st_mgr ether130 for Ethernet and an Xstation 130 Address Specifies the Local Area Network LAN hardware address of the Xstation This address appears on the LAN Statistics screen when you power on the Xstation Each Xstation has a unique 6 byte hexadecimal hardware address in XXXXXXXXXXXX format that cannot be changed by the user Server Specifies whether or not the host system is a primary boot server A primary boot server responds immediately to a boot protocol broadcast request from an Xstation for other secon
174. ater trap requestors This parameter modifies the assignment algorithm by allowing later requests for normal priority traps to override low priority traps nomodify Ignore all NTP mode 6 and 7 packets which attempt to modify the state of the server run time reconfiguration Permits queries which return information xntpdc Command 253 Commands Reference Volume 6 nopeer Provide stateless time service to polling hosts but not to allocate peer memory resources to these hosts noquery SIgnore all NTP mode 6 and 7 packets information queries and configuration requests from the source Does not affect time service noserve Ignore NTP packets whose mode is not 6 or 7 This denies time service but permits queries notrap Decline to provide mode 6 control message trap service to matching hosts The trap service is a subsystem of the mode 6 control message protocol intended for use by remote event logging programs notrust STreat these hosts normally in other respects but never use them as synchronization sources ntpport Match the restriction entry only if the source port in the packet is the standard NTP UDP port 123 setprecisionPrecision Sets the precision which the server advertises Precision should be a negative integer in the range 4 through 20 traps Displays the traps set in the server trustkeyKeyid Adds one or more keys to the trusted key list When you enable authentication authenticates peers with tru
175. ates the terminfo descriptor files from source to compiled format xstr Extracts strings from C programs to implement shared strings yacc Generates a LR 1 parsing program from input consisting of a context free grammar specification Commands List Assemblers and Compilers Assembler as Assembles a source file FORTRAN asa Prints FORTRAN files fpr Prints FORTRAN files fsplit Splits FORTRAN source code into separate routine files struct Translates a FORTRAN program into a RATFOR program Commands List Object Data Manager ODM odmadd Adds objects to created object classes odmchange Changes the contents of a selected object in the specified object class odmcreate Programming Tools 404 Commands Reference Volume 6 Produces the c source and h include files necessary for ODM application development and creates empty object classes odmdelete Deletes selected objects from specified object classes odmdrop Removes an object class odmget Retrieves objects from the specified object classes into an odmadd format odmshow Displays an object class definition on the screen restbase Reads the base customized information from the boot image and restores it into the Device Configuration database used during system boot phase 1 savebase Saves information about base customized devices in the Device Configuration database onto the boot device Programming Tools 405 Vos remarques sur ce document
176. ault option is Base FLASH Specifies the way to access the Xserver file list In SMIT press the F4 key to select a option Valid options are e Base FLASH e Network e NFS e Optional FLASH The default option is Base FLASH Specifies how the hardware pan feature is to be used Valid options are none square horizontal and vertical The default value is none With the hardware pan feature enabled the physical screen shows a portion of a larger base window whose size is dependent on the amount of video memory VRAM installed on the Xstation When the cursor is moved past the edge of the display the screen will automatically scroll in that direction provided it has not already reached the edge of the base window Note The window size for panning is always a power of 2 With 2MB VRAM expanding the window dimensions to a power of 2 may not leave enough memory for the shape selected Specifies the mode used by X Display Manager Control Protocol XDMCP XDMCP uses the xdm program to facilitate the connection of an Xstation to a remote host XDMCP allows the user to turn an Xstation off and on again and maintain an established connection to the remote host Valid options are broadcast x_add_trm_150 Command 137 Commands Reference Volume 6 Sends a message to the network and waits for an xdmcp host to respond direct Directs a request to an xdmcp manager known to the Xstation indirect Sends an indirect request to an xdmcp man
177. away so that they do not prevent other programs from starting up However the last long lived program started usually a window manager or terminal emulator should be left in the foreground so that the script does not exit which indicates that the user is done and that xinit should exit An alternate client and or server may be specified on the command line The desired client program and its arguments should be given as the first command line arguments to xinit To specify a particular server command line add a double dash to the xinit command line after any client and arguments followed by the desired server command Both the client program name and the server program name must begin with a slash or a period Otherwise they are treated as an arguments to be added to their respective startup lines This makes it possible to add arguments for example foreground and background colors without having to retype the whole command line If a clear server name is not given and the first argument following the double dash is a colon followed by a number xinit uses that number as the display number instead of zero All remaining arguments are added to the server command line The following environment variables are used with the xinit command DISPLAY This variable gets set to the name of the display to which clients should connect XINITRC This variable specifies an init file containing shell commands to start u
178. ax available switches toggles and version information Note For MH the name of this flag must be fully spelled out whatnow Command 76 Commands Reference Volume 6 File User selected draft file Message Specifies the message Use the following references to specify messages Number Number of the message cur or period Current message This is the default first First message in a folder last Last message in a folder next Message following the current message prev Message preceding the current message nodraftfolder Places the draft in the UserMhDirectory draft file noedit Suppresses the initial edit prompt String Uses the specified string as the prompt The default string is What now whatnow Subcommands The whatnow subcommands enable you to edit the message direct the disposition of the message or end the processing of the whatnow command display Flags Displays the message being redistributed or replied to You can specify any Flags parameter that is valid for the listing program Use the lproc entry in the HOME mh_profile file to set a default listing program If you specify flags that are invalid for the listing program the whatnow command does not pass the path name of the draft edit CommandString Specifies with the CommandString parameter an editor for the message You can specify the editor and any valid flags to that editor If you do not specify an editor the whatnow comma
179. ay be displayed by window managers if the user so chooses The default title is the command line specified after the e option if any otherwise the application name rv Indicates that reverse video should be simulated by swapping the foreground and background colors geometryGeometry Specifies the preferred size and position of the VT102 window see the X command displayDisplay Specifies the X server to contact see the X command xrmResourceString Specifies a resource string to be used This is especially useful for setting resources that do not have separate command line options iconic Indicates that the xterm command should ask the window manager to start it as an xterm Command 289 Commands Reference Volume 6 icon rather than as the normal window Resources The program understands all of the core X Toolkit resource names and classes as well as iconGeometry class IconGeometry Specifies the preferred size and position of the application when iconified It is not necessarily obeyed by all window managers termName class TermName Specifies the terminal type name to be set in the TERM environment variable title class Title Specifies a string that may be used by the window manager when displaying this application ttyModes class TtyModes Specifies a string containing terminal setting keywords and the characters to which they may be bound Allowable keywords include intr quit erase kill eof eol
180. bar class SmeBSB jumpscroll class SmeBSB reversevideo class SmeBSB autowrap class SmeBSB reversewrap class SmeBSB autolinefeed class SmeBSB appcursor class SmeBSB appkeypad class SmeBSB scrollkey class SmeBSB scrollttyoutput class SmeBSB allow132 class SmeBSB cursesemul class SmeBSB visualbell class SmeBSB marginbell class SmeBSB altscreen class SmeBSB linel class SmeLine softreset class SmeBSB hardreset class SmeBSB clearsavedlines class SmeBSB line2 class SmeLine tekshow class SmeBSB tekmode class SmeBSB vthide class SmeBSB Invokes the set scrollbar toggle action Invokes the set jumpscroll toggle action Invokes the set reverse video toggle action Invokes the set autowrap toggle action Invokes the set reversewrap toggle action Invokes the set autolinefeed toggle action Invokes the set appcursor toggle action Invokes the set appkeypad toggle action Invokes the set scroll on key toggle action Invokes the set scroll on tty output toggle action Invokes the set allow132 toggle action Invokes the set cursesemul toggle action Invokes the set visualbell toggle action Invokes the set marginbell toggle action This entry is currently disabled This is a separator Invokes the soft reset action Invokes the hard reset action Invokes the clear saved lines action This is a separator Invokes the set visibility tek toggle action Invokes the s
181. be modified how they handle input and output who can run them and provides a master index for all six volumes For a quick reference list of commands arranged in functional groups see Volume 6 Who Should Use This Book This book is intended for users of AIX commands How to Use This Book A command is a request to perform an operation or run a program You use commands to tell the AIX Operating System what task you want it to perform When commands are entered they are deciphered by a command interpreter also known as a shell and that task is processed Some commands can be entered simply by typing one word It is also possible to combine commands so that the output from one command becomes the input for another command This is known as pipelining Flags further define the actions of commands A flag is a modifier used with the command name on the command line usually preceded by a dash Commands can also be grouped together and stored in a file These are known as shell procedures or shell scripts Instead of executing the commands individually you execute the file that contains the commands Some commands can be constructed using Web based System Manager applications or the System Management Interface Tool SMIT Highlighting The following highlighting conventions are used in this book Bold Identifies commands subroutines keywords files structures directories and other items whose names are predefined by the system
182. bscommand J MT vil vedit 1 R tTag v wNumber yNumber r File 1 c Subcommand File Description The vi command starts a full screen editor based on the underlying ex editor Therefore ex subcommands can be used within the vi editor The vedit command starts a version of the vi editor intended for beginners In the vedit editor the report option is set to 1 the showmode option is set and the novice option is set making it a line editor You start the vi editor by specifying the name of the file or files to be edited If you supply more than one File parameter on the command line the vi editor edits each file in the specified order The vi editor on an existing file displays the name of the file the number of lines and the number of characters at the bottom of the screen In case of multibyte locales the number of characters need to be interpreted as the number of bytes Since the vi editor is a full screen editor you can edit text on a screen by screen basis The vi editor makes a copy of the file you are editing in an edit buffer and the contents of the file are not changed until you save the changes The position of the cursor on the display screen indicates its position within the file and the subcommands affect the file at the cursor position vi Editor Limitations The following list provides the maximum limits of the vi editor These counts assume single byte chara
183. cal errors Changes are periodically made to the information herein these changes will be incorporated in new editions of the publication It is possible that this publication may contain references to or information about products machines and programs programming or services that are not announced in your country Such references or information must not be construed to mean that such products programming or services will be offered in your country Any reference to a licensed program in this publication is not intended to state or imply that you can use only that licensed program You can use any functionally equivalent program instead The information provided regarding publications by other vendors does not constitute an expressed or implied recommendation or endorsement of any particular product service company or technology but is intended simply as an information guide that will give a better understanding of the options available to you The fact that a publication or company does not appear in this book does not imply that it is inferior to those listed The providers of this book take no responsibility whatsoever with regard to the selection performance or use of the publications listed herein NO WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND ARE MADE WITH RESPECT TO THE CONTENTS COMPLETENESS OR ACCURACY OF THE PUBLICATIONS LISTED HEREIN ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
184. ce limits unalias Removes alias definitions xargs Constructs argument lists and runs commands yes Outputs an affirmative response repetitively Commands List System Accounting and Statistics accton Performs process accounting procedures crash Displays system images for examining a dump date Displays or sets the date or time Commands List Performance Tuning 393 diag dp du dump errclear errdead errdemon errinstall errlogger errmsg errpt errstop errupdate getconf id iostat ipcs ipreport iptrace last locale logger pac pstat sa sal sa2 sade sar snap stathcon Commands Reference Volume 6 Performs hardware problem determination Parses and reformats dates Summarizes disk usage Dumps selected parts of an object file Deletes entries from the error log Extracts error records from a system dump Starts the error logging daemon and writes entries to the error log Installs messages in the error logging message sets Logs an operator message Adds a message to the error logging message catalog Processes a report of logged errors Terminates the error logging daemon Updates the Error Record Template Repository Writes system configuration variable values to standard output Displays the system identifications of a specified user Reports Central Processing Unit CPU statistics and input output statistics for tty disks and CD ROMs Reports interprocess communication facil
185. cede the operating system li command with an li and the directory list appears on your workstation Typing the li command without the preceding is interpreted by the system as text to be sent to the target user When you write to a user who is logged in at more than one workstation or multi using more than one process the write command uses the first login instance found in the etc utmp file as the message delivery point usually the login or console shell and you get the message UserID is logged on more than one place You are connected to Workstation Other locations are Workstation When this message is received if you wish to send the message to a location other than the initial login location the target user can be contacted at a different location by specifying the Line of the location tty00 for example Permission to write to another user is granted or denied by the individual user with the mesg command Some commands deny message permission while they are running to prevent interference with their output A user with root user authority can write to any workstation regardless of the workstation s message permission You can use the write command to converse with users on other hosts You can identify a user on a remote host by using the nHostName flag or the User Host parameter In order to write to a user on a remote host the writesrv daemon must be running on both the current host and the remote host The write
186. cess to this command Example To change the characteristics of Xstation taylor for the current host so the new hardware address is 10005ac9999 but the other characteristics remain unchanged from those defined with the x_add_trm_150 command enter x_chg_trm_150 150 taylor x_st_mgr ether 10005ac9999 y 00 mouse Tl n n Base FLASH Base FLASH none off none English United States IBM 850 English United States keyboard Roml4 Upper left none 20 All parameters must be entered Files fusr Ipp x_st_mgr bin x_chg_trm_150 Contains the x_chg_trm_150 command etc x_st_mgr ibm xs150 cfg lt IPADDRESS gt Contains the Xstation configuration file etc x_st_mgr x_st_mgrd tmty Contains the terminal type file x_chg_trm_150 Command 160 Commands Reference Volume 6 Related Information The aixterm command bootpd daemon login command pclient command x_add_nfs_fpe command x_add_trm_120 command x_add_trm_130 command x_add_trm_140 command x_add_trm_150 command x_add_trm_160 command x_add_xst_fpe command x_chg_net command x_chg_trm_120 command x_chg_trm_130 command x_chg_trm_140 command x_chg_trm_160 command x_def_net command x_Is_net command x_Is_net_fp command x_ls_trm command x_rm_fpe command x_rm_net command x_rm_trm command x_chg_trm_150 Command 161 Commands Reference Volume 6 x_chg_trm 160 Command Purpose Changes the characteristics of an Xstation 160 Syntax en
187. ch any single character If no pattern is given is assumed Note The and characters must be placed within quotation marks to prevent them from being expanded by the shell You can use flags to specify servers number and width of columns to print size of font listings whether the output should be sorted and whether to use OpenFont instead of ListFonts Flags Note Using the l lowercase L flag of the xlsfonts command can tie up your server for a long time This is typical of single threaded non preemptable servers and not a program error 1 Indicates that listings should use a single column This flag is the same as the n flag C Indicates that listings should use multiple columns This flag is the same as the n0 flag displayHost Display Identifies the X Server to contact by specifying the host name and display number fnPattern Specifies the fontname Pattern that xIsfonts will list I 1 1 lowercase L Indicates that medium long and very long listings respectively should be generated for each font m Indicates that long listings should also print the minimum and maximum bounds of each font xlsfonts Command 227 Commands Reference Volume 6 nColumns Specifies the number of columns to use to display the output By default the xlsfonts command tries to fit as many columns of font names into the number of characters specified by the w Width flag 0 Instructs the xlsfonts command t
188. change frequently such as several times a day should be checked hourly for updates The services byname map for example may not change for months at a time while the hosts byname map may change several times a day To perform periodic updates automatically use a crontab entry To update several maps at once group commands together in a shell script Examples of a shell script can be found in the usr etc yp directory in the following files ypxfr_lperday ypxfr_2perday ypxfr_1perhour You can use the System Management Interface Tool SMIT to run this command To use SMIT enter ypxfr Command 343 Commands Reference Volume 6 smit ypxfr Flags C TID Program IPAddress Port Tells the ypxfr command where to find the yppush command The ypserv daemon invokes the ypxfr command to call back a yppush command to the host Use the parameters to indicate the following TID Specifies the transaction ID of the yppush command Program Specifies the program number associated with the yppush command IPAddress Specifies the Internet Protocol address of the port where the yppush command resides Port Specifies the port that the yppush command is listening on Note This option is only for use by the ypserv daemon c Prevents sending of a request to CLearCurrentMap to the local ypserv daemon Use this flag if the ypserv daemon is not running locally at the time you are running the ypxfr command Otherwise the ypxfr command displays an e
189. character is set but this is bit is normally stripped unless the terminal mode is RAW see the tty command for details Menus The xterm command has four menus named mainMenu vtMenu fontMenu and tekMenu Each menu pops up under the correct combinations of key and button presses Most menus are divided into two section separated by a horizontal line The top portion contains various modes that can be altered A check mark appears next to a mode that is currently active Selecting one of these modes toggles its state The bottom portion of the menu lists command entries selecting one of these performs the indicated function The xterm menu pops up when the control key and pointer button one are pressed in a window The mainMenu contains items that apply to both the VT102 and Tektronix windows The Secure Keyboard mode is used when typing in passwords or other sensitive data in an unsecure environment Notable entries in the command section of the menu are Continue Suspend Interrupt Hangup Terminate and Kill which send the SIGCONT SIGTSTP SIGINT SIGHUP SIGTERM and SIGKILL signals respectively to the process group of the process running under xterm usually the shell The Continue function is especially useful if the user has accidentally pressed Ctrl Z suspending the process The vtMenu sets various modes in the VT102 emulation and is popped up when the control key and pointer button two are pressed in the VT102 window In the c
190. ckup file edit is a prerequisite for backup String Specifies the pathname of the C preprocessor program to use Although the xrdb command was designed to use CPP any program that acts as a filter and accepts the D I and U flags can be used Passes through to the preprocessor and defines symbols to use with conditionals such as ifdef display Display Specifies the X Server to use It also specifies the screen to use for the screen option and edit FileName global help IDirectory load merge n nocpp override query quiet remove retain screen screens xrdb Command it specifies the screen from which preprocessor symbols are derived for the global option Indicates that the contents of the specified properties should be edited into the given file replacing any values listed there This allows you to put changes you made to your defaults back into your resource file preserving any comments or preprocessor lines Indicates that the operation should only be performed on the screen independent RESOURCE_MANAGER property This option is specific to X11R5 Prints a brief description of the allowed flags uppercase i Passes through to the preprocessor and specifies a directory to search for files referenced with include Indicates that the input is loaded as the new value of the specified properties replacing the old contents This is the default action I
191. cl usr lib nls msg sv_SE sendmail87 cat bos msg sv_SE net tcp cl usr lib nls msg ZH_CN sendmail87 cat bos msg ZH_CN net tcp cl usr lib nls msg zh_CN sendmail87 cat bos msg zh_CN net tcp cl usr lib nls msg Zh_TW sendmail87 cat bos msg Zh_TW net tcp cl usr lib nls msg zh_TW sendmail87 cat bos msg zh_TW net tcp cl etc sendmail cf bos net tcp client 4 2 1 usr lib sendmail gt usr sbin sendamil bos net tcp client 4 2 1 usr sbin mailq gt usr sbin sendamil bos net tcp client 4 2 1 usr sbin newaliases gt usr sbin sendmail bos net tcp client 4 usr sbin sendmail 3 To find where the usr sbin which_fileset command is shipped enter which fileset usr bin which_fileset The screen displays usr sbin which_fileset bos rte install 4 2 1 0 which_fileset Command bos net tcp client 4 2 1 ee NN PE ER te Ge oe ae Al PE TE PE KB BRB BRK KBR KB BB D BAB DB DB WA NNNNNNNNNNNNNDN DN N SO DS CE OO gt RD DD A E E CO ee Sa OS OO Ss a sers ee a 85 Commands Reference Volume 6 who Command Purpose Identifies the users currently logged in Syntax eicutmp 7 who Ll Fie m H who a b d i l m p q r s t u w A H T File who am ill Description The who command displays information about all users currently on the local system The following information is displayed login name tty date and time of login Entering who am iorwho am I displays your login na
192. command check the usr lib X11 xdm xdm errors file to see if the xdm command has any clues to the trouble The next configuration entry usr lib X11 xdm Xresources is loaded onto the display as a resource database using the xrdb command As the authentication widget reads this database before starting up it usually contains parameters for that widget Flags All of these options except config specify values that can also be specified in the configuration file as resources configConfigurationFile Names the configuration file which specifies resources to control the behavior of the xdm command The usr lib X11 xdm xdm config file is the default debug DebugLevel Specifies the numeric value for the DisplayManager debugLevel resource A nonzero value causes xdm to print debugging statements to the terminal and disables the DisplayManager daemonMode resource forcing xdm to run synchronously These error messages may be unclear To interpret them check the X11R4 source code for the xdm command nodaemon Specifies False as the value for the DisplayManager daemonMode resource This suppresses the normal daemon behavior in which the xdm command closes all file descriptors disassociates itself from the controlling terminal and puts itself in the background when it first starts up error ErrorLogFile Specifies the value for the DisplayManager errorLogFile resource This file contains errors from xdm as well as anything written to
193. cted to a dummy ASCII file 2 To convert an ASCII dummy file to a binary file in wtmp format called var adm wtmp enter the fwtmp command with the ic switch usr sbin acct fwtmp ic lt dummy file gt var adm wtmp The dummy ASCII file is redirected to a binary wtmp file Files usr sbin acct wtmpfix Contains the wtmpfix command var adm wtmp Contains records of date changes that include an old date and a new date usr include utmp h Contains history records that include a reason date and time Related Information The acctcon1 or acctcon2 command acctmerg command acctwtmp command fwtmp command runacct command Setting Up an Accounting System in AIX Version 4 3 System Management Guide Operating System and Devices describes the steps you must take to establish an accounting system See the Accounting Overview in AIX Version 4 3 System Management Concepts Operating System and Devices for a list of accounting commands that can be run automatically or entered from the keyboard and about the preparation of daily and monthly reports and the accounting files wtmpfix Command 110 Commands Reference Volume 6 wump Command Purpose Starts the hunt the wumpus game Syntax ump Command _ wimp wump Description A wumpus is a creature living in a cave with many rooms interconnected by tunnels You move among the rooms trying to shoot the wumpus with an arrow and trying to avoid being eaten by the wumpus
194. cters e LINE_MAX characters per line e 256 characters per global command list e 128 characters in the previously inserted and deleted text e 128 characters in a shell escape command e 128 characters in a string valued option e 30 characters in a tag name e 128 map macros with 2048 characters total 1 048 560 lines of LINE_MAX characters per line silently enforced Note Running the vi editor on a file larger than 64MB may cause the following error message to display 0602 103 file too large to place in tmp vi or vedit Command 32 Commands Reference Volume 6 vi Editing Modes The vi editor operates in the following modes command mode When you start the vi editor it is in command mode You can enter any subcommand except those designated for use only in the text input mode The vi editor returns to command mode when subcommands and other modes end Press the Esc key to cancel a subcommand text input mode You use the vi editor in this mode to add text Enter text input mode with any of the following subcommands the a subcommand A subcommand i subcommand I subcommand o subcommand O subcommand exsubcommands where the x represents the scope of the subcommand C subcommand s subcommand S subcommand and R subcommand After entering one of these subcommands you can enter text into the editing buffer To return to command mode press the Esc key for normal exit or press Interrupt the Ctrl C key sequence to end abnor
195. curring in the set xterm Command 297 The default table is static int charClass 128 NUL 32 BS CA Wn ds M I DB OOWAOOAN UE od od Oo A A A 0o x 96 h 48 P 48 x 48 SOH 1 HT 32 DCI 1 fl w NS OK on ooroo DAK AOD IH D O0 Lo CO H H Wer Commands Reference Volume 6 STX ETX EOT ENQ ACK BEL 1 1 1 1 1 1 NL VT NP CR SO SL 1 1 1 1 1 1 DC2 DC3 DC4 NAK SYN ETB 15 ie 1 1 1 1 SUB ESC FS GS RS US 1 1 1 1 1 1 S amp v 34 35 36 37 38 39 4 fi EY 42 43 44 45 46 47 2 3 4 5 6 7 48 48 48 48 48 48 lt gt 2 8 58 59 60 61 62 63 B C D E F GIZ 48 48 48 48 48 48 J K L N Or 48 48 48 48 48 48 R 9 T U V Ww 48 48 48 48 48 48 Z a 48 91 92 93 94 48 b c d e f g 48 48 48 48 48 48 j k 1 m n o 48 48 48 48 48 48 r s t u v w 48 48 48 48 48 48 Z DEL 48 123 124 125 126 1 For example the string 33 48 37 48 45 47 48 64 48 indicates that the exclamation mark percent sign dash period slash and ampersand characters should be treated the same way as characters and numbers This is useful for c
196. cursor at the beginning of the next sentence or the next s expression if you are in LISP mode Places the cursor at the beginning of the previous paragraph or at the next list if you are in LISP mode Places the cursor at the beginning of the next paragraph at the next section if you are in C mode or at the next list if you are in LISP mode Places the cursor at the next section or function if you are in LISP mode Places the cursor at the previous section or function if you are in LISP mode Moving by Redrawing the Screen Enter the following subcommands in command mode You can cancel an incomplete subcommand by pressing the Esc key If you need information about the format of vi subcommands see vi General Subcommand Syntax Z Redraws the screen with the current line at the top of the screen Z Redraws the screen with the current line at the bottom of the screen Z Redraws the screen with the current line at the center of the screen Pattern z Redraws the screen with the line containing the character string specified by the Pattern parameter at the bottom Paging and Scrolling Enter the following subcommands in command mode You can cancel an incomplete subcommand by pressing the Esc key If you need information about the format of vi subcommands see vi General Subcommand Syntax Ctrl U Scrolls up one half screen Ctrl D Scrolls down one half screen Ctri F Scrolls forward one screen Ctri B Scrolls back
197. d keyboard alt Sets the position of the login window on the display Press the F4 key in SMIT to select an option Valid entries are Upper left Upper right Lower left and Lower right LPFkeyport Specifies the serial port on an Xstation to which the LPF keys are attached Press the F4 key to x_add_trm_120 Command 126 Commands Reference Volume 6 select an option The valid options are none and com1 Security Access Control Only the root user should have execute x access to this command Example To add Xstation taylor to the current host as a primary server enter a command such as the following x_add_trm_120 120 taylor x_st_mgr ether 10005ac38e9 y 00 mouse none off none English United States IBM 850 English United States keyboard Romi4 Upper left none Xstation taylor is added to the current host as defined by the parameters Model 120 a network type of x_st_mgr ether a hardware address of 10005ac38e9 primary server status no delay time input from a mouse no hardware pan feature xdmcp mode off no host name United States English LANG environment variable United States English keyboard layout standard keyboard file login window font Rom14 and the login window in the upper left corner of the screen and no LPF keys Files fusr Ipp x_st_mgr bin x_add_trm_120 Contains the x_add_trm_120 command etc x_st_mgr x_st_mgrd cf Contains the Xstation Manager configuration file etc x_st_mgr
198. d Information The proxymngr command xfindproxy Command 210 Commands Reference Volume 6 xfs Command Purpose Supplies fonts to X Window System display servers Syntax ds Command xfs config ConfigurationFile ls ListenSocket port Number Description xfs is the AIXwindows font server It supplies fonts to AIXwindows display servers The xfs server responds to the following signals SIGTERM Causes the font server to exit cleanly SIGUSR1 Causes the server to re read its configuration file SIGUSR2 Causes the server to flush any cached data it may have SIGHUP Causes the server to reset closing all active connections and re reading the configuration file The server is usually run by a system administrator and started by way of boot files such as etc rc tcpip Users may also wish to start private font servers for specific sets of fonts The configuration language is a list of keyword and value pairs Each keyword is followed by an equal sign and the desired value The following list shows recognized keywords and the types and descriptions of valid values A comment character when located in the first column catalogue List of string Ordered list of font path element names The current implementation only supports a single catalogue all containing all of the specified fonts alternate servers List of string List of alternate servers for this font server client limit Cardinal Number of
199. d file usually named keyboard alt Font Sets the font used in the login window Press the F4 key in SMIT to select an option Location Sets the position of the login window on the display Press the F4 key in SMIT to select an option Valid entries are Upper left Lower left Upperright and Lower right LPFkeyport Specifies the serial port on an Xstation to which the LPF keys are attached Press the F4 key to select an option The valid options are none T1 T2 S1 or S2 KeyRepeatRate Sets the rate in characters per second of automatically transmitted duplicate characters A prolonged stay on any character key will activate the typematic operation and continue to transmit duplicate characters until the key is released The arrow keys will move at twice the speed of character keys up to 30 characters per second The default rate is 28 Security Access Control Only the root user should have execute x access to this command Example To add Xstation taylor to the current host as a primary server enter a command such as the following x_add_trm_160 160 taylor x_st_mgr ether 10005ac38e9 y 00 mouse S1 n n Base FLASH Base FLASH none off none English United States IBM 850 English United States keyboard Roml4 Upper left none 20 Xstation taylor is added to the current host as defined by the parameters Model 160 a network type of ethernet a hardware address of 10005ac38e9 primary server status no d
200. d followed by a white space period or comma ab city Austin Texas 78759 For example if while inputting text you type the following My current residence is city Pressing the Tab key expands the word city to read My current residence is Austin Texas 78759 The abbreviation is not expanded within a word For example if you type My current residence iscity the word iscity is not expanded If the map subcommand is used to map abbreviations for insert mode then all occurrences of the abbreviations are expanded regardless of where it occurs If you used the map subcommand for the preceding example map city Austin Texas 78759 then whenever you type the word city regardless of what precedes or follows the word will be expanded to Austin Texas 78759 Therefore the word iscity becomes isAustin Texas 78759 Note Be careful when choosing the keys that are used for the ab subcommand Once keys are defined they can no longer be input as text without first issuing the unab subcommand vi or vedit Command 40 Commands Reference Volume 6 Setting Abbreviations The set command has behavior similar to the map command except that the set command substitutes the string for the abbreviation only when the abbreviation is a separate word You can use the set command of the vi editor to e List existing abbreviations e Remove an abbreviation e Set define an abbreviation Note Start the vi editor with an empty ed
201. d is entered as in c the vi editor places the cursor on the first line of the file The c flag is incompatible with the flag Do not specify both flags at the same time Enters the vi editor in LISP mode In this mode the vi editor creates indents appropriate for LISP code and the and subcommands are modified to act appropriately for LISP Recovers a file after a vi editor or system malfunction If you do not specify the File variable the vi editor displays a list of all saved files Sets the readonly option to protect the file against overwriting Edits the file containing the Tag variable and positions the vi editor at its definition To use this flag you must first create a database of function names and their locations using the ctags command Enters the vi editor in the verbose mode Sets the default window size to the value specified by the Number variable This flag is useful when you use the vi editor over a low speed line Overrides the maximum line setting of 1 048 560 with any value greater than 1024 You vi or vedit Command 41 Commands Reference Volume 6 should request twice the number of lines that you require because the vi editor uses the extra lines for buffer manipulation Subcommand Carries out the ex editor subcommand before editing begins If you do not specify the Subcommand variable the cursor is placed on the first line of the file This flag is incompatible with the c f
202. d of the smit script file in a format that can easily be used to create executable shell scripts Example To start Device Manager enter xdevicem To see a list tasks you can perform for an object or area press the right mouse button to display its pop up menu Read the text in the Information Area for help on the objects and areas Files smit log Specifies detailed information on your session with time stamps smit script Specifies the task commands run during your session with time stamps xdevicem Command 194 Commands Reference Volume 6 xdm Command Purpose Manages a collection of X Displays with support for XDMCP Syntax xdm Command som config Coelgoratent de debug Vebugleve nodaen on error Errovlogf de resources Ressources server ServevEatry edpPort PortNumber session SossonFrogram arm RescurceSpesWeator xdm config ConfigurationFile debug DebugLevel nodaemon error ErrorLogFile resources ResourceFile server ServerEntry udpPort PortNumber session SessionProgram xrm ResourceSpecification Description The xdm X Display Manager command manages a collection of X displays which may be on the local host or remote servers The design of the xdm command was guided by the needs of X terminals as well as the X Consortium standard XDMCP the X Display Manager Control Protocol The xdm command provides services similar to those provided by the init
203. d starts the Network Installation Management NIM graphical user interface GUI The NIM GUI enables you to centrally manage the installation and maintenance of the AIX Base Operating System BOS and optionally software on machines within a networked environment It also helps you to manage the initialization of diskless and dataless machines within the NIM environment You can launch other windows from the initial NIM application window that allows you to define and manipulate machines resources and networks The NIM GUI also allows you to define custom tasks to represent operations that are performed frequently You can perform the operations by dragging and dropping the custom tasks onto the targets This eliminates providing the same input each time a common task is performed because the resources and options for the operation were specified when the custom task was created In addition machine and resource states are reflected in icons and status messages provided in the application information area that help provide a better visual view of the NIM environment This reduces the need to use the Isnim command for status checking For example the NIM GUI provides progress indication for each machine during BOS installs by placing the percentage complete for the BOS installation below the target icon Also installation status messages for each client are provided in the information area The first time the NIM graphical user interface is started
204. d to the user s mailbox and exits Pressing End Of File Ctrl D has the same effect n delete or d delete or Enter Deletes the current message and displays the next message Command Runs the specified workstation command s Filename Saves the message in the named File parameter instead of in the default mail file mbox w Filename Saves the message without its header in the specified File parameter instead of in the default mail file mbox help Displays a subcommand summary Examples 1 To receive secret mail enter xget You are prompted for the password established with the enroll command After entering your password the xget command prompt and a listing of any secret mail 1s displayed xget Command 214 Commands Reference Volume 6 2 To display your secret mail at the xget prompt press the Enter key After the most recent message is displayed a question mark indicates the xget command is waiting for one of the xget subcommands Enter help or a question mark to list the subcommands available 3 To save a message or a file to the default mail file enter xget Press the Enter key after the question mark prompt until the desired file is displayed When the appropriate file is displayed enter S In this example the file is saved in the default mail file mbox 4 To save a message or a file to a specific file enter xget Press the Enter key after the question mark prompt unt
205. d user Displays group membership Verifies the correctness of a group definition Displays information about previous logins Updates the var adm acct sum loginlog file to show the last date each user logged in Lists the attributes in the security stanza files Reserves a terminal Initiates a user session Displays login name Stops all processes on a port Displays the attributes of groups Displays the maximum number of users that can be logged in concurrently Displays role attributes Displays attributes of user accounts Generates an encryption key Creates a new group Creates a hashed look aside version of the user database Creates new roles Creates a new user account Customizes a new user account Changes your primary group identification Creates active accounting data files Changes a user s password Administers users passwords Verifies the correctness of local authentication information Removes a group Removes a role Removes a user account Invokes the restricted version of the Bourne shell Resets the supplementary group ID for the session Resets the protected state environment of a user Commands List Performance Tuning 392 Commands Reference Volume 6 shell Executes a shell with the user s default credentials and environment su Changes the user ID associated with a session sysck Checks the inventory information during installation and update procedures tcbck Audits the sec
206. dary boot servers a delay time is imposed see Time listed next Two options are valid y if the server is a primary server and n if the server is not a primary server The default option is y x_add_trm_130 Command 128 Time Device PortName Disk Pixmaps FontAccess BootFile PanShape Commands Reference Volume 6 Specifies the number of seconds a secondary boot server must wait before answering a boot protocol broadcast request The valid number for a primary server is 0 as there is no delay time In SMIT press F4 to see the recommended range of values Generally a value less than the minimum value does not distinguish between a primary and secondary server and a secondary server may be selected although the primary server is available A value greater than the maximum value may lead to a time out Specifies the input device Device must be mouse or tablet In SMIT press the F4 button to select the input device The default option is mouse You can attach a 6093 tablet device Model 11 or Model 12 to the Xstation serial port A tablet uses absolute positioning as opposed to the relative positioning of a mouse and cannot change the initial cursor location The threshold and acceleration parameters of the xset command apply only to the mouse X Windows protocol supports five button signals from a mouse or tablet Buttons 1 2 and 3 correspond to the left middle and right buttons respectively Button 4 is used
207. der number ID number of the Network Information Services NIS map currently in use on the server Syntax yepoll Command serishin yppet h Most MapName d Doman usr sbin yppoll hHost dDomain MapName Description The yppoll command uses the ypserv daemon to display the order number of the map you specify in the MapName parameter An order number is a map s ID number and is assigned by the system This number changes whenever a map is updated Use the yppoll command whenever you want to make sure your servers are using the most current version of a particular map The yppoll command can run on systems that have either version 1 or version 2 of the Network Information Services NIS protocol installed Be aware however that each version of the protocol has its own set of diagnostic messages Note When specifying a map name be sure to enter the map s full name The yppoll command does not recognize map nicknames Flags h Host Enables you to specify a server other than the default server To find out which server the command defaults to use the ypwhich command d Domain Enables you to specify a domain other than the default domain To find out which domain the command defaults to use the domainname command Examples 1 To look at a map located on a particular host enter usr sbin yppoll h thor netgroups byuser In this example the yppoll command displays the order number for the netgroups byuser map
208. dicates that a low amount of 116 p Number r r sNumber secIP PermissionCode secLocal PermissionCode secSMT PermissionCode stereo Display X Command Commands Reference Volume 6 memory should be reserved A value of 2 indicates that a high amount of memory should be reserved Not all adapters support pbuffers For those that do not all screen configurations support pbuffers The actual amount of frame buffer memory reserved for pbuffers is device dependent and may be influenced by other factors such as screen resolution or default pixel depth The display parameter is optional but useful when using the multihead option The display parameter is the name of the display as shown in the Isdisp command If no display number or name is supplied the specified pbuffer width is selected for all screens Specifies the time interval in minutes between changes of the X Window System logo position This flag is used with the s screen saver timeout flag to control the blanking of the screen Disables autorepeat The default is autorepeat enabled Turns on autorepeat Specifies the number of minutes to wait before blanking the screen The default is 10 minutes If this value is set to 0 the screen saver is disabled Sets local access control on the internet socket The PermissionCode is 3 octal digits which can set read write and execute bits If no PermissionCode is specified af
209. display of any virus signatures found If a scan terminates early due to an error this flag can be used to help diagnose the problem Causes the virscan command to scan files that match the specified String wildcard file name By default the virscan command only scans executable files This flag is used to force scanning of arbitrary files Displays a brief summary of command line options Displays usage examples Error Codes The virscan command sets the error level upon exit to one of the following 0 No virus signatures were found and no other fatal errors occurred 1 No virus signatures were found but the program terminated with an error before the scan was complete 2 One or more virus signatures were found virscan Command 54 Commands Reference Volume 6 Examples 1 To scan all files in the usr file system enter virscan a usr To scan all files in the usr file system and put the names of any infected files into the file positive vir in the current directory enter virscan a p usr To scan the files listed in the files dat file for viral signatures enter virscan lfiles dat To scan the usr file system using the signatures in both the mysig dat and virsig 1st files enter virscan s usr lib security scan virsig lst smysig dat usr To scan the usr file system for files matching the o wildcard specification enter virscan usr w o 5 To scan an entire system enter virsc
210. do jump scrolling Indicates that the shell that is started in the xterm window is a login shell in other words the first character of the ArgumentVector parameter is a dash indicating to the shell that it should read the user s login or profile file Indicates that the shell that is started should not be a login shell in other words it will be a normal subshell Indicates that the xterm command should ring a margin bell when the user types near the right end of a line This option can be turned on and off from the VT Options menu Indicates that the margin bell should not be rung Specifies the maximum time between multiclick selections Specifies the color to be used for the pointer cursor The default is to use the foreground color Specifies the number of characters from the right end of a line at which the margin bell if enabled will ring The default is 10 Indicates that reverse wraparound should be allowed This allows the cursor to back up from the leftmost column of one line to the rightmost column of the previous line This is very useful for editing long shell command lines and is encouraged This option can be turned on and off from the VT Options menu Indicates that reverse wraparound should not be allowed Indicates that auto wraparound should be allowed This allows the cursor to automatically wrap to the beginning of the next line when it is at the rightmost position of a line and text is output Indicates
211. dow is made shorter lines will be scrolled off the top of the screen and the top saved lines will be dropped Specifies whether reverse video should be simulated The default is False Specifies whether reverse wraparound should be enabled The default is False Specifies the number of lines to save beyond the top of the screen when a scrollbar is turned on The default is 64 Specifies whether the scrollbar should be displayed The default is False Specifies whether output to the terminal should automatically cause the scrollbar to go to the bottom of the scrolling region The default is True Specifies whether pressing a key should automatically cause the scrollbar to go to the bottom of the scrolling region The default is False Specifies the number of lines that the scroll back and scroll forw actions should use as a default The default value is 1 292 Commands Reference Volume 6 signalInhibit class SignalInhibit Specifies whether the entries in the Main Options menu for sending signals to xterm should be disallowed The default is False tekGeometry class Geometry Specifies the preferred size and position of the Tektronix window tekInhibit class TekInhibit Specifies whether the escape sequence to enter Tektronix mode should be ignored The default is False tekSmall class TekSmall Specifies whether the Tektronix mode window should start in its smallest size if no explicit geometry is given This is use
212. dow system xmbind Configures virtual key bindings Enhanced X Windows addX11input Adds an X11 input extension record into the ODM database aixterm Initializes an Enhanced X Windows terminal emulator bdftopcf A font compiler that converts fonts from Bitmap Distribution format to Portable Compiled format deleteX11input Deletes an X11 input extension record from the ODM database listX11input Lists X11 input extension records entered into the ODM database mkfontdir Creates a fonts dir file from a directory of font files resize Sets the TERMCAP environment variable and terminal settings to the current window size rgb Reads lines from standard input and inserts them into a database to associate color names with specific rgb values startx Initializes an X session uil Starts the User Interface Language Compiler for the AIXwindows system X Starts the X Server xauth Edits and displays the authorization information used in connecting to the X server xclock Continuously displays the current time of day xcmsdb Loads queries or removes Screen Color Characterization Data stored in properties on the root window of the screen xdm X Display Manager with support for XDMCP xfs Supplies fonts to X Window System display servers xhost Controls who can have access to Enhanced X Windows on the current host machine xinit Enhanced X Windows xinit X11R5 Initializes the X Window System xlock Locks the local X display until a p
213. e When the process is stopped your shell prompt returns and you can then enter another command ISO 9000 ISO 9000 registered quality systems were used in the development and manufacturing of this product AIX 32 Bit Support for the X Open UNIX95 Specification Beginning with AIX Version 4 2 the operating system is designed to support the X Open UNIX95 Specification for portability of UNIX based operating systems Many new interfaces and some current ones have been added or enhanced to meet this specification Beginning with Version 4 2 AIX is even more open and portable for applications At the same time compatibility with previous AIX releases is preserved This is accomplished by the creation of a new environment variable which can be used to set the system environment on a per system per user or per process basis To determine the proper way to develop a UNIX95 portable application you may need to refer to the X Open UNIX95 Specification which can be obtained on a CD ROM by ordering the printed copy of AIX Version 4 3 Commands Reference order number SBOF 1877 or by ordering Go Solo How to Implement and Go Solo with the Single Unix Specification order number SR28 5705 a book which includes the X Open UNIX95 Specification on a CD ROM About This Book 11 Commands Reference Volume 6 AIX 32 Bit and 64 Bit Support for the UNIX98 Specification Beginning with AIX Version 4 3 the operating system is designed to support
214. e Xstation Valid options are none or the name of an xdmcp host If XDMCP is not used or if broadcast mode is used the value of Host is none The name of an xdmcp host must be specified if Mode is direct or indirect The default option is none Language Sets the language used for system messages the LANG environment variable Press the F4 key in SMIT to select a option Keyboard Sets the map for the keyboard layout Press the F4 key in SMIT to select a option File Sets the name of the keyboard file The default is keyboard Some countries have a second keyboard file usually named keyboard alt Font Sets the font used in the login window Press the F4 key in SMIT to select a option Location Sets the position of the login window on the display Press the F4 key in SMIT to select a option Valid entries are Upper left Lower left Upperright and Lower right LPFkeyport Specifies the serial port on an Xstation to which the LPF keys are attached Press the F4 key to select an option The valid options are none com1 com2 com3 and com4 Security Access Control Only the root user should have execute x access to this command Example To add Xstation t aylor to the current host as a primary server enter a command such as the following x_add_trm_130 130 taylor x_st_mgr ether 10005ac38e9 y 00 mouse coml n n Use network only Use network only none off none English United States IBM 850 English United States
215. e kill commands and others This support also does not extend to specific system controlled files such as etc passwd etc inittab files in etc security system accounting files etc Consequently commands that only utilize these system files such as commands to administer users and system security mkuser su system accounting commands acctcom prdaily and general system controlling commands init penable do not have large file support Other commands do not support large files because they work with files of a specific format defined to have a maximum of less than or equal to 2 gigabytes These include the XCOFF file format defining the format of object files and executable files The file headers that define XCOFF do not have fields defined to support files this large and the system would not be able to load an executable file of this size Commands that utilize these files such as Id as m4 strip and so on do not have large file support The header format of the pack unpack and peat commands does not have enough characters to store a file size over 2 gigabytes Additional file formats also prevent files of their type from being larger than 2 gigabytes These include some archiving utilities restricted in format by industry standards such as the cpio pax and tar you can archive large files with backup commands and the object file archive format restricting the ar command The AIX print spooling subsystem has been enab
216. e 6 x_ add trm_ 140 Command Purpose Adds an Xstation 140 workstation to the host Syntax x_add_trm_140 Command x add trm_140 ha HarowareAddress n Name 4 TypeName gt kf File 4 Language KeyRepeathate Server x_add_trm_140 nName t TypeName ha HardwareAddress s Server w Time a FileAccess x Xserver hp PanShape xdm Mode h Host l Language k Keyboard Kf File fn Font g Location r KeyRepeatRate Description The x_add_trm_140 command adds the Xstation140 workstation to the current host using the Name variable of the n flag The x_add_trm_140 command also stores the configuration in the etc x_st_mgr xs140 cfg IPaddress file the etc x_st_mgr x_st_mgrd tmty file and the etc x_st_mgr x_st_mgrd cf file Flags The following flags are required when using the x_add_trm_140 command ha HardwareAddress Specifies the local area network LAN hardware address of the Xstation This address appears on the LAN Statistics screen when you turn on the Xstation Each Xstation has a unique 6 byte hexadecimal hardware address in XXXXXXXXXXXX format that cannot be changed by the user n Name Specifies the name of the Xstation The Name variable can be up to 8 characters long and include the uppercase or lowercase letters a through z the numbers 0 through 9 the dash and the period The value of the Name variable can be a user name such as taylor ora group name with a number ap
217. e Athena clock widget which understands core resource names and classes To specify these resources you need to know the hierarchy of the widgets that comprise the xclock command In the following example the indented items indicate the hierarchical structure The widget class name is given first followed by the widget instance name XClock xclock Clock clock The following examples demonstrate the possible ways to specify resources for this client xclock clock background XClock background xclock background Note Specifying resources as xclock background which worked with the previous version of xclock will not work with this version xclock Command 187 Flags Xtoolkitoption analog chime digital hd Color help hl Color paddingNumber update Seconds Commands Reference Volume 6 The xclock command accepts all of the standard X Toolkit command line option flags in addition to the specific flags listed See the List of Enhanced X Windows Protocols Toolkit and Extension Functions for detailed information on the available options Sets the analog display mode which is the default mode Draws a conventional 12 hour clock face with ticks for each minute and stroke marks on each hour Specifies the sounding of a chime once on the half hour and twice on the hour Sets the 24 hour digital display mode Displays the date and time in digital form Specifies the color of the hands in analog m
218. e Writes a message to standard error output in the form Message n message where n is number of the input line on which the message appeared err Message Writes an error message to standard error The ve command stops processing and returns an exit value of 1 The error message is in the form vc Command 25 Commands Reference Volume 6 ERROR message ERROR err statement on line n vcl5 Condition Syntax The items and statements allowed are condition OR statement NOR statement OR statement AND statement AND statement OR statement AND statement expression expression amp AND statement expression OR statement value operator value operator value ii or or lt or gt ASCII string numeric string The available condition operators and their meanings are Equal Not equal amp AND amp OR gt Greater than lt Less than Used for logical groupings NOT May only occur immediately after the if and when present inverts the value of the entire condition The gt and lt greater than and less than operate only on unsigned integer values for example 012 gt 12 is false All other operators take strings as modifiers for example 012 12 is true The precedence of the operators from highest to lowest precedence is as follows e gt lt all of equal precedence e amp amp l Parentheses can be used to alter the order of precedence Values mus
219. e backward character Moves the cursor backward move forward character Moves the cursor forward move to beginning Moves the cursor to the beginning of the editable text move to end Moves the cursor to the end of the editable text erase to end of line Erases all text after the cursor erase line Erases the entire text Jinish field If the cursor is in the name field proceeds to the password field if the cursor is in the password field checks the current name password pair If the name password pair is valid xdm starts the session Otherwise the failure message is displayed and the user is prompted again insert char Inserts the character typed set session argument Specifies a single word argument which is passed to the session at startup See the sections Session Program and Typical Usage Startup Program The Xstartup file is typically a shell script Since it is run as the root user be careful about security when it runs It usually contains commands that add entries to etc utmp mount users home directories from file servers display the message of the day or cancel the session if logins are not allowed In addition to the environment variables specified by DisplayManager exportList the following variables are passed DISPLAY Specifies the associated display name HOME Specifies the initial working directory of the user USER Specifies the user name PATH Specifies the value of DisplayManager DISPLAY systemPath SH
220. e command mode To turn on multiple vi editor options enter set Opt ionOptionOption This command turns on the three designated vi editor options and returns you to the command mode To turn off a vi editor option enter set noOption This command automatically returns you to the command mode To change the value of a vi editor option enter set Option Value This command automatically returns you to the command mode You can use the set subcommand of the vi editor to set options for this editing session only or to set options for this editing session and all future editing sessions To set or change vi editor options for this editing session only enter the set subcommand from the command line To set vi options for all editing sessions put the set subcommand in the EXINIT environment variable in the profile file read by the shell on login or put the set subcommand into a exre file The vi editor first looks for the EXINIT environment variable and runs its commands If the EXINIT environment variable does not exist the vi editor then looks for the HOME exrc file and runs its commands Last and regardless of any previous results the vi editor looks for the local exre file and runs its commands Note This process is true except with the tvi command trusted vi In this instance the vi editor looks for and runs only the etc exrec file For information about changing an option by setting the EXINIT environment variable see
221. e description of the add command merge FileName Authorization entries are read from the specified files and are merged into the authorization database superceding any matching existing entries If a file name consists of just a single dash the binary input is read if it has not been read before nlextractFilename DisplayName Authorization entries for each of the specified displays are written to the indicated file The entries are written in a numeric format suitable for non binary transmission such as secure electronic mail The extracted entries can be read back in using the merge and nmerge commands If the file name consists of just a single dash the entries are written to the standard output n list DisplayName Authorization entries for each of the specified displays or all displays if none are named are printed on the standard output in the numeric format used by the nextract command Key data is always displayed in the hexadecimal format given in the description of the add command n merge FileName Authorization entries are read from the specified files and are merged into the authorization database superceding any matching existing entries The numeric format given in the description of the extract command is used If a file name consists of just a single dash the standard input is read if it has not been read before removeDisplayName Authorization entries matching the specified displays are removed fr
222. e in European locales are e Times New Roman in normal italic and bold e Courier in normal and bold e Helvetica in normal and bold e Symbol The xpreview command supports the following font sizes 8 10 14 18 24 30 and 36 The xpreview command does not display files resulting from the troff command constructed for a device xpreview Command 261 Commands Reference Volume 6 other than those described in this document To preview a file on a certain device the xpreview command requires the fonts found in the following directories e usr lib X11 fonts directory for files formatted for font files other than Japanese o usr lib X11 fonts JP for Japanese font files Xstation Support The xpreview command can display the devX100 formatted files on an Xstation The Xstation must be configured to include usr lib X11 fonts i18n in the font path To preview Japanese character files the font path should include usr lib X11 fonts JP Multibyte Support The xpreview command supports multibye locales Also to display Japanese characters Japanese 16 dot fonts part of the Japanese BSL package and 24 and 32 dot fonts part of the AIXwindows font package must be installed To display Korean characters Korean fonts part of the Korean BSL package must be installed Japanese support currently includes the following font sets e In 16 dot RomanKn12 Kanji12 and IBM_JPN12 e In 24 dot RomanKn17 Kanji17 and IBM_JPN17 e In 3
223. e of each Xstation configured for the current host enter x_ls_net An example of a listing for a host with one Xstation network type follows Type Network Server port Bootfile x_st_mgr ether thernet 9000 boot file4 Files usr lpp x_st_mgr bin x_ls_net Contains the x_Is_net command etc bootptab Contains the boot protocol table Related Information The aixterm command bootpd daemon login command pclient command x_add_nfs_fpe command x_add_trm_120 command x_add_trm_130 command x_add_trm_140 command x_add_trm_150 command x_add_trm_160 command x_add_xst_fpe command x_chg_net command x_chg_trm_120 command x_chg_trm_130 command x_chg_trm_140 command x_chg_trm_150 command x_chg_trm_160 command x_def_net command x_Is_net command x_Is_net_fp command x_Is_trm command x_rm_fpe command x_rm_net command x_ls_net Command 168 Commands Reference Volume 6 x_rm_trm command x Is net Command 169 Commands Reference Volume 6 x_Is_net_fp Command Purpose Lists the font path elements for each network type Syntax x ls net ftp Command g ja set tp x_Is_net_fp Description The x_Is_net_fp command displays for the current host information about each network type configured in the etc bootptab file The network type and font path elements are displayed Security Access Control Only the root user should have execute x access to this command Examples To display the font path elements of eac
224. e the hardware access of Xstation taylor for the current host to 10005ac9999 without changing other characteristics defined with the x_add_trm_140 command enter x_chg_trm_140 n taylor ha 10005ac9999 Only changed variables must be entered Files fusr Ipp x_st_mgr bin x_chg_trm_140 Contains the x_chg_trm_140 command etc x_st_mgr xs140 cfg IPaddress Contains the Xstation configuration file etc x_st_mgr x_st_mgrd tmty Contains the terminal type file etc x_st_mgr x_st_mgrd cf Contains the Xstation Manager configuration file etc bootptab Contains the Boot Protocol table Related Information The aixterm command bootpd daemon login command pclient command x_add_nfs_fpe command x_add_trm_120 command x_add_trm_130 command x_add_trm_140 command x_add_trm_150 command x_add_trm_160 command x_add_xst_fpe command x_chg_net command x_chg_trm_120 command x_chg_trm_130 command x_chg_trm_150 command x_chg_trm_160 command x_def_net command x_Is_net command x_Is_net_fp command x_Is_trm command x_rm_fpe command x_rm_net command x_rm_trm command x_chg_trm_140 Command 157 Commands Reference Volume 6 x_chg_trm 150 Command Purpose Changes the characteristics of an Xstation 150 Syntax eng em 159 Command k ehg tm 159 150 Name TypeName Adorecs Server gt gt lime Device PorName FontAccess Xvewer gt b PanShape Mode West Language Keytoard gt be Fie Font o atio
225. e this value 199 Commands Reference Volume 6 DisplayManager DISPLAY pingTimeout Note AIXwindows sessions may continue to exist after the terminal has been accidentally disabled The xdm command does not ping local displays A workstation session can be ended if the server hangs for NFS service and does not respond to the ping To discover when remote displays disappear the xdm command occasionally pings them using an X connection and XSyne calls This resource specifies the maximum amount of time in minutes to wait for the terminal to respond to the request If the terminal does not respond the session is declared inactive and ended By default it is set to 5 minutes If you frequently use X terminals which can become isolated from the managing host you may wish to increase this value Note AIXwindows sessions may continue to exist after the terminal has been accidentally disabled The xdm command does not ping local displays A workstation session could be ended if the server hangs for NFS service and does not respond to the ping DisplayManager DISPLAY terminateServer Specifies whether the X server should be canceled when a DisplayManager DISPLAY userPath DisplayManager DISPLAY systemPath DisplayManager DISPLAY systemShell DisplayManager DISPLAY failsafeClient xdm Command session ends instead of resetting it This option can be used when the server tends to grow without bound over time in
226. e window manager can use a text representation when the window is iconified This flag is not used because you cannot iconify the background rv Exchanges the foreground and background colors Normally the foreground color is black and the background color is white solidColor Sets the background of the root window to the specified color This flag is only used on color servers Related Information The X command xset command xrdb command xsetroot Command 280 Commands Reference Volume 6 xss Command Purpose Improves the security of unattended workstations Syntax Les Command e CommandStrng tmecet Seconds ispiay DeplayPy dt tp Cow bg Cak Geom etry whe sey xss e CommandsString timeout Seconds display DisplayPtr v fg Color bg Color geometry wxh x y Description The xss command works with the newly added Massachusetts Institute of Technology MIT Screen Saver Extensions in order to implement a user controllable screen saver lock This command is designed to improve the security of unattended workstations The xss command executes a user specified command string when it receives a screen saver timeout message or when the user activates the pushbutton When no user specified command is given the xss command defaults to the xlock command Note The xss command only uses the newly added MIT Screen Saver Extensions The xss command does not work on an older X server
227. ed on the Xstation When the cursor is moved past the edge of the display the screen will automatically scroll in that direction provided it has not already reached the edge of the base window Note The window size for panning is always a power of 2 With minimum x_chg_trm_130 Command 152 Commands Reference Volume 6 VRAM expanding the window dimensions to a power of 2 may not leave enough memory for the shape selected Mode Specifies the mode used by X Display Manager Control Protocol XDMCP XDMCP uses the xdm program to facilitate the connection of an Xstation to a remote host XDMCP allows the user to turn an Xstation off and on again and maintain an established connection to the remote host Valid options are broadcast Sends a message to the network and waits for an xdmcp host to respond direct Directs a request to an xdmcp manager known to the Xstation indirect Sends an indirect request to an xdmcp manager that maintains a list of xdmcp hosts The manager assigns an xdmcp host to respond to the Xstation off No X Display Manager Control Protocol XDMCP The default option is off Host Specifies the name of the xdmcp host used for direct or indirect communication with the Xstation Valid options are none or the name of an xdmcp host If XDMCP is not used or if broadcast mode is used the value of Host is none The name of an xdmcp host must be specified if Mode is direct or indirect The default option is none Language Set
228. eed not be printable cherecers ESC _ P ESC i Appicaiion ram Command APC xterm no functions A is ignored PA need be printable characters ESC Ful Reset RS ESC n Select he G2 Character Sat L52 ESC Select he GI Character Set L33 Esc Invoke the G3 Character Set as GA LSA Has no Misibi fect n xterm esc invoke the G2 Character Set as GA LSA Has no visite effect xterm ESC invoke the Gt Character Set as GR LS R Has no visite effect in xterm XTERM Description Limitation The xterm terminal description in the DEC TI file on AIX Version 4 provides underline mode by using the SGR attribute The SMUL and RMUL attributes are not currently defined in the XTERM terminal description on AIX Version 4 Use the more generic capability named SGR tput sgr x y xterm Command 306 Commands Reference Volume 6 Where x is either a 1 or a 0 to turn standout mode on or off respectively and y is either a 1 or a 0 to turn underline mode on or off respectively See the article terminfo file format for more details on the SGR capability tput sgr 0 1 turn off standout turn on underline tput sgr 0 0 turn off standout turn off underline tout sgr 1 1 turn on standout turn on underline tput sgr 1 0 turn on standout turn off underline Mouse Tracking The VT widget can be set to send the mouse position and other information on button presses These modes are typically used by editors and other full screen application
229. elated Information The chdir subroutine whereis Command 82 Commands Reference Volume 6 which Command Purpose Locates a program file including aliases and paths Syntax which Command which Nama which Name Description The which command takes a list of program names and looks for the files that run when these names are given as commands The which command expands each argument if it is aliased and searches for it along the user s path The aliases and paths are taken from the cshre file in the user s home directory If the cshre file does not exist or if the path is not defined in the eshre file the which command uses the path defined in the user s environment A diagnostic is given if a name is aliased to more than a single word or if an executable file with the argument name is not found in the path In the Korn shell you can use the whence command to produce a more verbose report See Korn Shell Special Commands in AIX Version 4 3 System User s Guide Operating System and Devices for more information on the whence command Examples To find the executable file associated with a command name of lookup which lookup Files HOME cshre Contains the source of aliases and path values Related Information The csh command find command file command ksh command sh command whereis command Shells Overview in AIX Version 4 3 System User s Guide Operating System and Devices describes
230. elay time input from a mouse tablet port is ignored fonts and bootfile from Base FLASH no hardware pan feature xdmcp mode off no host name United States English LANG variable United States English keyboard layout standard keyboard file login window font Rom14 the login window in the upper left corner of the screen no LPF keys and a key repeat rate of 20 characters per second Files fusr Ipp x_st_mgr bin x_add_trm_160 Contains the x_add_trm_160 command etc x_st_mgr ibm xs160 cfg lt IPADDRESS gt Contains the Xstation configuration file etc x_st_mgr x_st_mgrd cf Contains the Xstation Manager configuration file x_add_trm_160 Command 142 Commands Reference Volume 6 etc x_st_mgr x_st_mgrd tmty Contains the terminal type file etc bootptab Contains the Boot Protocol table Related Information The aixterm command bootpd daemon login command pclient command x_add_nfs_fpe command x_add_trm_120 command x_add_trm_130 command x_add_trm_140 command x_add_trm_150 command x_add_xst_fpe command x_chg_net command x_chg_trm_120 command x_chg_trm_130 command x_chg_trm_140 command x_chg_trm_150 command x_chg_trm_160 command x_def_net command x_Is_net command x_Is_net_fp command x_ls_trm command x_rm_fpe command x_rm_net command x_rm_trm command x_add_trm_160 Command 143 Commands Reference Volume 6 x_ add _xst_fpe Command Purpose Adds an Xstation Manager accessed font directory to a font path Syntax
231. eline and multiline options specify the format to display this information The multiline option is the default Displays statistics counters related to memory allocation code Displays traffic counts collected and maintained by the monitor facility Displays a list of peers for which the server is maintaining state along with a summary of that state Summary information includes e address of the remote peer e reference ID 0 0 0 0 for an unknown reference ID e the stratum of the remote peer a stratum of 16 indicates the remote peer is unsynchronized e the polling interval seconds e the reachability register octal and e the current estimated delay offset and dispersion of the peer seconds The character in the left margin indicates the mode this peer entry is in symmetric active symmetric passive remote server polled in client mode AN server is broadcasting to this address remote peer is sending broadcasts x marks the peer the server is currently synchronizing to The contents of the host field may be a host name an IP address a reference clock implementation name with its parameter or REFCLK 250 Commands Reference Volume 6 ImplementationNumber Parameter Only IP addresses display when using hostanames no pstatsPeerAddress Addr2 Addr3 Addr4 Displays per peer statistic counters associated with the specified peers reslist Displays the server s restriction list which may help to
232. elli 0 The default bindings in the Tektronix window are Meta lt KeyPress gt Meta lt KeyPress gt Ctrl lt BtnlDown gt Lock Ctrl lt BtnlDown gt Ctrl lt Btn2Down gt Lock Ctrl lt Btn2Down gt Shift eta lt BtnlDown gt Meta lt BtnlDown gt Shift eta lt Btn2Down gt Meta lt Btn2Down gt hift eta lt Btn3Down gt eta lt Btn3Down gt 2 2 2 un insert seven bit n insert eight bit n popup menu mainMenu n popup menu mainMenu n popup menu tekMenu n popup menu tekMenu n gin press L n gin press l n gin press M n gin press m n gin press R n gin press r The following is an example of how the keymap action is used to add special keys for entering commonly typed works VT100 Translations override lt Key gt F13 keymap dbx VT100 dbxKeymap translations lt Key gt F14 lt Key gt F17 lt Key gt F18 lt Key gt F19 lt Key gt F20 keymap None n string next string 0x0d n string step string 0x0d n string continue string 0x0d n string print insert selection PRIMARY CUT_BUFFERO Environment The xterm command sets the environment variables TERM and TERMCAP properly for the size window you have created It also uses and sets the DISPLAY environment variable to specify which bitmap display terminal to use The WINDOWID environment variable is set to the X window ID number of the xt
233. elpful e Lamb Linda Learning the vi Editor Sebastopol CA O Reilly amp Associates 1990 Order Number SR28 4966 About This Book 12 Commands Reference Volume 6 e Dougherty Dale sed amp awk Sebastopol CA O Reilly amp Associates 1990 Order Number SR28 4968 e Hunt Craig TCP IP Network Administration Sebastopol CA O Reilly amp Associates 1992 Order Number SR23 7422 Ordering Publications You can order publications from your sales representative or from your point of sale To order additional copies of this book use order number SC23 4120 To order additional copies of all six volumes of AIX Version 4 3 Commands Reference use Order Number SBOF 1877 Use AIX and Related Products Documentation Overview for information on related publications and how to obtain them About This Book 13 Commands Reference Volume 6 Alphabetical Listing of Commands Alphabetical Listing of Commands Commands Reference Volume 6 vacation Command Purpose Returns a message to the sender that the mail recipient is on vacation Syntax vacation Command a vacation Uss vacation I User f Number Unit User Description The vacation command returns a message to the sender of a mail message to notify the sender that the recipient is on vacation The intended use is in a HOME forward file that allows messages to come to you while also sending a message back to the send
234. em Management Concepts Operating System and Devices For general information about auditing refer to Auditing Overview in AIX Version 4 3 System Management Concepts Operating System and Devices watch Command 68 Commands Reference Volume 6 wc Command Purpose Counts the number of lines words and bytes or characters in a file Syntax ts STAX is 10 De TEEN wc c m 1 w File we k c 1 w File Description By default the we command counts the number of lines words and bytes in the files specified by the File parameter The command writes the number of newline characters words and bytes to the standard output and keeps a total count for all named files When you use the File parameter the we command displays the file names as well as the requested counts If you do not specify a file name for the File parameter the we command uses standard input The we command is affected by the LANG LC_ALL LC_CTYPE and LC_MESSAGES environment variables Flags Cc Counts bytes unless the k flag is specified If the k flag is specified the we command counts characters k Counts characters Specifying the k flag is equivalent to specifying the klwe flag If you use the k flag with other flags then you must include the c flag Otherwise the k flag is ignored For more information see examples 4 and 5 Note This flag is to be withdrawn in a future release l Cou
235. em node enter who r Information similar to the following is displayed run level 2 Jun 8 04 15 2 0s 5 To display any active process that is currently actively and has been previously generated by init enter who p Information similar to the following is displayed srcmstr i Jun 8 04 15 old 2896 cron Jun 8 04 15 old 4809 uprintfd Jun 8 04 15 old 5158 6 To process the var adm wtmp file with the bdlprtTu flags specified enter who a var adm wtmp Information similar to the following is displayed system boot Jun 19 10 13 run level 2 Jun 19 10 13 who Command 88 Commands Reference Volume 6 Jun 19 10 14 old Jun 19 10 14 old Jun 19 10 14 old re x Jun 19 10 13 old Jun 19 10 16 old x Jun 19 10 14 old srcmstr Jun 19 10 14 old rctcpip Jun 19 10 14 old rcdce F Jun 19 10 14 old rccm 5 Jun 19 10 15 old dceupdt Jun 19 10 15 old renfs Jun 19 10 15 old cron Jun 19 10 16 old piobe Jun 19 10 16 old qdaemon Jun 19 10 16 old writesrv Jun 19 10 16 old uprintfd Jun 19 10 16 old Jun 19 10 16 old LOGIN lfto0 Jun 19 10 16 old Jun 19 10 16 old Jun 19 10 16 old Files etc utmp Contains user and accounting information etc security failedlogin Contains the history of all invalid logins var adm wtmp Contains the history of all logins since the file was last created usr include sys signal h Contains a list of termination values
236. emote applications to be able to use LBX across the Internet 4 If the RX document requests XPRINT service xrx will look for the variables XPRINTER PDPRINTER LPDEST PRINTER and XPSERVERLIST to get the printer name and X Print server address to use Note that although this set of variables allows to specify more than one server and printer only the first pair will be used Finally if you are using a firewall proxy xrx will look for PROXY_MANAGER to get the address of your proxy manager see proxymngr When not specified it will use 6500 as the default Related Information The libxrx command Ibxproxy command and the proxymngr command xrx Command 271 Commands Reference Volume 6 xsend Command Purpose Sends secret mail in a secure communication channel Syntax send Conmand send User xsend User Description The xsend command sends messages that can be read only by the intended recipient This command is similar to the mail command but the mail sent with this command is intended to be secret The xsend command is used with the enroll command and the xget command to send secret mail The enroll command sets up the password used to receive secret mail The xget command uses that password to receive the mail The xsend command reads standard input until an EOF Ctrl D or a period is entered It then encrypts
237. en user processes and the keyserv daemon keylogin Decrypts and stores the user s secret key keyserv Stores public and private keys Ismaster Displays the characteristics for the configuration of an NIS master server Isnfsexp Displays the characteristics of directories that are exported with the Network File System NFS Isnfsmnt Displays the characteristics of NFS mountable file systems makedbm Makes a Network Information Service NIS map mkclient Uncomments the entry in the etc rc nfs file for the ypbind daemon and starts the ypbind daemon to configure a client mkkeyserv Uncomments the entry in the etc rc nfs file for the keyserv daemon and invokes the daemon by using the startsrc command mkmaster Invokes the ypinit command and starts the NIS daemons to configure a master server mkslave Executes the ypinit command to retrieve maps from an NIS master server and starts the ypserv daemon to configure a slave server newkey Creates a new key in the etc publickey file revnetgroup Reverses the listing of users and hosts in network group files in NIS maps rmkeyserv Stops the keyserv daemon and comments the entries for the keyserv daemon in the etc rc nfs file rmyp Removes the configuration for NIS ypbind Enables client processes to bind or connect to an NIS server ypcat Prints out an NIS map ypinit Sets up NIS maps on an NIS server ypmatch Commands List Message Handler 361 Commands Reference Volume 6 Disp
238. ence Volume 6 command xstr Extracts strings from C programs to implement shared strings Commands List Source Programs admin Creates and controls SCCS files asa Prints FORTRAN files cdc Changes the comments in a SCCS delta comb Combines SCCS deltas ctags Makes a file of tags to help locate objects in source files delta Creates a delta in a SCCS file get Creates a specified version of a SCCS file prs Displays a Source Code Control System SCCS file rmdel Removes a delta from a SCCS file sact Displays current SCCS file editing status secs Administration program for SCCS commands scesdiff Compares two versions of a SCCS file sccshelp Provides information about a SCCS message or command unget Cancels a previous get command unifdef Removes ifdefed lines from a file val Validates SCCS files vc Substitutes assigned values for identification keywords verind Formats listings of programs that are easy to read whereis Locates source binary or manual for program which Locates a program file including aliases and paths the esh C shell command only Programming Tools 402 Commands Reference Volume 6 Commands List Object Files Id Links object files lorder Finds the best order for member files in an object library make Maintains up to date versions of programs nm Displays the symbol table of an object file prof Displays object file profile data size Displays
239. ength Period xset Command Commands Reference Volume 6 the current font path if the dash precedes fp and from the front of the font path if the dash follows fp Adds the font path specified by the Path parameter to the bottom of font list if the dash precedes fp and from the end of the font path if the dash follows fp Resets the font path to the server s default Causes the server to reread the font databases in the current font path Usually used only when adding new fonts to a font directory after running mkfontdir to recreate the font database Turns all LEDs on Turns the LED specfied by Integer off Valid values are between 1 and 32 Turns the LED specfied by Integer on Valid values are between 1 and 32 Turns all LEDs off Note Not all hardware assigns the same Integer variables to the same LED functions Allows you to control the precision of the mouse or other pointing device If no variable or the default argument is specified the system defaults are used This flag accepts the following optional arguments and parameters Acceleration Sets the multiplier for the mouse movement The value can be specified as an integer or a fraction Threshold Sets the minimum number of pixels needed to invoke a movement of the mouse The value is specified in pixels If only one parameter is given it will be interpreted as the Acceleration parameter default Uses the system defaults Controls
240. ensions to a power of 2 may not leave enough memory for the shape selected Specifies the mode used by X Display Manager Control Protocol XDMCP XDMCP uses the xdm program to facilitate the connection of an Xstation to a remote host XDMCP allows the user to turn an Xstation off and on again and maintain an established connection to the remote host Valid options are broadcast Sends a message to the network and waits for an xdmcp host to respond direct Directs a request to an xdmcp manager known to the Xstation indirect Sends an indirect request to an xdmcp manager that maintains a list of xdmcp hosts The manager assigns an xdmcp host to respond to the Xstation off No X Display Manager Control Protocol XDMCP The default option is off Specifies the name of the xdmcp host used for direct or indirect communication with the Xstation Valid options are none or the name of an xdmcp host If XDMCP is not used or if broadcast mode is used the value of Host is none The name of an xdmcp host must be specified if Mode is direct or indirect The default option is none Sets the language used for system messages the LANG environment variable Press the F4 key in SMIT to select an option Sets the map for the keyboard layout Press the F4 key in SMIT to select an option Sets the name of the keyboard file The default is keyboard Some countries have a second keyboard file usually named keyboard alt Sets the font used in the login window
241. ent host enter x_ls_trm An example of a listing for a host with one Xstation follows Name Network Hardware address Boot priority taylor ethernet 10005ac38e9 primary Files usr lpp x_st_mgr bin x_Is_trm Contains the x_ls_trm command etc bootptab Contains the boot protocol table Related Information The aixterm command bootpd daemon login command pclient command x_add_nfs_fpe command x_add_trm_120 command x_add_trm_130 command x_add_trm_140 command x_add_trm_150 command x_add_trm_160 command x_add_xst_fpe command x_chg_net command x_chg_trm_120 command x_chg_trm_130 command x_chg_trm_140 command x_chg_trm_150 command x_chg_trm_160 command x_def_net command x_Is_net command x_Is_net_fp command x_Is_trm command x_rm_fpe command x_rm_net command x_Is_trm Command 171 Commands Reference Volume 6 x_rm_trm command x_Is_trm Command 172 Commands Reference Volume 6 x_rm_fpe Command Purpose Removes a font path element from a font path Syntax 2 rm tpe Command rm ipe Typallane Postion Method Nost Porn Directory 4 x_rm_fpe TypeName Position Method Host Post Directory Description The x_rm_fpe command removes a font path element from the font path of the selected network type name TypeName Specifies from which network type name the element is to be removed Position Specifies where the element is in the font path Method Specifies the method used to access the font pa
242. eports virtual memory statistics Commands List Processes and Commands apply Applies a command to a set of parameters Commands List Performance Tuning 389 Commands Reference Volume 6 cron Runs commands automatically cronadm Lists or removes crontab or at jobs crontab Submits lists or removes cron job files env Displays the current environment or sets the environment for the execution of a command fuser Identifies processes using a file or file structure install Installs a command installbsd Installs a command BSD version of the install command ipes Reports interprocess communication facility status kill Sends a signal to running processes killall Cancels all processes except the calling process lastcomm Displays information about the last commands executed nice Runs a command at a specified priority nohup Runs a command without hangups ps Shows current status of processes renice Alters priority of running processes sleep Suspends execution for an interval time Prints the time of the execution of a command timex Reports in seconds the elapsed time user time and system execution time for a command wait Waits until the termination of a process ID whatis Describes what function a command performs xargs Constructs parameter lists and runs commands Commands List Queues at Runs commands at a later time atq Displays the queue of jobs waiting to be run atrm Removes jobs spooled by
243. er The vacation command expects a HOME vacation msg file containing a message to be sent back to each sender If this file does not exist the vacation command looks for usr share lib vacation def a systemwide default vacation message file It should be an entire message including any desired headers such as From or Subject By default this message is sent only once a week to each person who sends mail to you Use the f flag to change the frequency intervals at which the message is sent The names of the people who send messages are kept in the files HOME vacation pag and HOME vacation dir These files are created when the vacation command is initialized for your user ID using the I uppercase i flag If the I flag is not specified the vacation command reads the first line from the standard input for a From line to determine the sender If no text is available from standard input the command returns an error message All properly formatted incoming mail should have a From line No message is sent if the From header line indicates that the message is from Postmaster MAILER DAEMON or if the initial From line includes the string REQUEST orifaPrecedence bulkorPrecedence junk line is included in the header Flags I Initializes the SHOME vacation pag and HOME vacation dir files Execute the vacation command using this flag before you modify your HOME forward file fNumber Unit Specifies the frequency interval
244. er DISPLAY openDelay DisplayManager DISPLA Y openRepeat DisplayManager DISPLA Y openTimeout DisplayManager DISPLAY startAttempts DisplayManager DISPLAY pingInterval xdm Command the xdm command uses usr bin X11 xrdb Specifies the name of the C preprocessor that is used by the xrdb command Specifies a program that is run as root before offering the login window This resource may be used to change the appearance of the screen around the login window or to put up other windows for example you may want to run xconsole here By default no program is run The conventional name for a file used here is Xsetup See the section Setup Program Specifies a program that is run as root after the authentication process succeeds By default no program is run The conventional name for a file used here is Xstartup See the section Startup Program Specifies the session to be run when not running as root By default usr bin X11 xterm is run The conventional name is the Xsession script See the section Session Program Specifies a program that is run as root after the session ends By default no program is run The conventional name is the Xreset script See the section Reset Program Controls the behavior of the xdm command when attempting to open intransigent servers by specifying the length of the pause in seconds between successive attempts Controls the behavior of the xdm command when attempting to open int
245. er from being interpreted precede it with a backslash as in the following example ithe prog program includes several of the following The prog keyword is replaced by its value but the is passed to standard output as colon Input lines beginning with a backslash followed by a control character are not control lines and are copied to standard output without the backslash However the ve command writes lines beginning with a backslash and no following control character without any changes including the initial backslash File usr bin ve Contains the ve command Related Information The admin command delta command get command List of SCCS Commands in AIX General Programming Concepts Writing and Debugging Programs Source Code Control System SCCS Overview in AIX General Programming Concepts Writing and Debugging Programs vc Command 27 Commands Reference Volume 6 versions Command Purpose Prints the modification dates of an INed structured file Syntax versions F Me versionsFile Description The versions command displays a record of the modification dates and times from a structured file These are the dates and times that the file was opened for modification You can use these dates and times when you reconstruct the file using the ghost command The versions command also displays the user ID and group ID of the user who modified the file Related Information The e command ghost comma
246. er is logged in from To obtain information the who command normally examines the etc utmp file If you specify another file with the File parameter the who command examines that file instead This new file is usually the var adm wtmp or etc security failedlogin file If the File parameter specifies more than one file name only the last file name will be used Note This command only identifies users on the local node Flags a Processes the etc utmp file or the named file with all information Equivalent to specifying the bdlprtTu flags b Indicates the most recent system startup time and date d Displays all processes that have expired without being regenerated by init The exit field appears for dead processes and contains the termination and exit values as returned by wait of the dead process This flag is useful for determining why a process ended by looking at the error number returned by the application l Lists any login process m Displays information about the current terminal only The who m command is equivalent to the who am i and who am I commands p Lists any active process that is currently active and has been previously generated by init q Prints a quick listing of users and the number of users on the local system r Indicates the current run level of the process S Lists only the name line and time fields This flag is the default thus the who and who s commands are equivalent t I
247. er of 2 may not leave enough memory for the shape selected Specifies the mode used by X Display Manager Control Protocol XDMCP XDMCP uses the xdm program to facilitate the connection of an Xstation to a remote host XDMCP allows the user to turn an Xstation off and on again and maintain an established connection to the remote host Valid options are broadcast x_add_trm_160 Command 141 Commands Reference Volume 6 Sends a message to the network and waits for an xdmcp host to respond direct Directs a request to an xdmcp manager known to the Xstation indirect Sends an indirect request to an xdmcp manager that maintains a list of xdmcp hosts The manager assigns an xdmcp host to respond to the Xstation off No X Display Manager Control Protocol XDMCP The default option is off Host Specifies the name of the xdmcp host used for direct or indirect communication with the Xstation Valid options are none or the name of an xdmcp host If XDMCP is not used or if broadcast mode is used the value of Host is none The name of an xdmcp host must be specified if Mode is direct or indirect The default option is none Language Sets the language used for system messages the LANG environment variable Press the F4 key in SMIT to select an option Keyboard Sets the map for the keyboard layout Press the F4 key in SMIT to select an option File Sets the name of the keyboard file The default is keyboard Some countries have a second keyboar
248. erates in several modes including symmetric active passive client server and broadcast multicast A broadcast multicast client can automatically discover remote servers compute one way delay correction factors and comfigure itself automatically This mode makes it possible to deploy a group of workstations without specifying a configuration file or configuration details specific to its environment Note When operating in a client mode running AIX Version 4 2 1 or later the xntpd daemon will exit with an error if no configured servers are within 1000 seconds of local system time Use the date or ntpdate command to set the time of a bad skewed system before starting xntpd xntpd Daemon 244 Flags a b c ConfigFile d e AuthenticationDelay f DriftFile k KeyFile ILogFile m p pidFile r BroadcastDelay s StatsDirectory t TrustedKey v SystemVariable V SystemVariable Commands Reference Volume 6 Runs in authenticate mode Listens for broadcast NTP and synchronizes to thems if available Specifies the name of an alternate configuration file Specifies debugging mode This flag may occur multiple times maximun of 10 with each occurance indicating greater detail of display Specifies the time in seconds it takes to compute the NTP encryption field on this computer Specifies the location of the drift file Specifies the location of the file which contains the NTP authentication keys lowerc
249. ere ne ne et en ne ne ie A ete 368 G n ral Operations ist Mot tr eee is tat hein teases bess nl Abdo heh ia 378 Commands List Numerical Data nent ration yeceevbantedeyies ees 388 Commands List Performance Tuning ss 389 Programming Tools nuit nent he Mie Ai eh Raa Lohan dir dla 401 Commands Reference Volume 6 First Edition October 1997 This edition of the AIX Version 4 3 Commands Reference Volume 6 applies to the AIX Version 4 3 3270 Host Connection Program 2 1 and 1 3 3 for AIX and Distributed SMIT 2 2 for AIX licensed programs and to all subsequent releases of these products until otherwise indicated in new releases or technical newsletters The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law THIS MANUAL IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions therefore this statement may not apply to you It is not warranted that the contents of this publication or the accompanying source code examples whether individually or as one or more groups will meet your requirements or that the publication or the accompanying source code examples are error free This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographi
250. erm window Bugs Large pastes do not work on some systems This is not a bug in the xterm command it is a bug in the pseudo terminal driver of those systems The xterm command feeds large pastes to the pty only as fast as the pty will accept data but some pty drivers do not return enough information to know if the write operation has succeeded Many of the options are not resettable after the xterm command starts Only fixed width character cell fonts are supported xterm Command 302 Commands Reference Volume 6 Control Sequences This section lists control sequences available for the xterm command Definitions The following figure shows how to interpret key sequences in this section The Herel aracer 5 A singe required character Pr A tinge usually optional mumenc parameter composed of one or more dgts Ra A mipis num paramalar COM Of any number of singls numeric parameters saparatad by a characte of characters P A text parameter composed of printable characters VT100 Mode Most of these control sequences are standard VT102 control sequences but there are some sequences here from later DEC VT terminals too Major VT102 features not supported are smooth scrolling double size characters blinking characters and VT52 mode There are additional control sequences to provide xterm dependent functions like the scrollbar or window size Where the function is specified by DEC or ISO 6429 the code as
251. ers until the key is released The arrow keys will move at twice the speed of character keys up to 30 characters per second The default rate is 28 Security Access Control Only the root user should have execute x access to this command Example To change the characteristics of Xstation taylor for the current host so the new hardware address is 10005ac9999 but the other characteristics remain unchanged from those defined with the x_add_trm_160 command enter x_chg_trm_160 160 taylor x_st_mgr ether 10005ac9999 y 00 mouse T1 Base FLASH Base FLASH none off none English United States IBM 850 English United States keyboard Roml4 Upper left none 20 All parameters must be entered Files fusr Ipp x_st_mgr bin x_chg_trm_160 Contains the x_chg_trm_160 command etc x_st_mgr ibm xs160 cfg lt IPADDRESS gt Contains the Xstation configuration file etc x_st_mgr x_st_mgrd tmty Contains the terminal type file x_chg_trm_160 Command 164 Commands Reference Volume 6 Related Information The aixterm command bootpd daemon login command pclient command x_add_nfs_fpe command x_add_trm_120 command x_add_trm_130 command x_add_trm_140 command x_add_trm_150 command x_add_trm_160 command x_add_xst_fpe command x_chg_net command x_chg_trm_120 command x_chg_trm_130 command x_chg_trm_140 command x_chg_trm_150 command x_def_net command x_Is_net command x_Is_net_fp command x_Is_trm command
252. ersation The o at the beginning of the next line means the message is over It tells June that you are waiting for a response Do not press Ctrl D if you wish to continue Now June replies by typing write Command 102 Commands Reference Volume 6 write karen Presses the Enter key and types I m running tests at 12 30 Can we meet at 3 And you might respond OK the computer room at 3 00 The oo means over and out telling June that you have nothing more to say If June is also finished oo then you both press Ctrl D to end the conversation 3 To write someone a prepared message enter write june lt message text This writes the contents of the message text file to june s workstation 4 To write to the person using a certain workstation enter write n console Press the Enter key and type The printer in building 998 has jammed Please send help Then press the Ctrl D key sequence This writes the message to the person logged in at the workstation dev console 5 To send a message to user spuds at host part ya enter write n partya spuds Press the Enter key and type Your new tape has just arrived come see me to pick it up Thanks Then press the Ctrl D key sequence OR write spuds partya Press the Enter key and type Your new tape has just arrived come see me to pick it up Thanks write Command 103 Commands Reference Volume 6 Then press the Ctrl D key sequence
253. es have changed By default the value is True You can force the xdm daemon to reread these files by sending a SIGHUP signal to the main process When computing the display name for XDMCP clients the name resolver typically creates a fully qualified host name for the terminal As this is sometimes confusing the xdm command removes the domain name portion of the host name if it is the same as the domain name of the local host when this variable is set The default value is True XDM AUTHENTICATION I style XDMCP authentication requires that a private key be shared between the xdm daemon and the terminal This resource specifies the file containing those values Each entry in the file consists of a display name and the shared key By default the xdm command does not include support for XDM AUTHENTICATION 1 because it requires the data encryption method DES which is not generally distributable because of United States export restrictions To prevent unauthorized XDMCP service and to allow forwarding of XDMCPIndirectQuery requests this file contains a database of host names that are allowed direct access to this machine or have a list of hosts to which queries should be forwarded The format of this file is described in the XDMCP Access Control section A whitespace separated list of additional environment variables to pass on to the Xsetup Xstartup Xsession and Xreset programs A file to checksum to generate the seed of authorizati
254. es a directory which_fileset Searches the usr Ipp bos AIX_file_list file for a specified file name or command Files and Directories 368 Commands List Editors ctags ed edit ex ffill fformat fill fjust ghost history just keymaps newfile prtty readfile red rmhist rpl sed tdigest tvi Files and Directories Commands Reference Volume 6 Makes a file of tags to help locate objects in source files Starts the INed editor Edits text by line Provides a simple line editor for the new user Edits lines interactively with a screen display Fills arbitrarily broken lines of text Formats a text paragraph Fills arbitrarily broken lines of text Fills and justifies unevenly indented paragraphs of text Reconstructs previous versions of an INed structured file Displays the history of an INed structured file Fills and justifies unevenly indented paragraphs of text Displays Ned command key layout for all keyboards Converts a text file into an INed structured file Prints to the printer port of the terminal Displays the text of Ned structured files Edits text by line Removes the history information from INed structured files Replaces all occurrences of a string in a file Provides a stream editor Converts the terms files Provides a trusted editor with a full screen display 369 vedit versions vi view Commands List
255. ese requests require the daemon to verify the user s old password and change it The daemon changes the password in the file you specify in the FileName parameter which has the same format as the etc passwd file To make it possible to update the Network Information Services NIS password map from remote machines the yppasswdd daemon must be running on the master server that contains the NIS password map Note The yppasswdd daemon is not run by default nor can it be started up from the inetd daemon like other Remote Procedure Call RPC daemons The yppasswdd daemon can be started and stopped with the following System Resource Controller SRC commands startsrc s yppasswdd stopsrc s yppasswdd Flags m Runs the make command using the makefile in the var yp directory This adds the new or changed password to the NIS password map Any arguments that follow the m flag are passed to the make command nogecos Indicates the server will not accept changes for gecos information from the yppasswd command nopw Indicates that the server will not accept password changes from the yppasswdd command noshell Indicates the server will not accept changes for user shells from the yppasswd command r Directly updates the var yp domainnamelpasswd byname and var yp domainname passwd byuid database files with new or changed passwords This option is faster than the m flag because the make command is not run The r flag is useful when
256. esired proxy service for example LBX The name is case insensitive server This argument is also required and it specifies the address of the target server The format of the address is specific to the proxy service specified with the name argument For example for a proxy service of LBX the address would be an X display address e g blah x org 0 auth This argument is optional If specified xfindproxy will read 2 lines from standard input The first line is an authorization authentication name The second line is the authorization authentication data in hex format the same format used by xauth xfindproxy will pass this auth data to the proxy and in most cases will be used by the proxy to authorize authenticate itself to the target server host This argument is optional If xfindproxy starts a new proxy service it will pass the host specified The proxy may choose to restrict all connections to this host In the event that xfindproxy locates an already existing proxy the host will be passed but the semantics of how the proxy uses this host are undefined options This argument is optional If xfindproxy starts a new proxy service it will pass any options specified The semantics of the options are specific to each proxy server and are not defined here In the event that xfindproxy locates an already existing proxy the options will be passed but the semantics of how the proxy uses these options are undefined Relate
257. ess password TextString Specifies the password prompt string The default is Password saturation Value timeout Seconds Sets saturation of the color ramp A value of 0 zero is grayscale and a value of 1 is very rich color A value of 0 4 is a medium pastel Sets the number of seconds before the password screen times out username TextString Specifies the message shown in front of the user name The default is Name validate TextString Specifies the message that is shown while validating the password The default is allowaccess allowroot echokeys enablesaver mono nolock remote usefirst v xlock Command Validating login Allows the disabling of the access control list but still causes the local server to prompt for a password If xlock is killed using the KILL command the access control list is not lost This flag is also needed when running the xlock command remotely if your display server is an AIX machine since access to the control list is restricted Allows the root password to unlock the server as well as the user who started the xlock command Causes the xlock command to echo to screen a question mark character for each key typed into the password prompt The default is no echo Enables the default screensaver It is possible to set delay parameters long enough to cause phosphor burn on some displays This flag can be used as an added precaut
258. ess the Esc key and enter the following command F where T is the name of the buffer macro You can repeat this process at any time to add more vi subcommands to the same buffer For example to add commands that move the cursor to the previous line and delete that line enter the following command o dd where minus sign means to move the cursor up one line and dd means to delete the current line Press the Esc key and enter the following command Tdd To start the macro enter Letter where the Letter variable specifies the letter name of the buffer macro you want to use To use the same macro again enter two at symbols For example enter T to start the T buffer macro and run the search move cursor and delete line commands Enter T to start the T buffer macro again The character set used by your system is defined by the collation table This table affects the performance of vi macros Mapping Keys You can use the map map and ab subcommands to map a keystroke to a command or a sequence of commands The map subcommand is used in the command mode The map and ab subcommands are vi or vedit Command 37 Commands Reference Volume 6 used in the text input mode You can map keys for this editing session and all future editing sessions or only for the current editing session from either mode To map keys for all future editing sessions put the subcommand into a HOME exrc file Each time you start
259. et terminal type tek action Invokes the set visibility vt off action The fontMenu has the following entries fontdefault class SmeBSB Invokes the set vt font d action font1 class SmeBSB Invokes the set vt font 1 action font2 class SmeBSB Invokes the set vt font 2 action font3 class SmeBSB Invokes the set vt font 3 action font4 class SmeBSB Invokes the set vt font 4 action font5 class SmeBSB Invokes the set vt font 5 action font6 class SmeBSB Invokes the set vt font 6 action fontescape class SmeBSB Invokes the set vt font e action fontsel class SmeBSB Invokes the set vt font s action The tekMenu has the following entries tektextlarge class SmeBSB Invokes the set tek text l action xterm Command 294 Commands Reference Volume 6 tektext2 class SmeBSB Invokes the set tek text 2 action tektext3 class SmeBSB Invokes the set tek text 3 action tektextsmall class SmeBSB Invokes the set tek text s action linel class SmeLine This is a separator tekpage class SmeBSB Invokes the tek page action tekreset class SmeBSB Invokes the tek reset action tekcopy class SmeBSB Invokes the tek copy action line2 class SmeLine This is a separator vtshow class SmeBSB Invokes the set visibility vt toggle action vtmode class SmeBSB Invokes the set terminal type vt action tekhide class SmeBSB Invokes the set visibility tek
260. etes the rest of the line same as d dd Deletes a line dw Deletes a word J Joins lines rx Replaces the current character with the character specified by x RText Overwrites characters with the text specified by the Text parameter s Substitutes characters same as cl S Substitutes lines same as cc u Undoes the previous change x Deletes a character at the cursor X Deletes a character before the cursor same as dh lt lt Shifts one line to the left lt L Shifts all lines from the cursor to the end of the screen to the left gt gt Shifts one line to the right vi or vedit Command 46 Commands Reference Volume 6 gt L Shifts all lines from the cursor to the end of the screen to the right Changes letter at the cursor to the opposite case Indents for LISP Copying and Moving Text Use the following subcommands in command mode An incomplete subcommand can be canceled by pressing the Esc key If you need information about the format of vi subcommands see vi General Subcommand Syntax p Puts back text from the undo buffer after the cursor P Puts back text from the undo buffer before the cursor xp Puts back text from the x buffer xd Deletes text into the x buffer y Places the object that follows for example w for word into the undo buffer xy Places the object that follows into the x buffer where x is any letter Y Places the line in the undo buffer Restoring and Repeating Changes
261. eturns a pointer to a null terminated string 399 svc_destroy svc_freeargs svc_getargs svc_getcaller varargs VendorRelease WhitePixel WhitePixelOfScreen WidthMMOfScreen WidthOfScreen xdr_destroy xdr_getpos xdr_inline xdr_setpos XtCheckSubclass XtClass XtDisplay XtIsManaged XtIsRealized XtIsSensitive XtNewString XtOffset XtParent XtScreen XtSuperclass XtWindow Commands List Performance Tuning Commands Reference Volume 6 Destroys a Remote Procedure Call RPC service transport handle Frees data allocated by the RPC XDR system Decodes the arguments of an RPC request Gets the network address of the caller of a procedure Handles a variable length parameter list Returns a number related to a vendor s release of the X server Returns the white pixel value for the specified screen Returns the white pixel value Returns an integer that describes the width of the screen in millimeters Returns an integer that describes the width of the screen in pixels Destroys the XDR stream pointed to by the xdrs parameter Returns an unsigned integer that describes the current position in the data stream Returns a pointer to the buffer of a stream pointed to by the xdrs parameter Changes the current position in the XDR stream Checks the subclass of a widget and generates a debugging error message Obtains the class of a widget Returns the display pointer for the specified widget Determines the managed state of a
262. expo_0 startup is the name of the resource that defines the startup shell file on the expo 0 display Because the resource manager uses colons to separate the name of the resource from its value and dots to separate resource name parts xdm substitutes underscores for both dots and colons when generating the resource name Display Manager servers Specifies either a file name full of server entries one per line if the value starts with a slash or a single server entry See the section Server Specification for details DisplayManager requestPort Indicates the UDP port number which the xdm command uses to listen for incoming XDMCP requests Unless you need to debug the system leave this with its default value of 177 Display Manager errorLogFile Redirects error messages to go to the named file rather than to the console This file also contains any output directed to standard error by the Xsetup Xstartup Xsession and Xreset files so it will contain descriptions of problems in those scripts as well DisplayManager debugLevel If the integer value of this resource is greater than 0 zero the xdm command outputs a large amount of debugging information It also disables daemon mode which would discard the information and allow nonroot users to run the xdm command which would normally not be useful DisplayManager daemonMode The xdm command attempts to make itself into a daemon process unassociated with any terminal This is accomplished
263. fault and gray See the Jusr Ipp X11 Xambples clients xstdcmap for information about creating Standard Colormaps Specifies a particular visual type or visual id The default picks the best one or you can specify default which is the same class as the colormap of the root window You can specify a particular class StaticGray GrayScale StaticColor PseudoColor DirectColor TrueColor Specify Match to use the same class as the source image Specify an exact visual id specific to the server as a hexadecimal number prefixed with Ox or as a decimal number This string is not case sensitive Environment Variables DISPLAY Gets the default display Example To retrieve a specific file from the dump window enter xwud in FileName Related Information The X command xpr command xwd command See usr Ipp X11 Xamples clients xstdcmap xwud Command 313 Commands Reference Volume 6 yacc Command Purpose Generates an LALR 1 parsing program from input consisting of a context free grammar specification Syntax yeee Command yao N0000 p Nm Number SE ae H xine H o p Nn Number Wr Number p Pretir WUSsyaccpa m l Gramme 4 7 Path yacc b Prefix C d 1 NnNumber NmNumber NrNumber p Prefix s t v y Path Grammar Description The yace command converts a context free grammar specification into a set of tables for a simple automaton t
264. ferent from the p flag This is the same as the dmpeers subcommand Parameters Host Specifies the hosts Exit Status This command returns the following exit values 0 Successful completion gt 0 An error occurred Security Access Control You must be part of the system group to run this command Auditing Events N A Displays per peer statistic counters associated with the specified peers Examples 1 To start the query control program for the Network Time Protocol daemon enter xntpdc 2 To display the statistic counters of the peer at address 127 127 1 0 on host 9 3 149 107 enter xntpdc c pstats 127 127 1 0 9 3 149 107 Output similar to the following appears remote host LOCAL 0 local interface T2706 0 1 time last received 49s time until next send 15s reachability change 818s packets sent 13 packets received 13 bad authentication 0 bogus origin 0 duplicate 0 bad dispersion 4 bad reference time 0 candidate order 1 xntpdc Internal Subcommands You can run a number of interactive format subcommands entirely within the xntpdc command that do not send NTP mode 7 requests to a server The following subcommands can only be used while running the xntpdce query program xntpdc Command 248 Commands Reference Volume 6 Interactive Format Subcommands Interactive format subcommands consist of a keyword followed by zero to four arguments You only need to type enough characters
265. file s Name ShellProg Changes user Name s login shell in the NIS maps Example 1 To change a user s NIS password enter yppasswd Joe yppasswd Command 327 Commands Reference Volume 6 This example demonstrates how to change the NIS password for the user named Joe The system prompts you to enter Joe s old password and then his new password 2 To change the login shell to bin ksh for the user named Joe if the yppasswdd daemon has not been started with the noshell flag enter yppasswd s Joe bin ksh 3 To change the gecos information in the passwd file for the user named Joe if the yppasswdd daemon has not been started with the nogecos flag enter yppasswd f Joe Old NIS password Joe s current gecos John Doe Test User Id Change yes or no gt y To gt Joe User Test User Id Related Information The yppasswdd daemon Network Information Services NIS Overview for System Management in AIX Version 4 3 Network Information Services NIS and NIS Guide NIS Reference yppasswd Command 328 Commands Reference Volume 6 yppasswdd Daemon Purpose Receives and executes requests from the yppasswd command Syntax yPPpasewed Laem rpoyppesswudd FileName rpc yppasswdd FileName nogecos nopw noshell r m Argument Description The yppasswdd daemon is a server that receives and executes requests for new passwords from the yppasswd command Th
266. files is explained in item 10 When you follow a path that takes you to a box with an arrow around it you must choose at least one item from the box Then you can either follow the arrow back around and continue to choose items from the box or you can continue along the path When following an arrow that goes around a box rather than an arrow that includes several branches in the diagram do not choose the same item more than once Following the branch with the repeat arrow is a branch with three choices and no default line around them This means that you must choose one of A B or C If a diagram is too long to fit on one line this character tells you to go to the next line of the diagram to continue entering your command Remember the diagram does not end until you reach the vertical mark This character shows you where to continue with the diagram after it breaks on the previous line 8 OPTIONAL PARAMETER If a flag can but does not have to take a parameter the path branches after 9 DEFAULT VALUE 10 INPUT OR OUTPUT About This Book the flag If you cannot enter a space between the flag and parameter you are told in a footnote Often a command has default values or actions that it will follow if you do not enter a specific item These default values are indicated in normal font in the default line if they are equivalent to something you could enter on the command line for example a flag with a value If the default i
267. files containing supplemental information inurecv Recovers all files saved by the inusave command inurest Performs simple archive and restore operations for the installp command and shell scripts inusave Saves files that are installed or updated during an installation procedure inuumsg Displays specific error or diagnostic messages provided by a software products installation procedures logger Make entries in the system log Ippchk Verifies files of an installable software product Isitab Lists records in the etc inittab file Islpp Lists software products mkboot Creates the boot image the boot record and the service record mkitab Makes records in the etc inittab file re Performs normal startup initialization reboot Restarts the system refresh Requests a refresh of a subsystem or group of subsystems Commands List Performance Tuning 396 Commands Reference Volume 6 rmitab Removes records in the etc inittab file shutdown Ends system operation smit Performs system management sync Updates the i node table and writes buffered files to the hard disk sysck Checks the inventory information during installation and update procedures Commands List User Interface AIXwindows custom Allows users to customize X applications dtscript Builds simple dialogs used in the X Window System environment mwm Runs the AIXwindows Window Manager uil The command that starts the User Interface Language Compiler for the AIXwin
268. fonts info mac usr lib X11 fonts JP usr lib X11 fonts misc Related Information The X command xmodmap command xrdb command xsetroot command xset Command 278 Commands Reference Volume 6 xsetroot Command Purpose Sets the root window parameters for the X command Syntax Loetreet Commana xeetroot be Coir cursor Cursor As Masti As Oursor_name CwsorN arme bimap FileName solid Coben grey grey mod XY display Ospuy ig Cor help nome Sung tY xsetroot bg Color cursor CursorFile MaskFile cursor_name CursorName def display Display fg Color help name String rv bitmap FileName gray grey mod X Y solid Color Description The xsetroot command allows you to tailor the appearance of the background root window on a workstation display running X Normally you experiment with the xsetroot command until you find a personalized look that you like then put the xsetroot command that produces it into your X startup file If no options are specified or if the def flag is specified the window is reset to its default state The def flag can be specified with other flags and only the unspecified characteristics are reset to the default state Only one of the background color tiling changing flags bitmap solid gray grey or mod can be specified at a time Flags bgColor Uses the Color parameter as the background color bitmapFile
269. formance Tuning 398 DoesBackingStore DoesSaveUnders del_netopt EventMaskOfScreen feof ferror clearerr or fileno HeightMMOfScreen ImageByteOrder LastKnownRequestProcessed IsCursorKey IsFunctionKey IsKeypadKey IsMiscFunctionKey IsModifierKey IsPFKey M_HASCL MTOCL MTOD M_XMEMD man MaxCmapsOfScreen m_copy m_clget me m_getclust MinCmapsOfScreen NextRequest PlanesOfScreen ProtocolRevision ProtocolVersion QLength RootWindow RootWindowOfScreen ScreenCount ScreenOfDisplay ServerVendor Commands List Performance Tuning Commands Reference Volume 6 Indicates if the screen supports backing store attributes Indicates if the specified screen supports the save under flag Deletes a network option structure from the list of network options Returns the initial event mask of the root window Checks the status of a stream Returns an integer that describes the height of the screen in millimeters Specifies the required byte order Extracts the full serial number of the last request known by Xlib to have been processed by the X Server Determines if the key symbol is a cursor key Determines if the key symbol is a function key Determines if a key symbol is a keypad key Determines if the key symbol is a miscellaneous function key Determines if the key symbol is a modifier key Determines if the key symbol is a programmed function PF key Determines if an mbuf structure has an attached cluster
270. ful when running the xterm command on displays with small screens The default is False tekStartup class TekStartup Specifies whether xterm should start up in Tektronix mode The default is False titeInhibit class TiteInhibit Specifies whether xterm should remove ti and tetermcap file entries used to switch between alternate screens during startup of many screen oriented programs from the TERMCAP string If set the xterm command also ignores the escape sequence to switch to the alternate screen translations class Translations Specifies the key and button bindings for menus selections programmed strings and so forth See Actions visualBell class VisualBell Specifies whether a visible bell flashing should be used instead of an audible bell when the Ctrl G key sequence signal is received The default is False The following resources are specified as part of the tek4014 widget class Tek4014 width class Width Specifies the width of the Tektronix window in pixels height class Height Specifies the height of the Tektronix window in pixels fontLarge class Font Specifies the large font to use in the Tektronix window font2 class Font Specifies font number 2 to use in the Tektronix window font3 class Font Specifies font number 3 to use in the Tektronix window fontSmall class Font Specifies the small font to use in the Tektronix window initialFont class InitialFont Specifies which of the four Tektronix fon
271. ful for cleaning up after a virus infection because absolutely every file on a file system is checked for the presence of viruses By default virscan Command 53 nmut pFile sFile tFile w String Commands Reference Volume 6 the virscan command only scans executable files Displays a brief summary of command line options Displays usage examples Scans all files listed in the specified File for viral signatures The file should contain one file name per line The files to be scanned may be specified relative to the current directory or may be given full path names Attempts to detect mutant viruses With this flag the virscan command tries to detect larger variations on the viruses listed in the signature files Virus signatures are broken into random fragments and the virscan command scans for the fragments as well as for the original signatures With this flag the virscan command need not match an entire signature The number of mismatched bytes allowed is a function of the signature length the longer the signature the more mismatched bytes are allowed There is a small possibility of false alarms if this option is used since short fragments may be found in files that do not contain viruses Be prepared to investigate in more detail any reports of signatures found By default the virscan command scans for the entire signature string Disables the default mutant detection This option is usefu
272. fy a diagnostic message is displayed Flags d Domain Specifies a domain other than the default domain k Prints a key followed by a colon before printing the value of the key This is useful only if the keys are not duplicated in the values or if you have specified so many keys that the output could be confusing t Inhibits translation of nickname to map name x Displays the map nickname table This lists the nicknames as specified by the MapName parameter the command knows of and indicates the map name associated with each nickname Examples To display the value associated with a particular key enter ypmatch Command 325 Commands Reference Volume 6 ypmatch d ibm k hostl hosts In this example the ypmatch command displays the value of the host 1 key from the hosts map in the ibm domain Related Information The ypeat command Network Information Services NIS Overview for System Management in AIX Version 4 3 Network Information Services NIS and NIS Guide NIS Reference ypmatch Command 326 Commands Reference Volume 6 yppasswd Command Purpose Changes your network password in Network Information Services NIS Syntax yepesewd Command RERO Fg eee yppasswd f Name s Name ShellProg Description The yppasswd command changes or installs a network password and associates it with the name you specify in the UserName parameter To create or change a password you must be the
273. g System and Devices Network File System NFS Overview for System Management in AIX Version 4 3 System Management Guide Communications and Networks and NIS Maps in AIX Version 4 3 Network Information Services NIS and NIS Guide Network Information Services NIS Overview for System Management in AIX Version 4 3 Network Information Services NIS and NIS Guide NIS Reference yppush Command 334 Commands Reference Volume 6 ypserv Daemon Purpose Looks up information in local Network Information Services NIS maps Syntax voserv Damon varnlib neteve yp ypaerv usr lib netsvc yp ypserv Description The ypserv daemon looks up information in its local Network Information Services NIS maps The operations performed by the ypserv daemon are defined for the implementor by the NIS Protocol Specification and for the programmer by the usr include rpcsve yp_prot h header file Communication with the ypserv daemon is by means of Remote Procedure Calls RPC The ypserv daemon runs only on server machines The ypserv daemon is started and stopped by the following System Resource Controller SRC commands startsrc s ypserv stopsrc s ypserv The ypserv daemon performs the following operations on a specified map within an NIS domain Match Takes a key and returns the associated value Get_first Returns the first key value pair from the map Get_next Enumerates the next key value pair in the map Get_all Shi
274. g em 188 Command x_shg_wm_168 160 Name TypeName Adorecs Server gt gt ime Device PorName FontAccess Xvewer gt b PanShape Mode West Language Keytoard gt be Fie Font o ation LPFheappon KelopeatAinte x_chg_trm_160 160NameTypeName Address ServerTime Device PortName FontAccess Xserver PanShape Mode Host Language Keyboard File Font Location LPFkeyport KeyRepeatRate Description The x_chg_trm_160 command changes for the current host the characteristics of the Xstation specified by the Name parameter and stores the changed configuration in the etc x_st_mgr xs160 cfg lt IPaddress gt file and the etc x_st_mgr x_st_mgrd tmty file Parameters Parameters that can be changed are 160 Specifies that this command is used only for an Xstation 160 Name Specifies the name of the Xstation The Name parameter can be up to eight characters long and include the uppercase or lowercase letters a through z the numbers 0 through 9 the dash and the period Name can be a user name such as taylor or a group name with a number appended such as graphs 2 and should identify an Xstation by its location in the work place or by the primary user s name Name is stored in the etc hosts file Note Name should not start with a lowercase or an uppercase 0 or x followed by an octal or hexadecimal numeric These characters are interpreted as octal or hexadecimal numbers instead of as a terminal
275. g it in Argument for each occurence of ReplaceString ReplaceStrings can not be used in more than 5 arguements Blank characters at the beginning of each standard input line are ignored Each Argument can contain one or more ReplaceStrings but may not be larger than 255 bytes The I flag also turns on the x flag Note The I Uppercase i and the i flags are mutually exclusive the last flag specified takes effect Lowercase L Obsolete flag Use the L flag If you do not specify the Number parameter a value of 1 is used The I flag also turns on the x flag Note The L I Lowercase L and n flags are mutually exclusive the last flag specified takes effect Runs the Command parameter with the specified number of nonempty parameter lines read from standard input The last invocation of the Command parameter can have fewer parameter lines if fewer than the specified Number remain A line ends with the first new line character unless the last character of the line is a space or a tab A trailing space indicates a continuation through the next nonempty line Note The L I Lowercase L and n flags are mutually exclusive the last flag specified takes effect Runs the Command parameter using as many standard input arguments as possible up to the maximum specified by the Number parameter The xargs command uses fewer arguments if 1 If the accumulated command line length exceeds the bytes specified by the
276. g space from the system along with any logical volume on which it resides rmserver Removes a subserver definition from the Subserver Type object class rmssys Removes a subsystem definition from the subsystem object class srcmstr Starts the System Resource Controller startsrc Starts a subsystem a group of subsystems or a subserver stopsre Stops a subsystem a group of subsystems or a subserver swapon Specifies additional devices for paging and swapping tracesoff Turns off tracing of a subsystem a group of subsystems or a subserver traceson Turns on tracing of a subsystem a group of subsystems or subserver uncompress Compresses and expands data zcat Compresses and expands data Commands List Software Installation bootinfo Determines current boot device default install and paging disks Determines and displays various boot information bootlist Alters the list of IPL devices or the ordering of devices on the list available to the system bootparamd Provides information for booting to diskless clients bosboot Creates boot device chitab Changes records in the etc inittab file ckprereq Verifies that all prerequisite software is available and at appropriate revision levels fastboot Restarts the system fasthalt Stops the processor halt Stops the processor init Initializes and controls processes installp Installs available software products in a compatible installation package inudocm Displays contents of
277. gest side follows the long side of the paper Specifies the left margin in inches Fractions are acceptable By default this flag prints the window on the center of the page When specified in conjunction with the append flag the window is displayed on the same page as the previous window This flag is not supported on PostScript printers Causes the header trailer and image positioning command generation to be bypassed for the LaserJet printer Specifies an output file name If you do not specify this option the xpr command uses standard output 259 Commands Reference Volume 6 planePlaneNumber Specifies which bit plane to use in an image The default uses the entire image and portrait psfig report rv scale Scale split Number top Inches trailer String width Inches maps values into black and white based on color intensities This option is not supported for the LaserJet printer Forces the window to print in portrait mode The display is laid out with the windows being higher than they are wide By default a window prints so that its longest side follows the long side of the paper Suppresses translation of the PostScript picture to the center of the page Prints out statistics to standard error about the window ImageFile parameter Forces the window to print in reverse video Affects the size of the window on the page PostScript printers are able to translate each bit in a window pixel map
278. ght of the default screen in pixels Specifies the x resolution of the default screen in pixels per meter Specifies the y resolution of the default screen in pixels per meter Specifies the number of bit planes the depth of the root window of the default screen Specifies the vendor release number for the server The interpretation of this number varies depending on VENDOR Specifies the X protocol minor version supported by this server currently 0 Specifies the X protocol major version supported by this server should always be 11 A string specifying the vendor of the server Turns the VENDOR name string into a legal identifier For example MIT X Consortium becomes VNDR MIT _ X Consortium Turns each extension string into a legal identifier A symbol is defined for each protocol extension supported by the server For example X3D PEX becomes EXT_X3D_PEX Specifies the total number of screens Specifies the number of current screen from 0 zero Specifies the number of significant bits in an RGB color specification This is the log base 2 of the number of distinct shades of each primary that the hardware can generate Note that it is not related to PLANES Specifies the visual class of the root window of the default screen which is one of the following Specifies the visual class of the root window in a form can ifdef on The value is the numeric id of the visual DirectColor GrayScale PseudoColor
279. gion The Mousex and Mousey parameters give the location of the mouse at button up which may not be over a character Tektronix 4014 Mode Most of these sequences are standard Tektronix 4014 control sequences The major features missing are the write thru and defocused modes This document does not describe the commands used in the various Tektronix plotting modes but does describe the commands to switch modes Related Information The aixterm command resize command tset command vi or vedit command xterm Command 308 Commands Reference Volume 6 xuserm Command Purpose Starts Users amp Groups Manager a Visual System Management VSM application Syntax perm f xuserm Description The xuserm command starts Users amp Groups Manager one of the Visual System Management VSM applications Users amp Groups Manager is a graphical interface that enables you to perform security tasks through direct manipulation of objects icons freeing you from entering complex command syntax or from searching through menus Users amp Groups Manager makes adding users simple by providing system defined and user customized templates Simple drag and drop actions enable you to set user passwords change a user s language and allow or disallow a user to log in to a system enable or disable The Users amp Groups Manager session creates or adds to the smit log and smit script files in your home directory These are the same
280. guration file x_add_trm_150 Command 138 Commands Reference Volume 6 etc x_st_mgr x_st_mgrd tmty Contains the terminal type file etc bootptab Contains the Boot Protocol table Related Information The aixterm command bootpd daemon login command pclient command x_add_nfs_fpe command x_add_trm_120 command x_add_trm_130 command x_add_trm_140 command x_add_trm_160 command x_add_xst_fpe command x_chg_net command x_chg_trm_120 command x_chg_trm_130 command x_chg_trm_140 command x_chg_trm_150 command x_chg_trm_160 command x_def_net command x_Is_net command x_Is_net_fp command x_ls_trm command x_rm_fpe command x_rm_net command x_rm_trm command x_add trm 150 Command 139 Commands Reference Volume 6 x_add_ trm 160 Command Purpose Adds an Xstation 160 to the host Syntax L_odd_wre 160 Command 1 pdd trim 160 160 Name TypeName Adiress Sewer gt D Tire Darke PotName Font ceass Xserve P b PanShape Mode Nost Langage Keyboard gt gt File Font Location LPF heypovt Keyfonsarae x_add_trm_160 160NameTypeName Address ServerTime Device PortName FontAccess Xserver PanShape Mode Host Language Keyboard File Font Location LPFkeyport KeyRepeatRate Description The x_add_trm_160 command adds the Xstation 160 specified by the Name parameter to the current host and stores the configuration in the etc x_st_mgr xs160 cfg lt IPaddress gt file and the
281. h network type enter x_ls_net_fp An example of a listing of the font path elements with one network type defined follows Network Type Font Path Elements x_st_mgr ether usr lib X11 fonts Files usr lpp x_st_mgr bin x_Is_net_fp Contains the x_ls_net_fp command etc bootptab Contains the boot protocol table Related Information The aixterm command bootpd daemon login command pclient command x_add_nfs_fpe command x_add_trm_120 command x_add_trm_130 command x_add_trm_140 command x_add_trm_150 command x_add_trm_160 command x_add_xst_fpe command x_chg_net command x_chg_trm_120 command x_chg_trm_130 command x_chg_trm_140 command x_chg_trm_150 command x_chg_trm_160 command x_def_net command x_Is_net command x_Is_net_fp command x_Is_trm command x_rm_fpe command x_rm_net command x_rm_trm command x_ls_net_fp Command 170 Commands Reference Volume 6 x_Is_trm Command Purpose Lists the Xstations configured for the current host Syntax x te or Command x Le _trm x_Is_trm Description The x_Is_trm command displays for the current host information about each Xstation configured in the etc bootptab file The name network type hardware address and boot priority of each Xstation are displayed Security Access Control Only the root user should have execute x access to this command Examples To display the name network type and hardware address of each Xstation configured for the curr
282. haracter that specifies the font to be used d or D indicates the default font the font initially used when the xterm command was started 1 through 6 indicate the fonts specified by the font through font6 resources e or E indicates the normal and bold fonts that have been set through escape codes or specified as the second and third action arguments respectively and s or S indicates the font selection as made by programs such as the xfontsel program specified by the second action argument This action is similar to select start except that the selection is extended to the current pointer location This action is similar to select extend except that the selection is extended to the current text cursor position This action inserts the specified text string as if it had been typed Quotation is necessary if the string contains white space or nonalphanumeric characters If the string argument begins with the characters 0x it is interpreted as a hex character constant This action scrolls the text window backward so that text that had previously scrolled off the top of the screen is now visible The 299 Commands Reference Volume 6 Count argument indicates the number of Units which may be page halfpage pixel or line by which to scroll scroll forw Count Units This action scrolls is similar to scroll back except that it scrolls the other direction allow send events On Off Toggle This action set or toggle
283. hat executes an LALR 1 parsing algorithm The grammar can be ambiguous specified precedence rules are used to break ambiguities You must compile the output file y tab c with a C language compiler to produce a yyparse function This function must be loaded with the yylex lexical analyzer as well as with the main subroutine and the yyerror error handling subroutine you must provide these subroutines The lex command is useful for creating lexical analyzers usable by the yyparse subroutine Simple versions of main and yyerror subroutines are available through the yacc library liby a Also yace can be used to generate C output You can compile the yace generated C file y tab c with the DYACC_MSG option to include code necessary to use the Message Facility When you use this option during compilation error messages generated by the yyparse subroutine and the YY BACKUP macro are extracted from the yacc_user cat catalog This allows you to receive error messages in languages other than English in non English locales If the catalog cannot be found or opened the yyparse and YYBACKUP subroutines display the default English messages The yace command is affected by the LANG LC_ALL LC_CTYPE and LC_MESSAGES environment variables Flags b Prefix Use Prefix instead of y as the prefix for all output file names The code file y tab c the header file y tab h created when d is specified and the description file y output created
284. he connect or directory subcommand to establish a connection to the remote system 1 After logging in to the remote system and before pressing the MAINMENU_KEY usually the Ctrl Vkey sequence to return to ATE on the local system enter xmodem r myfile at the shell command line The xmodem protocol starts receive mode on the remote system xmodem Command 234 Commands Reference Volume 6 2 Press the MAINMENU_KEY to return to ATE on the local system The ATE Connected Main Menu displays 3 Enter the send subcommand at the prompt on the ATE Connected Main Menu s myfile The send subcommand instructs the local system to send my file to the remote system After transferring the file the ATE Connected Main Menu displays Receiving a File with the xmodem Protocol Receive the file infile from a remote system using xmodem protocol with the ate command and the connect or directory subcommand establishing a connection to the remote system 1 After logging in to the remote system and before pressing the MAINMENU_KEY usually the Ctrl V key sequence to return to ATE on the local system enter xmodem s infile at the shell command line The xmodem protocol starts in send mode on the remote system 2 Press the MAINMENU_KEY to return to ATE on the local system The ATE Connected Main Menu displays 3 Enter the receive subcommand at the prompt on the ATE Connected Main Menu r infile The receive subcommand instructs the loc
285. he current directory beginning with the name COPY It is also invoked from the tekcopy entry in tekMenu This action flashes the window quickly The Tektronix window also has the following action gin press L m M r R This action sends the indicated graphics input code The default bindings in the VT102 window are Shift lt KeyPress gt Prior scroll back 1 halfpage n Shift lt KeyPress gt Next scroll forw 1 halfpage n Shift lt KeyPress gt Select select cursor start select cursor end PRIMARY CUT_BUFFERO n Shift lt KeyPress gt Insert insert selection PRIMARY CUT_BUFFERO n Meta lt KeyPress gt insert seven bit n Meta lt KeyPress gt insert eight bit n Ctrl lt BtnlDown gt popup menu mainMenu n Lock Ctrl lt BtnlDown gt popup menu mainMenu n Meta lt BtnlDown gt select start n Meta lt BtniMotion gt select extend n Ctrl lt Btn2Down gt popup menu vtMenu n ILock Ctrl lt Btn2Down gt popup menu vtMenu n xterm Command 301 Ctrl Meta lt Btn2Down gt Ctrl Meta lt Btn2Up gt Ctrl lt Btn3Down gt Lock Ctrl lt Btn3Down gt Ctrl Meta lt Btn3Down gt Meta lt Btn3Motion gt lt BtnUp gt lt BtnDown gt Commands Reference Volume 6 ignore n insert selection PRIMARY CUT_BUFFERO n popup menu fontMenu n popup menu fontMenu n start extend n select extend n select end PRIMARY CUT_BUFFERO n b
286. hell to run the job in and if you want to be notified when the jobs starts This graphical dialog can also be started from an application using a Schedule action or a Schedule button The job is scheduled using the at command Remove or View Scheduled Jobs enables you to review and delete previously scheduled operations The xdat Command 192 Commands Reference Volume 6 application displays the user s scheduled jobs the date and time they are scheduled a description and umask for each job and directory from where each job will run Flags c Operation Specifies the job operation you want to schedule in the Schedule a Job application m Starts the Remove or View Scheduled Jobs application Example 1 To start Set Date and Time and change your system time enter xdat Enter the correct time and click the Set Date Time button If you want help on a field click the button and move the cursor over the field 2 To use Schedule a Job to schedule a backup of the root file system enter xdat c backup 0 u f dev rmt0 Set the date and time for the operation to run Specify the shell and mail options or accept the defaults 3 To start Remove or View Scheduled Jobs and remove a scheduled job enter xdat m Select the job you want to remove from the Scheduled Jobs field and click the Remove button Related Information Using the Visual System Management Applications in AIX Version 4 3 Quick Beginnings a
287. hernet IEEE 802 3 or token ring system This address is an Internet address unique to the gateway in dotted decimal format ddd ddd ddd ddd where 0 lt ddd lt 255 To designate a default gateway select a gateway that is on the same local network as the Xstation If the Xstation has more than one network connection you can set a gateway for each network When multiple gateways are defined for an Xstation only one default gateway can be used The configured gateway is determined during the boot process for the Xstation If the Xstation is booted from a token ring network the token ring gateway is selected otherwise the Ethernet gateway address is selected h7ype Specifies the type of physical network connection used for the terminal Ethernet or token ring or IEEE802 3 Press the F4 key in SMIT to select a network type Valid options are ethernet tokenring or ieee802 The default option is ethernet x_def_net Command 166 Commands Reference Volume 6 An Xstation network type must be defined for each network The same Xstation can be on multiple networks but must be configured with a different name and Internet address for each network mMask Specifies the subnet mask A network subnet mask is required for each gateway entry to tell the system what the subnet partitioning scheme is This 4 byte bit mask in dotted decimal format consists of the Network Address portion and the Subnet Address portion of the Internet address
288. hrome output on a LaserJet printer The Level variable is expressed as a percentage of full brightness Fractions are acceptable Specifies the device on which the file prints The xpr command supports the following printers 3812 or pp IBM PP3812 4207 Proprinter 5201 IBM Quietwriter 1 model 2 5202 IBM Quietwriter 2 Jprinter IBM Japanese Printer Japanese data stream jet HP LaserJet and IBM Laser Printer ps PostScript printers this is the default lips2 Canon LaserShot LIPS H mode lips3 Canon LaserShot LIPS III mode Indicates the dots per inch dpi density that the HP printer uses 300 dpi is the default Allowable densities are 300 150 100 and 75 dpi Specifies gray scale conversion to a color image rather than mapping to a black and white image The Number variable must be one of the following 2 2 x 2 conversion 3 3 x 3 conversion 4 4 x 4 conversion This conversion doubles triples or quadruples respectively the effective width and height of the image Note This option is valid only for PostScript printers Specifies a header string to print above the window Specifies the maximum height of the page Contains the captured bitmap of the image If you do not specify the ImageFile parameter the xpr command uses standard input Forces the window to print in landscape mode The display is laid out with the windows being wider than they are high By default a window prints so that its lon
289. hs 2 and should identify an Xstation by its location in the work place or by the primary user s name Name is stored in the etc hosts file Note Name should not start with a lowercase or an uppercase o or x followed by an octal or hexadecimal numeric These characters are interpreted as octal or hexadecimal numbers instead of as a terminal name In the examples x3 and xE4 the 3 and the E4 are hexadecimal numerics TypeName Specifies the name you defined for this network Xstation model subnet combination with the Define an Xstation Network Type option in SMIT or with the x_def_net command Press the F4 key in SMIT to select the network type An example is x_st_mgr ether130 for Ethernet and an Xstation 130 Address Specifies the Local Area Network LAN hardware address of the Xstation This address appears on the LAN Statistics screen when you power on the Xstation Each Xstation has a unique 6 byte hexadecimal hardware address in XXXXXXXXXXXX format that cannot be changed by the user Server Specifies whether the host system is a primary boot server A primary boot server responds immediately to a boot protocol broadcast request from an Xstation for other secondary boot servers a delay time is imposed see Time listed next Two options are valid y if the server is a primary server and n if the server is not a primary server The default option is y x_chg_trm_130 Command 151 Time Device PortName Disk Pixmaps
290. ht margin The default is False Specifies the maximum time in milliseconds between multiclick select events The default is 250 milliseconds Specifies whether scrolling should be done asynchronously The default is False Specifies the number of characters from the right margin at which the margin bell should be rung when enabled Specifies the foreground color of the pointer The default is XtDefaultForeground pointerColorBackground class Background pointerShape class Cursor resizeGravity class ResizeGravity reverseVideo class ReverseVideo reverseWrap class ReverseWrap saveLines class SaveLines scrollBar class ScrollBar scrollTtyOutput class ScrollCond scrollKey class ScrollCond scrollLines class ScrollLines xterm Command Specifies the background color of the pointer The default is XtDefaultBackground Specifies the name of the shape of the pointer The default is xterm Affects the behavior when the window is resized to be taller or shorter NorthWest specifies that the top line of text on the screen stays fixed If the window is made shorter lines are dropped from the bottom if the window is made taller blank lines are added at the bottom This is compatible with the behavior in MIT version X11R4 SouthWest the default specifies that the bottom line of text on the screen stays fixed If the window is made taller additional saved lines will be scrolled down onto the screen if the win
291. ides the fudge command which configures reference clocks in special ways This command has the following format fudge127 127 Type Unit timel Seconds time2 Seconds stratum Integer refid Integer flag1 011 flag2 011 flag3 011 flag4 011 The timel and time2 options are in fixed point seconds and used in some clock drivers as calibration constants The stratum option is a number in the range zero to 15 and used to assign a nonstandard operating stratum to the clock Since the xntpd daemon adds one to the stratum of each peer a primary server ordinarily displays stratum one In order to provide engineered backups use the stratum option to specify the reference clock stratum as greater than zero Except where noted this option applies to all clock drivers The refid option is an ASCII string in the range one to four characters and used to assign a nonstandard reference identifier to the clock xntpd Daemon 245 Commands Reference Volume 6 The binary flags flag1 flag2 flag3 and flag4 are for customizing the clock driver The interpretation of these values and whether they are used at all is a function of the needs of the particular clock driver Exit Status This command returns the following exit values 0 Successful completion gt 0 An error occurred Security Access Control You must have root authority to run this command Auditing Events N A Examples 1 To start the xntpd daemon enter star
292. il the desired file is displayed When the appropriate file is displayed enter s mycopy In this example the file is saved in a file named mycopy instead of the default mail file 5 To delete a message enter xget Press the Enter key after the question mark prompt until the desired file is displayed When the appropriate file is displayed enter d In this example the current file is deleted Files var spool secretmail User key Contains the encrypted key for User var spool secretmail User 0 9 Contains the encrypted mail messages for User usr bin xget Contains executable files Related Information The enroll command mail command xsend command Mail Overview in AIX Version 4 3 System User s Guide Communications and Networks Sending and Receiving Secret Mail in AIX Version 4 3 System User s Guide Communications and Networks xget Command 215 Commands Reference Volume 6 Mail Overview for System Management in AIX Version 4 3 System Management Guide Communications and Networks xget Command 216 Commands Reference Volume 6 xhost Command Purpose Controls who accesses Enhanced X Windows on the current host machine Syntax xhost Command xhost Name xhost Name Description The xhost command adds or deletes host names on the list of machines from which the X Server accepts connections This command must be run from the machine with the display connection You can remove
293. ime per command instance xwud in FileName noclick geometry Geometry display Display new std MapType raw vis visual_type visual_id help rv plane Number fg Color bg Color Description The xwud command retrieves the dumped image of an Enhanced X Windows window It does so by displaying in a window an image saved in a specially formatted dump file previously produced by the xwd command The dump file format is determined by the XWDFile h file You can use flags to specify color display window size and position input field and visual class or identification You can also select a single bit plane of the image to display Flags bgColor Specifies the color to display for the 0 zero bits in the image if a bitmap image or a single plane of an image is displayed displayDisplay Specifies the server to connect to see the X command fgColor Specifies the color to display for the 1 bits in the image if a bitmap image or a single plane of an image is displayed geometryGeometry Specifies the size and position of the window Typically you will only specify the position and let the size default to the actual size of the image help Prints a short description of the allowable options inFileName Specifies the input file on the command line If the input file is not specified the standard input is assumed new Creates a new color map for displaying the image
294. inese locale usr lib font devX100 Contains troff fonts for devX100 devices usr lib X11 fonts Contains X fonts for 100 dpi devices usr lib X11 fonts JP Contains X fonts for multi byte characters usr lib X11 fonts JP Contains X fonts for Japanese characters Related Information The cat command esplit command diff command lint command Ip command Ipr command pg command pr command qprt command sed command sort command tabs command X command xrdb command The eqn command grap command pic command tbl command troff command X command xrdb command AT amp T Bell Laboratories Computing Science Technical Report No 14 GRAP A Language for Typesetting xpreview Command 263 Commands Reference Volume 6 Graphs Tutorial and User Manual by John L Bentley and Brian W Kernighan The nl_langinfo subroutine in Technical Reference Base Operating System and Extensions Some Applications of Inverted Indexes on the UNIX System by M E Lesk UNIX System V Documentor s Workbench Reference Manual ISBN 0 13 943580 8 Prentice Hall xpreview Command 264 Commands Reference Volume 6 xprintm Command Purpose Starts Print Manager a Visual System Management VSM application Syntax xpristm Command einen xprintm Description The xprintm command starts Print Manager one of the Visual System Management VSM applications Print Manager is a graphical interface that enables you to perform printer and que
295. ion Causes the xlock command to display monochrome black and white pixels rather than the default colored ones on color displays Causes the xlock command to only draw the patterns and not to lock the display A keypress or a mouse click terminates the screen saver Allows remote locking of X11 servers This flag should be used with care It is intended mainly to lock X11 terminals that cannot run the xlock command locally If you lock a workstation other than your own that person will need your password to unlock it The remote option does not disable your ability to toggle to another shell Allows using the keystroke which obtained the password screen as the first input character in the password The default ignores the first keystroke Minus prefix enables the verbose mode to tell which options the xlock command is going to use The plus prefix is the default 226 Commands Reference Volume 6 xlsfonts Command Purpose Displays the font list for X Windows Syntax Histonts Command sieto 1 C display HoseDispiay in Pattem m A Cobmns a u I be H w WA xlsfonts display Host Display 1 1 1 m C 1 w Width n Columns u o fn Pattern Description The xlsfonts command lists the fonts that match a specified Pattern parameter Use the wildcard character x asterisk to match any sequence of characters including none and the question mark to mat
296. ion off and on again and maintain an established connection to the remote host Valid options are broadcast Sends a message to the network and waits for an xdmcp host to respond direct Directs a request to an xdmcp manager known to the Xstation indirect Sends an indirect request to an xdmcp manager that maintains a list of xdmcp hosts The manager assigns an xdmcp host to respond to the Xstation off No X Display Manager Control Protocol XDMCP The default option is off Security Access Control Only the root user should have execute x access to this command Examples 1 To add an Xstation 140 named taylor with all configuration performed on the host enter the following x_add_trm_140 n taylor t x_st_mgr ether ha 10005ac38e9 s y w 00 d mouse tp S1 a none n x Base FLASH hp none xdm off h none 1 English United States IBM 850 k English United States kf keyboard fn Rom14 g Upper left lp none r 20 This entry adds Xstation taylor to the current host with the following characteristics Model 140 A network type of ethernet A hardware address of 10005ac38e9 Primary server status No delay time Input from a mouse Tablet port is ignored Bootfile from Base FLASH boot option No hardware pan feature XDMCP mode off No host name United States English LANG variable United States English keyboard layout Standard keyboard file Login window font Rom14
297. ion with the Define an Xstation Network Type option in SMIT or with the x_def_net command Press the F4 key in SMIT to select a network type An example is x_st_mgr ether120 for Ethernet and an Xstation 120 Address Specifies the Local Area Network LAN hardware address of the Xstation This address appears on the LAN Statistics screen when you power on the Xstation Each Xstation has a unique 6 byte hexadecimal hardware address in XXXXXXXXXXXX format that cannot be changed by the user Server Specifies whether the host system is a primary boot server A primary boot server responds immediately to a boot protocol broadcast request from an Xstation for other secondary boot servers a delay time is imposed see the Time parameter below Two options are valid y if the server is a primary server and n if the server is not a primary server The default option is y Time Specifies the number of seconds a secondary boot server must wait before answering a x_chg_trm_120 Command 148 Device PanShape Mode Host Language Keyboard File Font Location Commands Reference Volume 6 boot protocol broadcast request The valid number for a primary server is 0 because there is no delay time In SMIT press the F4 key to see the recommended range of values Generally a value less than the minimum value does not distinguish between a primary and secondary server and a secondary server may be selected even when the primary server i
298. ions Commands Reference Volume 6 Enables or disables mail notification during the current session Notifies users of incoming mail Determines who mail is from Starts the Internet Message Access Protocol IMAP server process Sends and receives mail Prints the contents of the mail queue Displays statistics about mail traffic Sends and receives mail Reads system messages Builds a new copy of the alias database from the etc aliases file Starts the Post Office Protocol Version 3 POP3 server process Handles remote mail received through Basic Networking Utilities BNU Routes mail for local or network delivery Cleans up the sendmail queue for periodic housekeeping Receives secret mail in a secure communication channel Sends secret mail in a secure communication channel 356 Commands Reference Volume 6 Commands List Message Handler ali anno ap bugfiler burst comp conflict dist dp folder folders forw inc install_mh mark mhl mhmail mhpath msgchk msh next Lists mail aliases and their addresses Annotates messages Parses and reformats addresses Automatically stores bug reports in specified mail directories Explodes digests into messages Composes a message Searches for alias and password conflicts Redistributes a message to additional addresses Parses and reformats dates Selects and lists folders and messages
299. iring the user to select a window with the pointer This option is specific to X11R5 name Name Indicates that the window with the specified WM_NAME property should be selected for the window dump without requiring the user to select a window with the pointer This option is specific to X11R5 xwd Command 310 Commands Reference Volume 6 icmap Forces the first installed colormap of the screen to be used to obtain RGB values By default the colormap of the chosen window is used This option is specific to X11R5 screen Indicates that the GetImage request used to obtain the image should be done on the root window rather than directly on the specified window In this way you can obtain pieces of the other windows that overlap the specified window and more importantly capture menus or other popups that are independent windows but appear over the specified window This option is specific to X11R5 xy Selects xy format dumping instead of the default z format This option applies to color displays only File XWDFile h X Window dump file format definition file Related Information The xwud command xwd Command 311 Commands Reference Volume 6 xwud Command Purpose Retrieves and displays the dumped image of an Enhanced X Windows window Syntax xwud Command xwud splay Display ig Color geometry Geometry help Ain FileWarne 1 Use as many optional flags as needed Do not use a flag more than one t
300. is vi or vedit Command 47 Commands Reference Volume 6 subcommand within the ex editor you do not need to type the colon w File Overwrites the file specified by the File parameter with the edit buffer contents If you are using this subcommand within the ex editor you do not need to type the colon Editing a Second File Enter the following subcommands in command mode If you need information about the format of vi subcommands see vi General Subcommand Syntax seFile Edits the specified file If you are using this subcommand from the ex editor you do not need to type the colon ce Re edits the current file and discards all changes e File Edits the specified file starting at the end e Number File Edits the specified file starting at the specified line number e Edits the alternate file The alternate file is usually the previous file name before accessing another file with a e command However if changes are pending on the current file when a new file is called the new file becomes the alternate file This subcommand is the same as the Ctrl A subcommand r File Reads the file into the editing buffer by adding new lines below the current line If you are using this subcommand from the ex editor you do not need to type the colon r Command Runs the specified AIX command and places its output into the file by adding new lines below the current cursor position staTag Edits a file containing
301. is y Specifies the number of seconds a secondary boot server must wait before answering a boot protocol broadcast request The valid number for a primary server is 0 because there is no delay time In SMIT press the F4 key to see the recommended range of values Generally a value less than the minimum value does not distinguish between a primary and secondary server and a secondary server may be selected even when the primary server is available A value greater than the maximum value may lead to a timeout Specifies the way to access the Xserver file list In SMIT press the F4 key to select an option The default value is Base FLASH Specifies the mode used by XDMCP uses the xdm program to facilitate the connection of an Xstation to a remote host XDMCP allows the user to turn an Xstation off and on again and maintain an established connection to the remote host Valid options are broadcast x_chg_trm_140 Command 156 Commands Reference Volume 6 Sends a message to the network and waits for an xdmcp host to respond direct Directs a request to an xdmcp manager known to the Xstation indirect Sends an indirect request to an xdmcp manager that maintains a list of xdmcp hosts The manager assigns an xdmcp host to respond to the Xstation off No X Display Manager Control Protocol XDMCP The default option is off Security Access Control Only the root user should have execute x access to this command Example To chang
302. issions and ownership of the new device special files are duplicated to those of the volume group special file If you have changed the permissions and or ownership of the device special files of the logical volume on the node it was created you will need to perform the same changes on this node If the volume group cannot be varied on due to a loss of the majority of physical volumes a list of all physical volumes with their status is displayed To varyon the volume group in this situation you will need to use the force option The varyonvg will fail to varyon the volume group if a majority of the physical volumes are not accessible no Quorum This condition is true even if the quorum checking is disabled Disabling the quorum checking will only ensure that the volume group stays varied on even in the case of loss of quorum The volume group will not varyon if there are any physical volumes in PV_MISSING state and the quorum checking is disabled This condition is true even if there are a quorum of disks available To varyon on in this situation either use the force option or set an environment variable MISS INGPV_VARYON to TRUE set this value in etc environment if the volume group needs to be varied with missing disks at the boot time In the above cases using force varyon option and using MISSINGPV_VARYON variable you take full responsibility for the volume group integrity varyonvg Command 22 Commands Refe
303. issions to other users pax Extracts writes and lists members of archive files copies files and directory hierarchies pg Formats files to the display restore Copies previously backed up file systems or files created by the backup command from a local device rm Removes unlinks files or directories rmvfs Removes entries in the ete vfs file split Splits a file into pieces sum Displays the checksum and block count of a file tar Manipulates archives tee Displays the output of a program and copies it into a file touch Updates the access and modification times of a file umask Displays or sets the file mode creation mask unlink Performs an unlink subroutine Commands List File Contents awk Finds lines in files matching patterns and then performs specified actions on them Files and Directories 371 bdiff bfs cmp colrm comm comp compress csplit cut diff diff3 dircmp egrep expand fformat forep fold genxlt grep head iconv join localedef Files and Directories Commands Reference Volume 6 Uses the diff command to find differences in very large files Scans files Compares two files Extracts columns from a file Selects or rejects lines common to two sorted files Composes a message Compresses and expands data Splits files by context Writes out selected bytes characters or fields from each line of a file Compares text files
304. istered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation POSIX is a trademark of the Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers IEEE PostScript is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated Proprinter is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation Quickwriter is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation Trademarks and Acknowledgements Commands Reference Volume 6 Quiet is a trademark of International Business Machines Corporation RS 6000 is a trademark of International Business Machines Corporation RT is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation Sun is a trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc Tektronix is a trademark of Tektronix Inc Televideo is a trademark of Televideo Inc The Source is a service mark of Source Telecomputing Corp a subsidiary of The Reader s Digest Assn Inc UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States and other countries licensed exclusively through X Open Company Limited WY 5S0 is a trademark of the WYSE Corporation WYSE is a trademark of WYSE Corporation Trademarks and Acknowledgements 6 Commands Reference Volume 6 About This Book This book is Volume 6 of the six volume AIX Version 4 3 Commands Reference SBOF 1877 which contains reference information on Advanced Interactive Executive AIX Operating System commands It describes the tasks each command performs how commands can
305. it is safest to enter secure mode before the prompt gets displayed and to make sure that the prompt gets displayed correctly in the new colors to minimize the probability of spoofing You can also bring up the menu again and make sure that a check mark appears next to the entry Secure Keyboard mode will be disabled automatically if your xterm window becomes iconified or otherwise unmapped or if you start up a reparenting window manager that places a title bar or other decoration around the window while in Secure Keyboard mode This is a feature of the X protocol not easily overcome When this happens the foreground and background colors will be switched back and the bell will sound in warning Character Classes Clicking the middle mouse button twice in rapid succession will cause all characters of the same class such as letters white space punctuation to be selected Since different people have different preferences for what should be selected for example should file names be selected as a whole or only the separate subnames the default mapping can be overridden through the use of the charClass class CharClass resource This resource is a series of comma separated range value pairs The range is either a single number or low high in the range of 0 to 127 corresponding to the ASCII code for the character or characters to be set The value is arbitrary although the default table uses the character number of the first character oc
306. it will invoke SMIT s Configure a Basic NIM Environment Easy Startup from AIX Version 4 2 if the NIM master is not configured This allows you to define the basic elements needed for performing network installation operations In AIX Version 4 2 1 the xinstallm application allows you to install from a network device providing a graphical user interface for clients in a NIM environment Flags machines Starts the NIM GUI to define and manipulate NIM machines and groups You can also perform diag_boot maint_boot reset and reboot operations on a machine or machine group networks Starts the NIM GUI to define and manipulate NIM networks and routes It also provides a utility to display all of the machines defined on a particular network resources Starts the NIM GUI to define and manipulate NIM resources You can also perform check and showres operations on NIM resources using this application xnim Command 239 Commands Reference Volume 6 Security Access Control You must have root authority to run the xnim command Related Information The xinstallm command xnim Command 240 Commands Reference Volume 6 XNSquery Command Purpose Queries a Xerox Network Systems XNS host or router for routing information Syntax XMSquery Command hesrhbiniKNBquery Host usr sbin XNSqueryHost Description The usr sbin XNSquery command obtains routing information from the remote XNS host or router The local host
307. itial connection the session is over and the terminal is required to close all other connections Controlling XDM The xdm command responds to two signals SIGHUP and SIGTERM When sent a SIGHUP xdm rereads the configuration file the access control file and the servers file For the servers file it notices if entries have been added or removed If a new entry has been added the xdm command starts a session on the associated display Entries that have been removed are disabled immediately meaning that any session in progress is ended without notice and no new session is started When sent a SIGTERM the xdm command stops all sessions in progress and exits This can be used when shutting down the system xdm Command 207 Commands Reference Volume 6 The xdm command attempts to mark its various subprocesses for use by the ps command in AIX Commands Reference by editing the command line argument list in place Because the xdm command cannot allocate additional space for this task it is useful to start the xdm command with a reasonably long command line using the full path name should be enough Each process that is servicing a display is marked display Other Possibilities You can use the xdm command to run a single session at a time using the xinit command options or other suitable daemons by specifying the server on the command line xdm server 0 local usr bin X11 X 0 force It might also run a file server and a collection
308. iting buffer Do not name a vi file using the vi command or type anything into the buffer after the vi editor starts Press the Esc key to be sure you are in the command mode To list abbreviations Enter the ab command to list existing abbreviations Press the Enter key to return to command mode To remove abbreviations Enter the anabAbbreviation command to remove an abbreviation where the Abbreviation variable specifies the character string you do not want abbreviated any more To set define an abbreviation Enter the ab Abbreviation String command to set an abbreviation Flags CSubcommand y wNumber yNumber where the Abbreviation variable specifies the character string being defined as an abbreviation and the String variable specifies the character string being abbreviated The abbreviation can be substituted for the string only when the abbreviation is a separate word For example if you enter the ab kn upper command and then type acknowledge while in the text input mode the set abbreviation string is not started because the kn string in the word acknowledge is not a separate word However if you type the ab kn upper command and then type make the kn line all kncase while in the text input mode the resultismake the upper line all uppercase Carries out the ex editor subcommand before viewing with vi begins The cursor moves to the line affected by the last subcommand to be carried out When a null operan
309. ity status Generates a packet trace report from the specified packet trace file Provides interface level packet tracing for Internet protocols Displays information about previous logins Writes information about current locale or all public locales Makes entries in the system log Prepares printer plotter accounting records Interprets the contents of the various system tables and writes it to standard output Summarizes accounting records Collects and stores binary data in the var adm sa sadd file Writes a daily report in the var adm sa sardd file Provides a system activity report package Collects reports or saves system activity information Gathers system configuration information Lists the status of HCON session profiles and SNA logical unit LU pools sysdumpstart Provides a command line interface to start a kernel dump to the primary or secondary dump sysline syslogd tput uname uptime users BSD vmstat w watch who whoami whois device Displays system status on the status line of a terminal Logs system messages Queries the terminal descriptor files in the terminfo database Displays the name of the current operating system Shows how long the system has been up Displays a compact list of users currently on the system Reports virtual memory statistics Prints a summary of current system activity Observes a program that may be untrustworthy Identifies the users currently logged in Displa
310. ke no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose It is provided as is without express or implied warranty This software and documentation is based in part on the Fourth Berkeley Software Distribution under license from The Regents of the University of California We acknowledge the following institutions for their role in its development the Electrical Engineering and Computer Sciences Department at the Berkeley Campus The Rand MH Message Handling System was developed by the Rand Corporation and the University of California Portions of the code and documentation described in this book were derived from code and documentation developed under the auspices of the Regents of the University of California and have been acquired and modified under the provisions that the following copyright notice and permission notice appear Copyright Regents of the University of California 1986 1987 1988 1989 All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted provided that this notice is preserved and that due credit is given to the University of California at Berkeley The name of the University may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission This software is provided as is without express or implied warranty Portions of the code and documentation described in this book were derived from code and documentation Commands Refere
311. kground you can continue to work and enter other commands on your system At times you might want to run a command at a specified time or on a specific date Using the cron daemon you can schedule commands to run automatically Or using the at and batch commands you can run commands at a later time or when the system load level permits Entering Commands When you work with AIX you typically enter commands following the shell prompt on the command line The shell prompt can vary In the following examples is the prompt To display a list of the contents of your current directory you would type Is and press the Enter key ls When you enter a command and it is running the operating system does not display the shell prompt When the command completes its action the system displays the prompt again This indicates that you can enter another command The general format for entering AIX commands is Command Flag s Parameter The flag alters the way a command works Many commands have several flags For example if you type the l long flag following the Is command the system provides additional information about the contents of the current directory The following example shows how to use the I flag with the Is command ls 1 A parameter consists of a string of characters that follows a command or a flag It specifies data such as the About This Book 10 Commands Reference Volume 6 name of a file or directory or va
312. king a specific location in a file and returning e Adding text to a file e Changing text while in input mode e Changing text from command mode e Copying and moving text e Restoring and repeating changes Marking a Specific Location in a File and Returning Enter the following subcommands in command mode You can cancel an incomplete subcommand by pressing the Esc key If you need information about the format of vi subcommands see vi General Subcommand Syntax Moves the cursor to the previous location of the current line Moves the cursor to the beginning of the line containing the previous location of the current line mx Marks the current position with the letter specified by the x parameter x Moves the cursor to the mark specified by the x parameter x Moves the cursor to the beginning of the line containing the mark specified by the x parameter Adding Text to a File Text Input Mode Enter the following subcommands in command mode to change the vi editor into text input mode If you need information about the format of vi subcommands see vi General Subcommand Syntax aText Inserts text specified by the Text parameter after the cursor End text input mode by pressing the Esc key AText Adds text specified by the Text parameter to the end of the line End text input mode by pressing the vi or vedit Command 45 Commands Reference Volume 6 Esc key iText Inserts text specified by the Text parameter before the cursor
313. ks that are done with SMIT The Logical Volume Storage Overview in AIX Version 4 3 System Management Concepts Operating System and Devices explains the Logical Volume Manager physical volumes logical volumes volume groups organization ensuring data integrity and allocation characteristics varyoffvg Command 21 Commands Reference Volume 6 varyonvg Command Purpose Activates a volume group Syntax varyors vary onvg varyonvg b c f n p s u VolumeGroup Description The varyonvg command activates the volume group specified by the VolumeGroup parameter and all associated logical volumes A volume group that is activated is available for use When a volume group is activated physical partitions are synchronized if they are not current A list of all physical volumes with their status is displayed to standard output whenever there is some discrepancy between the Device Configuration Database and the information stored in the Logical Volume Manager The volume group may or may not be varied on You must carefully examine the list and take proper action depending on each reported status to preserve your system integrity A list of every status and its meanings can be found in the lvm_varyonvg subroutine While varying on in concurrent mode if the varyon process detects that there are logical volumes which are not previously known to the system their definitions are imported The perm
314. l should you encounter false virus warnings Creates a list of files that tested positive This is useful if you want to have a list of infected files for use in a cleanup process If the File variable is not specified the positive vir default output file will be created in the current directory However the file will not be created unless a virus signature is found Enables the display of only those messages that are indications that a viral signature has been found error messages and warnings that troublesome viruses have been found Disables the display of all messages except fatal error messages and warnings that troublesome viruses have been found The only indication that viral signatures have been found is the error level returned by the virscan command Uses a non default signature file for this scan By default the virscan command uses the signatures in the usr lib security scan virsig lst file and the usr lib security scan addenda Ist file if present for its scan However this flag disables the use of these default signature files and causes the virscan command to use the signature file specified by the File variable To use a default signature file as well as a user defined signature file the default signature file must be separately and explicitly specified with the s flag Scans only the specified file for viral signatures Causes the virscan command to display both a list of files as they are scanned and a hexadecimal
315. la AN EE tn nn a sade santo tra Fae atne be n e de ne donne dead Lo do a ile son 64 Wall Eorna aa Feia SEENE E nine RAT 66 watch Command saroien et a nn ENa E Aaaa OESE O SA a T bleiben 67 We Command rean ae RE RS R E a nn en nest 69 What COMMANG ensien aer areae a eE eaaa EAE EE E EEE EEE ts leo snus duce E EAEE EE 72 Whatis COMMANDE A TE E E EE SEAE E E SE EE ETA E E 74 whatnow Commandant bie a tia as walsh ER ren nn As 76 wh reis Command i55 sestt ti nn ere a Re ner ae ce nt 81 which Commandi ssss hit ea at Lin tent relate dette cet done de dt est etant 83 which hleset Command de een nn tt te trente siens terne ten ee AS 84 Who Command snif ini al AS ade ent on ln es Momie te tnt nine 86 wWhoami Command 35888 nn en TT en nn dont den E ee TS 90 Whois Command smith il tte tent asnrtatie net EEEE scagessaviceu seb adenbavaneees 91 Whom Command M RSR RE ar oran dns da fi detre din N ot ent 93 wimentrl Command sinini en er em RS nid ea RI BUR EE 96 wimstat Command ie whedon Me A a e an UA BG aug EES 98 Write Commande ns nn sess M dues chs in ne ne sbi ce Entre fe eco do orale d 100 Wrtles tv Daemon Len en A M oe rate Mn En 105 WSMSEFVER Command rise er nest ie dent ne eee in re remote nine tn 107 wtmpfix Commands resume int nnt sleet EE oda Made inter in nt 109 W mp Commande atteste frise sfr e tte aa aeea aeea eea e aee Passant tt stef 111 De COMMANT LR EE Tnt den EES METAR 113 x add 1s 1pe Commande sieren eE a rE EE e ENE
316. lag Do not specify both flags at the same time vi General Subcommand Syntax Use the following general syntax to enter subcommands Named_Buffer Operator Number Object Note Square brackets indicate optional items Named_Buffer Specifies a temporary text storage area Operator Specifies the subcommand or action instructs the vi editor Number Specifies either the extent of the action or a line address as a whole number Object Specifies what to act on such as a text object a character word sentence paragraph section character string or a text position a line position in the current line screen position Counts before Subcommands You can put a number in front of many subcommands The vi editor interprets this number in one of the following ways Go to the line specified by the Number parameter 5G 102 e Go to the column specified by the Number parameter 25 e Scroll the number of lines up or down specified by the Number parameter 10Ctr1 U 10Ctrl D vi Editor Subcommands Use the subcommands to perform these kinds of actions e Moving the cursor e Editing text e Manipulating files e Other actions Moving the Cursor Use subcommands to move the cursor within a file in these ways e Moving within a line e Moving within a line by character position e Moving to words vi or vedit Command 42 Commands Reference Volume 6 e Moving by line position e Moving to sentences paragraphs or sec
317. lays the values of given keys within an NIS map yppasswd Changes your network password in NIS yppasswdd Receives and executes requests from the yppasswd command yppoll Displays the order number ID number of the NIS map currently in use on the server yppush Prompts the NIS slave servers to copy updated NIS maps ypserv Looks up information in local NIS maps ypset Directs a client machine to a specific server ypupdated Updates information in NIS maps ypwhich Identifies either the NIS server or the server that is the master for a given map ypxfr Transfers an NIS map from an NIS server to a local host Commands List Network Management mosy Converts the ASN 1 definitions of Structure and Identification of Management Information SMI and Management Information Base MIB modules into objects definition files for the snmpinfo command snmpd Starts the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP agent daemon as a background process snmpinfo Requests or modifies values of Management Information Base MIB variables managed by a Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP agent Commands List STREAMS autopush Configures lists of automatically pushed STREAMS modules sels Produces a list of module and driver names strace Prints STREAMS trace messages strchg Changes stream configuration strload Commands List Message Handler 362 strconf strclean strerr Daemon Commands Reference Volume 6 Loads and co
318. lcs mit edu xenon lcs mit edu force extract to contact xenon lxtra lcs mit edu dummy disallow indirect access lcs mit edu SHOSTS all others get to choose Chooser For X terminals that do not offer a host menu for use with Broadcast or Indirect queries the chooser program can do this for them In the Xaccess file specify CHOOSER as the first entry in the Indirect host list The chooser program sends a Query request to each of the remaining host names in the list and offers a menu of all the hosts that respond The list may consist of the word BROADCAST in which case chooser sends a Broadcast query instead again offering a menu of all hosts that respond The following is an example Xaccess file using chooser extract lcs mit edu CHOOSER SHOSTS offer a menu of these hosts xtra lcs mit edu CHOOSER BROADCAST offer a menu of all hosts The program to use for chooser is specified by the DisplayManager DISPLAY chooser resource Resources for this program can be put into the file named by the DisplayManager DISPLAY resources resource The chooser has been implemented using a Motif SelectionBox Widget Refer to the XmSelectionBoxWidget Class documentation for a description of resources and widget or gadget names Server Specification The resource DisplayManager servers gives a server specification or if the values starts with a slash the name of a file containing server specifications one per line Each specification indicates
319. ld be accepted as is or stripped when printed The default is True Specifies the name of the normal font The default is fixed Specifies the name of the first alternative font Specifies the name of the second alternative font Specifies the name of the third alternative font Specifies the name of the fourth alternative font Specifies the name of the fifth alternative font Specifies the name of the sixth alternative font Specifies the preferred size and position of the VT102 window hpLowerleftBugCompat class hpLowerleftBugCompat xterm Command Specifies whether to work around a bug in xdb which ignores termcap and always sends ESC F to move to the lower left corner true causes xterm in interpret ESC F as a request to 291 Commands Reference Volume 6 internalBorder class Border Width jumpScroll class JumpScroll loginShell class LoginShell marginBell class MarginBell multiClickTime class MultiClickTime multiScroll class MultiScroll nMarginBell class Column pointerColor class Foreground move to the lower left corner of the screen The default is false Specifies the number of pixels between the characters and the window border The default is 2 Specifies whether jump scrolling should be used The default is True Specifies whether the shell to be run in the window should be started as a login shell The default is False Specifies whether the bell should be run when the user types near the rig
320. lection If the key or button bindings specify that an X selection is to be made the xterm command will leave the selected text highlighted for as long as it is the selection owner Pointer button 2 usually middle types pastes the text from the PRIMARY selection if any otherwise from the cut buffer inserting it as keyboard input Pointer button 3 usually right extends the current selection If pressed while closer to the right edge of the selection than the left it extends or contracts the right edge of the selection If you contract the selection past the left edge of the selection the xterm command assumes you really meant the left edge restores the original selection and then extends or contracts the left edge of the selection And the opposite also applies if pressed while closer to the left edge of the selection than the right it extends contracts the left edge of the selection If you contract the selection past the right edge of the selection the xterm command assumes you really meant the right edge restores the original selection and then extends contracts the right edge of the selection Extension starts in the selection unit mode that the last xterm Command 295 Commands Reference Volume 6 selection or extension was performed in you can multiple click to cycle through them By cutting and pasting pieces of text without trailing new lines you can take text from several places in different windows and form a comm
321. led on the frontend to support the submission manipulation and cancelation of files larger than 2 gigabytes However the default AIX printer backend the piobe command does not support files of this size This means print jobs larger than 2 gigabytes can either be sent to a remote printer or print server that can handle these large files or an alternate user or vendor supplied backend that comprehends large files could be used Note A print job larger than 2 gigabytes would likely take several days to complete Finally there are commands for which the user files used are not reasonably expected to ever be larger than 2 gigabytes For example although a directory may contain large files the directory file itself may not exceed 2 gigabytes Hence commands such as mkdir and rmdir do not support large directories Other examples in which support is unnecessary would be using the wall command to broadcast the contents of extremely large files to all terminals or using the nroff command to process over 2 gigabytes of written text in a single file Commands That Support Files Larger Than 2 Gigabytes The following commands all support files larger than 2 gigabytes Commands which do not appear on the list do not support large files Commands with limited large file support are marked with an asterisk and an explanation of their limitations follow the list Appendix A Command Support for Files Larger than 2 Gigabytes 348 Commands Reference
322. lication Kayped DECPAM ESC gt Normal Keypad DECPNM ESC D index INO Next Line NEL ESC W Tab Set HTS ESC W Reverse Index Pe ESC N 1 Singe Snn Select of G2 Character Set B52 ANECIA x character only ESC Singje GNN Golec of GS Character Set DER Acts character only ESCI P A ECC Daa Conun Saing La py naad Rat be printable characte ESC 2 Petun Terminal 10 DECI Obsolete form of ESC IL _ a ESC A eee 1 ESCIC IL gt CA Cursor Up P Times d faut 1 CUU ESC IAB Cursor Down P Times datauit 1 CUD ESCI a Cusor Forward P Times detautt 1 CUF ESC 0 Cursor Backward P Times default 1 CUB EC ICI P CR ESC I PL K ES L a LM ESC P CP xterm Command Cursor Position jrow column cetaut 1 11 CUP Erase in Display ED Pe Cer Below detent P 1 Cow Abowe P al 2 gt Cow All Erase in Line EL Pe O gt Clear t Right detauty P gt Caa io Lati A 2 gt Gee AN koeni P Lines default 1 IL Delete P Lines defaut 1 DL Deime P Characters default 1 DOH 304 Ps Commands Reference Volume 6 1 Ps 1 Pa 4 Ps T hitain hiie mouse racking Paramaters eae State Stany FiretFow LastRow See Mouse ECCO aE Sand Device Attributes DA ESC TJ Ps ESC iT a CE P 0 or omitted gt Request attrbu
323. line must be within the limit specified by the s Size flag Exit Status This command returns the following exit values 0 All invocations of the Command parameter returned exit status 0 1 125 A command line meeting the specified requirements could not be assembled one or more of the invocations of the Command parameter returned a non zero exit status or some other error occurred 126 Command was found but could not be invoked 127 Command could not be found If a command line meeting the specified requirements cannot be assembled the command cannot be invoked an invocation of the command is terminated by a signal or an invocation of the command exits with exit status 255 The xargs command will write a diagnostic message and exit without processing any remaining input Examples 1 To use a command on files whose names are listed in a file enter xargs lint a lt cfiles If the cfiles file contains the following text main c readit c gettoken c putobj c the xargs command constructs and runs the following command lint a main c readit c gettoken c putobj c If the cfiles file contains more file names than fit on a single shell command line up to LINE_MAX the xargs command runs the lint command with the file names that fit It then constructs and runs another lint command using the remaining file names Depending on the names listed in the cfiles file the commands might look like the following lint a main c
324. ll of the relevant files The following is a reasonable configuration file which could be named xdm config xdm Command 195 Commands Reference Volume 6 DisplayManager servers usr lib X11 xdm Xservers DisplayManager errorLogFile usr lib X11 xdm xdm errors DisplayManager resources usr lib X11 xdm Xresources DisplayManager startup usr lib X11 xdm Xstartup DisplayManager session usr lib X11 xdm Xsession DisplayManager pidFile usr lib X11 xdm xdm pid DisplayManager _ 0 authorize true DisplayManager authorize false Note that this file simply contains references to other files Note also that some of the resources are specified with an asterisk separating the components These resources can be made unique for each display by replacing the asterisk with the display name but normally this is not very useful See the Resources section on the next page for a complete discussion The first file usr lib X11 xdm Xservers contains the list of displays to manage that are not using XDMCP Most workstations have only one display numbered 0 zero so the file looks something like this 0 Local local usr bin X11 X force This keeps usr bin X11 X running on this display and manages a continuous cycle of sessions The usr lib X11 xdm xdm errors file contains error messages from xdm and anything output to standard error by Xsetup Xstartup Xsession or Xreset scripts If you have trouble starting the xdm
325. lly this feature is used to allow the user to escape from the ordinary session when it fails This allows users to repair their own xsession if it fails without requiring administrative intervention The section Typical Usage demonstrates this feature Reset Program The Xreset script is run after the user session has ended Run as root it should contain commands that undo the effects of commands in Xstartup by removing entries from etc utmp or unmounting directories from file servers The environment variables that are passed to Xstartup are also passed to Xreset This program is symmetrical with the Xstartup program Controlling the Server The xdm command controls local servers using POSIX signals The SIGHUP signal is expected to reset the server closing all client connections and performing other cleanup duties The SIGTERM signal is expected to cancel the server If these signals do not perform the expected actions the resources DisplayManager DISPLAY resetSignal and DisplayManager DISPLAY termSignal can specify alternate signals To control remote terminals that are not using XDMCP the xdm command searches the window hierarchy on the display and uses the protocol request KillClient in an attempt to clean up the terminal for the next session This may not actually cause all of the clients to become inactive as only those which have created windows will be noticed XDMCP provides a more sure mechanism when the xdm command closes its in
326. lock modifier keycode Number KeySymbolName Assigns the list of key symbols to the indicated keycode which can be specified in decimal hex or octal and be determined by running the xev program in the usr Ipp X11 Xamples demos directory Usually only one key symbol is assigned to a given code keysym KeySymbolName KeySymbolName The KeySymbolName on the left hand side is translated into matching keycodes used to perform the corresponding set of keycode expressions The list of keysym names may be found in the keysym database usr lib X11 XKeysymDB or the header file X11 keysymdef h without the XK_ prefix Note that if the same keysym is bound to multiple keys the expression is run for each matching keycode pointer default Sets the pointer map back to its default settings such as button 1 generates a code of 1 button 2 generates a 2 and so forth pointer Button Button2 Button3 Sets the pointer map to contain the indicated button codes The list always starts with the first physical button remove ModifierName KeySymbolName Removes all keys containing the given keysyms from the indicated modifier map Unlike add the keysym names are evaluated as the line is read in This allows for the removal of keys from a modifier without having to worry about whether or not they have been reassigned Lines that begin with an exclamation point are taken as comments If you want to change the binding of a modifier
327. low text cursor is displayed whenever the pointer moves out of the window or the window loses the input focus appcursorDefault class AppcursorDefault If True the cursor keys are initially in application mode The default is False appkeypadDefault class AppkeypadDefault If True the keypad keys are initially in application mode The default is False autoWrap class AutoWrap Specifies whether auto wraparound should be enabled The default is True xterm Command 290 Commands Reference Volume 6 bellSuppressTime class BellSuppressTime boldFont class BoldFont c132 class C132 charClass class CharClass curses class Curses cutNewline class cutNewline Specifies the number of milliseconds after a bell command is sent during which additional bells will be suppressed The default is 200 If set to nonzero additional bells will also be suppressed until the server reports that processing of the first bell has been completed this feature is most useful with the visible bell Specifies the name of the bold font to use instead of overstriking Specifies whether the VT 102 DECCOLM escape sequence should be honored The default is False Specifies comma separated lists of character class bindings of the form low high value These are used in determining which sets of characters should be treated the same when doing cut and paste See Character Classes Specifies whether the last column bug in the
328. lowing examples show the different formats used for the login time field 10 25am The user logged in within the last 24 hours Tue10am The user logged in between 24 hours and 7 days 12Mar91 The user logged in more than 7 days ago If a user name is specified with the User parameter the output is restricted to that user Flags h Suppresses the heading l Prints the summary in long form This is the default s Prints the summary in short form In the short form the tty is abbreviated and the login time system unit time and command arguments are omitted u Prints the time of day amount of time since last system startup number of users logged on and number of processes running This is the default Specifying the u flag without specifying the w or h flag is w Command 62 Commands Reference Volume 6 equivalent to the uptime command w The equivalent of specifying the u and I flags which is the default Files etc utmp Contains the list of users Related Information The who command finger command ps command uptime command w Command 63 Commands Reference Volume 6 wait Command Purpose Waits until the termination of a process ID Syntax walt Command weit Proces s0 wait ProcessID Description The wait command waits pauses execution until the process ID specified by the ProcessID variable terminates If the ProcessID variable is not specified the wait comma
329. lues In the following example the directory named usr bin is a parameter ls l usr bin When entering commands in AIX it is important to remember the following e Commands are usually entered in lowercase e Flags are usually prefixed with a minus sign e More than one command can be typed on the command line if the commands are separated by a semicolon e Long sequences of commands can be continued on the next line by using the backslash The backslash is placed at the end of the first line The following example shows the placement of the backslash cat usr ust mydir mydata gt usr usts yourdir yourdata When certain commands are entered the shell prompt changes Because some commands are actually programs such as the telnet command the prompt changes when you are operating within the command Any command that you issue within a program is known as a subcommand When you exit the program the prompt returns to your shell prompt AIX can operate with different shells for example Bourne C or Korn and the commands that you enter are interpreted by the shell Therefore you must know what shell you are using so that you can enter the commands in the correct format Stopping Commands If you enter a command and then decide to stop that command from running you can halt the command from processing any further To stop a command from processing press the Interrupt key sequence usually Ctrl C or Alt Paus
330. lume 6 e Entering shell commands e Interrupting and ending the vi editor Adjusting the Screen Enter the following subcommands in command mode An incomplete subcommand can be canceled by pressing the Esc key If you need information about the format of vi subcommands see vi General Subcommand Syntax Ctri L Clears and redraws the screen Ctri R Redraws the screen and eliminates blank lines marked with at sign ZNumber Makes the window the specified number of lines long Entering Shell Commands The following subcommands allow you to run a command within the vi editor Enter these subcommands in command mode If you need information about the format of vi subcommands see vi General Subcommand Syntax sh Enters the shell to allow you to run more than one AIX command You can return to the vi editor by pressing the Ctrl D key sequence If you are using this subcommand within the ex editor a colon is not needed Command Runs the specified AIX command and then returns to the vi editor If you are using this subcommand within the ex editor a colon is not needed Note The alternate file current file and previous command special characters are expanded when following a subcommand To prevent any of these characters from being expanded use the backslash if Repeats the last Command subcommand Number Command Runs the specified AIX command and replaces the lines specified by Number with the o
331. m MapName To Display the Map Nickname Table Dissteys the Map Nicteame Table 7 fuanbin yp which 1 Jusr bin ypwhich x Description The ypwhich command identifies which server supplies Network Information Services NIS services or which server is the master for a map depending on how the ypwhich command is invoked If invoked without arguments this command displays the name of the NIS server for the local machine If you specify a host name the system queries that host to find out which master it is using Flags d Domain Uses the specified domain instead of the default domain V1 Indicates which server is serving the old version 1 NIS protocol client processes V2 Indicates which server is serving the current version 2 NIS protocol client processes If neither version is specified the ypwhich command attempts to locate the server that supplies the version 2 services If there is no version 2 server currently bound the ypwhich command then attempts to locate the server supplying version 1 services Since servers and clients are ypwhich Command 341 Commands Reference Volume 6 both backward compatible the user need seldom be concerned about which version is currently in use t Inhibits nickname translation which is useful if there is a map name identical to a nickname m MapName Finds the master NIS server for a map No host can be specified with the m flag The MapName variable can be a map name or a nickna
332. mally last line mode Subcommands with the prefix colon slash question mark exclamation point or two exclamation points read input on a line displayed at the bottom of the screen When you enter the initial character the vi editor places the cursor at the bottom of the screen where you enter the remaining characters of the command Press the Enter key to run the subcommand or press Interrupt the Ctrl C key sequence to cancel it When the prefix is used the cursor moves only after both exclamation points are entered When you use the prefix to enter the last line mode the vi editor gives special meaning to the following characters when they are used before commands that specify counts All lines regardless of cursor position Last line Current line Customizing the vi Editor You can customize the vi editor by e Setting vi editor options e Defining macros e Mapping keys e Setting abbreviations Setting vi Editor Options The following list describes the vi editor options you can change with the set command The default setting for these options is off If you turn on one of these toggle options you can turn it off again by entering the word no before the option If you want to discontinue the autowrite vi option enter noaw where no turns off the option and aw specifies the autowrite option Note Do not include parentheses when entering vi options vi Option Abbreviation Description aut
333. mand diff command echo command ksh command lint command Is command mv command Shells Overview and Commands Overview in AIX Version 4 3 System User s Guide Operating System and Devices Input and Output Handling Programmer s Overview in AIX Version 4 3 General Programming Concepts Writing and Debugging Programs xargs Command 182 Commands Reference Volume 6 xauth Command Purpose Edits and displays the authorization information used in connecting to the X server Syntax xauth Command CommandAruimert xauth f AuthFile v q i b CommandArgument Description The xauth command is usually used to edit and display the authorization information used in connecting to the X server This program extracts authorization records from one machine and merge them into another for example when using remote logins or granting access to other users The following commands can be entered interactively on the xauth command line or in scripts Note that this program does not contact the X server addDisplayName ProtocolName Hexkey An authorization entry is added to the authorization file for the indicated display using the given protocol and key data The data is specified as an even length string of hexadecimal digits each pair representing one octet The first digit of each pair gives the most significant 4 bits of the octet and the second digit of the pair gives the least significant 4 bits For exam
334. map Letter viSubcommand e To unmap a character previously mapped in command mode enter unmap Letter e To display a list of current mappings for the command mode enter map The following keys are not used by the vi editor but are available for use with the map subcommand in the command mode e Letters g K q V and v e Control key sequences Ctrl A Ctrl K Ctrl O Ctrl T Ctrl W and Ctrl X e Symbols _ underscore asterisk backslash and equal sign Although you can map a key that is already used by the vi editor the key s usual function is not available as long as the map is in effect Some terminals allow you to map command sequences to function keys If you are in LISP mode the equal sign cannot be used because it is used by the vi editor To map the letter v to the sequence of commands that would locate the next occurrence of the word map and change it to the word MAP enter the following command map v map lt Ctrl V gt lt Enter gt cwMAP lt Ctrl V gt lt Esc gt lt Ctrl V gt lt Enter gt The previous example instructs the vi editor to locate the next occurrence of map map lt Ctrl V gt lt Enter gt change map to MAP cwMAP end the change word subcommand lt Ctr1 V gt lt Esc gt and enter the command lt Ct rl V gt lt Enter gt vi or vedit Command 38 Commands Reference Volume 6 Note To prevent the vi editor from interpreting the Enter key it must be preceded by
335. me tty date and time you logged in If the user is logged in from a remote machine then the host name of that machine is displayed as well The who command can also display the elapsed time since line activity occurred the process ID of the command interpreter shell logins logoffs restarts and changes to the system clock as well as other processes generated by the initialization process The general output format of the who command is as follows Name State Line Time Activity Pid Exit Hostname where Name Identifies the user s login name State Indicates whether the line is writable by everyone see the T flag Line Identifies the line name as found in the dev directory Time Represents the time when the user logged in Activity Represents the hours and minutes since activity last occurred on that user s line A dot here indicates line activity within the last minute If the line has been quiet more than 24 hours or has not been used since the last system startup the entry is marked as old Pid Identifies the process ID of the user s login shell Term Identifies the process termination status see the d flag For more information on the termination values refer to the wait subroutine or to the usr include sys signal h file Exit Identifies the exit status of ended processes see the d flag who Command 86 Commands Reference Volume 6 Hostname Indicates the name of the machine the us
336. me for a map When the map name is omitted the m flag produces a list of available maps X Displays the map nickname table This lists the nicknames MapName the command knows of and indicates the map name associated with each nickname Examples 1 To find the master server for a map enter ypwhich m passwd In this example the ypwhich command displays the name of the server for the passwd map 2 To find the map named passwd rather than the map nicknamed passwd enter ypwhich t m passwd In this example the ypwhich command displays the name of the server for the map whose full name is passwd 3 To find out which server serves clients that run the old version 1 of the NIS protocol enter ypwhich V1 4 To display a table of map nicknames enter ypwhich x Related Information The ypset command The ypserv daemon Network File System NFS Overview for System Management in AIX Version 4 3 System Management Guide Communications and Networks Network Information Services NIS Overview for System Management in AIX Version 4 3 Network Information Services NIS and NIS Guide NIS Reference ypwhich Command 342 Commands Reference Volume 6 ypxfr Command Purpose Transfers a Network Information Services NIS map from an NIS server to a local host Syntax yer Commerc verisbin ypxfr MapName TID Program PAddvess Por usr sbin ypxfr f c dDomain hHost sDomain C
337. mediately sends the following message along with an attention getting sound the ASCII BEL character to the message recipient or target Message from SenderID on SenderHostname ttynn Date With a successful connection the write command sends two ASCII BEL characters to both workstations The beep alerts the sender that the message can begin and it alerts the receiving user that a message is coming Sending occurs one line at a time as the Enter key is pressed The communication link from the sender to the receiver remains open and sending continues until the Ctrl D key sequence ends the sending link Then an end of text character lt EOT gt is sent to the target workstation and the write command mode is terminated The receiving or target user can respond by sending a write command to the originating user This opens a line of communication from the receiver back to the sender enabling message responses in return For this type of exchange the following convention is useful When you first write to others wait for a response before sending any text End a message with a signal such as o over to alert the other person to reply Use write Command 100 Commands Reference Volume 6 oo over and out when the conversation is finished If the character exclamation point is found at the beginning of a line the write command calls the shell to execute the rest of the line as a command For example while waiting for a response pre
338. mem timer auth allpeers restrictAddressMaskOption Adds the values of Option to an existing restrict list entry or adds a new entry to the list with the specified Option The mask option defaults to 255 255 255 255 meaning that Address is treated as the address of an individual host You can specify one or more of the following values for Option ignore Ignore all packets from hosts which match this entry Does not respond to queries nor time server polls limited Specifies that these hosts are subject to client limitation from the same net Net in this context refers to the IP notion of net class A class B class C etc Only accepts the first client_limit hosts that have shown up at the server and that have been active during the last client_limit_period seconds Rejects requests from other clients from the same net Only takes into account time request packets Private control and broadcast packets are not subject to client limitation and therefore do not contribute to client count The monitoring capability of the xntpd daemon keeps a history of clients When you use this option monitoring remains active The default value for client_limit is 3 The default value for client_limit_period is 3600 seconds lowpriotrap Declare traps set by matching hosts to low priority status The server can maintain a limited number of traps the current limit is 3 assigned on a first come first served basis and denies service to l
339. meric address of the machine on which the font server is running The port is the decimal TCP port on which the font server is listening for connections The cataloguelist specifies a list of catalogue names with as a separator The following are some examples tcp expo lcs mit edu 7100 tcp 18 30 0 212 7101 all One of the following forms can be used to name a font server that accepts DECnet connections decnet nodename font objname decnet nodename fontS objname cataloguelist The nodename specifies the name or decimal numeric address of the machine on which the font server is running The objname is a normal case insensitive DECnet object name The cataloguelist specifies a list of catalogue names with as a separator Flags configConfigurationFile Specifies the configuration file the font server will use IsListenSocket Specifies a file descriptor that is already set up to be used as the listen socket This option is only intended to be used by the font server itself when automatically spawning another copy of itself to handle additional connections portNumber Specifies the TCP port number on which the server will listen for connections Examples sample font server configuration file allow a max of 10 clients to connect to this font server client limit 10 xfs Command 212 Commands Reference Volume 6 when a font server reaches its limit start up a new one clone self on
340. mmand Events Paramerer ori watch e Events o File Command Parameter Description The watch command permits the root user or a member of the audit group to observe the actions of a program that is thought to be untrustworthy The watch command executes the program you specify with the Command parameter with or without any Parameter fields and records all audit events or the audit events you specify with the e flag The watch command observes all the processes that are created while the program runs including any child process The watch command continues until all processes exit including the process it created to observe all the events that occur The watch command formats the audit records and writes them to standard output or to a file you specify with the o flag For the watch command to work the auditing subsystem must not have been configured and enabled Flags e Events Specifies the events to be audited The Events parameter is a comma separated list of audit events that are defined in the etc security audit events file The default value is all events oFile Specifies the path name of the output file If the o flag is not used output is written to standard output Security Access Control This command should grant execute x access to the root user and members of the audit group The command should be setuid to the root user so it can access other audit subsystem commands and files and
341. mmand wall command wait Command 64 Commands Reference Volume 6 The alarm subroutine pause subroutine sigaction subroutine Shells Overview in AIX Version 4 3 System User s Guide Operating System and Devices wait Command 65 Commands Reference Volume 6 wall Command Purpose Writes a message to all users that are logged in Syntax wali Command o E Message wall Message Description The wall command writes a message to all users that are logged in If the Message parameter is not specified the wall command reads the message from standard input until it reaches an end of file character The message is then sent to all logged in users The following heading precedes the message Broadcast message from user node tty at hh mm ss hh mm ss represents the hours minutes and seconds when the message was sent To override any protections set up by other users you must operate with root user authority Typically the root user uses the wall command to warn all other users of an impending system shutdown Notes 1 The wall command only sends messages to the local node 2 Messages can contain multibyte characters Files dev tty Specifies a device Related Information The mesg command su command write command wall Command 66 Commands Reference Volume 6 watch Command Purpose Observes a program that may be untrustworthy Syntax wath Uonrrmand waich a Co
342. mmand x_rm_fpe command x_rm_net command x_rm_trm command x_add trm 140 Command 135 Commands Reference Volume 6 x_add_ trm 150 Command Purpose Adds an Xstation 150 to the host Syntax kdd vme 150 Command sedd tm 160 15 Name TypeName Adiress Sener gt D Tire Dake PotName Font ceass Xserve P gt be PanShape Mode Nost Langage Keyboard gt gt File Font Location LPF heypovt Keyfonsarae x_add_trm_150 150NameTypeName Address ServerTime Device PortName FontAccess Xserver PanShape Mode Host Language Keyboard File Font Location LPFkeyport KeyRepeatRate Description The x_add_trm_150 command adds the Xstation 150 specified by the Name parameter to the current host and stores the configuration in the etc x_st_mgr xs150 cfg lt IPaddress gt file and the etc x_st_mgr x_st_megrd tmty file Parameters Mandatory parameters are 150 Specifies that this command is used only for an Xstation 150 Name Specifies the name of the Xstation The Name parameter can be up to eight characters long and include the uppercase or lowercase letters a through z the numbers 0 through 9 the dash and the period Name can be a user name such as taylor or a group name with a number appended such as graphs 2 The terminal name must be known to the host system Note Name should not start with a uppercase or lowercase o or x followed by an octal or hexadecimal nume
343. mmediately receive the shell prompt 6 To quit composing a draft message and save it to a file so that you can later finish composing the message enter the following at the What now prompt quit whatnow Command 78 Commands Reference Volume 6 The system responds with a message similar to the following whatnow draft left on home dale Mail draft In this example user dale s draft message is saved to the home dale Mail draft file 7 To quit composing a draft message and delete the message enter the following at the What now prompt quit delete The shell prompt is displayed when the draft message is deleted 8 To file the draft message you are composing before you send it enter the following at the What now prompt refile tmp The system responds with a message similar to the following Create folder home dale Mail tmp In this example if you answer yes the draft message is filed in user dale s folder tmp 9 To send the draft message you have composed enter the following at the What now prompt send The shell prompt is displayed when the message is sent 10 To verify that all addresses in the draft message are recognized by the mail delivery system enter the following at the What now prompt whom The system responds with a message similar to the following jeanne User unknown dale venus deliverable In this example the mail delivery system recognized dale venus as a correct address
344. mpt to send a large file to a pre AIX 4 2 or non AIX machine with the rdist command Doing so will result in undefined behaviors and in rare cases loss of data Appendix A Command Support for Files Larger than 2Gigabytes 350 Commands Reference Volume 6 Appendix B Functional List of Commands This appendix lists commands by function e Communications Asynchronous Terminal Emulation Basic Networking Utilities General AIX Communications Facilities Mail Facilities Message Handler Network File System Network Information Service Network Management STREAMS Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol 3270 Host Connection Program Network Computing System NCS e Files and Directories Directories Editors Files File Contents Text Formatting Text Formatting Macro Packages e General Operations Devices and Terminals Documentation and Education File Systems Games iFOR LS Logical Volumes Network Installation Management NIM Numerical Data Performance Tuning Processes and Commands Queues Screen Output Security and System Access Shells System Accounting and Statistics acct Commands System Resources Software Installation User Interface Macros e Programming Tools Debuggers Messages Source Programs Object Files Micellaneous Languages C Tools Appendix B Functional List of Commands 351 Commands Reference Volume 6 Assemblers and C
345. n LPFheappon KelopeatAinte x_chg_trm_150 150NameTypeName Address ServerTime Device PortName FontAccess Xserver PanShape Mode Host Language Keyboard File Font Location LPFkeyport KeyRepeatRate Description The x_chg_trm_150 command changes for the current host the characteristics of the Xstation specified by the Name parameter and stores the changed configuration in the etc x_st_mgr xs150 cfg lt IPaddress gt file and the etc x_st_mgr x_st_mgrd tmty file Parameters Parameters that can be changed are 150 Specifies that this command is used only for an Xstation 150 Name Specifies the name of the Xstation The Name parameter can be up to eight characters long and include the uppercase or lowercase letters a through z the numbers 0 through 9 the dash and the period Name can be a user name such as taylor or a group name with a number appended such as graphs 2 and should identify an Xstation by its location in the work place or by the primary user s name Name is stored in the etc hosts file Note Name should not start with a lowercase or an uppercase 0 or x followed by an octal or hexadecimal numeric These characters are interpreted as octal or hexadecimal numbers instead of as a terminal name In the examples x3 and xE4 the 3 and the E4 are hexadecimal numerics TypeName Specifies the name you defined for this network Xstation model subnet combination with the Define an Xstation Network Type option i
346. n the shift commands gt and lt and the text input commands the Ctrl D and Ctrl T key sequences This vi option only affects the indentation at the beginning of a line The default is sw 8 Shows the matching left parenthesis or left bracket as you type the right parenthesis or right bracket The default is nosm Displays a message to indicate when the vi editor is in input mode The default is nosmd Postpones updating the display screen during inserts The default is noslow Sets the distance between tab stops in a displayed file The default is ts 8 Defines the search path for the database file of function names created using the ctags command The default is tags tagsVusr lib tags Sets the type of workstation you are using The default is term TERM where TERM is the value of the TERM shell variable Allows the vi editor to display the short form of messages The default is noterse Sets a time limit of two seconds on an entry of characters This limit allows the characters in a macro to be entered and processed as separate characters when the timeout option is set To resume use of the macro set the notimeout option The default is to Indicates the tty type for the terminal being used You cannot change this value from the vi editor Displays a warning message before the subcommand executes a shell command if it is the first time you issued a shell command after changes were made in the editing buffer
347. n NIS slave server enter ypinit s zorro In this example the ypinit command copies the NIS maps onto your workstation from the NIS server named zorro making your workstation an NIS slave server 3 To set up an NIS master server without being prompted for input enter ypinit o n q m slave Note If the system has previously been configured as an NIS master server You should ensure that the directory var yp binding is removed before executing ypinit If old information is stored in var yp binding it may cause errors to occur during configuration of the NIS master server Files etc bootparams Lists clients that diskless clients can use for booting etc passwd Contains an entry for each user that has permission to log on to the machine letc group Contains an entry for each user group allowed to log on to the machine etc hosts Contains an entry for each host on the network var yp Makefile Contains rules for making NIS maps etc networks Contains the name of each network in the DARPA Internet etc netmasks Lists network masks used to implement IP standard subnetting etc netid Contains identification information for machines hosts and groups etc rpe Contains map information for RPC programs etc services Contains an entry for each server available through the Internet etc protocols Defines Internet protocols used on the local host etc netgroup Contains information about each user group on the network etc
348. n SMIT or with the x_def_net command Press the F4 key in SMIT to select the network type An example is x_st_mgr ether150 for Ethernet and an Xstation 150 Address Specifies the Local Area Network LAN hardware address of the Xstation This address appears on the LAN Statistics screen when you power on the Xstation Each Xstation has a unique 6 byte hexadecimal hardware address in XXXXXXXXXXXX format that cannot be changed by the user Server Specifies whether the host system is a primary boot server A primary boot server responds immediately to a boot protocol broadcast request from an Xstation for other secondary boot servers a delay time is imposed see Time listed next Two options are valid y if the server is a primary server and n if the server is not a primary server The default option is y x_chg_trm_150 Command 158 Time Device PortName FontAccess Xserver PanShape Mode Commands Reference Volume 6 Specifies the number of seconds a secondary boot server must wait before answering a boot protocol broadcast request The valid number for a primary server is 0 because there is no delay time In SMIT press the F4 key to see the recommended range of values Generally a value less than the minimum value does not distinguish between a primary and secondary server and a secondary server may be selected even when the primary server is available A value greater than the maximum value may lead to a time out
349. n freely discard window contents s noexpose Sets the preference to disable screen saver unless the server can regenerate the screens without causing exposure events q Reports information on the current settings These settings will be reset to default values when you log out Note Not all X implementations are guaranteed to honor all of these options Examples 1 To set the bell volume to medium the tone to 50 hertz and length of time the bell rings to 50 milliseconds xset b 50 50 50 2 To set the font path to the usr lib X11 fonts directory xset fp usr lib x11 fonts 3 To cause the server to reread the font databases in the current font path xset fp rehash 4 To see information on the current settings xset q which produces output similar to the following Keyboard Control auto repeat on key click percent 0 LED mask 00000000 auto repeating keys 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 bell percent 50 bell pitch 400 bell duration 100 Pointer Control acceleration 2 2 1 threshold 4 Screen Saver prefer blanking no allow exposures no timeout 0 cycle 0 Colors default colormap 0x8006e BlackPixel 0 WhitePixel 1 xset Command 277 Commands Reference Volume 6 Font Path usr lib X11 fonts usr 1lib X11 fonts 75dpi usr lib X11 fonts 100dpi usr lib X11 fonts oldx10 usr lib X11 fonts oldx11 usr lib X11 fonts bmug usr 1 ib X11
350. n mkstr Contains an executable file lusr ccs bin mkstr Contains an executable file for Berkeley environment Related Information The mkstr command xstr Command 284 Commands Reference Volume 6 xterm Command Purpose Provides a terminal emulator for the X Window System Note The xterm command is ported from the Massachusetts Institute of Technology MIT X Window System Version 11 Release 6 with no functional enhancements The xterm command does not have support for localization or internationalization For the localized and internationalized terminal emulator the user can use the aixterm or dtterm commands Syntax xterm ToolkitOption Option Description The xterm program is a terminal emulator for the X Window System It provides DEC VT102 and Tektronix 4014 compatible terminals for programs that cannot use the window system directly If the underlying operating system supports terminal resizing capabilities the xterm program uses the facilities to notify programs running in the window whenever it is resized The VT102 and Tektronix 4014 terminals each have their own window so that you can edit text in one and look at graphics in the other at the same time To maintain the correct aspect ratio height width Tektronix graphics are restricted to the largest box with a 4014 aspect ratio that will fit in the window This box is located in the upper left area of the window Although both windows may
351. n one screen of output the vmh command prompts the user for a subcommand The vmh subcommands enable you to display specific portions of the command output vmh Subcommands Ctri L Refreshes the screen Space Advances to the next screen Number Enter Advances the specified number of lines The default is one line Number d Advances 10 times the specified number of lines The default for the Number variable is 1 for a total of 10 lines Number g Goes to the specified line Number G Goes to the end of the window If the Number variable is specified this command acts like the g flag Number u Goes back 10 times the specified number of lines The default for the Number variable is 1 for a total of 10 lines Number y Goes back the specified number of lines The default is one line h Displays a help message q Ends output Flags help Lists the command syntax available switches toggles and version information Note For MH the name of this flag must be fully spelled out novmhproc Runs the default vmproc without the window management protocol prompt String Uses the specified string as the prompt vmh Command 56 Commands Reference Volume 6 vmhproc CommandString Specifies the program that implements the client side of the window management protocol The default is the msh program Profile Entries The following entries are entered in the UserMhDirectory mh_profile file Path Specifies the user s
352. n the server if possible A preceding dash disables this mode otherwise bug compatibility mode is enabled The server must support the MIT SUNDRY NONSTANDARD protocol extension for the be flag to work New application development should be performed with bug compatibility mode disabled The be flag is provided for pre X11 Release 4 X11R4 clients Some pre X11R4 clients pass illegal values in various protocol requests Such clients when run with an X11R4 server end abnormally or otherwise fail to operate correctly This flag explicitly reintroduces certain bugs into the X server so that such clients still can be run c or con Turns on the click System default c Volume A numeric from 0 to 100 that specifies a percentage of the click s maximum possible volume dependent on current hardware capabilities C or coff Turns off the click fp Path Sets the font path to the directories given in the Path parameter The directories are interpreted by the server not by the client and are server dependent The server ignores directories that do not contain font databases created by the mkfontdir command All of the options and variables supported by the fp flag are available fp or fp Deletes the font path specified by the Path parameter from the end of xset Command 275 fp or fp fp default fp rehash led orled on led Integer led Integer led or led off rorron r or r off s or s default s L
353. nals tapechk Performs consistency checking of the streaming tape device tcopy Copies a magnetic tape tetl Gives commands to a streaming tape device termdef Queries terminal characteristics tput Queries the terminal discriptor files in the terminfo database tset Initializes terminals tsm Provides terminal state management tty Writes to standard output the full pathname of your terminal Commands List Documentation and Education apropos Locates commands by keyword lookup catman Creates the cat files for the manual explain Provides an interactive thesaurus help Provides information for new users learn Provides computer aided instruction courses and practice for using files editors macros and other features man Displays manual entries online mergenote Combines multiple InfoExplorer note files into a single notes file Commands List File Systems automount Mounts NFS file systems automatically chfs General Operations 382 chps chvfs crfs crvfs defragfs df dfsck dosformat dumpfs ff fsck fsdb istat Isfs mkfs mklost found mkproto mount ncheck proto rmfs rrestore General Operations Commands Reference Volume 6 Changes attributes of a file system Changes attributes of a paging space Changes entries in the etc vfs file Adds a file system Creates entries in the etc vfs file Increases a file system s contiguous free
354. name In the examples x3 and xE4 the 3 and the E4 are hexadecimal numerics TypeName Specifies the name you defined for this network Xstation model subnet combination with the Define an Xstation Network Type option in SMIT or with the x_def_net command Press the F4 key in SMIT to select the network type An example is x_st_mgr ether160 for Ethernet and an Xstation 160 Address Specifies the Local Area Network LAN hardware address of the Xstation This address appears on the LAN Statistics screen when you power on the Xstation Each Xstation has a unique 6 byte hexadecimal hardware address in XXXXXXXXXXXX format that cannot be changed by the user Server Specifies whether the host system is a primary boot server A primary boot server responds immediately to a boot protocol broadcast request from an Xstation for other secondary boot servers a delay time is imposed see Time listed next Two options are valid y if the server is a primary server and n if the server is not a primary server The default option is y x_chg_trm_160 Command 162 Time Device PortName FontAccess Xserver PanShape Mode Commands Reference Volume 6 Specifies the number of seconds a secondary boot server must wait before answering a boot protocol broadcast request The valid number for a primary server is 0 because there is no delay time In SMIT press the F4 key to see the recommended range of values Generally a value less than
355. nce Volume 6 2 Commands Reference Volume 6 developed by Massachusetts Institute of Technology Cambridge Massachusetts and Digital Equipment Corporation Maynard Massachusetts and have been acquired and modified under the provision that the following copyright notice and permission notice appear c Copyright Digital Equipment Corporation 1985 1988 1990 1991 All rights reserved c Copyright 1985 1986 1987 1988 1989 Massachusetts Institute of Technology All rights reserved Permission to use copy modify and distribute this program and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted provided that this copyright permission and disclaimer notice appear on all copies and supporting documentation the name of M I T or Digital not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the program without specific prior permission M I T and Digital make no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose It is provided as is without express or implied warranty c Copyright Apollo Computer Inc 1987 All rights reserved c Copyright TITN Inc 1984 1989 All rights reserved c Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1997 All rights reserved Notice to U S Government Users Documentation Related to Restricted Rights Use duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions set forth in GSA ADP Schedule Contract Commands Reference Volume
356. nd The whatis command displays the header line from the manual section You can then issue the man command to obtain additional information The whatis command is equivalent to using the man f command Note When the usr share man whatis database is built from the HTML library using the catman w command section 3 is equivalent to section 2 or 3 See the man command for further explanation of sections Flags MPathName Specifies an alternative search path The search path is specified by the PathName parameter and is a colon separated list of directories in which the whatis command expects to find the standard manual subdirectories Examples To find out what the Is command does enter whatis ls This produces the following output ls 1 Displays the contents of a directory Files usr share man whatis Contains the whatis database whatis Command 74 Commands Reference Volume 6 Related Information The apropos command catman command Is command man command whatis Command 75 Commands Reference Volume 6 whatnow Command Purpose Starts a prompting interface for draft disposition Syntax whemew Command ona of dratifoider Fower nodralttiotter Fi prompt What now editer Edror hH prompt String noedit whatnow draftfolder Folder nodraftfolder File draftmessage Message File editor Editor noedit prompt String whathow dratir ensage Massage
357. nd rmhist command How to Access Versions of a File with the INed Editor in AIX Version 4 3 INed Editor User s Guide INed Editor Overview in AIX Version 4 3 Ned Editor User s Guide versions Command 28 Commands Reference Volume 6 vgrind Command Purpose Formats listings of programs that are easy to read Syntax veering Command usr share vannes gind gt d la 1 h Headey iLacguage A diank spaca a feQuered balaban h and Nendor vgrind f n t x PPrintdev TName dFile h Header ILanguage sSize File Description The vgrind command formats grinds the program sources specified by the File parameters in an easily readable style using the troff command Comments are placed in italics keywords in boldface and the name of the current function is listed down the margin of each page as it is encountered The vgrind command runs in either filter mode or regular mode In filter mode the vgrind command acts as a filter in a manner similar to the tbl command Standard input is passed directly to standard output except for lines bracketed by the following troff like macros VS Starts processing VE Ends processing The preceding lines are formatted according to the vgrind command conventions The output from this filter can be passed to the troff command for output There is no particular ordering with the eqn or tbl command In regular m
358. nd to the server named mars Related Information The domainname command ypcat command ypwhich command The ypbind daemon ypserv daemon Network File System NFS Overview for System Management in AIX Version 4 3 System Management Guide Communications and Networks How to Configure NIS in AIX Version 4 3 Network Information Services NIS and NIS Guide Network Information Services NIS Overview for System Management in AIX Version 4 3 Network Information Services NIS and NIS Guide NIS Reference ypset Command 338 Commands Reference Volume 6 ypupdated Daemon Purpose Updates information in Network Information Services NIS maps Syntax yeupdemd Deemer farltibmeteve yp rpc yeupdated Tey usr lib netsvc yp rpc ypupdated i s Description The ypupdated daemon updates information in Network Information Services NIS maps Before it can update information however the daemon consults the updaters file in the var yp directory to determine which NIS maps should be updated and how they should be changed By default the ypupdated daemon requires the most secure method of authentication available to it either DES secure or UNIX insecure The ypupdated daemon is started and stopped by the following System Resource Controller SRC commands startsrc s ypupdated stopsrce s ypupdated Flags s Accepts only calls authenticated using the secure Remote Procedure Call RPC mechanism A
359. nd uses the editor specified by the Editor entry in your UserMhDirectory mh_profile file If your Editor entry is undefined the whatnow command starts the editor used in the previous editing session list Flags Displays the draft You can specify any Flags parameter that is valid for the listing program To specify a default listing program set a default lproc entry in the HOME mh_profile file If you specify any flags that are invalid for the listing program the whatnow command does not pass the path name of the draft push Flags Sends the message in the background You can specify any valid flag for the send command quit delete Ends the whatnow session If you specify the delete flag the whatnow command deletes the draft Otherwise the whatnow command stores the draft refile Flags Folder Files the draft in the specified folder and supplies a new draft having the previously specified form You can specify any Flags parameter that is valid for the command serving as the fileproc You can set a default ileproc entry in the HOME mh_profile file whatnow Command 77 Commands Reference Volume 6 send Flags Sends the message You can specify any valid flags for the send command whom Flags Displays the addresses to which the message would be sent You can specify any valid flags for the whom command Profile Entries The following entries are entered in the UserMhDirectory mh_profile file
360. nd waits until all process IDs known to the invoking shell have terminated and exit with a 0 exit status If a ProcessID variable represents an unknown process ID the wait command treats them as known process IDs that exited with exit status 127 The wait command exits with the exitstatus of the last process ID specified by the ProcessID variable Flag ProcessID Specifies an unsigned decimal integer process ID of a command which the wait command waits on until termination Exit Status If one or more operands were specified all of the operands terminated or were not known by the invoking shell and the status of the last operand specified is known then the exit status of the wait command is the same as the exit status information of the command indicated by the last operand specified If the process terminated abnormally due to the receipt of a signal then the exit status is greater than 128 and distinct from the exit status information generated by other signals although the exact status value is unspecified see the kill 1 command option Otherwise the wait command exits with one of the following values 0 The wait command was invoked with no operands and all process IDs known by the invoking shell have terminated 1 126 The wait command detected an error 127 The command identified by the last ProcessID operand specified is unknown File usr bin wait Contains the wait command Related Information The shutdown command sleep co
361. ndicates that the input merges with instead of replaces the current contents of the specified properties This option performs a lexicographic sorted merge of the two inputs which is probably not what you want but remains for backward compatibility Indicates that changes to the specified properties when used with load or merge or to the resource file when used with edit should be shown on the standard output but should not be performed This option is specific to X11R5 Indicates that the xrdb command should not run the input file through a preprocessor before loading it into properties Indicates that the input should be added to instead of replacing the current contents of the specified properties New entries override previous entries Indicates that the current contents of the specified properties should print onto the standard output Note that since preprocessor commands in the input resource file are part of the input file not part of the property they do not appear in the output from this flag Indicates that a warning about duplicate entries should not display This option is specific to X11R5 Indicates that the specified properties should be removed from the server Indicates that the server should be instructed not to reset if the xrdb command is the first client This should never be necessary under normal conditions since the xdm and xinit commands always act as the first client This option is specific to X11R5
362. ndicates the last change to the system clock by the root user using the date command If the date command has not been run since system installation the who t command produces no output u or i Displays the user name tty login time line activity and process ID of each current user A Displays all accounting entries in the etc utmp file These entries are generated through the acctwtmp command H Displays a header title T or w Displays the state of the tty and indicates who can write to that tty as follows Writable by anyone Writable only by the root user or its owner Bad line encountered Exit Status This command returns the following exit values 0 Successful completion gt 0 An error occurred who Command 87 Commands Reference Volume 6 Examples 1 To display information about who is using the local system node enter who Information similar to the following is displayed joe 1ft 0 Jun 8 08 34 2 To display your user name enter who am i Information similar to the following is displayed george lft 0 Jun 8 08 34 3 To display a history of logins logouts system startups and system shutdowns enter who var adm wtmp Information similar to the following is displayed hank 1 t 0 Jun john 1ft 0 Jun mary 1ft 0 Jun jan pts4 Jun 08 34 ausnix5 08 34 JIKey 08 22 machine austin ibm 09 19 puff wisc edu 4 To display the run level of the local syst
363. nects processes on a Network Information Services NIS client to services on an NIS server This daemon which runs on every NIS client is started and stopped by the following System Resource Controller SRC commands startsre s ypbind stopsre s ypbind When a client requests information from a Network Information Services NIS map the ypbind daemon broadcasts on the network for a server When the server responds it gives the daemon the Internet address and port number of a host This is the host that provides the information the client is seeking The ypbind daemon stores this address information in the var yp binding directory using a file name of domainname version Then the next time the client wants to access an NIS map the client s ypbind daemon refers to the addresses in the domainname version file The ypbind daemon can maintain bindings to several domains and their servers ypsetme simultaneously The default domain is the one specified by the domainname command at startup time Notes 1 If a domain becomes unbound usually when the server crashes or is overloaded the ypbind daemon broadcasts again to find another server 2 To force a client to bind to a specific server use the ypset command 3 To find out which server a client is bound to use the ypwhich command Flags s Runs the ypbind daemon in a secure mode on privileged communications ports ypset Indicates the local host accepts ypset commands from local
364. nfigures Portable Streams Environment PSE Queries stream configuration Cleans up the STREAMS error logger Receives error log messages from the STREAMS log driver Commands List Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol arp chnamsv chprtsv finger fingerd ftp ftpd gated gettable host hostent hostid hostname htable ifconfig Displays and modifies address resolution Changes TCP IP based name service configuration on a host Changes a print service configuration on a client or server machine Shows user information Shows user information Provides server function for finger command Transfers files between a local and a remote host Provides the server function for the Internet FTP protocol Provides gateway routing functions for the RIP EGP HELLO and SNMP protocols Gets NIC format host tables from a host Resolves a host name into an Internet address or an Internet address into a host name Directly manipulates address mapping entries in the system configuration database Sets or displays the identifier of the current local host Sets or displays the name of the current host system Converts host files to the format used by network library routines Configures or displays network interface parameters for a network that is using TCP IP Commands List Message Handler 363 inetd ipreport iptrace Ipd Isnamsv Isprtsv mkhosts mknam
365. ng for a pattern In off mode only the parentheses and dollar sign retain special meanings However you can evoke special meaning in other characters by preceding them with a backslash The default is magic Turns on write permission to the terminal if set while in visual mode This option only is effective if used with the exre file or the EXINIT environment variable The default is on Runs a vi editor command line if found in the first five or the last five lines of the file A vi editor command line can be anywhere in a line For the vi editor to recognize a command line the line must contain a space or a tab followed by the ex orvi string The command line is ended by a second colon The vi editor tries to interpret any data between the first and second colon as vi editor commands The default is nomodeline Indicates whether you are in novice mode You cannot change the value by using the set command Displays lines prefixed with their line numbers The default is nonu Speeds the operation of terminals that lack cursor addressing The default is noopt Defines vi macro names that start paragraphs The default is para IPLPPPQPP LIpplpipnpbp Single letter nroff macros such as the 34 partialchar pc prompt readonly ro redraw redraw remap report re scroll scr sections sect shell sh shiftwidth sw showmatch sm showmode smd slowopen slow tabstop ts tags
366. nse before it completes the specified action For example the yes command is useful when deleting multiple files from a directory The Ctl C key sequence terminates the continuous affirmative responses Note The current locale is determined by the LC_MESSAGES environment variable or the Expletive parameter if specified The Expletive parameter can be any single character or character stream If you enter an Expletive parameter after issuing the yes command the Expletive parameter displays to the screen until you type the Ctl C key sequence Examples 1 To delete all files in a directory and automatically send an affirmative response to the question Remove these files enter yes del This statement displays the names of the files deleted by the delete command 2 To display the word first to the screen enter yes first This statement displays the word until you enter the Ctl C key sequence File usr bin yes Contains the yes command yes Command 317 Commands Reference Volume 6 Related Information The environment file Shells Overview in AIX Version 4 3 System User s Guide Operating System and Devices yes Command 318 Commands Reference Volume 6 ypbind Daemon Purpose Enables client processes to bind or connect to an NIS server Syntax ypbind Daemon usrtibnetevclypypbineg re pesi usr lib netsvc yp ypbind s ypset ypsetme Description The ypbind daemon binds or con
367. ntains Statistics for the time since system startup Subsequent reports contain statistics collected during the interval since the previous report If the nterval parameter is not specified the vmstat command generates a single report and then exits The Count parameter can only be specified with the Interval parameter If the Count parameter is specified its value determines the number of reports generated and the number of seconds apart If the Interval parameter is specified without the Count parameter reports are continuously generated A Count parameter of 0 is not allowed The kernel maintains statistics for kernel threads paging and interrupt activity which the vmstat command accesses through the use of the knlist subroutine and the dev kmem pseudo device driver The disk input output statistics are maintained by device drivers For disks the average transfer rate is determined by using the active time and number of transfers information The percent active time is computed from the amount of time the drive is busy during the report The following example of a report generated by the vmstat command contains the column headings and their description kthr kernel thread state changes per second over the sampling interval r Number of kernel threads placed in run queue b Number of kernel threads placed in wait queue awaiting resource awaiting input output vmstat Command 58 Commands Reference Volume 6 Memor y information
368. ntains the boot protocol table etc x_st_mgr xs150 cfg lt IPADDRESS gt Contains the Xstation configuration file Related Information The aixterm command bootpd daemon login command pclient command x_add_nfs_fpe command x_add_trm_120 command x_add_trm_130 command x_add_trm_140 command x_add_trm_150 command x_add_trm_160 command x_add_xst_fpe command x_chg_net command x_chg_trm_120 command x_chg_trm_130 command x_chg_trm_140 command x_chg_trm_150 command x_chg_trm_160 command x_def_net command x_Is_net command x_Is_net_fp command x_Is_trm command x_rm_fpe command x_rm_net command x_rm_trm command x_rm_trm Command 177 Commands Reference Volume 6 xargs Command Purpose Constructs parameter lists and runs commands Syntax karge Commang n MumDes E LOF String LC String Rapace Sirm HapinceSinng gt al L Nomber Nam ber CE eho ay Li Command i Argumen Do not pul 4 blank space between the fag and he parameler xargs p t e EOFString E EOFString i ReplaceString I ReplaceString 1 Number LNumber n Number x s Size Command Argument 1 Note Do not put a blank space between the lowercase flags and the parameter Description The generated command line length is the sum of the size in bytes of the Command and each Argument treated as strings including a null byte terminator for each of the
369. ntax r y ail goby sereen soreens merge se query symbols xrdb display Display help quiet retain cpp FileName nocpp D Name Value IDirectory U Name all global screen screens n edit FileName backup String merge FileName load FileName query remove symbols override Description The xrdb command gets or sets the contents of the RESOURCE_MANAGER property on the root window of screen 0 or the SCREEN_RESOURCES property on the root window of any or all screens or everything combined You normally run this program from your X startup file Most X clients use the RESOURCE_MANAGER and SCREEN_RESOURCES properties to get user preferences about color fonts and so on for applications Having this information in the server where it is available to all clients instead of on disk solves the problem in previous versions of X that required you to maintain defaults files on every machine that you might use It also allows for dynamic changing of defaults without editing files The RESOURCE_MANAGER property specifies resources that apply to all screens of the display The SCREEN_RESOURCES property on each screen specifies additional or overriding resources to be used for that screen When there is only one screen SCREEN_RESOURCES is normally not used all resources are placed in the RESOURCE_MANAGER property For compatibility if there
370. nterval count Description The wlmstat command symbolically displays the contents of wlm data structures fetched from the kernel If a count is specified wlmstat loops count times and sleeps interval seconds after each block is displayed A summary of operation is also displayed after each loop Flags l class Class name If not specified all classes are displayed along with a summary for appropriate fields c Show only CPU statistics m Show only memory statistics interval Specifies an interval in seconds defaults to 1 count Specifies how many times wlmstat will print a report defaults to 1 Display Results are tabulated with the following fields Name Class name CPU Percentage of total CPU time comsumed by the class MEM Percentage of physical memory consumed by the class Examples 1 To get a printout of wlm activity right now type wlmstat This produces the following output Name CPU MEM nyc 65 2 system TRR S default 0 7 procsA 7 4 procsB 13 5 student 1 0 67 2 To get a report for class student enter wlmstat 1 student 3 To get a report for class student updated every second and this for one minute enter wimstat Command 98 wilmstat 1 student 1 60 Commands Reference Volume 6 This produces the following output Name CPU student 9 student 9 student 10 student 9 student 9 student 10 Errors M EM 12 14 eT 22 27 30 No error can be repor
371. nts lines m Counts characters This flag cannot be used with the c flag w Counts words A word is defined as a string of characters delimited by spaces tabs or newline characters wc Command 69 Commands Reference Volume 6 Exit Status This command returns the following exit values 0 The command ran successfully gt 0 An error occurred Examples 1 To display the line word and byte counts of a file enter we chapl The we command displays the number of lines words and bytes in the chap file To display only byte and word counts enter WC cw chap The we command displays the number of bytes and words in each file that begins with chap The command also displays the total number of bytes and words in these files To display the line word and character counts of a file enter we k chapl The we command displays the number of lines words and characters in the chap file To display the word and character counts of a file enter wc kcw chapl The we command displays the number of characters and words in the chap1 file To use the we command on standard input enter wc klw The we command displays the number of lines and words in standard input The k flag is ignored To display the character counts of a file enter wc m chapl The we command displays the number of characters in the chap1 file To use the we command on standard input enter wc mlw
372. nts occur e The input file was not produced by the compress command e An input file cannot be read or an output file cannot be written If no error occurs the exit status is 0 Exit Status 0 Successful completion gt 0 An error occurred Examples To view the foo Z file without uncompressing it enter zcat foo Z zcat Command 346 Commands Reference Volume 6 The uncompressed contents of the foo Z file are written to standard output The file is not renamed Related Information The compress command pack command uncompress command unpack command Commands Overview in AIX Version 4 3 System User s Guide Operating System and Devices The compress command uses the modified Lempel Zev algorithm described in A Technique for High Performance Data Compression Welch Terry A IEEE Computer vol 17 no 6 June 1984 pp 8 19 zcat Command 347 Commands Reference Volume 6 Appendix A Command Support for Files Larger than 2 Gigabytes AIX 4 2 or later provides support for files greater than 2 gigabytes so that users can store large quantities of data in a single file Many but not all AIX commands support the use of files larger than 2 gigabytes Additionally some commands have large file support with limitations Commands That Do Not Support Files Larger Than 2 Gigabytes In many cases commands that do not support large files do not utilize files of any size to begin with such as the date echo nic
373. o perform OpenFont and QueryFont if appropriate instead of ListFonts The o flag is useful if the ListFonts or ListFontsWithInfo fails to list a known font as is the case with some scaled font systems u Indicates that the output should remain unsorted wWidth Specifies the width in characters that should be used to determine how many columns to print The default is 79 Environment Variable DISPLAY Gets the default host and display to use Examples 1 To specify a medium sized list of each font use a lowercase L and enter xlsfonts 1 2 To specify a three column list of each font enter xlsfonts n 3 3 To display all fonts with the string iso8859 within their names enter xlsfonts 11 1iso8859 4 To list all fonts with rom1 plus one following character in their names enter xlsfonts roml This obtains a listing similar to roml0 romll roml4 roml6 roml7 Related Information The X command xset command xlsfonts Command 228 Commands Reference Volume 6 xlvm Command Purpose Starts Storage Manager a Visual System Management VSM application Syntax sive Command wm j xlvm Description The xlvm command starts Storage Manager one of the Visual System Management VSM applications Storage Manager is a graphical interface that enables you to manage physical volumes volume groups logical volumes and file systems through direct manipulation of objects icons This frees you f
374. o the Xstation off No X Display Manager Control Protocol XDMCP The default option is off Host Specifies the name of the xdmcp host used for direct or indirect communication with the Xstation Valid options are none or the name of an xdmcp host If XDMCP is not used or if broadcast mode is used the value of Host is none The name of an xdmcp host must be specified if Mode is direct or indirect The default option is none Language Sets the language used for system messages the LANG environment variable Press the F4 key in SMIT to select an option Keyboard Sets the map for the keyboard layout Press the F4 key in SMIT to select an option File Sets the name of the keyboard file The default is keyboard Some countries have a second keyboard file usually named keyboard alt Font Sets the font used in the login window Press the F4 key in SMIT to select an option Location Sets the position of the login window on the display Press the F4 key in SMIT to select an option Valid options are Upper left Upper right Lower left and Lower right LPFkeyport Specifies the serial port on an Xstation to which the LPF keys are attached Press the F4 key to select an option The valid options are none T1 T2 S1 or S2 KeyRepeatRate Sets the rate in characters per second of automatically transmitted duplicate characters A prolonged stay on any character key will activate the typematic operation and continue to transmit duplicate charact
375. ocuments Prints a bibliographic database Processes so requests in nroff command files Sorts a bibliographic database Finds English language spelling errors Creates a spelling list Verifies that a word is not in the spelling list 376 style subj tbl tc troff ul verind xpreview Commands Reference Volume 6 Analyzes surface characteristics of a document Generates a list of subjects from a document Formats tables for the nroff and troff commands Interprets text in the troff command output for the Tektronix 4015 system Formats text for printing on typesetting devices Performs underlining Formats listings of programs that are easy to read Displays troff files on an X display Text Formatting Macro Packages man Files and Directories Provides a formatting facility for manual pages Provides a formatting facility for creating technical papers in various styles Provides a formatting facility for business documents such as memos letters and reports Formats a permuted index produced by the ptx command Provides a formatting facility for various styles of articles theses and books Simplifies typesetting of view graphs and projection slides 377 General Operations Commands Reference Volume 6 Commands List Devices and Terminals adfutil bterm cancel captoinfo cfgmegr chcons chdev chdisp chfont chkbd clear devnm diag
376. ode the vgrind command accepts input files processes them and passes them in order to the troff command the appropriate postprocessor and then the printer In both modes the vgrind command passes without converting lines beginning with a decimal point The vgrind command supports only ASCH keywords defined in either the standard usr share lib vgrindefs language definitions file or any alternately specified file by the d flag Flags f Forces filter mode n Forces no keyword bolding vgrind Command 29 Commands Reference Volume 6 t Causes formatted text to go to standard output similar to the same flag in the troff command Xx Outputs the index file in an easily readable format The index file itself is produced whenever the vgrind command is run with the index file in the current directory The index of function definitions can then be run off by running the vgrind command with the x flag and the File parameter PPrintDev Sends the output to Printdev Printer using the qprt command If this flag is not specified the PRINTER environment variable is used If the PRINTER environment variable is not set the system default is used TName Creates output for a troff device as specified by the Name parameter The output is sent through the appropriate postprocessor The default is the ibm3816 postprocessor Forces input to be taken from standard input default if the f flag is specified dFile Specifies an alternate
377. ode on color displays The default is black Prints a brief summary of the allowed options lowercase HL Specifies the highlight color of the edges of the hands of the analog clock The default is black Specifies the width in pixels of the padding between the window border and the clock text or picture The default is 8 Specifies the frequency in seconds that the xclock command updates its display If the xclock window is obscured and then exposed the xclock command redisplays immediately The specification of an update frequency less than 30 seconds enables the second hand in the analog mode The default update frequency is 60 seconds Xdefaults Keywords Use the following keywords to set the defaults for the xclock command analog class Boolean Specifies an analog clock instead of a digital clock The default is true chime class Boolean Specifies whether a bell sounds on the hour and half hour fontSet class FontSet Specifies the fontset for the digital clock Variable width fonts do not always display correctly foreground class Foreground Specifies the color of tick marks on color displays If reverse Video is specified the default is white otherwise the default is black hands class Foreground Specifies the color on the inside of the hands in the analog clock on color displays If reverseVideo is specified the default is white otherwise the default is black highlight class Foreground Specifies the colo
378. of X terminals The configuration for this is identical to the previous sample except the Xservers file would look like the following extol 0 VISUAL 19 foreign exalt 0 NCD 19 foreign explode 0 NCR TOWERVIEW3000 foreign This directs the xdm command to manage sessions on all three of these terminals See the section Controlling XDM for a description of using signals to enable and disable these terminals Note The xdm command does not coexist well with other window systems To use multiple window systems on the same hardware use the xinit command Examples 1 The sample xstartup script that follows prevents login while the file etc nologin exists As there is no provision for displaying any messages here there is no core X client that displays files the setup in this example is not recommended since the login would fail without explanation Thus this is not a complete example but simply a demonstration of the available functionality bin sh Xstartup This program is run as root after the user is verified if f etc nologin then exit 1 fi exit 0 2 This Xsession script recognizes the special failsafe mode specified in the translations in the preceding Xresources file to provide an escape from the ordinary session bin sh exec gt SHOME xsession errors 2 gt 6 amp 1 case S in 1 case 1 in failsafe exec aixterm geometry 80x24 0 0 a esac esac startup SHOME xsession resource
379. of the full keyword to uniquely identify the subcommand The output of a subcommand goes to standard output but you can redirect the output of individual subcommands to a file by appending a greater than sign gt followed by a file name to the command line SubCommand help SubCommand delayMilliseconds host HostName hostnamesyes no keyid Number passwd quit timeoutMilliseconds Query Subcommands Displays command usage information When used without SubCommand displays a list of all the xntpde command keywords When used with SubCommand displays function and usage information about the command Same as the Subommand subcommand Specifies the time interval to add to timestamps included in requests which require authentication This subcommand enables unreliable server reconfiguration over long delay network paths or between machines whose clocks are unsynchronized If you enter this subcommand without an argument it prints the current setting for this subcommand Specifies the host to send quieries to HostName may be either a host name or a numeric address If you enter this subcommand without an argument it prints the current setting for this subcommand Specifies whether to display the host name yes or the numeric address no The default is yes unless the n flag is used If you enter this subcommand without an argument it prints the current setting for this subcommand Specifies the ser
380. of the left hand on a 3 button pointer xmodmap e pointer 1 2 3 4 5 The following command attaches meta to the multi language key sometimes labeled Compose Character It also takes advantage of the fact that applications that need a Meta key simply need to get the keycode and do not require the key symbol to be in the first column of the keymap table This means that applications that are looking for a Multi_key including the default modifier map will not notice any change keysym Multi_key Multi_key Meta_L To automatically generate less than and greater than characters when the comma and period keys are shifted reset the bindings for the comma and period with the following scripts make shift be lt and shift be gt keysym comma comma less keysym period period greater To swap the location of the Control and Shift Lock keys use the following script Swap Caps_Lock and Control_L remove Lock Caps_Lock remove Control Control _L keysym Control_L Caps_Lock keysym Caps_Lock Control _L add Lock Caps_Lock add Control Control _L Related Information The X command xmodmap Command 238 Commands Reference Volume 6 xnim Command Purpose Starts the Network Installation Management NIM graphical user interface This command only applies to AIX Version 4 2 1 or later Syntax Loin Command xnim machines networks resources Description The xnim comman
381. og uuname uupick uupoll uuq uusched uusend uusnap uustat uuto uutry Uutry uux uuxqt Communications Commands Reference Volume 6 Cleans up BNU spooling directories and log files Initiates file transport calls to remote systems using the BNU program Polls the systems listed in the BNU Poll file Generates Universal Unique Identifiers UUIDs for objects types and interfaces Encodes or decodes a binary file for transmission using electronic mail Uses debugging mode to contact a specified remote system Provides information about BNU file transfer activities on a system Provides information about other systems accessible to the local system Completes the transfer and handles files sent by the uuto command Forces a poll of a remote BNU system Displays the BNU job queue and deletes specified jobs from the queue Schedules work for the Basic Networking Utilities BNU file transport program Sends a file to a remote host Displays the status of BNU contacts with remote systems Reports the status of and provides limited control over BNU operations Copies files from one system to another Contacts a specified remote system with debugging turned on and allows the user to override the default retry time Contacts a specified remote system with debugging turned on and saves the debugging output in a temporary file Runs a command on another UNIX based system Executes
382. oindent ai Indents automatically in text input mode to the indentation of the previous line by using the spacing between tab stops specified by the shiftwidth option The default is noai To back the cursor up to the previous tab stop press the Ctrl D key sequence This option is not in effect for global commands autoprin ap Prints the current line after any command that changes the editing buffer The default is ap This option applies only to the last command in a sequence of vi or vedit Command 33 autowrite aw beautifying text bf closepunct cp directory dir edcompatible ed exrc exrc hardtabs ht ignorecase ic linelimit l lisp lisp list list magic magic mesg mesg modeline modeline novice number nu optimize opt paragraphs para vi or vedit Command Commands Reference Volume 6 commands on a single line and is not in effect for global commands Writes the editing buffer to the file automatically before the n subcommand the ta subcommand the Ctrl A key sequence and the subcommand if the editing buffer changed since the last write subcommand The default is noaw Prevents the user from entering control characters in the editing buffer during text entry except for tab new line and form feed indicators The default is nobf This option applies to command input Handles a list of closing punctuation especially when wrapping text wraptype opti
383. ol XDMCP host used for direct or indirect communication with the Xstation Valid options are none or the name of an XDMCP host If XDMCP is not used or if broadcast mode is used the value of Host is none The name of an XDMCP host must be specified if Mode is direct or indirect The default value is none Specifies how the hardware pan feature is to be used Valid options are none square horizontal and vertical The default value is none With the hardware pan feature enabled the physical screen shows a portion of a larger base window whose size is dependent on the amount of video random access memory VRAM installed on the Xstation When the cursor is moved past the edge of the display the screen will automatically scroll in that direction provided it has not already reached the edge of the base window Note The window size for panning is always a power of two With 2MB of VRAM expanding the window dimensions to a power of two may not leave enough memory for the shape selected Sets the map for the keyboard layout Press the F4 key in SMIT to select an option Sets the name of the keyboard file The default is keyboard Some countries have a second keyboard file usually named keyboard alt Sets the LANG variable which specifies system messages Press the F4 key in SMIT to select a value Sets the rate in characters per second of automatically transmitted duplicate characters A prolonged stay on any character key will activa
384. ole device to standard output Displays devices in the system and their characteristics Lists the displays currently available on the system Displays an alpha ordered list of the domains for DSMIT Displays an alphabetically ordered list of machines in DSMIT Lists the fonts available for use by the display Lists the keyboard maps currently available to the Low Function Terminal LFT subsystem Displays the possible parent devices that accept a specified connection type or device Adds a device to the system Adds the font code associated with a display to the system Creates a special file Gives subcommands to streaming tape device Diagnoses activity between an HIA and the 5080 Control Unit Enables or reports the availability of delayed login ports Disables login ports Enables or reports the availability of login ports Disables or reports the availability of login ports on hold Provides a way to format and edit attributes in a virtual printer Print job manager for the printer backend Generates burst pages header and trailer pages for printer output Expands or contracts a predefined definition or virtual printer definition 380 piodigest piofontin pioformat piofquote pioout piopredef portmir pr pshare pstart pstat reset rmdev rmt script setmaps splp stty stty cxma swapon swcons General Operations Commands Reference Volume 6
385. om the authority file sourceFileName The specified file is treated as a script containing xauth commands xauth Command 184 info exit quit Commands Reference Volume 6 to execute Blank lines and lines beginning with a pound sign are ignored A single dash can be used to indicate the standard input if it has not already been read Information describing the authorization file whether or not any changes have been made and from where xauth commands are being read is printed on the standard output If any modifications have been made the authority file is written out if allowed and the program exits An end of file is treated as an implicit exit command The program exits ignoring any modifications This may also be accomplished by pressing the interrupt character help String A description of all commands that begin with the given string or all commands if no string is given is printed on the standard output A short list of the valid commands is printed on the standard output Display names for the add n extract n list n merge and remove commands use the same format as the DISPLAY environment variable and the common display command line argument Display specific information such as the screen number is unnecessary and is ignored Same machine connections such as local host sockets shared memory and the Internet Protocol HostName LocalHost are referred to as HostName unix DisplayNumber so tha
386. ommand You can do this by using the keyid and passwd subcommands which prompts at the terminal for a password to use as the encryption key The xtnpde command will also prompt you automatically for both the key number and password the first time you give a subcommand which would result in an authenticated request to the server Authentication not only verifies that the requester has permission to make such changes but also protects against transmission errors Authenticated requests always include a timestamp in the packet data as does the computation of the authentication code The server compares this timestamp to the time at which it receives the packet The server rejects the request if they differ by more than 10 seconds This makes simple replay attacks on the server by someone able to overhear traffic on your LAN much more difficult It also makes it more difficult to request configuration changes to your server from topologically remote hosts While the reconfiguration facility works well with a server on the local host and may work adequately between time synchronized hosts on the same LAN it works very poorly for more distant hosts So if you choose reasonable passwords take care in the distribution and protection of keys and apply appropriate source address restrictions the run time reconfiguration facility should provide an adequate level of security The following subcommands all make authenticated requests addpeerPeerAddress
387. ommand section of this menu the soft reset entry will reset scroll regions This can be convenient when some program has left the scroll regions set incorrectly often a problem when using VMS or TOPS 20 The full reset entry will clear the screen reset tabs to every eight columns and reset the terminal modes such as wrap and smooth scroll to their initial states just after the xterm command has finished processing the command line options xterm Command 296 Commands Reference Volume 6 The fontMenu sets the font used in the VT102 window In addition to the default font and a number of alternatives that are set with resources the menu offers the font last specified by the Set Font escape sequence See Control Sequences and the current selection as a font name if the PRIMARY selection is owned The tekMenu sets various modes in the Tektronix emulation and is popped up when the control key and pointer button two are pressed in the Tektronix window The current font size is checked in the Modes section of the menu The PAGE entry in the command section clears the Tektronix window Security X windows environments differ in their security consciousness MIT servers run under xdm are capable of using a magic cookie authorization scheme that can provide a reasonable level of security for many people If your server is only using a host based mechanism to control access to the server see the xhost command and if you enable acces
388. ommands Redefines the set of physical volumes of the given volume group in the device configuration database Removes physical volumes from a volume group Reorganizes the physical partition allocation for a volume group Restores the user volume group and all it containers and files as specified in the tmp vgdata vgname vgname data file contained within the backup image created by the savevg command Removes logical volumes from a volume group Removes copies from a logical volume Finds and backs up all file belonging to a specified volume group Synchronizes or rebuilds the logical volume control block the device configuration database and the volume group descriptor areas on the physical volumes Synchronizes logical volume copies that are not current Removes the mirrors that exist on volume groups or specified disks Deactivates a volume group Activates a volume group 386 Commands Reference Volume 6 Commands List Network Installation Management NIM Isnim Displays information about the Network Installation Management NIM environment nim Performs operations on Network Installation Management NIM objects nimclient Allows Network Installation Management NIM operations to be performed from a NIM client nimconfig Initializes the Network Installation Management NIM client package niminit Displays information about the Network Installation Management NIM environment xinstallm Star
389. ompilers Object Data Manager ODM Appendix B Functional List of Commands 352 Commands Reference Volume 6 Communications Commands List Asynchronous Terminal Emulation ate Starts the Asynchronous Terminal Emulation ATE Program xmodem Transfers files with the xmodem protocol which detects data transmission errors during asynchronous transmission Commands List Basic Networking Utilities ct Dials an attached terminal and issues a login process cu Connects directly or indirectly to another system cut Writes out selected bytes characters or fields from each line of a file rmail Handles remote mail received through Basic Networking Utilities BNU tip Connects to a remote system uucheck Checks for files and directories required by the BNU uucico Transfers Basic Networking Utilities BNU command data and execute files to remote systems uuclean Removes files from the BNU spool directory uucleanup Deletes selected files from the Basic Networking Utilities BNU spooling directory uucp Copies files from one operating system to another uucpadm Enters basic BNU configuration information uucpd Handles communications between BNU and TCP IP uudecode Encodes or decodes a binary file for transmission using electronic mail uudemon admin Provides periodic information on the status of BNU file transfers uudemon cleanu Communications 353 uudemon hour uudemon poll uuid_gen uuencode uukick uul
390. on Precedes multicharacter punctuation with the number of characters for example cp 3 The vi command does not split closing punctuation when wrapping Displays the directory that contains the editing buffer The default is dir var tmp Retains g global and confirm subcommand suffixes during multiple substitutions and causes the r read suffix to work like the r subcommand The default is noed If not set ignores any exre file in the current directory during initialization unless the current directory is that named by the HOME environment variable The default is noexre Tells the vi editor the distance between the hardware tab stops on your display screen This option must match the tab setting of the underlying terminal or terminal emulator The default is ht 8 Ignores distinction between uppercase and lowercase while searching for regular expressions The default is noic Sets the maximum number of lines as per the y command line option This option only is effective if used with the exre file or the EXINIT environment variable Removes the special meaning of and and enables the formatted print operator for s expressions so you can edit list processing LISP programs The default is nolisp Displays text with tabs T and the marked end of lines The default is nolist Treats the period left bracket and asterisk characters as special characters when searchi
391. on as specified in the P flag Specifies the beep volume The default is 1 or medium The supported values are as follows Value Setting 0 Off 1 33 Low 1 or 34 66 Medium 67 100 High Specifies the cursor font for cursor glyphs and cursor masks The default depends on the operating system and the display Specifies the default text font The default depends on the operating system and the display Specifies the font path Causes all remaining command line arguments to be ignored Uppercase i 115 Commands Reference Volume 6 help layer Display logo n Number nobs nologo once PRowColumnDisplay pbuffer evel displayname displaynumber X Command Prints a usage message Specifies that the default visual should be in the number sign layer The Display parameter is the name of the display as shown in the Isdisp command Specifying this flag for an adapter that does not have overlays or has less than 8 bits of overlay has no effect Specifying this flag with a higher than the number of supported layers results in the default visual residing in the default layer of the screen as if no layer flag had been used Turns on the X Window System logo display in the screen saver There is currently no way to change this from a client Specifies the connection number Valid values for the Number parameter are 0 to 255 The default is the next available number
392. on keys This should be a file that changes frequently The default is dev mem Number of seconds to wait for the display to respond after a user has selected a host from the chooser If the display sends an XDMCP IndirectQuery Within this time the request is forwarded to the chosen host Otherwise it is assumbed to be from a new session and the chooser is offered again The default is 15 Specifies the name of the file to be loaded by the xrdb command as the resource database onto the root window of screen 0 of the display The Login widget Xsetup and chooser programs use the resources set in this file This resource data base is loaded just before the authentication procedure is started so it can control the appearance of the login window See the section Authentication Client which describes the various resources that are appropriate to place in this file There is no default value for this resource but usr lib X11 xdm Xresources is the conventional name Specifies the program run to offer a host menu for indirect queries redirected to the special host name CHOOSER usr lib X11 xdm chooser is the default See the sections XDMCP Access Control and Chooser Specifies the program used to load the resources By default 198 Commands Reference Volume 6 DisplayManager DISPLAY cpp DisplayManager DISPLAY setup DisplayManager DISPLAY startup DisplayManager DISPLAY session DisplayManager DISPLAY reset DisplayManag
393. on algorithm The possible character in the leftmost column are 249 iostats kerninfo listpeers loopinfo oneline multiline memstats monlist peers xntpdc Command Commands Reference Volume 6 Indicates that this peer was cast off in the falseticker detection Indicates that the peer made it through Denotes the peer the server is currently synchronizing with Displays statistics counters maintained in the input output module Displays kernel phase lock loop operating parameters This information is available only if the kernel of the hosts being generated has been specially modified for a precision timekeeping function Displays a brief list of the peers for which the server is maintaining state These include all configured peer associations as well as those peers whose stratum is such that the server considers them to be possible future synchonization candidates Displays the values of selected loop filter variables The loop filter is the part of NTP that adjusts the local system clock The offset is the last offset given to the loop filter by the packet processing code The frequency is the frequency error of the local clock in parts per million ppm The poll adjust controls the stiffness resistance to change of the phase lock loop and the speed at which it can adapt to oscillator drift The wat chdog timer is the number of elasped seconds since the last sample offset given to the loop filter The on
394. on for the Xstation Security Access Control Only the root user should have execute x access to this command Example To change the characteristics of a network type named x_st_mgr ether enter a command such as the following x_chg_net nx_st_mgr ether bbootfile3 d etc x_st_mgr hethernet s9000 In this example the characteristics include the following the bootfile name is boot file3 the bootfile home directory is etc x_st_mgr the network type is ethernet and the server port number is 9000 Files fusr Ipp x_st_mgr bin x_chg_net Contains the x_chg_net command etc bootptab Contains the boot protocol table etc x_st_mgr lt TypeName gt cf Contains the network configuration file Related Information The aixterm command bootpd daemon login command pclient command x_add_nfs_fpe command x_add_trm_120 command x_add_trm_130 command x_add_trm_140 command x_add_trm_150 command x_add_trm_160 command x_add_xst_fpe command x_chg_net command x_chg_trm_120 command x_chg_trm_130 command x_chg_trm_140 command x_chg_trm_150 command x_chg_trm_160 command x_def_net command x_Is_net command x_Is_net_fp command x_Is_trm command x_rm_fpe command x_rm_net command x_rm_trm command x_chg_net Command 147 Commands Reference Volume 6 x_chg_trm 120 Command Purpose Changes the characteristics of an Xstation 120 Syntax s_chg_trm 320 Conran x che tm 128 120 Name TypeName Address
395. on toggles the marginBell resource and is also invoked from the marginbell entry in vtMenu This action toggles between the alternate and current screens This action resets the scrolling region and is also invoked from the softreset entry in vtMenu This action resets the scrolling region tabs window size and cursor keys and clears the screen It is also invoked from the hardreset entry in vtMenu This action does hard reset see previous entry and also clears the history of lines saved off the top of the screen It is also invoked from the clearsavedlines entry in vtMenu This action directs output to either the vt or tek windows according to the Type string It is also invoked by the tekmode entry in vtMenu and the vtmode entry in tekMenu This action controls whether or not the vt or tek windows are visible It is also invoked from the tekshow and vthide entries in vtMenu and the vtshow and tekhide entries in tekMenu This action sets font used in the Tektronix window to the value of the resources tektextlarge tektext2 tektext3 and tektextsmall according to the argument It is also by the entries of the same names as the resources in tekMenu This action clears the Tektronix window and is also invoked by the tekpage entry in tekMenu This action resets the Tektronix window and is also invoked by the tekreset entry in tekMenu This action copies the escape codes used to generate the current window contents to a file in t
396. on1 command runs the acctconl command generates an error and stops The wtmpfix command also checks the validity of the name field to ensure that it consists only of alphanumeric characters a dollar sign or spaces If the name is invalid the wtmpfix command changes the login name to INVALID and writes a diagnostic message to standard error In this way the wtmpfix command reduces the chance that the acctcon2 command will fail Each time the date is set on system startup or with the date command a pair of date change records is written to the var adm wtmp file The first record is the old date denoted by the old time string The old time string is placed in the line field and the OLD_TIME flag is placed in the type field The second record is the new date denoted by the string new time The new time string is placed in the line field and the NEW_TIME flag is placed in the type field The wtmpfix command uses these records to synchronize all date and time stamps in the file Flags None Parameters File Specifies the file to examine that contains records in wtmp format Security Access Control These commands should grant execute x access only to members of the adm group Examples 1 To convert a binary record in wtmp format to an ASCII record called dummy file enter wtmpfix Command 109 Commands Reference Volume 6 usr sbin acct fwtmp lt var adm wtmp gt dummy file The content of a binary wtmp file is redire
397. ons and decryptions performed broadcastPeerAddress Keyid Version Same as the addpeer subcommand except that the operating mode is broadcast The PeerAddress can be the broadcast address of the local network or a multicast group address assigned to NTP 224 0 1 1 clrtrapAddress Port Interface Clears a trap for asynchronous messages at the specified address and port number for sending messages with the specified local interface address If you do not specify the port number the value defaults to 18447 If you do not specify the interface address the value defaults to the source address of the local interface delrestrictAddressMask ntpport Deletes the matching entry from the restrict list disableOption Disables various server options Does not affect options not mentioned The enable subcommand describes the options enableOption Enables various server options Does not affect options not mentioned You can specify one or more of the following values for Option auth Causes the server to synchronize with unconfigured peers only if the peer has been correctly authenticated using a trusted key and key identifier The default for this option is disable off bclient Causes the server to listen for a message from a broadcast or multicast server following which an association is automatically instantiated for that server The default for this argument is disable off monitor Enables the monitoring facility wi
398. ons are denoted by the kfnumber entries where kf1 represents the F1 function key kf2 represents the F2 function key and so on If the output that you get when you press the function key does not match this entry you must use the terminal s setup mode to correct the settings to match these terminal database entries before any mapping can occur You can also map certain keyboard special keys such as the Home End Page Up and Page Down keys For most terminals these keys are already mapped in the vi editor You can verify this mapping by using the map subcommand If these keys are not already mapped you can use the map subcommand as follows map lt Ctrl V gt lt End gt G map lt Ctrl V gt lt Home gt 1G map lt Ctrl V gt lt PageUp gt lt Ctrl F gt map lt Ctrl V gt lt PageDown gt lt Ctrl B gt To get a listing of all current maps in the command mode enter the map subcommand The preceding examples are then displayed as follows v v map lt Ctrl M gt cwMAP lt Ctrl gt Ctrl M gt lt Ctrl A gt lt Ctrl A gt w lt Ctrl M gt n lt Ctrl M gt g g cat etc motd wc lt Ctrl M gt Note The Ctrl V and Enter key sequence is displayed as the Ctrl M key sequence and the Ctrl V and Esc key sequence is displayed as the Ctrl key sequence map Maps character strings to single keys while in text input mode To map keys in the text input mode start the vi editor with an empty editing buffer and do not name a vi file
399. ontained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the use of this material Commands Reference Volume 6 Table of Contents Commands Reference Volume G ssscccssssscscsssscscsssccccssssccscssccecessccececsscecscssccececsscececsssccsessscesesssescesececeens 1 First Edition October 1997 em interne nee BS 1 Trademarks and Acknowledgements ss 5 W101 6101 Gad AIRE 21010 Gar ante Re RAC IC pO foe oR E 7 Alphabetical Listing of Commands ss 14 Vacation Conia yy 565i ssc aioveg sn EE Avia Ne nn nn te den pose Devotees 15 val Cominand SCCOS he acii i a eE e ENEA SEERE ETEENI EEE naiss fetes etat 18 Varvotive Commandement ur e a aaa a a che a eia a ia A Ea E E Ar OR e E Leea Naa 20 varyonvs Command Ainaa aa ae a E E A EE SEE oan A ead ea si ee 22 ve COMMANG 2s EE E E ETTE E A RRs CR a 25 versions Command ss ons ae ee aa aae ae aa E E set er dl ess Bev an 28 Verind Command damier cates hr nr en ni ne fr tee de sde dt 29 Vlior vedit Command ie int nn into in marient tin ben at 32 view Command 5e nm nn ln rennes tan ne daa eo DR EE EE 51 Virscan Command dessins secs yadagvodsdaduwoabanedasdsaceacsdckanusdadeakacageesasidessayaccerteasdsagsadeses savages 53 VMRCOMMAN nn nn Patient ae ne ne near een dede id Ro E E dos nn et 56 vmstat Command haine entente PA ne RENTE ATEN A ES 58 W Command sn Es ss O OE a EN a os 62 Wait E OSa na Te
400. or falling into bottomless pits There are also super bats that may pick you up and drop you in some randomly selected room For moving among the rooms and shooting arrows the game prompts you with appropriate questions and follows your instructions For example You are in room 14 I feel a draft There are tunnels to 1 13 18 ove or shoot m s m hich room 1 ou are in room 1 feel a draft here are tunnels to 14 17 18 ove or shoot m s m hich room 17 You are in room 17 You fell into a pit Another game y n ZSEHHRKREAE In the above example you start out in room 14 The computer displays I feel a draft This is the hint that a pit is nearby You choose to move to room 1 Again you are warned of the pit You then choose to move to room 17 where you fall into a pit and die At the beginning of the game you are prompted Instructions y n Choosing y provides an explanation of the warnings how to move and how to shoot The game ends and you are prompted Another game y n if e You kill the wumpus e The wumpus eats you e You fall into a bottomless pit e You run out of arrows To quit the game at any time press the interrupt Ctrl C key sequence wump Command 111 Commands Reference Volume 6 Files usr games Contains the location of the system s games Related Information The arithmetic command back command bj command craps command fish command fortune command hangman command
401. or remote hosts ypsetme Indicates that the local host accepts ypset commands only from the local host This flag overrides the ypset flag if both are specified Note If neither the ypset or ypsetme flags are specified the local host rejects all ypbind Daemon 319 Commands Reference Volume 6 ypset commands from all hosts This is the most secure mode since the NIS server cannot change Note If neither the ypset or ypsetme flags are specified the local host rejects all ypset commands from all hosts This is the most secure mode since the NIS server cannot change However if no NIS servers exist on the networks directly connected to the client machine then the ypsetme flag must be used and the NIS server should be specified with the ypset command Files var yp binding directory Contains Internet addresses and port numbers for NIS servers domainname version Binary file that contains the address and port number of the current NIS server Related Information The domainname command makedbm command mkclient command mkmaster command mkslave command ypcat command ypinit command ypmatch command yppoll command yppush command ypset command ypwhich command ypxfr command System Resource Controller Overview in AIX Version 4 3 System Management Concepts Operating System and Devices Network File System NFS Overview for System Management in AIX Version 4 3 System Management Guide Communications and Networks
402. or when using an older X extension library Flags eCommandString Sets the xss command to execute when either the screen saver times out or the user activates the pushbutton Note that if the CommandString parameter value is longer than one word it must be surrounded by double quotations timeoutSeconds Sets the number of seconds of user inactivity before the screen saver times out and causes the xss command to run the CommandString parameter displayDisplayPtr Sets the connection to the X11 display y Turns on verbose mode fgColor Sets the foreground color of the pushbutton bgColor Sets the background color of the pushbutton geometry wxh x y Specifies the size and location of the client window Examples When running remotely and using the display flag for the xss command remember that you may also have to use the display flag option for the command that will be executed by the xss command See the following xss Command 281 Commands Reference Volume 6 running remote example 1 Running remote xss display myhost 0 e xlock remote display myhost 0 2 Screen saver only xss e xlock nolock 3 Simple example xss e xlock xss Command 282 Commands Reference Volume 6 xstr Command Purpose Extracts strings from C programs to implement shared strings Syntax xetr Command xe A I l H L o Le xstr v c File Description The xstr command maintains a file st
403. order to limit the amount of time the server is run The default value is False The xdm command sets the PATH environment variable for the session to this value It should be a list of directories separated by colons see the sh command in AIX Commands Reference for a full description bin usr bin usr bin X11 usr ucb is a common setting The default value can be specified at build time in the AIXwindows system configuration file with the DefaultUserPath resource The xdm command sets the PATH environment variable for the startup and reset scripts to the value of this resource The default for this resource is specified at build time by the DefaultSystemPath resource entry in the system configuration file letc bin usr bin usr bin X11 usr ucb is a common choice Note the absence of period the current directory from this entry This is a good practice to follow for root it avoids many common Trojan Horse system penetration schemes The xdm command sets the SHELL environment variable for the startup and reset scripts to the value of this resource It is bin sh by default If the default session fails to run the xdm command returns to this program This program is run with no arguments using the same environment variables as the session would have had see the section Session Program By default usr bin X11 xterm is used 200 Commands Reference Volume 6 DisplayManager DISPLAY grabServer DisplayManager DISPL
404. osition If the wrapx flag is not set the mouse stops at the far edge of Display 2 In a vertical configuration when the mouse is traveling from top to bottom in Display 1 and reaches the border of Display 1 and Display 2 the cursor continues into Display 2 at the same x axis position When the cursor reaches the bottom of the display 2 and the wrapy flag is set the cursor appears at the top edge of Display 1 in the same x axis position If the wrapy flag is not set the mouse stops at the bottom of Display 2 Flags a Number Specifies the acceleration multiplier for mouse movement For example a value of 5 causes the cursor to move five times as fast as the mouse The default is 4 pixels any value specified must be a positive value greater than 0 authFileName Specifies to X the file from which to read the MIT Massachusetts Institute of Technology magic cookie bc Turns off backward compatibility with Enhanced X Windows version 1 1 be Turns on backward compatibility with Enhanced X Windows version 1 1 This is the default bp Color Specifies a black pixel color for the display The default is display dependent bs Enables backing store support on all screens Backing store support is disabled by default X Command 114 cVolume ce VisualType Display coFile D File d Depth Display Number fc Font fn Font fp Font I X Command Commands Reference Volume 6
405. ostestDeuy F StatsO rectory A1 Truse ey af 9 System anede V Systere ans te xntpd a b d m c ConfigFile e AuthenticationDelay f DriftFile k KeyFile l LogFile p pidFile r BroadcastDelay s StatsDirectory t TrustedKey v SystemVariable V SystemVariable Description The xntpd daemon sets and maintains a Unix system time of day in compliance with Internet standard time servers The xntpd daemon is a complete implementation of the Network Time Protocol NTP version 3 standard as defined by RFC 1305 and also retains compatability with version 1 and 2 servers as defined by REC 1059 and RFC 1119 respectively The xntpd daemon does all computations in fixed point arithmetic and does not require floating point code The xntpd daemon reads from a configuration file etc ntp conf is the default at startup time You can override the configuration file name from the command line You can also specify a working although limited configuration entirely on the command line eliminating the need for a configuration file Use this method when configuring the xntpd daemon as a broadcast or multicast client that determines all peers by listening to broadcasts at runtime You can display the xntpd daemon internal variables with the ntpq command Network Time Protocol NTP query program You can alter configuration options with the xntpde command The xntpd daemon op
406. ostromo Subject a test When prompted again enter the text of the message Sosa Enter initial text After the whatnow prompt enter the whom command whatnow gt gt gt whom The address of the proposed recipients of the message is then displayed lance d77 nostromo deliverable Files HOME mh_profile Specifies the MH user profile usr bin whom Contains the whom command whom Command 94 Commands Reference Volume 6 Related Information The ali command post command whatnow command The mh_alias file format mh_profile file format Mail Overview in AIX Version 4 3 System User s Guide Communications and Networks Peek Jerry MH and xmh E mail for Users and Programmers Sebastopol CA O Reilly amp Associates 1992 whom Command 95 Commands Reference Volume 6 wimcnirl Command Purpose Starts or stops the Workload Manager Syntax wimentrl d Config_dir a p I u o q Description The wlmentrl command loads the Workload Manager WLM properties files and starts the Workload Manager subsystem WLM can be started in two different modes e An active mode where the WLM monitors and regulates the CPU and memory utilization of the processes in the various classes e A passive mode where the WLM only monitors the resource utilization without interfering with the standard operating system resource allocation mechanisms The active mode is the normal operating mode of the WL
407. ow to be mapped the first time before starting the subprocess so that the initial terminal size settings and environment variables are correct It is the application s responsibility to catch subsequent terminal size changes 288 Commands Reference Volume 6 wf Indicates that the xterm command should not wait before starting the subprocess C Indicates that this window should receive console output This is not supported on all systems To obtain console output you must be the owner of the console device and you must have read and write permission for it If you are running X windows under xdm on the console screen you may need to have the session startup and reset programs explicitly change the ownership of the console device in order to get this option to work Sccn Specifies the last two letters of the name of a pseudoterminal to use in slave mode plus the number of the inherited file descriptor The option is parsed c c d This allows the xterm command to be used as an input and output channel for an existing program and is sometimes used in specialized applications The following command line arguments are provided for compatibility with older versions They may not be supported in the next release as the X Toolkit provides standard options that accomplish the same task geom Specifies the preferred size and position of the Tektronix window It is shorthand for specifying the tekGeometry resource geom Specifies the
408. owner of the password you want to change The Network Information Services NIS password can be different from the one on your own machine Root users on an NIS server can change the password of another user without knowing the user s original password Root users on an NIS client however do not have this privilege When you enter the yppasswd command on the command line the system prompts you to enter the old password Once you do this the system prompts you to enter the new password The password you enter can be as small as four characters long if you use a mixture of uppercase and lowercase characters Otherwise the password has to be six characters long or longer These rules are relaxed if you are insistent enough If you should enter the old password incorrectly you have to enter the new password before the system will give you an error message The system requires both passwords because the update protocol sends them to the server at the same time The server catches the error and notifies you that you entered the old password incorrectly To verify the new password the system prompts you to enter it again For this new password to take effect the yppasswdd daemon must be running on your NIS server Note The yppasswd command cannot establish rules for passwords as does the passwd command Flags f Name Changes user Name s gecos information in the NIS maps Gecos information is general information stored in the etc passwd
409. p the initial windows By default xinitre in the home directory is used Options List any option you wish that is available to the client you specified Client Specify the client with which you are working For example xterm or aixterm The client you specify must begin with a dot or a slash Server Use any valid xserver The server you specify must begin with a dot or a slash Examples 1 To start up a server named X and run the user s xinitre program if it exists or else start an aixterm command enter xinit 2 To start a specific type of server on an alternate display enter xinit usr bin X11 X qdss 1 3 To start up a server named X and add the given arguments to the default xinitre or aixterm command enter xinit geometry 80x65 10 10 fn 8x13 j fg white bg navy 4 To use the command Xsun l c to start the server and add the arguments e widgets to the default xinitre or aixterm command enter xinit e widgets Xsun l c 5 To start a server named X on display 1 with the arguments a 2 t 5 then start a remote shell on the machine fasthost in which it runs the command cpupig telling it to display back on the local workstation enter xinit Command 220 Commands Reference Volume 6 xinit usr ucb rsh fasthost cpupig display ws 1 1 a 2 t 5 6 The following sample of the xinitre script starts a clock several terminals and leaves the window manager running as the
410. page A page fault can occur due to a lock miss and this count is incremented for each such occurrence free frame waits Incremented each time a process is waited by VMM while free frames are gathered extend XPT waits Incremented each time a process is waited by VMM due to a commit in progress for the segment being accessed pending I O waits Incremented each time a process is waited by VMM for a page in I O to complete start I Os Incremented for each read or write I O request initiated by VMM This count should equal the sum of page ins and page outs iodones Incremented at the completion of each VMM I O request CPU context switches Incremented for each CPU context switch dispatch of a new process device interrupts Incremented on each hardware interrupt software interrupts Incremented on each software interrupt A software interrupt is a machine instruction similar to a hardware interrupt that saves some state and branches to a service routine System calls are implemented with software interrupt instructions that branch to the system call handler routine traps vmstat Command 60 Commands Reference Volume 6 Not maintained by the AIX operating system syscalls Incremented for each system call Examples 1 To display a summary of the statistics since boot enter vmstat 2 To display five summaries at 2 second intervals enter vmstat 2 5 The first summary contains statistics for the time since boot 3 To display
411. parameter represents the user ID host name network address or nickname on which to perform a directory search The whois command performs a wildcard search for any name that matches the string preceding the optional three periods Flags Forces a name only search for the name specified in the Name parameter Displays help information for the nickname or handle ID specified in the Name parameter Displays the entire membership list of a group or organization If there are many members this can take some time 24 Requests help from the ARPANET host hHostName Specifies an alternative host name The default host name on the ARPANET is internic net You can contact the other major ARPANET user name database nic ddn mil by specifying the hHostName flag Examples 1 To display information about ARPANET registered users by the name of Smith enter whois Smith whois Command 91 Commands Reference Volume 6 2 To display information about ARPANET registered users that use the handle Hobo enter whois Hobo 3 To display information about ARPANET registered users with the name of John Smith enter whois Smith John 4 To display information about ARPANET registered users whose names or handles begin with the letters HEN enter whois HEN 5 To get help information for the whois command enter whois Related Information The who command The named conf file format Network Overview in AIX Version 4 3
412. pecifies the string displayed in the title The default is the hostname of the machine on which the authentication client is running Specifies the font used to display the title Specifies the string displayed to prompt for a user name The Xrdb program strips trailing white space from resource values Add spaces escaped with backslashes at the end of the prompt The default is login Specifies the string displayed to prompt for a password The default is password Specifies the font used to display both prompts Specifies the label for the failsafe button Specifies the font used for the failsafe button Specifies the label for the cancel button Specifies the font used for the cancel button Specifies a message displayed to indicate that the authentication fails The default is Login was incorrect Specifies the font used to display the failure message Specifies the color used to display the failure message Specifies the number of seconds that the failure message is displayed The default is thirty seconds Specifies the argument to be passed to the session program Xlogin XmText translations This specifies the translations use for the authentification client Refer to the X xdm Command Toolkit documentation for a complete discussion on translations The default translation table is Ctrl lt Key gt b backward character n Ctrl lt Key gt a beginning of line n Ctrl lt Key gt e end of line n Ctrl lt Key
413. pended such as graphs 2 The terminal name must be known to the host system Note The Name variable value should not start with an uppercase or lowercase o or x followed by an octal or hexadecimal numeric These characters are interpreted as octal or hexadecimal numbers instead of as a terminal name For example in x3 and xE4 the 3 and the E4 are interpreted as hexadecimal numerics t TypeName Specifies the name you defined for this network Xstation model subnet combination with the Define an Xstation Network Type option in SMIT or with the x_add trm 140 Command 132 Commands Reference Volume 6 x_def_net command Press the F4 key in SMIT to select the network type An example is x_st_mgr ether140 for Ethernet and an Xstation 140 The following flags are optional when using the x_add_trm_140 command a FileAccess fn Font g Location h Host hp PanShape k Keyboard kf File l Language r KeyRepeatRate Server w Time x Xserver Specifies the process for accessing the font files In SMIT press the F4 key to select an option The default option is x_st_mgrd Sets the font used in the login window Press the F4 key in SMIT to select an option Sets the position of the login window on the display Press the F4 key in SMIT to select an option Valid entries are Upper left Lower left Upperright and Lower right Specifies the name of the X Display Manager Control Protoc
414. play and authorization is not available the user is informed by a different message displayed in the Login widget By default the authorize resource is True authName is MIT MAGIC COOKIE I Indicates the file is used to communicate the authorization data from the xdm command to the server using the auth server command line option It should be kept in a directory with restricted write permissions as it could easily be removed disabling the authorization mechanism in the server DisplayManager DISPLA Y authComplain If set to a value of False this disables the use of the DisplayManager DISPLA Y resetSignal DisplayManager DISPLA Y termSignal DisplayManager DISPLAY resetForAuth DisplayManager DISPLAY userAuthDir xdm Command unsecureGreeting in the login window See the section Authentication Client The default is a value of True The number of the signal that the xdm command sends to reset the server See the section Controlling the Server The default is 1 SIGHUP The number of the signal that the xdm command sends to end the server See the section Controlling the Server The default is 15 SIGTERM Causes the xdm command to send SIGHUP to the server after setting up the authorization file causing an additional server reset to occur during which time the new authorization information is read The default is a value of False which works for all AIXwindows servers When the xdm command is unable to write to the u
415. ple a 32 character hexkey would represent a 128 bit value A protocol name consisting of just a single period is treated as an abbreviation for MIT MAGIC COOKIE 1 extractFileName DisplayName Authorization entries for each of the specified displays are written to the indicated file The extracted entries can be read back in using the merge and nmerge commands If the file name consists of just a single dash the entries are written to the binary output generateDisplayName ProtocolName This command is similar to add The main difference is that trusted untrusted timeout seconds instead of requiring the user to supply the key data it connects to group group id data hexdata the server specified in displayname and uses the SECURITY extension in order to get the key data to store in the authorization file If the server cannot be contacted or if it does not support the SECURITY extension the command fails Otherwise an authorization entry for the indicated display using the given protocol is added to the authorization file protocol name consisting of just a single period is treated as an abbreviation for MIT MAGIC COOKIE 1 xauth Command 183 Commands Reference Volume 6 If the trusted option is used clients that connect using this authorization will have full run of the display as usual If untrusted is used clients that connect using this authorization will be considered untrusted and
416. preferred position of the icon window It is shorthand for specifying the iconGeometry resource TString Specifies the title for the xterm program s windows It is equivalent to title nString Specifies the icon name for the xterm program s windows It is shorthand for specifying the iconName resource Note that this is not the same as the Toolkit option name see the following The default icon name is the application name r Indicates that reverse video should be simulated by swapping the foreground and background colors It is equivalent to rv wNumber Specifies the width in pixels of the border surrounding the window It is equivalent to borderwidth or bw The following standard X Toolkit command line arguments are commonly used with the xterm command bgColor Specifies the color to use for the background of the window The default is white bdColor Specifies the color to use for the border of the window The default is black bwNumber Specifies the width in pixels of the border surrounding the window fgColor Specifies the color to use for displaying text The default is black fnFont Specifies the font to be used for displaying normal text The default is fixed nameName Specifies the application name under which resources are to be obtained rather than the default executable file name The Name parameter should not contain or characters titleString Specifies the window title string which m
417. ps the entire NIS map to a requestor in response to a single RPC request Get_order_number Supplies information about a map instead of map entries The order number actually exists in the map as a key value pair but the server does not return it through the normal lookup functions However the pair will be visible if you examine the map with the makedbm command Get_master_name Supplies information about a map instead of map entries The master name actually exists in the map as a key value pair but the server does not return it through the normal lookup functions However the pair will be visible if you examine the map with the makedbm command Log information is written to the var yp ypserv log file if it exists when the ypserv daemon starts running If the var yp securenets file exists the ypservr command only responds to hosts within the ip range specified in this file ypserv Daemon 335 Commands Reference Volume 6 Files etc re nfs Contains the startup script for the NFS and NIS daemons var yp ypserv log Contains the log for the ypserv daemon Related Information The chmaster command chslave command domainname command makedbm command mkmaster command mkslave command ypcat command ypinit command ypmatch command yppoll command yppush command ypset command ypwhich command ypxfr command System Resource Controller Overview in AIX Version 4 3 System Management Concepts Operating System and Devices Net
418. r 365 tftpd timed timedc tn tn3270 traceroute trpt utftp Commands Reference Volume 6 Provides the server function for the Trivial File Transfer Protocol Invokes the time server daemon at system startup time Returns information about the timed daemon Connects the local host with a remote host using the TELNET interface Connects the local host with a remote host using the TELNET interface Prints the route that IP packets take to a network host Performs protocol tracing on TCP sockets Transfers files between hosts using the Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP Commands List X 25 WAN Support Commands List 3270 Host Connection Program chhcons clhcons e789 e789cin e789pr fxfer genprof hconutil Ishconp Ishcons Ishconu Changes an HCON session profile Classifies an HCON session profile Initiates one or more HCON emulation sessions Stops an HCON session and its associated resources Initiates an HCON printer session Transfers files between a local system and a host computer connected by HCON Generates an automatic logon logoff profile for an AUTOLOG procedure Starts the HCON Utility Program Lists all defined HCON session profiles for an HCON user Lists the characteristics of a HCON session profile Commands List Message Handler 366 Commands Reference Volume 6 Lists all HCON users mkhcons Creates an HCON session profile mkhcon
419. r database Commands List Logical Volumes chlv Changes only the characteristics of a logical volume chpv Changes the characteristics of a physical volume in a volume group chvg Sets the characteristics of a volume group cplv Copies the contents of a logical volume to a new logical volume exportvg Exports the definition of a volume group from a set of physical volumes extendlv Increases the size of a logical volume by adding unallocated physical partitions from within the volume group extendvg Adds physical volumes to a volume group importvg Imports a new volume group definition from a set of physical volumes Islv Displays information about a logical volume General Operations 385 Ispv Isvg migratepv mirrorvg mklv mklvcopy mkvg mkvgdata redefinevg reducevg reorgvg restvg rmlv rmlvcopy savevg synclvodm syncvg unmirrorvg varyoffvg varyonvg General Operations Commands Reference Volume 6 Displays information about a physical volume within a volume group Displays information about volume groups Moves allocated physical partitions from one physical volume to one or more other physical volumes Mirrors all the logical volumes that exist on a given volume group Creates a logical volume Provides copies of data within the logical volume Creates a volume group Creates a file containing information about a volume group for use by the savevg and restvg c
420. r the name of an xdmcp host If XDMCP is not used or if broadcast mode is used the value of Host is none The name of an xdmcp host must be specified if Mode is direct or indirect The default option is none Language Sets the language used for system messages the LANG environment variable Press the F4 key in SMIT to select an option Keyboard Sets the map for the keyboard layout Press the F4 key in SMIT to select an option File Sets the name of the keyboard file The default is keyboard Some countries have a second keyboard file usually named keyboard alt Font Sets the font used in the login window Press the F4 key in SMIT to select an option Location Sets the position of the login window on the display Press the F4 key in SMIT to select an option Valid options are Upper left Upper right Lower left and Lower right LPFkeyport Specifies the serial port on an Xstation to which the LPF keys are attached Press the F4 key to select an option The valid options are none T1 T2 S1 or S2 KeyRepeatRate Sets the rate in characters per second of automatically transmitted duplicate characters A prolonged stay on any character key will activate the typematic operation and continue to transmit duplicate characters until the key is released The arrow keys will move at twice the speed of character keys up to 30 characters per second The default rate is 28 Security Access Control Only the root user should have execute x ac
421. r used to highlight the clock s hands If reverseVideo is specified the default is white otherwise the default is black height class Height Specifies the height of the clock The default for the analog clock is 164 pixels The default for the digital clock is whatever is required to hold the clock when displayed in the chosen font padding class Margin Specifies the amount of internal padding in pixels The default is 8 update class Interval Specifies the frequency in seconds in which the xclock command updates its display width class Width Specifies the width of the clock The default for the analog clock is 164 pixels The default for the digital clock is whatever is needed to hold the clock when displayed in the chosen font Environment Variables DISPLAY Gets the default host and display number XENVIRONMENT Gets the name of a resource file that overrides the global resources stored in the xclock Command RESOURCE_MANAGER property 188 Commands Reference Volume 6 Examples 1 To specify a digital clock display enter xclock digital 2 To specify red hands on an analog clock enter xclock hd red File usr lib X11 app defaults X Clock Specifies the required resources Related Information xclock Command 189 Commands Reference Volume 6 xcmsdb Command Purpose Loads queries or removes Screen Color Characterization Data stored in properties on the root window of the screen
422. ransigent servers by specifying the number of attempts to make Controls the behavior of the xdm command when attempting to open intransigent servers by specifying the number of seconds to wait while actually attempting the open that is the maximum time spent in the connect 2 system call Controls the behavior of the xdm command when attempting to open intransigent servers by specifying the number of times that the entire process is completed before giving up on the server After the number of attempts specified by the Display Manager openRepeat resource have been made or if the number of seconds specified by the Display Manager openTimeout resource elapse in any particular attempt the xdm command ends and restarts the server attempting to connect again This process is repeated startAttempts times at which point the display is declared inactive and disabled Although this behavior may seem arbitrary it has been empirically developed and works well on most systems The default is a value of 5 for openDelay a value of 5 for openRepeat a value of 30 for openTimeout and a value of 4 for startAttempts To discover when remote displays disappear the xdm command occasionally pings them using an X connection and XSynce calls This resource specifies the time in minutes between ping attempts By default it is set to 5 minutes If you frequently use X terminals which can become isolated from the managing host you may wish to increas
423. readit c gettoken c lint a getisx c getprp c getpid c lint a fltadd c fltmult c fltdiv c This command sequence is not quite the same as running the lint command once with all the file names The lint command checks cross references between files However in this example it cannot check between the main c and the fltadd c files or between any two files listed on separate command lines For this reason you may want to run the command only if all the file names fit on one line To specify this to the xargs command use the x flag by entering xargs x lint a lt cfiles xargs Command 180 Commands Reference Volume 6 If all the file names in the cfiles file do not fit on one command line the xargs command displays an error message 2 To construct commands that contain a certain number of file names enter xargs t n 2 diff lt lt EOF starting chapl concepts chap2 writing chap3 EOF This command sequence constructs and runs diff commands that contain two file names each n 2 diff starting chapl diff concepts chap2 diff writing chap3 The t flag causes the xargs command to display each command before running it so you can see what is happening The lt lt EOF and EOF pattern matching characters define a here document which uses the text entered before the end line as standard input for the xargs command 3 To insert file names into the middle of command lines enter ls xargs t I mv
424. reenID FileName Description The xmbind command is an X Windows System client that configures the virtual key bindings for AIXwindows applications This action is performed by the mwm command at its startup so the xmbind client is only needed when mwm is not in use or when you want to change bindings without restarting mwm If a file is specified its contents are used as the virtual key bindings If a file is not specified the motifbind file in the user s home directory is used If this file is not found the xmbind command loads the default virtual key bindings Flags display Host Display ScreenID Specifies the display to use The display option has the following parameters Host Specifies the host name of a valid system on the network Depending on the situation this could be the host name of the user or the host name of a remote system Display Specifies the number usually 0 of the display on the system on which the output is to be displayed ScreenID Specifies the number of the screen where the output is to be displayed This number is 0 for single screen systems Parameter FileName Specifies the file containing bindings for virtual mouse and key events Exit Status This command returns the following exit values 0 Indicates successful completion gt 0 Indicates an error occurred xmbind Command 231 Commands Reference Volume 6 Related Information The X command xmbind Command 232 Commands
425. rence Volume 6 Note To use this command you must either have root user authority or be a member of the system group You can use the System Management Interface Tool SMIT to run this command To use SMIT enter smit varyonvg Flags b Breaks disk reservations on disks locked as a result of a normal varyonvg command Use this flag on a volume group that is already varied on This flag only applies to AIX Version 4 2 or later Note This flag unlocks all disks in a given volume group c Varies the volume group on in concurrent mode This is only possible if the volume group is Concurrent Capable and the system has the HACAMP product loaded and available If neither is true the volume group will fail the varyon This flag only applies to AIX Version 4 2 or later If the varyon process detects that there is a new logical volume in the volume group whose name is already being used for one of the existing logical volumes then the varyon will fail You will need to rename the existing logical volume before attempting the varyon again f Allows a volume group to be made active that does not currently have a quorum of available disks All disk that cannot be brought to an active state will be put in a removed state At least one disk must be available for use in the volume group n Disables the synchronization of the stale physical partitions within the VolumeGroup p All physical volumes must be available to use the varyonvg command
426. ress the F4 key to select an option Valid options are e Base FLASH e Network e NFS e Optional FLASH The default option is Base FLASH Specifies how the hardware pan feature is to be used Valid options are none square horizontal and vertical The default value is none With the hardware pan feature enabled the physical screen shows a portion of a larger base window whose size is dependent on the amount of video memory VRAM installed on the Xstation When the cursor is moved past the edge of the display the screen will automatically scroll in that direction provided it has not already reached the edge of the base window Note The window size for panning is always a power of 2 With 2MB VRAM expanding the window dimensions to a power of 2 may not leave enough memory for the shape selected Specifies the mode used by X Display Manager Control Protocol XDMCP XDMCP uses the xdm program to facilitate the connection of an Xstation to a remote host XDMCP allows the user to turn an Xstation off and on again and maintain an established connection to the remote host Valid options are broadcast x_chg_trm_160 Command 163 Commands Reference Volume 6 Sends a message to the network and waits for an xdmcp host to respond direct Directs a request to an xdmcp manager known to the Xstation indirect Sends an indirect request to an xdmcp manager that maintains a list of xdmcp hosts The manager assigns an xdmcp host to respond t
427. ric These characters are interpreted as octal or hexadecimal numbers instead of as a terminal name In the examples x3 and xE4 the 3 and the E4 are hexadecimal numerics TypeName Specifies the name you defined for this network Xstation model subnet combination with the Define an Xstation Network Type option in SMIT or with the x_def_net command Press the F4 key in SMIT to select the network type An example is x_st_mgr ether150 for Ethernet and an Xstation 150 Address Specifies the Local Area Network LAN hardware address of the Xstation This address appears on the LAN Statistics screen when you power on the Xstation Each Xstation has a unique 6 byte hexadecimal hardware address in XXXXXXXXXXXX format that cannot be changed by the user Server Specifies whether or not the host system is a primary boot server A primary boot server responds immediately to a boot protocol broadcast request from an Xstation for other secondary boot servers a delay time is imposed see Time listed next Two options are valid y if the server is a primary server and n if the server is not a primary server The default option is y x_add_trm_150 Command 136 Time Device PortName FontAccess Xserver PanShape Mode Commands Reference Volume 6 Specifies the number of seconds a secondary boot server must wait before answering a boot protocol broadcast request The valid number for a primary server is 0 as there is no delay
428. rings into which strings in component parts of a large program are hashed These strings are replaced with references to this array This serves to implement shared constant strings most useful if they are also read only The command xstr c File extracts the strings from the C source in the File parameter replacing string references by expressions of the form amp xstr number for some number An appropriate declaration of the xstr array is prepended to the file The resulting C text is placed in the file x c to then be compiled The strings from this file are appended into the strings file if they are not there already Repeated strings and strings which are suffixes of existing strings do not cause changes to the file strings If a string is a suffix of another string in the file but the shorter string is seen first by the xstr command both strings are placed in the file strings After all components of a large program have been compiled a file xs c declaring the common xstr array space can be created by a command of the form xstr This xs c file should then be compiled and loaded with the rest of the program If possible the array can be made read only shared saving space and swap overhead The xstr command can also be used on a single file The command xstr File creates files x c and xs c as before without using or affecting any strings file in the same directory It may be useful to run the xstr command after the C
429. rk Type option in SMIT or with the x_def_net command Press the F4 key in SMIT to select the network type An example is x_st_mgr ether120 for Ethernet and an Xstation 120 Address Specifies the Local Area Network LAN hardware address of the Xstation This address appears on the LAN Statistics screen when you power on the Xstation Each Xstation has a unique 6 byte hexadecimal hardware address in XXXXXXXXXXXX format that cannot be changed by the user Server Specifies whether or not the host system is a primary boot server primary boot server responds immediately to a boot protocol broadcast request from an Xstation for other secondary boot servers a delay time is imposed see Time listed next Two options are valid y if the server is a primary server and n if the server is not a primary server The default option is y Time Specifies the number of seconds a secondary boot server must wait before answering a boot protocol broadcast request The valid number for a primary server is 0 because there is x_add_trm_120 Command 125 Device PanShape Mode Host Language Keyboard Font File Location Commands Reference Volume 6 no delay time In SMIT press the F4 key to see the recommended range of values Generally a value less than the minimum value does not distinguish between a primary and secondary server and a secondary server may be selected even when the primary server is available A value greater than
430. rns the black pixel value Returns the black pixel value Returns the number of color map cells in the default color map of the specified screen Calls the remote procedure associated with the cint parameter Changes or retrieves various information about a client object Destroys the client s RPC handle Frees data that was allocated by the RPC XDR system Copies error information from a client handle Returns the file descriptor of the connection Converts an address anywhere within an mbuf structure to the head of that mbuf structure Returns the default color map ID Returns the default color map Returns the depth number of planes of the root window Returns the default depth number of planes Returns the default graphics context GC of the default root window Returns the default graphic context GC Returns the root window Returns the default screen Returns the default screen Returns the default visual type Returns the default visual Returns the number of entries in the default color map Returns an integer that describes the height of the screen in pixels Returns the display of the specified screen Returns the depth number of planes of the root window of the specified screen Obtains the string passed to the XOpenDisplay function Returns an integer that describes the width of the screen in pixels Returns an integer that describes the width of the screen in millimeters Commands List Per
431. rom entering complex command syntax or from searching through menus In addition the VSM interface provides an easy way to view the contents of a logical volume something that was previously only possible from the command line The Storage Manager session creates or adds to the smit log and smit script files in your home directory These are the same files appended when you run a SMIT session The commands built and run by Storage Manager are added to the end of the smit log file along with the command output The time name of the task and the command flags and parameters included are added to the end of the smit script file in a format that can easily be used to create executable shell scripts Example To start Storage Manager enter xlvm To see a list tasks you can perform for an object or area press the right mouse button to display its pop up menu Read the text in the Information Area for help on the objects and areas Files smit log Specifies detailed information on your session with time stamps smit script Specifies the task commands run during your session with time stamps xlvm Command 229 Commands Reference Volume 6 xmaintm Command Purpose Starts Maintain Installed Software a Visual System Management VSM application Syntax xmoalsntim commana smainim f xmaintm Description The xmaintm command starts Maintain Installed Software one of the Visual System Management VSM applications
432. rom the default vacation message create the file HOME vacation msg and add your message to this file The following is an example of a vacation message From mark odin valhalla Mark Smith Subject I am on vacation Delivered By The Graces Of the Vacation program I am on vacation until October 1 If you have something urgent please contact Jim Terry lt terry zeus valhalla gt mark To cancel the vacation message remove the forward file vacation dir file vacation pag file and vacation msg file from your HOME login directory rm forward vacation dir vacation pag vacation msg HOME forward Contains the names of people who you want your mail to be forwarded to usr share lib vacation def Contains the systemwide default vacation message HOME vacation dir Contains the names of people who have sent mail to you while the vacation command was being used HOME vacation msg Contains your personalized vacation message HOME vacation pag Contains the names of people who have sent mail to you while the vacation command was being used usr bin vacation Contains the vacation command vacation Command 16 Commands Reference Volume 6 Related Information The mail command sendmail command The forward file Mail Overview and Forwarding Mail Sending a Vacation Message Notice in AIX Version 4 3 System User s Guide Communications and Networks Understanding Directories in AIX Version 4 3
433. routing tables if one of the following conditions is satisfied e No routing table entry exists for the destination network or host and the metric indicates the destination is reachable that is the hop count is not infinite e The source host of the packet is the same as the router in the existing routing table entry That is updated information is being received from the very internetwork router through which packets for the destination are being routed e The existing entry in the routing table has not been updated for at least 90 seconds and the route is at least as cost effective as the current route e The new route describes a shorter route to the destination than the one currently stored in the routing tables The XNSrouted daemon updates the route after comparing the metric of the new route against the one stored in the table When an update is applied the XNSrouted daemon records the change in its internal tables and generates a XNSrouted Daemon 242 Commands Reference Volume 6 response packet to all directly connected hosts and networks The XNSrouted daemon waits a maximum 30 seconds before modifying the kernel s routing tables to allow possible unstable situations to settle In addition to processing incoming packets the XNSrouted daemon also periodically checks the routing table entries If an entry has not been updated for 3 minutes the entry s metric is set to infinity and marked for deletion Deletions are delayed an
434. rror message and the transfer fails dDomain Specifies a domain other than the default domain The maps for the specified domain must exist f Forces the transfer to occur even if the version at the master is not more recent than the local version hHost Gets the map from host specified regardless of what the map says the master is If a host is not specified the ypxfr command asks the NIS service for the name of the master and tries to get the map from there The Host variable can contain a name or an Internet address in the form aa DAC S Requires the ypserv server from which it obtains the maps to be transferred use privileged IP ports Since only root user processes are typically allowed to use privileged ports this feature adds an extra measure of security to the transfer If the map being transferred is a secure map the ypxfr command sets the permissions on the map to 0600 sDomain Specifies a source domain from which to transfer a map that should be the same across domains such as the services byname map Examples To get a map from a host in another domain enter usr sbin ypxfr d ibm h venus passwd byname In this example the ypxfr command gets the passwd byname map from the host name venus in the ibm domain Files var yp ypxfr log Contains the log file ypxfr Command 344 Commands Reference Volume 6 Jusr sbin ypxfr_1perday Contains the script to run one transfer each day for use with the cron d
435. s The exrc files must be text files consisting of ex commands By default the vi editor reads lines from the files to be edited without interpreting any of those lines as any form of vi editor command Related Information The ctags command ed command ex command sed command tvi command view command The profile file vi or vedit Command 50 Commands Reference Volume 6 view Command Purpose Starts the vi editor in read only mode Syntax lt Subecormmand 4 4 Tag number d a 3 Fe Sotcommand view cSubcommand 1 t Tag wNumber y r File Subcommand File Description The view command starts the vi full screen editor in read only mode The read only mode is only advisory to prevent accidental changes to the file To override read only mode use the exclamation point when executing a command The File parameter specifies the name of the file you want to browse Use vi subcommands for moving within the file Use the q subcommand to exit the view command If you modify the file you can save your modifications by pressing the Esc key and wq Flags CSubcommand Carries out the ex editor subcommand before viewing with vi begins When a null operand is entered as in c the editor places the cursor on the last line of the file l Enters a version of the vi editor with specialized features designed for writing programs in the LISP lang
436. s HOME Xresources if f usr bin X11 startx then exec usr bin X11 startx t wait elif f S startup then xdm Command 208 3 Commands Reference Volume 6 exec Sstartup else if f Sresources J then xrdb load resources Ei mwm amp exec aixterm geometry 80x24 10 10 1s fi To have xdm come up from system startup as root enter the following usr lib X11 xdm xdmconf To disable xdm on reboot as root enter the following usr lib X11 xdm xdmconf d When usin xdm to manage your display an authentication procedure insures that only clients that are allowed can connect to your display Clients that are built using X11 R4 and X11 R5 libraries understand this protocol Clients that are built with X11 R3 or earlier libraries do not support this authentication protocol and are not allowed to connect to the Xserver unless xhost permission is granted Enter the following to allow local clients to connect xhost localhost or xhost machine where machine is the hostname of the local client Files Jusr lib X11 xdm xdm config The default configuration file usr lib X11 xdm Xaccess The default access file listing authorized displays usr lib X11 xdm Xservers The default server file listing non XDMCP servers to manage HOME Xauthority User authorization file where xdm stores keys for clients to read usr lib X11 xdm chooser The default chooser usr bin X11 xrdb The default resource databa
437. s Reference Volume 6 Table of Contents yes Command seeren aea a a e ee hernie ea theta aaa eagles tee 317 ypbind Daemons fiisrsimnnnnintinninininnnnin nine EA RO T a 319 ypeat Commande sta es en AE betes ce Mics veld net en a Len lee er le eaa 321 ypinit Command sn Len eaten nee re matin a are ne ee PT Etre 323 ypmiatch Commande sececiessdeiiessesbiotveshietsd estes tin tte den ne T sede eee nant 325 vppasswd Command vets teed ten elena mee ewes eA cath nae een met eine 327 yppasswdd Daemon iieii isunen a eeren ee e ee NEE EErEE EEEE iageetlseagestelescetabeseseadedusl blasts 329 yppoll Command meiren nee vo aise Ai a AS ea eA eee 331 yppush Command sesan enei aae i a nt M un anne E AAE AE Ei 333 Yps rv Damon nn a a a Mint OS S AE nr dns lets 335 ypseb Commandant Aveta eer EEE eE a E A E RS nate E E eee Seat nu 337 ypupdated Daemons eninin eteren eines en a near detre e e s 339 Ypwhich Commands uc ts sors a un a e e a E ne rare E E marble isis ees 341 ypxfr Command sic feel nn ren REVNE e e Siang eck RaT her RE ee EAE so ia 343 Zeat ComMan Aeee seareiro aaae aee a are aeee 346 Appendix A Command Support for Files Larger than 2 Gigabytes 348 Appendix B Functional List of Commands ss 351 COMMUNICATIONS sr ne den ne oA ee ec nan nait 353 Commands List Message Handler 15 22642e ut nine en edoseubel ethos een entier 357 File and Difectorie Seinere kr
438. s a message to the sender that the mail recipient is on vacation Commands List Security and System Access acledit Edits the access control information of a file aclget Displays the access control information of a file aclput Sets the access control information of a file audit Controls system auditing auditbin Manages bins of audit information Commands List Performance Tuning 391 auditcat auditpr auditselect Commands Reference Volume 6 Writes bins of audit records Formats bin or stream audit records to a display device or printer Selects audit records for analysis according to defined criteria auditstream Creates a channel for reading audit records chfn chgroup chgrp chgrpmem chmod chown chrole chsec chsh chtcb chuser groups grpck last lastlogin Issec lock login logname logout Isgroup Islicense Isrole Isuser makekey mkgroup mkpasswd mkrole mkuser mkuser sys newerp nulladm passwd pwdadm pwdck rmgroup rmrole rmuser Rsh setgroups setsenv Changes a user s gecos information Changes attributes for groups Changes the group ownership of a file or directory Changes the administrators or members of a group Changes permission modes Changes the user associated with a file Changes role attributes Changes attributes in the security stanza files Changes a user s login shell Changes or queries the trusted computing base attribute of a file Changes attributes for the specifie
439. s available A value greater than the maximum value may lead to a time out Specifies the input device Device must be mouse or tablet In SMIT press the F4 button to select the input device The default option is mouse You can attach a 6093 tablet device Model 11 or Model 12 to the Xstation serial port A tablet uses absolute positioning as opposed to the relative positioning of a mouse and cannot change the initial cursor location The threshold and acceleration parameters of the xset command apply only to the mouse X Windows protocol supports five button signals from a mouse or tablet Buttons 1 2 and 3 correspond to the left middle and right buttons respectively Button 4 is used as an event generating button If required by specific application programs button 5 sends the required messages Buttons 6 through 16 if present are disabled Specifies how the hardware pan feature is to be used Valid options are none square horizontal and vertical The default value is none With the hardware pan feature enabled the physical screen shows a portion of a larger base window whose size is dependent on the amount of video memory VRAM installed on the Xstation When the cursor is moved past the edge of the display the screen will automatically scroll in that direction provided it has not already reached the edge of the base window Note The window size for panning is always a power of 2 With minimum VRAM expanding the window dim
440. s ethernet and the server port number is 9000 Files fusr Ipp x_st_mgr bin x_def_net Contains the x_def_net command etc bootptab Contains the boot protocol table etc x_st_mgr lt TypeName gt cf Contains the network configuration file Related Information The aixterm command bootpd daemon login command pclient command x_add_nfs_fpe command x_add_trm_120 command x_add_trm_130 command x_add_trm_140 command x_add_trm_150 command x_add_trm_160 command x_add_xst_fpe command x_chg_net command x_chg_trm_120 command x_chg_trm_130 command x_chg_trm_140 command x_chg_trm_150 command x_chg_trm_160 command x_def_net command x_Is_net command x_Is_net_fp command x_Is_trm command x_rm_fpe command x_rm_net command x_rm_trm command x_def_net Command 167 Commands Reference Volume 6 x_Is_net Command Purpose Lists Xstation network types for the current host Syntax EJ met Command sz is ae 4 x_Is_net Description The x_Is_net command displays for the current host all the Xstation network types defined in the etc bootptab file These are the network types you use when you add an Xstation to the host with the x_add_trm_120 or x_add_trm_130 command The network type is displayed in the Type column followed by the network server port and bootfile for each network type Security Access Control Only the root user should have execute x access to this command Example To display the network typ
441. s for a host and other users are also permitted to run clients on that same host there is every possibility that someone can run an application that will use the basic services of the X protocol to snoop on your activities potentially capturing a transcript of everything you type at the keyboard This is of particular concern when you want to type in a password or other sensitive data The best solution to this problem is to use a better authorization mechanism than host based control but a simple mechanism exists for protecting keyboard input in the xterm command The xterm menu contains a Secure Keyboard entry that when enabled ensures that all keyboard input is directed only to the xterm command using the GrabKeyboard protocol request When an application prompts you for a password or other sensitive data you can enable Secure Keyboard using the menu type in the data and then disable Secure Keyboard using the menu again Only one X client at a time can secure the keyboard so when you attempt to enable Secure Keyboard it may fail In this case the bell will sound If the Secure Keyboard succeeds the foreground and background colors will be exchanged as if you selected the Reverse Video entry in the Modes menu they will be exchanged again when you exit secure mode If the colors do not switch you should be very suspicious that you are being spoofed If the application you are running displays a prompt before asking for the password
442. s not something you can enter on the command line it is not indicated in the diagram Note Default values are included in the diagram for your information It is not necessary to enter them on the command line A command that can read either input files or standard input has an empty Commands Reference Volume 6 default line above the file parameter If the command can write its output to either an output file or to standard output it is also shown with an empty default line above the output file parameter If a command can read only from standard input an input file is not shown in the diagram and standard input is assumed If a command writes only to standard output an output file is not shown in the diagram and standard output is assumed When you must supply a file name for input or output the file parameter is included in the diagram without an empty default line above it 11 FOOTNOTE If a command has special requirements or restrictions a footnote calls attention to these differences 12 VERTICAL MARK This ends the syntax diagram Running Commands in the Background If you are going to run a command that takes a long time to process you can specify that the command run in the background Background processing is a useful way to run programs that process slowly To run a command in the background you use the amp ampersand operator at the end of the command Command amp Once the process is running in the bac
443. s that pressing a key while using the scrollbar should not cause the window to be repositioned Specifies the number of lines to save that have been scrolled off the top of the screen The default is 64 Indicates that the xterm command should start in Tektronix mode rather than in VT102 mode Switching between the two windows is done using the Options menus Indicates that the xterm command should start in VT102 mode Specifies a series of terminal setting keywords followed by the characters that should be bound to those functions similar to the stty program Allowable keywords include intr quit erase kill eof eol swtch start stop brk susp dsusp rprnt flush weras and Inext Control characters may be specified as Character for example c or u and may be used to indicate Delete Specifies the name of the terminal type to be set in the TERM environment variable This terminal type must exist in the termcap database and should have li and co entries Indicates that the xterm command should not write a record into the etc utmp system log file Indicates that the xterm command should write a record into the etc utmp system log file Indicates that a visual bell is preferred over an audible one Instead of ringing the terminal bell whenever the Ctrl G key sequence signal is received the window will flash Indicates that a visual bell should not be used Indicates that the xterm command should wait for the wind
444. s that want to make use of the mouse There are three mutually exclusive modes each enabled or disabled by a different parameter in the DECSET or DECRST escape sequence Parameters for all mouse tracking escape sequences generated by the xterm command encode numeric parameters in a single character as value 040 The screen coordinate system is 1 based For example a 1 The screen cootiinale system is 1 based X10 compatibility mode sends an escape sequence on button press encoding the location and the mouse button pressed It is enabled by specifying parameter 9 to DECSET On button press the xterm command sends the following 6 characters Cb is button 1 Cx and Cy are the x and y coordinates of the mouse when the button was pressed Normal tracking mode sends an escape sequence on both button press and release Modifier information is also sent It is enabled by specifying parameter 1000 to DECSET On button press or release the xterm command sends the following key sequence ESC Yv CCC The low two bits of Cb encode button information 0 MB1 pressed 1 MB2 pressed 2 MB3 pressed 3 release The upper bits encode what modifiers were down when the button was pressed and are added together 4 Shift 8 Meta 16 Control Cx and Cy are the x and y coordinates of the mouse event The upper left corner is 1 1 Mouse hilite tracking notifies a program of a button press receives a range of lines from the program highlights the region co
445. s the allowSendEvents resource and is also invoked by the allowsends entry in mainMenu redraw This action redraws the window and is also invoked by the redraw entry in mainMenu send signal SigName This action sends the signal named by SigName to the xterm subprocess the shell or program specified with the e command line option and is also invoked by the suspend continue interrupt hangup terminate and kill entries in mainMenu Allowable signal names are case is not significant tstp if supported by the operating system suspend same as tstp cont if supported by the operating system int hup term quit alrm alarm same as alrm and kill quit This action sends a SIGHUP to the subprogram and exits It is also invoked by the quit entry in mainMenu set scrollbar On Off Toggle This action toggles the scrollbar resource and is also invoked by the scrollbar entry in vtMenu set jumpscroll On Off Toggle This action toggles the jumpscroll resource and is also invoked by the jumpscroll entry in vtMenu set reverse video On Off Toggle This action toggles the reverseVideo resource and is also invoked by the reversevideo entry in vtMenu set autowrap On Off Toggle This action toggles automatic wrapping of long lines and is also invoked by the autowrap entry in vtMenu set reversewrap On Off Toggle This action toggles the reverse Wrap resource and is also invoked by the reversewrap entry in vtMenu
446. s the language used for system messages the LANG environment variable Press the F4 key in SMIT to select an option Keyboard Sets the map for the keyboard layout Press the F4 key in SMIT to select an option File Sets the name of the keyboard file The default is keyboard Some countries have a second keyboard file usually named keyboard alt Font Sets the font used in the login window Press the F4 key in SMIT to select an option Location Sets the position of the login window on the display Press the F4 key in SMIT to select an option Valid entries are Upper left Upper right Lower left and Lower right LPFkeyport Specifies the serial port on an Xstation to which the LPF keys are attached Press the F4 key to select an option The valid options are none com1 com2 com3 and com4 Security Access Control Only the root user should have execute x access to this command Example To change the characteristics of Xstation taylor for the current host so the new hardware address is 10005ac9999 but the other characteristics remain unchanged from those defined with the x_add_trm_130 command enter x_chg_trm_130 130 taylor x_st_mgr ether 10005ac9999 y 00 mouse coml Use network only Use n All parameters must be entered Files fusr Ipp x_st_mgr bin x_chg_trm_130 Contains the x_chg_trm_130 command etc x_st_mgr x_st_mgrd cf Contains the Xstation Manager configuration file etc x_st_mgr x_st_mgrd tmty Contains the termin
447. s to determine if they have been sorted Finds English language spelling errors Creates a spelling list Verifies that a word is not in the spelling list Changes spaces into tabs Writes a file to standard output beginning at a specified point Translates characters Translates characters BSD version Sorts an unordered list of ordered pairs a topological sort Compresses and expands data Writes to standard output with tabs restored Deletes repeated lines in a file 373 Commands Reference Volume 6 Expands files untab Changes tabs into spaces we Counts the number of lines words and bytes in a file what Displays identifying information in files zcat Compresses and expands data Commands List Text Formatting addbib Creates or extends a bibliographic database apropos Locates commands by keyword lookup canonls Processes troff command output for the Canon LASER SHOT in LIPS Ill mode catman Creates the cat files for the manual checkcw Prepares constant width text for the troff command checkeq Checks documents formatted with memorandum macros checkmm Checks documents formatted with memorandum macros checknr Checks nroff and troff files col Filters for standard output text having reverse linefeeds and forward reverse half linefeeds colert Filters nroff command output for CRT previewing cw Prepares constant width text for the troff command deroff Removes nroff troff tbl
448. s to read or edit any authority files that have been locked by other programs usually xdm or another xauth Indicates that xauth should attempt to break any authority file locks before proceeding Use this option only to clean up stale locks xauth Command 185 Commands Reference Volume 6 Example The most common use for the xauth command is to extract the entry for the current display copy it to another machine and merge it into the user s authority file on the remote machine xauth extract S DISPLAY rsh otherhost xauth merge Files HOME Xauthority Contains the default authority file if the XAUTHORITY environment variable is not defined xauth Command 186 Commands Reference Volume 6 xclock Command Purpose Continuously displays the current time of day Syntax x toen Command Kok rn analog 391s Es L bd E a hi Cobre i g padding Number A update Seconds xclock Xtoolkitoption analog digital chime hd Color help hl Color padding Number update Seconds Description The xclock command gets the time from the system clock then displays and updates it in the form of a digital or analog clock Select the analog or digital flag to display the clock in analog or digital formats You can also select flags to specify the presentation of the clock including chime and update frequency colors and border width This command uses th
449. se in the desired window The keyboard bell rings once at the beginning of the dump and twice when the dump is completed Flags add Value Specifies a signed value to add to every pixel This option is specific to X11R5 frame This option indicates that the window manager frame should be included when manually selecting a window display Display Specifies the server connection help Prints the usage command syntax summary nobdrs Specifies that the window dump does not include the pixels that compose the X window border This is useful if you want to include the window contents in a document as an illustration The result of the nobdrs flag depends on which window manager is running Many window managers remove all borders from the client For example the XGetWindowAttributes function returns the value of 0 for the border_width field regardless of the border width when the client was started Therefore any border that is visible on the screen belongs to the window manager the client has no knowledge of it In this case the nobdrs flag has no effect outFile Specifies the output file on the command line The default is to output to standard out root Indicates that the root window should be selected for the window dump without requiring the user to select a window with the pointer This option is specific to X11R5 idid Indicates that the window with the specified resource id should be selected for the window dump without requ
450. se loader usr bin X11 X The default server usr bin X11 xterm The default session program and failsafe client usr lib X11 xdm A lt host gt lt suffix gt The default place for authorization files Related Information The X command xinit command startx command xdm Command 209 Commands Reference Volume 6 xfindproxy Command Purpose Locates proxy services Syntax xfindproxy manager managerAddr name serviceName server server Addr auth host hostAddr options opts Description xfindproxy is a program used to locate available proxy services It utilizes the Proxy Management Protocol to communicate with a proxy manager The proxy manager keeps track of all available proxy services starts new proxies when necessary and makes sure that proxies are shared whenever possible If xfindproxy is successful in obtaining a proxy address it will print it to stdout The format of the proxy address is specific to the proxy service being used For example for a proxy service of LBX the proxy address would be the X display address of the proxy e g blah x org 63 If xfindproxy is unsuccessful in obtaining a proxy address it will print an error to stderr Flags manager This argument is required and it specifies the network address of the proxy manager The format of the address is a standard ICE network id for example tcp blah x org 6500 name This argument is required and it specifies the name of the d
451. se strings The xargs command limits the command line length When the constructed command line runs the combined Argument and environment lists can not exceed ARG_MAX bytes Within this constraint if you do not specify the n or the s flags the default command line length is at least the value specified by LINE_MAX Flags e EOF String Obsolete flag Use the E flag Uses the EOF String parameter as the logical EOF string If you do not specify the e or the E flags underscore _ is assumed for the logical EOF string If you do not specify the EOFString parameter the logical EOF string capability is disabled and underscores are taken literally The xargs command reads from standard input until either EOF or the specified string is reached xargs Command 178 EEOFString i ReplaceString ReplaceString I Number L Number n Number P Size X xargs Command Commands Reference Volume 6 Specifies a logical EOF string to replace the default underscore _ The xargs command reads standard input until either EOF or the specified string is reached Obsolete flag Use the I Uppercase i flag If you do not specify the ReplaceString parameter the string is used Note The I Uppercase i and the i flags are mutually exclusive the last flag specified takes effect Uppercase i Inserts each line of standard input as an argument for the Command parameter insertin
452. sed Valid options are none square horizontal and vertical The default value is none With the hardware pan feature enabled the physical screen shows a portion of a larger base window whose size is dependent on the amount of video memory VRAM installed on the Xstation When the cursor is moved past the edge of the display the screen will automatically scroll in that direction provided it has not already reached the edge of the base window Note The window size for panning is always a power of 2 With minimum x_add_trm_130 Command 129 Commands Reference Volume 6 VRAM expanding the window dimensions to a power of 2 may not leave enough memory for the shape selected Mode Specifies the mode used by X Display Manager Control Protocol XDMCP XDMCP uses the xdm program to facilitate the connection of an Xstation to a remote host XDMCP allows the user to turn an Xstation off and on again and maintain an established connection to the remote host Valid options are broadcast Sends a message to the network and waits for an xdmcp host to respond direct Directs a request to an xdmcp manager known to the Xstation indirect Sends an indirect request to an xdmcp manager that maintains a list of xdmcp hosts The manager assigns an xdmcp host to respond to the Xstation off No X Display Manager Control Protocol XDMCP The default option is off Host Specifies the name of the xdmcp host used for direct or indirect communication with th
453. sends a datagram to the remote host or router using the well known routing information socket to request routing information The remote host returns the routing table information maintained on that system This information includes the networks that can be reached from the remote host and the required metrics Metrics are the number of hops or routers needed to reach the destination network In the AIX implementation of the XNS protocol the local host forwards all incoming datagrams to the local host if possible Thus the local host can be used as a router if the routing table is properly maintained Examples To obtain the routing information or table contained at remote host 02 4e 5f 70 83 65 on network 40 enter XNSquery 40 02 4e 5f 70 83 65 This displays the following from 28H 24e5f7708365 1h 8 metric 1 110 metric 1 40 metric 1 120 metric 1 where 8 110 40 and 120 are the accessible networks from host 40 02 4e 5f 70 83 65 and metric 1 specifies the number of hops or gateways between the host and the specified network Related Information The netstat command route command XNSrouted daemon Xerox Network Systems XNS Overview for Programming in AIX Version 4 3 Communications Programming Concepts XNSquery Command 241 Commands Reference Volume 6 XNSrouted Daemon Purpose Manages the Xerox Network Systems XNS routing tables Syntax XMBroeuted Daemon MertsbinIKNSroute usr sbin XNSrouted
454. shd ruptime ruser rwho rwhod securetcpip setclock slattach sliplogin talk talkd tcpdump telinit telnet telnetd tftp Commands Reference Volume 6 Unconfigures TCP IP based name service on a host Unconfigures a print service on a client or server machine Manually manipulates the routing tables Manages network routing tables Executes the specified command at the remote host or logs into the remote host Provides the server function for remote command execution Shows the status of each host on a network Directly manipulates entries in three separate system databases that control foreign host access to programs Shows which users are logged in to hosts on the local network Provides the server function for the rwho and ruptime commands Enables the operating system network security feature Sets the time and date for a host on a network Attaches serial lines as network interfaces Configures a standard input terminal line as a Serial Line Internet Protocol SLIP link to a remote host Converse with another user Provides the server function for the talk command Prints out packet headers Initializes and controls processes Connects the local host with a remote host using the TELNET interface Provides the server function for the TELNET protocol Transfers files between hosts using the Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP Commands List Message Handle
455. signed to it is given in parentheses The escape codes to designate character sets are specified by ISO 2022 see that document for a discussion of character sets BEL Bel Ctri G BS Rackspace Crt W TAB Horizontai Tab HT Curt t LF Line Feed or New Line NL CHJ VT Vertical Tad Or same as LF FF Form Feed or New Paga NF Cii L same as LF CA Cartage Ratum 4Cui A so Shit Out Ciri N gt Swtoh to Alternate Character Set wokes the Gt character sat Si Shift ln Ctri O gt Switch to Standard Character Sat invokes the GO character sat ihe dataut ESC 5 DEC Screen Algnment Tee DECALN ESC c Designate GO Character Set ISO 2022 G 0 gt DEC Special Character and Line Drawing See Ce A gt United Kingdom UK c B gt United States USASOH ESC Designate G Character Set ISO 2022 C 0 gt DEC Special Character and Line Drawing Set Cel A gt United Kingdom UK C 8 gt United States USASCII xterm Command 303 Commands Reference Volume 6 LESC ji je Designate G2 Character Set ISO 2022 Ce 0 DEC Character and Lin gt Sont e G A United Kingdom UK Ce United States USASCIN TESST Ile Designate GS Character Sat 150 2022 C 0 DEC Specal Character arc Line Dramng Set Cu gt United Kingdom UK C D gt United States USASCI ESC 7 Save Cursor DECSC Esc 8 Restore Cursor DECAC ESC App
456. space Reports information about space on file systems Checks file system consistency and interactively repairs the file system Formats a DOS diskette Dumps file system information Lists the file names and statistics for a file system Checks file system consistency and interactively repairs the file system Debugs file systems Examines i node numbers Displays the characteristics of file systems Makes a file system Creates a lost and found directory for the fsck command Constructs a prototype file system Makes a file system available for use Generates path names from i node numbers Constructs a prototype file for a file system Removes a file system any logical volume on which it resides and the associated stanza in the etc filesystems file Copies previously backed up file systems from a remote machine s 383 skulker umount unmount update Commands List Games arithmetic bj craps fish fortune hangman moo number quiz ttt turnoff turnon wump Commands Reference Volume 6 device to the local machine Cleans up file systems by removing unwanted files Unmounts a previously mounted file system directory or file Unmounts a previously mounted file system directory or file Periodically updates the super block Tests arithmetic skills Starts the blackjack game Starts the craps game Plays the go fish card game Displays
457. specified child widget Determines is a widget has been realized Determines the current sensitivity state of a widget Copies an instance of a string Determines the byte offset of a resource field within a structure Returns the parent widget for the specified widget Returns a pointer to the screen Obtains the superclass of the widget Returns the window of the specified widget 400 Commands Reference Volume 6 Programming Tools Commands List Debuggers adb Provides a general purpose debug program dbx Provides an environment to debug and run programs under the AIX system od Displays files in a specified format prof Displays object file profile data savecore Saves a core dump of the operating system syscall Performs a specified subroutine call trace Records selected system events tredead Extracts the trace buffer from a system dump image trenm Generates a kernel name list trerpt Formats a report from the trace log trestop Stops the trace function trcupdate Adds replaces or deletes trace report format templates Commands List Messages dspcat Displays all or part of a message catalog dspmsg Displays a selected message from a message catalog gencat Creates and modifies a message catalog mkcatdefs Preprocesses a message source file mkstr Creates an error message file runcat Pipes the output data from the mkcatdefs command to the gencat Programming Tools 401 Commands Refer
458. specified column Moving to Words Enter the following subcommands in command mode If you need information about the format of vi subcommands vi General Subcommand Syntax Moves the cursor to the next small word Moves the cursor to the previous small word Moves the cursor to the next end of a small word Moves the cursor to the previous big word w b e W Moves the cursor to the next big word B E Moves the cursor to the next end of a big word Moving by Line Position Enter the following subcommands in command mode If you need information about the format of vi subcommands see vi General Subcommand Syntax vi or vedit Command 43 Commands Reference Volume 6 Moves the cursor to the top line on the screen Moves the cursor to the last line on the screen Moves the cursor to the middle line on the screen 251 Moves the cursor to the next line at its first nonblank character Moves the cursor to the previous line at its first nonblank character Enter Moves the cursor to the next line at its first nonblank character Moving to Sentences Paragraphs or Sections Enter the following subcommands in command mode You can cancel an incomplete subcommand by pressing the Esc key If you need information about the format of vi subcommands see vi General Subcommand Syntax Places the cursor at the beginning of the previous sentence or the previous s expression if you are in LISP mode Places the
459. st be replaced by a name are in italics These items include parameters that follow flags and parameters that the command reads such as Files and Directories e Default values that do not have to be entered are in the normal font on a bold path The Sample Syntax Diagram illustrates the conventions used in syntax diagrams Each part of the diagram is labeled An explanation of the labels follows the diagram You interpret the example diagram as follows 0 PATH LINE 1 COMMAND NAME 2 SINGLE CHOICE BOX 3 DEFAULT LINE 4 REPEAT ARROW 5 REQUIRED ITEM 6 GO TO NEXT LINE 7 CONTINUE DIAGRAM The path line begins the syntax diagram This item in the diagram is the name of the command you want to invoke It is in bold which indicates that it must be entered exactly as it appears in the diagram In the example diagram the path branches into two paths after the command name You can follow either the lower path discussed in item 2 or the upper path discussed in item 3 If you follow the lower path you encounter a box with the words one of over it You can choose only one item from this box If you follow the upper path you bypass the single choice box and enter nothing The bold line around the box is a default line which means that you do not have to enter anything from that part of the diagram Exceptions are usually explained under Description One important exception the blank default line around input and output
460. st root window at the same y position If this flag is not set the mouse stops at the left or right border of any root window If this flag is set and the hotspot of the mouse reaches the top border of the topmost root window the mouse is positioned at the bottom border of the bottommost root window at the same x position Conversely if this flag is set and the hotspot of the mouse reaches the bottom border of the bottommost root window the mouse is positioned at the top border of the topmost root window at the same x position The wrap flag is for use with multiple head support Specifies the behavior of the mouse when its hotspot reaches the left or right border of any root window If this flag is set and the hotspot of the mouse reaches the left border of the leftmost root window the mouse is positioned at the right border of the rightmost root window at the same y position Conversely if this flag 118 wrapy x ExtensionName query HostName broadcast indirect HostName port PortNumber class DisplayClass cookie XDMAuthenticationBits X Command Commands Reference Volume 6 is set and the hotspot of the mouse reaches the right border of the rightmost root window the mouse is positioned at the left border of the leftmost root window at the same y position If this flag is not set the mouse stops at the left or right border of any root window The wrapx flag is for use with multiple head
461. standard error by the various scripts and programs run during the progress of the session resources Resource File Specifies the value for the DisplayManager resources resource This file is loaded using the xrdb command to specify configuration parameters for the authentication widget server ServerEntry Specifies the value for the DisplayManager servers resource See the section Server Specification for a description of this resource udpPort PortNumber Specifies the value for the DisplayManager requestPort resource This sets the port number that the xdm command monitors for XDMCP requests xdm Command 196 Commands Reference Volume 6 XDMCP uses the registered well known UDP port 177 Do not change this resource except when debugging session SessionProgram Specifies the value for the DisplayManager session resource This indicates the program to run as the session after the user has logged in xrm ResourceSpecification Allows an arbitrary resource to be specified as in most X Toolkit applications Resources At many stages the actions of xdm can be controlled through the use of its configuration file which is in the X resource format Some resources modify the behavior of xdm on all displays while others modify its behavior on a single display When actions relate to a specific display the display name is inserted into the resource name between DisplayManager and the final resource name segment For example DisplayManager
462. sted time using a trusted key unconfigPeerAddress Addr2 Addr3 Addr4 Removes the configured bit from the specified peers In many cases deletes the peer association When appropriate however the association may persist in an unconfigured mode if the remote peer is willing to continue on in this fashion unrestrictAddressMaskOption Removes the specified options from the restrict list entry indicated by Address and Mask The restrict subcommand describes the values for Option untrustkeyKeyid Removes one or more keys from the trusted key list Files usr sbin xntpdc Contains the xntpde command Related Information The ntpq ntpdate and ntptrace commands The xntpd daemon xntpdc Command 254 Commands Reference Volume 6 xpcmcia Command Purpose Starts PCMCIA GUI Graphical User Interface utility Syntax xponcis Covrand xpencis xpemcia Description The xpemcia command starts the PCMCIA GUI utility a graphical interface that enables you to know the real time state of the PCMCIA cards installed in your machine The PCMCIA GUL utility displays icons in the xpemcia window for each PC card slot to indicate their state Each icon represents a device in a slot and what state the device is in When there is no PC card inserted in a slot the image for empty is displayed The description of the device can be viewed in a popup window by moving the mouse pointer onto the device icon Securi
463. stem piomgpdev Manages printer pseudo devices piomkapqd Builds a SMIT dialog to create print queues and printers piomkpq Creates a printer queue piomsg Sends a printer backend message to the user qadm Performs system administration functions for the print spooling system qcan Cancels a print job qchk Displays the status of a print queue qdaemon Schedules jobs enqueued by the eng command qhld Holds a spooled print job qmov Moves spooled print jobs to another queue qpri Prioritizes a job in the print queue qprt Starts a print job qstatus Provides printer status for the printer spooling system rembak Sends a print job to a queue on a remote server rmprtsv Unconfigures a print service on a client or server machine rmque Removes a printer queue from the system rmquedev Removes a printer or plotter queue device from the system rmvirprt Removes a virtual printer Commands List Screen Output banner Writes ASCII character strings in large letters to standard output cal Displays a calendar calendar Writes reminder messages to standard output echo Writes character strings to standard output leave Reminds you when you have to leave more Displays continuous text one screen at a time on a display screen news Writes system news items to standard output page Displays continuous text one screen at a time on a display screen tail Writes a file to standard output beginning at a specified point vacation Return
464. sual System Management VSM applications Install and Update Software Manager is a graphical interface that enables you to install or schedule an install software bundles products packages filesets fixes or maintence levels through direct manipulation of objects icons freeing you from entering complex command syntax or from searching through menus xinstallm ez starts Easy Install a simplified version of the Install and Update Software Manager Easy Install installs only at the bundle level The Install Manager sessions create or add to the smit log and smit script files in your home directory These are the same files appended when you run a SMIT session The commands built and run by the Install Managers are added to the end of the smit log file along with the command output The time name of the task and the command flags and parameters included are added to the end of the smit script file in a format that can easily be used to create executable shell scripts Example 1 To start Install and Update Software Manager enter xinstallm To see a list tasks you can perform on an object or area press the right mouse button to display its pop up menu Read the text in the Information Area for help on the objects and areas 2 To start Easy Install enter xinstallm ez Files smit log Specifies detailed information on your session with time stamps smit script Specifies the task commands run during your session with
465. sual user authorization file SHOME Xauthority it creates a unique file name in this directory and sets the XAUTHORITY environment variable to the name of the created file It uses tmp by default 201 Commands Reference Volume 6 XDMCP Access Control The database file specified by the DisplayManager accessFile resource provides information that the xdm command uses to control access from displays requesting XDMCP service This file contains three types of entries e Entries that control the response to Direct and Broadcast queries e Entries that control the response to Indirect queries e Macro definitions Direct query entries contain either a host name or a pattern which is distinguished from a host name by the inclusion of one or more pattern matching characters An asterisk matches any sequence of 0 zero or more characters and a question mark matches any single character These are compared against the host name of the display device If the entry is a host name all comparisons are done using network addresses so that any name which converts to the correct network address may be used For patterns only actual host names are used in the comparison so ensure that you do not attempt to match aliases Preceding either a host name or a pattern with an exclamation point causes hosts that match that entry to be excluded An Indirect entry also contains a host name or pattern but follows it with a list of host names
466. sv mkprtsv mktcpip named namerslv netstat nslookup ping rep remsh rexec rexecd rlogin rlogind rmnamsv Commands Reference Volume 6 Provides Internet service management for a network Generates a packet trace report from the specified packet trace file Provides interface level packet tracing for Internet protocols Provides the remote print server on a network Shows name service information stored in the database Shows print service information stored in the database Generates the host table file Configures TCP IP based name service on a host for a client Configures TCP IP based print service on a host Sets the required values for starting TCP IP on a host Provides the server function for the Domain Name Protocol Directly manipulates domain name server entries for local resolver routines in the system configuration database Shows network status Queries Internet domain name servers Sends an echo request to a network host Transfers files between a local and a remote host or between two remote hosts Executes the specified command at the remote host or logs into the remote host Executes commands one at a time on a remote host Provides the server function for the rexec command Connects the local host with a remote host Provides the server function for the rlogin command Commands List Message Handler 364 rmprtsv route routed rsh r
467. t Lorrand Sets up NIS on Master Server lusrebin ypinit m A SiweName usr sbin ypinit o n q m SlaveName To Set up NIS on an NIS Slave Server Sets up NIG of Sieve Bervet uariabin ypinit s MaeterName f usr sbin ypinit sMasterName Description The ypinit command sets up NIS maps on a Network Information Services NIS master server or NIS slave server Only users with root user authority can use the ypinit command By default the ypinit command uses the ASCII system files as input files for the map being created Flags m SlaveName Indicates that the local host is to be the NIS master If the q flag is used the m flag can be followed by the names of the machines that will be the NIS slave servers n Indicates that the ypinit command is not to stop if it finds errors 0 Allows any existing maps for the current NIS domain to be overwritten q Indicates that the ypinit command is to get arguments from the command line instead of prompting for input s MasterName Copies NIS maps from the server workstation you specify in the MasterName parameter Examples 1 To set up an NIS master server that functions as the master for all NIS maps enter the following command on the command line ypinit m ypinit Command 323 Commands Reference Volume 6 This command invokes the make procedure which follows the instructions in the var yp Makefile file 2 To set up a
468. t be separated from operators or parentheses by at least one blank or tab Keyword Replacement A keyword must begin and end with the same control character used in control statements A keyword may be up to nine alphanumeric characters where the first character must be alphabetic Keyword values can be any ASCII string A numeric keyword Value is an unsigned string of digits Values cannot contain tabs or spaces Flags a Replaces keywords surrounded by control characters with their assigned value in all text lines not just those beginning with two control characters cCharacter Uses the Character value as the control character The Character parameter must specify an ASCII character vc Command 26 Commands Reference Volume 6 s Does not display the warning messages normally displayed to standard error t Ignores all characters from the beginning of a line up to and including the first tab character for detecting a control statement If the ve command finds a control character it ignores all characters up to and including the tab Exit Status This command returns the following exit values 0 Successful completion gt 0 An error occurred Examples 1 Examples of Keyword Value assignments are numlines 4 prog acctg pass4 yes The ve command removes all control characters and keywords from input text lines marked with two control characters as it writes the text to standard output 2 To prevent a control charact
469. t command xdat Command 193 Commands Reference Volume 6 xdevicem Command Purpose Starts Device Manager a Visual System Management VSM application Syntax xdevicem Commana s eriocem 4 xdevicem Description The xdevicem command starts Device Manager one of the Visual System Management VSM applications Device Manager is a graphical interface that enables you to perform device management tasks through direct manipulation of objects icons freeing you from entering complex command syntax or from searching through menus Device Manager displays system objects and dialogs based on what is contained in your system s Device Configuration database This enables you to manage some devices not covered by the System Management Interface Tool SMIT such as ports buses expansion drawers non SCSI adapters standard adapters and memory cards However Device Manager does not include the following SMIT functions trace printer subsystem management keyboards displays fonts speakers Xstation configuration and communication applications and services The Device Manager session creates or adds to the smit log and smit script files in your home directory These are the same files appended when you run a SMIT session The commands built and run by Device Manager are added to the end of the smit log file along with the command output The time name of the task and the command flags and parameters included are added to the en
470. t local entries for different machines can be stored in one authority file Flags Note Users that have unsecure networks should take care to use encrypted file transfer mechanisms to copy authorization entries between machines Similarly the MIT MAGIC COOKIE I1 protocol is not very useful in unsecure environments Sites that are interested in additional security may need to use encrypted authorization mechanisms such as Kerberos Spaces are currently not allowed in the protocol name Quoting could be added The following options are used with the xauth command They can be given individually for example q i or combined for example qi f AuthFile Specifies the name of the authority file to use By default xauth uses the file specified by the y q i XAUTHORITY environment variable or xauthority in the user s home directory Indicates that xauth should operate verbosely and print status messages indicating the results of various operations for example how many records have been read in or written out This is the default if xauth is reading commands from its standard input and its standard output is directed to a terminal Indicates that xauth should operate quietly and not print unsolicited status messages This is the default if an xauth command is given on the command line or if the standard output is not directed to a terminal Indicates that xauth should ignore any authority file locks Normally xauth refuse
471. t server responds immediately to a boot protocol broadcast request from an Xstation for other secondary boot servers a delay time is imposed see Time listed next Two options are valid y if the server is a primary server and n if the server is not a primary server The default option is y x_add_trm_160 Command 140 Time Device PortName FontAccess Xserver PanShape Mode Commands Reference Volume 6 Specifies the number of seconds a secondary boot server must wait before answering a boot protocol broadcast request The valid number for a primary server is 0 as there is no delay time In SMIT press F4 to see the recommended range of values Generally a value less than the minimum value does not distinguish between a primary and secondary server and a secondary server may be selected although the primary server is available A value greater than the maximum value may lead to a time out Specifies the input device Device must be mouse or tablet In SMIT press the F4 button to select the input device The default option is mouse You can attach a 6093 tablet device Model 11 or Model 12 to an Xstation serial port A tablet uses absolute positioning as opposed to the relative positioning of a mouse and cannot change the initial cursor location The threshold and acceleration parameters of the xset command apply only to the mouse X Windows protocol supports five button signals from a mouse or tablet Buttons
472. tags term term terse terse timeout to ttytype warn warn window wi wrapmargin wm wrapscan ws vi or vedit Command Commands Reference Volume 6 P macro must include the space as a quoted character if respecifying a paragraph Appears in the last display column where a double wide character would not be displayed completely The default character is minus sign Prompts for a new vi editor command when in command mode by printing a colon The default is on Sets permanent read only mode The default is noreadonly Simulates a smart workstation on a dumb workstation The default is nore Allows defining macros in terms of other macros The default is on Sets the number of times you can repeat a command before a message is displayed For subcommands that produce many messages such as global subcommands the messages are displayed when the command sequence completes The default is report 5 Sets the number of lines to be scrolled when the user scrolls up or down The default is 1 2 of the window size rounded down Defines vi macro names that start sections The default is sect NHSHHH HUuhsh c Single letter nroff macros such as the P macro must include the space as a quoted character if respecifying a paragraph Defines the shell for the subcommand or the subcommand The default is the login shell Sets the distance for the software tab stops used by the autoindent optio
473. te the typematic operation and continue to transmit duplicate characters until the key is released The arrow keys will move at twice the speed of character keys up to 30 characters per second The default rate is 28 Specifies whether or not the host system is a primary boot server A primary boot server responds immediately to a boot protocol broadcast request from an Xstation for other secondary boot servers a delay time is imposed see the w Time flag below Two values are valid y if the server is a primary server and n if the server is not a primary server The default value is y Specifies the number of seconds a secondary boot server must wait before answering a boot protocol broadcast request The valid number for a primary server is 0 as there is no delay time In SMIT press F4 to see the recommended range of values Generally a value less than the minimum value does not distinguish between a primary and secondary server and a secondary server may be selected although the primary server is available A value greater than the maximum value can lead to a timeout Specifies the way to access the Xserver file list In SMIT press the F4 key to select an option The default value is Base FLASH x_add_trm_140 Command 133 Commands Reference Volume 6 xdm Mode Specifies the mode used by XDMCP XDMCP uses the xdm program to facilitate the connection of an Xstation to a remote host XDMCP allows the user to turn an Xstat
474. ted by wlmstat Related Information The wlmcntrl command wlmstat Command 99 Commands Reference Volume 6 write Command Purpose Opens a line of communication to send messages to other users on the system in real time Syntax To Query All Messages Awaiting Replies From Users on a Host and Display them with their Handles write q n Host To Reply to a Message Sent by a Utility or a Shell Script or Redisplay the Message Associated with a Given handle write hHandle ok cancel query n Host To Send Messages to a User Optionally on Another Host or a Particular Device write r n Host User User Host Line Description The write command enables message sending over the system in real time It provides conversation like communication with another logged in user Each user alternately sends and receives short messages from the other workstation Long messages can be sent by putting the complete message in a file and then redirecting that file as input to the write command For another user as specified by the User parameter to receive a message that user must be logged in and must not have refused message permission When a message is sent to a user who is not logged in the message user not logged in appears If the message is sent to a user who has refused message permission by setting the mesg command to no the message write permission denied appears When the write command is issued it im
475. ter a security flag then permission is defaulted to 0 for that socket Sets access control on the unix socket The PermissionCode is 3 octal digits which can set read write and execute bits If no PermissionCode is specified after a security flag then permission is defaulted to 0 for that socket Sets access control on the shared memory transport socket The PermissionCode is 3 octal digits which can set read write and execute bits If no PermissionCode is specified after a security flag then permission is defaulted to 0 for that socket Configures the graphics adapter for optimum stereo support for the screen specified by Display Supported screens will configure the adapter to provide the best available support for stereo This may decrease other resources such as texture memory The actual amount of memory affected is device dependent and may be influenced by other factors such as screen resolution or default pixel depth The Display parameter is optional but useful when using the multihead option The Display parameter is the name of the display as shown in the Isdisp command If no display number or name is supplied the stereo flag pertains to all supported screens 117 tNumber to Number V wp Color wrap wrapx X Command Commands Reference Volume 6 Non supported screens will ignore the stereo flag Disables save under support on all screens Disables the Ctrl Alt Backspace ke
476. ter key will activate the typematic operation and continue to transmit duplicate characters until the key is released The arrow keys will move at twice the speed of character keys up to 30 characters per second The default rate is 28 Security Access Control Only the root user should have execute x access to this command Example To add Xstation taylor to the current host as a primary server enter a command such as the following x_add_trm_150 150 taylor x_st_mgr ether 10005ac38e9 y 00 mouse S1 n n Base FLASH Base FLASH none off none English United States IBM 850 English United States keyboard Roml4 Upper left none 20 Xstation taylor is added to the current host as defined by the parameters Model 150 a network type of ethernet a hardware address of 10005ac38e9 primary server status no delay time input from a mouse tablet port is ignored fonts and bootfile from Base FLASH no hardware pan feature xdmcp mode off no host name United States English LANG variable United States English keyboard layout standard keyboard file login window font Rom14 the login window in the upper left corner of the screen no LPF keys and a key repeat rate of 20 characters per second Files fusr Ipp x_st_mgr bin x_add_trm_150 Contains the x_add_trm_150 command letc x_st_mgr ibm xs150 cfg lt IPADDRESS gt Contains the Xstation configuration file letc x_st_mgr x_st_mgrd cf Contains the Xstation Manager confi
477. th default enable on pll Enables the server to adjust its local clock with default enable on If not set the local clock free runs at its intrinsic time and frequency offset This option is useful when the local clock is controlled by some other device or protocol and NTP is used only to provide synchronization to other clients Stats Enables statistics facility filegen with default enable on xntpdc Command 252 Commands Reference Volume 6 fudgePeerAddress Timel Time2 Stratum Refid Provides a way to set certain data for a reference clock Timel and Time2 are in fixed point seconds and used in some clock drivers as calibration constants Stratum is a number in the range zero to 15 and used to assign a nonstandard operating stratum to the clock Refid is an ASCII string in the range one to four characters and used to assign a nonstandard reference identifier to the clock monitoryes no Enables or disables the monitoring facility A monitorno subcommand followed by a monitoryes subcommand is a good way of resetting the packet counts readkeys Purges the current set of authentication keys and obtains a new set by rereading the keys file specified in the xntpd configuration file This allows you to change encryption keys without restarting the server resetModule Clears the statistics counters in various modules of the server You can specify one or more of the following values for Module io sys
478. th element The valid options are xst for Xstation Manager Daemon tcp for Network Font Server default for initial default font path element nfs for NFS and tftp for TFTP Host Specifies the name of the system specified in the font path element For elements using the default method specify None Port Specifies the number of the server port specified in the font path element For elements using the nfs or tftp method specify None Directory Specifies the complete path to the directory that contains the fonts For a Network Font Server element specify None Security Access Control Only the root user should have execute x access to this command Examples To remove the font element usr lib X11 fonts 100dpi from the font path for network type x_st_mgr ether enter x_rm fpe x_st_mgr ether 3 nfs waco None usr lib X11 fonts 100dpi In this example the font path element usr lib X11 fonts 100dpi that is accessed on host waco using NFS has been removed from the third position of the font path for network type x_st_mgr ether Because a port number is not used for NFS this parameter was set to None Files fusr Ipp x_st_mgr bin x_rm_fpe Contains the x_rm_fpe command x_rm_fpe Command 173 Commands Reference Volume 6 letc x_st_mgr ether cf Contains the network type x_st_mgr ether configuration file sample Related Information The aixterm command bootpd daemon login command pclient command x_add_nfs_fpe command x_
479. that auto wraparound should not be allowed Indicates that the xterm command may scroll asynchronously 287 S sk sl Number t t tmSfring tnName xterm Command Commands Reference Volume 6 meaning that the screen does not have to be kept completely up to date while scrolling This allows the xterm command to run faster when network latencies are high and is typically useful when running across a large Internet or many gateways Indicates that the xterm command should scroll synchronously Indicates that some number of lines that are scrolled off the top of the window should be saved and that a scrollbar should be displayed so that those lines can be viewed This option may be turned on and off from the VT Options menu Indicates that a scrollbar should not be displayed Indicates that Sun Function Key escape codes should be generated for function keys Indicates that the standard escape codes should be generated for function keys Indicates that output to a window should not automatically reposition the screen to the bottom of the scrolling region This option can be turned on and off from the VT Options menu Indicates that output to a window should cause it to scroll to the bottom Indicates that pressing a key while using the scrollbar to review previous lines of text should cause the window to be repositioned automatically in the normal position at the bottom of the scroll region Indicate
480. the Ctrl V key sequence when being mapped This condition is also true of the Esc Backspace and Delete keys To map the control characters Ctrl A Ctrl K and Ctrl O simultaneously press the Ctrl key and the letter For example to map the Ctrl A key sequence to the sequence of commands that saves a file and edits the next one in a series enter the following command map lt Ctrl A gt w lt Ctrl V gt lt Enter gt n lt Ctrl V gt lt Enter gt To map the control characters Ctrl T Ctrl W and Ctrl X you must first escape them with the Ctrl V key sequence To map the pipe symbol you must first escape it with the two Ctrl V key sequences as illustrated by the following example that maps the character g to the sequence of commands that escapes to the shell concatenates the file etc motd and pipes the output to the we command map g cat etc motd lt Ctrl V gt lt Ctrl V gt we lt Ctrl V gt lt Enter gt If your terminal permits you to map function keys you must reference them with the number key sequence to designate the number of the function key that you want to map In the following example the F1 function key is mapped to the sequence of commands that deletes a word and moves the cursor three words down map 1 dwwww In order for function key mapping to work the output of the function key for your terminal type must match the output defined in the terminfo file On AIX operating systems these definiti
481. the Tag tag starting at the location of the tag To use this subcommand you must first create a database of function names and their locations using the ctags command If you are using this subcommand from the ex editor you do not need to type the colon Ctrl A Edits the alternate file The alternate file is usually the previous current file name However if changes are pending on the current file when a new file is called the new file becomes the alternate file This subcommand is the same as the e subcommand Editing a List of Files Enter the following subcommands in command mode If you need information about the format of vi subcommands see vi General Subcommand Syntax nm Edits the next file in the list entered on the command line If you are using this subcommand from the ex editor a colon is not needed nFiles Specifies a new list of files to edit If you are using this subcommand from the ex editor a colon 1s not needed Finding File Information Enter the following subcommand in command mode If you need information about the format of vi subcommands see vi General Subcommand Syntax Ctrl G Shows the current file name current line number number of lines in the file and percentage of the way through the file where the cursor is located Other Actions The vi editor provides the subcommands described in the following sections e Adjusting the screen vi or vedit Command 48 Commands Reference Vo
482. the X Open UNIX98 Specification for portability of UNIX based operating systems Many new interfaces and some current ones have been added or enhanced to meet this specification Making AIX Version 4 3 even more open and portable for applications At the same time compatibility with previous AIX releases is preserved This is accomplished by the creation of a new environment variable which can be used to set the system environment on a per system per user or per process basis To determine the proper way to develop a UNIX98 portable application you may need to refer to the X Open UNIX98 Specification which can be obtained on a CD ROM by ordering the printed copy of AIX Version 4 3 Commands Reference order number SBOF 1877 or by ordering Go Solo How to Implement and Go Solo with the Single Unix Specification order number SR28 5705 a book which includes the X Open UNIX98 Specification on a CD ROM Related Information The following books contain information about or related to commands e AIX and Related Products Documentation Overview Order Number SC23 2456 e AIX Version 4 3 Files Reference Order Number SC23 4168 e AIX Version 4 3 General Programming Concepts Writing and Debugging Programs Order Number SC23 4128 e AIX Version 4 3 Problem Solving Guide and Reference Order Number SC23 4123 e AIX Version 4 3 System Management Guide Communications and Networks Order Number SC23 4127 e AIX Version 4 3 System Management
483. the maximum value may lead to a time out Specifies the input device Device must be mouse or tablet In SMIT press the F4 button to select the input device The default option is mouse You can attach a 6093 tablet device Model 11 or Model 12 to the Xstation serial port A tablet uses absolute positioning as opposed to the relative positioning of a mouse and cannot change the initial cursor location The threshold and acceleration parameters of the xset command apply only to the mouse X Windows protocol supports five button signals from a mouse or tablet Buttons 1 2 and 3 correspond to the left middle and right buttons respectively Button 4 is used as an event generating button If required by specific application programs button 5 sends the required messages Buttons 6 through 16 if present are disabled Specifies how the hardware pan feature is to be used Valid options are none square horizontal and vertical The default value is none With the hardware pan feature enabled the physical screen shows a portion of a larger base window whose size is dependent on the amount of video memory VRAM installed on the Xstation When the cursor is moved past the edge of the display the screen will automatically scroll in that direction provided it has not already reached the edge of the base window Note The window size for panning is always a power of 2 With minimum VRAM expanding the window dimensions to a power of 2 may not lea
484. the section sizes of the Extended Common Object File Format XCOFF object files slibclean Removes any currently unused modules in kernel and library memory strings Finds the printable strings in an object or binary file strip Reduces the size of an Extended Common Object File Format XCOFF object file by removing information used by the binder and symbolic debug program Commands List Miscellaneous Languages be Provides an interpreter for arbitrary precision arithmetic language bs Compiles and interprets modest sized programs m4 Preprocesses files expanding macro definitions sno Provides a SNOBOL interpreter Commands List C Tools cb Puts C source code into a form that is easily read cflow Generates a C flow graph of external references cpp Performs file inclusion and macro substitution on C Language source files cxref Creates a C program cross reference listing execerror Programming Tools 403 Commands Reference Volume 6 Writes error messages to standard error indent Reformats a C Language program ipcrm Removes message queue semaphore set or shared memory identifiers lex Generates a C Language program that matches patterns for simple lexical analysis of an input stream lint Checks the C Language programs for potential problems m4 Preprocesses files expanding macro definitions mkstr Creates an error message file regcmp Compiles patterns into C Language char declarations tic Transl
485. ther140 for Ethernet and an Xstation 140 The following flags are optional when using the x_chg_trm_140 command to change the Xstation 140 x_chg_trm_140 Command 155 a FileAccess fn Font g Location h Host hp PanShape k Keyboard kf File l Language r KeyRepeatRate Server w Time x Xserver xdm Mode Commands Reference Volume 6 Specifies the process for accessing the font files In SMIT press the F4 key to select an option The default option is x_st_mgrd Sets the font used in the login window Press the F4 key in SMIT to select an option Sets the position of the login window on the display Press the F4 key in SMIT to select an option Valid options are Upper left Upper right Lower left and Lower right Specifies the name of the X Display Manager Control Protocol XDMCP host used for direct or indirect communication with the Xstation Valid options are none or the name of an XDMCP host If XDMCP is not used or if broadcast mode is used the value of Host is none The name of an XDMCP host must be specified if Mode is direct or indirect The default value is none Specifies how the hardware pan feature is to be used Valid options are none square horizontal and vertical The default value is none With the hardware pan feature enabled the physical screen shows a portion of a larger base window whose size is dependent on the amount of video random access memory VRA
486. this text along with some header information and sends it After sending the encrypted message the xsend command mails a standard mail message to the recipient informing them they have received secret mail Note Secret mail can only be sent to local users Examples 1 To send secret mail enter xsend ron When you have issued the xsend command with the recipient s name the mail system is used to enter the text of the message When you finish entering the message to user ron press the Enter key then Ctrl D or a period to exit the mail editor and send the message The xsend command encrypts the message before it is sent 2 To send a file to another user enter xsend lance lt proposal In this example the file proposal is sent to user lance Files var spool secretmail keys Contains the encrypted key for User var spool secretmail 0 9 Contains the encrypted mail messages for User xsend Command 272 Commands Reference Volume 6 usr bin xsend Contains the command executable files Related Information The bellmail command enroll command mail command xget command Mail Overview Sending and Receiving Secret Mail in AIX Version 4 3 System User s Guide Communications and Networks xsend Command 273 Commands Reference Volume 6 xset Command Purpose Sets options for your X Windows environment Syntax xset Command UE pepe display Host Display xset displayDisplay b Volume
487. time In SMIT press F4 to see the recommended range of values Generally a value less than the minimum value does not distinguish between a primary and secondary server and a secondary server may be selected although the primary server is available A value greater than the maximum value may lead to a time out Specifies the input device Device must be mouse or tablet In SMIT press the F4 button to select the input device The default option is mouse You can attach a 6093 tablet device Model 11 or Model 12 to an Xstation serial port A tablet uses absolute positioning as opposed to the relative positioning of a mouse and cannot change the initial cursor location The threshold and acceleration parameters of the xset command apply only to the mouse X Windows protocol supports five button signals from a mouse or tablet Buttons 1 2 and 3 correspond to the left middle and right buttons respectively Button 4 is used as an even generating button If required by specific application programs button 5 sends the required messages Buttons 6 through 16 if present are disabled Specifies the serial port on an Xstation 150 to which the tablet is attached In SMIT press the F4 key to select an option The valid options are T1 T2 S1 or S2 The default option is T1 Specifies the way to access the font files In SMIT press the F4 key to select an option Valid options are e Base FLASH e Network e NFS e Optional FLASH The def
488. time stamps xinstallm Command 222 Commands Reference Volume 6 Related Information Installing Optional Software in AIX Installation Guide xinstallm Command 223 Commands Reference Volume 6 xlock Command Purpose Locks the local X display until a password is entered Syntax xlock Command invalid TextStang batchcourt Number mode ModeVarne bg Color username eatStnang delay Users nice Level display Display password Text String fg Coor saturation Value font FontNiame timeout Seconds info TextStrng help validate TextSiring mono nolock remote ov nono holock remote Vv Moment H pa Ls allowaccess allowroot echokeys enablesaver echokeys enablesaver a usefirst xlock batchcount Number bg Color delay Users display Display fg Color font FontName info TextString invalid TextString mode ModeName mono mono username TextString nice Level nolock nolock password TextString remote remote tallowaccess allowaccess allowroot allowroot echokeys echokeys enablesaver enablesaver help saturation Value timeout Seconds usefirst usefirst v v validate TextString Description The xlock command locks the X server until the user enters a password at the keyboard While the xlock command is running all new server connections are refused The screen sa
489. tions e Moving by redrawing the screen e Paging and scrolling e Searching for patterns e Marking a specific location in a file and returning Moving within a Line Enter the following subcommands in command mode You can cancel an incomplete command by pressing the Esc key If you need information about the format of vi subcommands see vi General Subcommand Syntax Left Arrow or h or Ctri H Moves the cursor one character to the left Down Arrow or j or Ctrl J or Ctrl N Moves the cursor down one line it remains in the same column Up Arrow or k or Ctrl P Moves the cursor up one line it remains in the same column Right Arrow or Moves the cursor one character to the right Moving within a Line by Character Position Enter the following subcommands in command mode You can cancel an incomplete command by pressing the Esc key If you need information about the format of vi subcommands see vi General Subcommand Syntax Moves the cursor to the first nonblank character 0 Moves the cursor to the beginning of the line Moves the cursor to the end of the line fx Moves the cursor to the next x character Fx Moves the cursor to the last x character tx Moves the cursor to one column before the next x character Tx Moves the cursor to one column after the last x character Repeats the last f F t or T subcommand Repeats the last f F t or T subcommand in the opposite direction Number Moves the cursor to the
490. tmty file and the etc x_st_mgr x_st_merd cf file Flags The following flags are required when using the x_chg_trm_140 command to change the Xstation 140 ha Address Specifies the local area network LAN hardware address of the Xstation This address appears on the LAN Statistics screen when you turn on the Xstation Each Xstation has a unique 6 byte hexadecimal hardware address in XXXXXXXXXXXX format that cannot be changed by the user n Name Specifies the name of the Xstation The Name variable can be up to 8 characters long and include the uppercase or lowercase letters a through z the numbers 0 through 9 the dash and the period Name can be a user name such as taylor or a group name with a number appended such as graphs 2 and should identify an Xstation by its location in the work place or by the primary user s name The Name parameter is stored in the etc hosts file Note The Name variable should not start with a lowercase or uppercase o or x followed by an octal or hexadecimal numeric These characters are interpreted as octal or hexadecimal numbers instead of as a terminal name For example in x3 and xE4 the 3 and the E4 are hexadecimal numerics tTypeName Specifies the name you defined for this network Xstation model subnet combination with the Define an Xstation Network Type option in SMIT or with the x_def_net command Press the F4 key in SMIT to select the Network Type An example is x_st_mgr e
491. tns from gt EXC TY IT IG JE Jo lam a VT100 with Advanced Video Option Pa ESC Fel_m xterm Command Horizontal and Vertca Position column detautt 1 1 HVP T Tab Clear TEC Py O gt Clear Current Column defaut P 3 Geer Al Set Mode SM P 4 insert Mode IRM P 2 0 gt Automatic Newline LNM Reset Mode AM FP 4 gt Replace Mode IRM Pal 2 C0 gt Noma Linetesd LNA Craracter Atrbutes SSR P D gt Normal defaut Ps 1 gt Bow Pes 4 gt Underscores Pan 5 Blink appesrs ss Boks P 7 bvwese Device Status Report DSA P 5 Status Rapor ESI ICE Ca ron huii Mn O row column as ESI TL i Ci lela A Sat Streling Ragion op bottom tait tul size at Request Termina Parameters DECREOTPARM DEC Private Mode Set DECSET P ul T gt Application Cursor Keys DECCKM P 2 USASCI for character atl I coe DOOS tin See VIICE Bus sec VTS2 made DECANAR no support P 3 122 Column Mode DECCOLM Pa 4 gt Smooth Siow Sorot DECSCL Pal 5 Reverse Video DECSCNM P 6 Origin Mode DECOM Py 7 gt Wraparound Mode DECAWM P 8 Auto repeat Keys DEGAAM Pr 9 e Sand Mous X Aon bulon ee Saa Mouse Tracking Pp 3 8 gt Breer Tekronix Mage DECTEK Pn 4 gt Allow 80 lt gt 132 Mode P 4 seurses function fix Pam 4
492. to read commands from standard input and run them on the NTP server running on the first host specified or on the local host by default It prompts for subcommands if standard input is the terminal The xntpde command uses NTP mode 7 packets to communicate with the NTP server and can query any compatable server on the network which permits it The xntpde command makes no attempt to retransmit requests and will time out requests if the remote host does not respond within a suitable time Specifying a flag other than i or n sends the queries to the specified hosts immediately Otherwise the xntpde command attempts to read interactive format commands from standard input Flags C SubCommand Specifies an interactive format command This flag adds SubCommand to the list of commands to run on the specified hosts You can enter multiple c flags i Specifies interactive mode Standard output displays prompt and standard input reads commands l lowercase L Displays a list of the peers known to the servers This is the same as the listpeers subcommand n Displays all host addresses in dotted decimal format 0 0 0 0 rather than the canonical host names xntpdc Command 247 Commands Reference Volume 6 p Displays a list of the peers known to the server and a summary of their state This is the same as the peers subcommand s Displays a list of the peers known to the server and a summary of their state but in a format dif
493. top Inches trailer String width Inches device Device ImageFile Description The xpr command uses a window dump file produced by the xwd utility as input and formats the dump file for output on all printers supported by the hardware If you do not specify a file argument the xpr command uses standard input By default the xpr command prints the largest possible representation of the window on the output page The xpr command options allow you to add headers and trailers specify margins adjust the scale and orientation and append multiple window dumps to a single output file Output is to standard output unless the output flag is specified Flags append FileName Specifies a file name previously produced by the xpr command to which the window is to append This flag is not supported on PostScript printers compact Uses simple run length encoding for compact representation of windows with many white pixels This flag compresses white space but not black space so it is not useful for reverse video windows This flag supports PostScript LIPS II and LIPSII output only xpr Command 258 cutoffLevel device Device density Dpi gray Number header String height Inches ImageFile landscape left Inches noff noposition output FileName xpr Command Commands Reference Volume 6 Changes the intensity level where colors are mapped to black or white for monoc
494. toreType page Number ToolKitFlag File Description The xpreview command is an AIXwindows 2 1 and Motif2 1 based application that displays output from the troff command on an AIXwindows display The troff command output file must be prepared for the devX100 device The user interface contains the standard AIXwindows interface controls for calling the root menu iconifying the window and setting the window to full screen size The interface also includes a main window with a scrollable display area for text Use the pushbuttons for Next Previous Goto Page Print Page Print File and Newfile to manipulate the viewing document Mouse button three actuates a popup menu for configuring print capabilities The menu includes an option to set the command line and another to select a printer queue The command line dialog box expects command line input through the troff command For example pic Tibm3816 troff input file tbl troff mm Tibm3816 is an acceptable command line The printer queue option displays a list of configured printer queues If this option is not selected the xpreview command uses the system defined default queue When you are previewing an input file the Print Page and Print File buttons require command line input Note that once a printer queue is selected it remains selected for the duration of the viewing session or until an alternate printer queue is selected Fonts supported for the devX100 devic
495. ts Install and Update Software Manager or Easy Install two of the Visual System Management VSM applications xnim Starts the Network Installation Management NIM graphical user interface General Operations 387 Commands Reference Volume 6 Commands List Numerical Data be Provides an interpreter for arbitrary precision arithmetic language de Provides an interactive desk calculator for doing arbitrary precision integer arithmetic factor Factors a number number Displays the written form of a number units Converts units in one measure to equivalent units in another measure Commands List Numerical Data 388 Commands Reference Volume 6 Commands List Performance Tuning acctcms acctcom accton bf bfrpt filemon fileplace gprof iostat Isattr Islv mmtu Produces command usage summaries from accounting records Displays selected process accounting record summaries Performs process accounting procedures Analyzes the memory requirements of applications Analyzes the memory requirements of applications Monitors and reports performance of file system Displays the placement of file s blocks within logical or physical volumes Displays call graph profile data Reports Central Processing Unit CPU statistics and input output statistics for tty disks and CD ROMs Displays attribute characteristics and possible values of attributes for devices in the system Displays information about a logical
496. ts to use initially Values are the same as for the set tek text action The default is large ginTerminator class GinTerminator Specifies what characters should follow a GIN report or status report The possibilities are none which sends no terminating characters CRonly which sends CR and CR amp EOT which sends both CR and EOT The default is none The resources that may be specified for the various menus are described in the documentation for the AthenaSimpleMenu widget Following is a list of the names and classes of the entries in each of the menus The mainMenu has the following entries securekbd class SmeBSB Invokes the secure action allowsends class SmeBSB Invokes the allow send events toggle action redraw class SmeBSB Invokes the redraw action linel class SmeLine This is a separator suspend class SmeBSB Invokes the send signal tstp action on systems that support job control continue class SmeBSB Invokes the send signal cont action on systems that support job control interrupt class SmeBSB Invokes the send signal int action xterm Command 293 Commands Reference Volume 6 hangup class SmeBSB Invokes the send signal hup action terminate class SmeBSB Invokes the send signal term action kill class SmeBSB Invokes the send signal kill action line2 class SmeLine This is a separator quit class SmeBSB Invokes the quit action The vtMenu has the following entries scroll
497. tsre s xntpd 2 To stop the xntpd daemon enter stopsre s xntpd 3 To use the authentication key file etc ntp new keys when running the xntpd daemon enter usr sbin xntpd k etc ntp new keys Files usr sbin xntpd Contains the xntpd daemon etc ntp conf Contains the default configuration file etc ntp drift Contains the default drift file etc ntp keys Contains the default key file Related Information The ntpq ntpdate ntptrace and xntpde commands xntpd Daemon 246 Commands Reference Volume 6 xntpdc Command Purpose Starts the query control program for the Network Time Protocol daemon xntpd This command only applies to AIX Version 4 2 or later Syntax xntpde i l n p s c SubCommand Host Description The xntpde command queries the xntpd daemon about its current state and requests changes to that state It runs either in interactive mode or by using command line arguments The xntpde command interface displays extensive state and statistics information In addition nearly all the configuration options which you can specify at start up using the xntpd daemon s configuration file you can also specify at run time using the xntpde command If you enter the xntpdc command with one or more request flags the NTP servers running on each of the hosts specified or defaults to local host receive each request If you do not enter any request flags the xntpde command tries
498. twork type names by specifying A11 If a font path element is added to A11 network types it will be placed at the end of each font path Security Access Control Only the root user should have execute x access to this command Example To add the fonts in usr lib X11 fonts 100dpi to the network type x_st_mgr ether enter x_add_nfs_fpe cedar usr lib X11 fonts 100dpi nfs Last x_st_mgr ether In this the font path element usr 1ib X11 fonts 100dpi is added to the end of the font path for network type x_st_mgr ether The font directory is on the host cedar which is accessed using NFS Files fusr Ipp x_st_mgr bin x_add_nfs_fpe Contains the x_add_nfs_fpe command letc x_st_mgr ether cf Contains the network type x_st_mgr ether configuration file sample x _ add nfs_ fpe Command 123 Commands Reference Volume 6 Related Information The aixterm command bootpd daemon login command pclient command x_add_fs_fpe command x_add_trm_120 command x_add_trm_130 command x_add_trm_140 command x_add_trm_150 command x_add_trm_160 command x_chg_net command x_chg_trm_120 command x_chg_trm_130 command x_chg_trm_140 command x_chg_trm_150 command x_chg_trm_160 command x_def_net command x_Is_net command x_Is_net_fp command x_ls_trm command x_rm_fpe command x_rm_net command x_rm_trm command x_add_nfs_fpe Command 124 Commands Reference Volume 6 x_add_ trm 120 Command Purpose Adds an Xstation 120 to the host
499. ty Access Control Any User Files Accessed None Examples To start PCMCIA GUI utility enter xpcmcia Files fusr Ipp X11 bin xpcmcia Contains the xpemcia command xpcmcia Command 255 Commands Reference Volume 6 xpowerm Command Purpose Starts Power Management GUI Graphical User Interface utility Syntax xpowerm Command pouerm xpowerm Description The xpowerm command starts Power Management GUI utility a graphical interface that enables you to perform Power Management tasks without entering complex commands The Power Management GUI utility displays two function buttons the system transition button and the Power Management parameter button Note If the power management controller pmc and the power management daemon pmd are not available you can not run the PM GUI utility XPOWERM Motif will display an error message The PM GUI utility XPOWERM requires that the power management controller pmc be configured and the power management daemon pmd running System Transition Button You can change the destination of system state transition by clicking the right mouse button on the system transition button A popup menu appears from which you can select a state The selected state can be viewed in a popup window by moving the mouse pointer onto the button area Power Management Parameter Button You can display the Power Management parameters all of the items in SMIT by clicking the Power Man
500. u Registers an HCON user rmhcons Removes an HCON session profile rmhconu Removes an HCON user stathcon Lists the status of HCON session profiles and SNA Logical Unit LU pools sthcondmn Starts the hcondmn subsystem tlog Tests an AUTOLOG script xhcon Invokes an HCON session using the Motif interface Commands List Network Computing System NCS Ib_admin Monitors and administers Location Broker registrations Iibd Manages the information in the Local Location Broker database nrglbd Manages the Global Location Broker database Commands List Message Handler 367 Commands Reference Volume 6 Files and Directories Commands List Directories cd Changes the current directory chgrp Changes the group ownership of a file or directory chmod Changes permission modes chroot Changes the root directory of a command delete Removes unlinks files or directories di Lists the contents of a directory dircmp Compares two directories and the contents of their common files dirname Writes to standard output all but the last part of a specified path dosdir Lists the directory for DOS files fdformat Formats diskettes li Lists the contents of a directory Is Displays the contents of a directory mkdir Creates one or more new directories mvdir Moves renames a directory pathchk Checks pathnames pwd Displays the pathname of the working directory rm Removes unlinks files or directories rmdir Remov
501. uage In this mode the vi editor indents appropriately for LISP programming and the L and subcommands are modified to act appropriately for LISP r File Recovers a file after an editor or system crash If you do not specify a File parameter the editor displays a list of all saved files tTag Edits the file containing the tag specified by the Tag parameter and positions the editor at its definition To use this flag you must first create a database of function names and their locations using the ctags command wNumber Sets the default window size to the value specified by the Number parameter This is useful when your terminal communicates with the system running the editor over a slow communications line y Overrides the maximum line setting of 1 048 560 with any value greater than 1024 Subcommand Carries out the ex editor subcommand specified by the Subcommand parameter before viewing with vi begins If you do not specify a subcommand the cursor is placed on the last line of the file view Command 51 Commands Reference Volume 6 Related Information The vi command ctags command Editor Overview in AIX Version 4 3 INed Editor User s Guide view Command 52 Commands Reference Volume 6 virscan Command Purpose Scans files for viruses Syntax virseon Command viracen otre ve 7 vw ne ut q 99 8 File v mg qe Do not put a space betwoen the p flag anc
502. ue tasks through direct manipulation of objects icons freeing you from entering complex command syntax or from searching through menus Print Manager enables you to perform basic tasks on printers and queues and is designed to make creating queues much simpler In addition it provides a graphical representation of queue and printer attachments as well as print jobs waiting in the queue However you must use SMIT to start or schedule print jobs The Print Manager session creates or adds to the smit log and smit script files in your home directory These are the same files appended when you run a SMIT session The commands built and run by Print Manager are added to the end of the smit log file along with the command output The time name of the task and the command flags and parameters included are added to the end of the smit script file in a format that can easily be used to create executable shell scripts Example To start Print Manager enter xprintm To see a list tasks you can perform for an object or area press the right mouse button to display its pop up menu Read the text in the Information Area for help on the objects and areas Files smit log Specifies detailed information on your session with time stamps smit script Specifies the task commands run during your session with time stamps xprintm Command 265 Commands Reference Volume 6 xrdb Command Purpose X Server resource database utilities Sy
503. understand how the restrictions are applied sysinfo Displays a variety of system state variables related to the local server All except the last four lines are described in the NTP Version 3 specification RFC 1305 The system flags show various system flags some of which can be set and cleared by the enable and disable configuration statements The stability is the residual frequency error remaining after applying the system frequency correction You use it for maintenance and debugging In most architectures this value will initially decrease from as high as 500 ppm to a nominal value in the range 01 to 0 1 ppm If it remains high for some time after starting the daemon something may be wrong with the local clock or the value of the kernel variable Tick may be incorrect The broadcastdelay shows the default broadcast delay as set by the broadcastdelay configuration statement while the authdelay shows the default authentication delay as set by the authdelay configuration statement sysstats Displays statistics counters maintained in the protocol module timerstats Displays statistics counters maintained in the timer event queue support code Runtime Configuration Requests Subcommands The server authenticates all requests which cause state changes in the server by using a configured NTP key The server can also disable this facility by not configuring a key You must make the key number and the corresponding key known to the xtnpde c
504. urity state of the system usrck Verifies the correctness of a user definition XSS Improves the security of unattended workstations Commands List Shells alias Defines or displays aliases basename Returns the base file name of a string parameter bg Runs jobs in the background bsh Invokes the Bourne shell chsh Changes a user s login shell command Executes a simple command csh Invokes the C shell expr Evaluates arguments as expressions false Returns an exit value of zero true or a nonzero exit value false fc Processes the command history list fg Runs jobs in the foreground getopt Parses command line flags and parameters hash Remembers or reports command path names jobs Displays status of jobs in the current session ksh Invokes the Korn shell line Reads one line from the standard input patch Applies changes to files read Reads one line from standard input rsh Executes the specified command at the remote host or logs into the remote host Rsh Invokes the restricted version of the Bourne shell sh Invokes the default shell shell Executes a shell with the user s default credentials and environment tee Displays the output of a program and copies it into a file test Evaluates conditional expressions true Returns an exit value of zero true or a nonzero exit value false tsh Interprets commands in a trusted shell type Writes a description of the command type ulimit Sets or reports user resour
505. utput of the command If a number is not specified the default value is 1 If the command expects standard input the specified lines are used as input Object Command Runs the specified AIX command and replaces the object specified by the Object parameter with the output of the command If the command expects standard input the specified object is used as input Interrupting and Ending the vi Editor Enter the following subcommands in command mode If you need information about the format of vi subcommands see vi General Subcommand Syntax Q Enters the ex editor in command mode ZZ Exits the vi editor saving changes q Quits the vi editor If you have changed the contents of the editing buffer the vi editor displays a warning message and does not quit If you are using this subcommand from the ex editor a colon is not needed q Quits the vi editor discarding the editing buffer If you are using this subcommand from the ex editor a colon is not needed Ese Ends text input or ends an incomplete subcommand Ctrl Interrupts a subcommand vi or vedit Command 49 Commands Reference Volume 6 Exit Status The following exit values are returned 0 Indicates successful completion gt 0 Indicates an error occurred Input Files Input files must be text files or files that are similar to text files except for an incomplete last line that is no longer than LINE_MAX 1 bytes in length and contains no null character
506. utting and pasting electronic mailing addresses and file names Actions It is possible to rebind keys or sequences of keys to arbitrary strings for input by changing the translations for the vt100 or tek4014 widgets Changing the translations for events other than key and button events is not expected and will cause unpredictable behavior The following actions are provided for using within the vt100 or tek4014 translations resources bell Percent ignore insert insert seven bit insert eight bit insert selection SourceName xterm Command This action rings the keyboard bell at the specified percentage above or below the base volume This action ignores the event but checks for special pointer position escape sequences This action inserts the character or string associated with the key that was pressed This action is a synonym for insert This action inserts an 8 bit meta version of the character or string associated with the key that was pressed The exact action depends on the value of the eightBitInput resource D This action inserts the string found in the selection or cutbuffer 298 keymap Name popup menu MenuName secure select start select extend select end DestName select cursor start select cursor end DestName Commands Reference Volume 6 indicated by the SourceName parameter Sources are checked in the order given case is significant
507. ve enough memory for the shape selected Specifies the mode used by X Display Manager Control Protocol XDMCP XDMCP uses the xdm program to facilitate the connection of an Xstation to a remote host XDMCP also allows the user to turn an Xterminal off and on again and maintain an established connection to the remote host Valid options are broadcast Sends a message to the network and waits for an xdmcp host to respond direct Directs a request to an xdmcp manager known to the Xstation indirect Sends an indirect request to an xdmcp manager that maintains a list of xdmcp hosts The manager assigns an xdmcp host to respond to the Xstation off No X Display Manager Control Protocol XDMCP The default option is off Specifies the name of the xdmcp host used for direct or indirect communication with the Xstation Valid options are none or the name of an xdmcp host If XDMCP is not used or if broadcast mode is used the value of Host is none The name of an xdmcp host must be specified if Mode is direct or indirect The default option is none Sets the language used for system messages the LANG environment variable Press the F4 key in SMIT to select an option Sets the map for the keyboard layout Press the F4 key in SMIT to select an option Sets the font used in the login window Press the F4 key in SMIT to select an option Sets the name of the keyboard file The default is keyboard Some countries have a second keyboard file usually name
508. ver is disabled the mouse cursor is turned off the screen is blanked and a changing pattern is displayed If a key or a mouse button is pressed a prompt asks for the password of the user who started the xlock command If the correct password is typed the screen is unlocked and the X server is restored When typing the password Ctrl U and Ctrl H are active as kill and erase respectively To return to the locked screen click in the small icon version of the changing pattern xlock Command 224 Commands Reference Volume 6 In order to function properly on AIX xlock needs to run with root permission since AIX restricts access to the password and access control files To give xlock root permission perform the following steps 1 Log in as root 2 Go to the directory that contains the xlock program file 3 Run these two commands a chownroot xlock b chmodu s xlock Flags batchcount Number Sets the number of things to do per batch Number refers to different things depending on the mode qix Refers to the number of lines rendered in the same color hop Refers to the number of pixels rendered in the same color image Refers to the number of sunlogos on screen at once swarm Refers to the number of bees life and blank Does not apply bg Color Sets the color of the background on the password screen delay Number Sets the speed at which a mode operates to the number of microseconds to delay between batches of
509. ver key number to use to authenticate configuration requests If you enter this subcommand without an argument it prints the current setting for this subcommand Prompts you to type in the NTP server authentication password to use to authenticate configuration requests Exits the xntpde query program Specifies the time out period for responses to server queries The default is 8000 milliseconds If you enter this subcommand without an argument it prints the current setting for this subcommand The xntpde query subcommands result in sending NTP mode 7 packets containing requests to the server These subcommands are read only they do not modify the server configuration state clkbugClockPeerAddress Addr2 Addr3 Addr4 Displays debugging information for a reference clock driver Some clock drivers provide this information which is mostly undecodable without a copy of the driver source in hand clockbugClockPeerAddress Addr2 Addr3 Addr4 dmpeers xntpdc Command Displays information concerning a peer clock The values obtained provide information on the setting of fudge factors and other clock performance information Displays a list of peers for which the server is maintaining state along with a summary of that state Identical to the output of the peers subcommand except for the character in the leftmost column Characters only appear beside peers which were included in the final stage of the clock selecti
510. vered by the mouse within that range until button release and then sends the program the release coordinates It is enabled by specifying parameter 1001 to DECSET Attention Use of this mode requires a cooperating program or it will hang the xterm command On button press the same information as for normal tracking is generated the xterm command then waits for the program to send mouse tracking information All X events are ignored until the following proper escape sequence is received from the pty ESC P P e P p The parameters are Func Startx Starty FirstRow and LastRow The Func parameter is nonzero to initiate hilite tracking and 0 zero to abort The Startx and Starty parameters give the starting x and y location for the xterm Command 307 Commands Reference Volume 6 highlighted region The ending location tracks the mouse but is never above row FirstRow and is always above row LastRow The top of the screen is row 1 When the button is released the xterm command reports the ending position one of two ways if the start and end coordinates are valid text locations the xterm command reports the ending position as follows ESC I If either coordinate is past the end of the line the xterm command reports the ending position as follows ESC CLL CL C The parameters are Startx Starty Endx Endy Mousex and Mousey The Startx Starty Endx and Endy parameters give the starting and ending character positions of the re
511. wColumnWidget userlabel xmLabelWidget username xmTextWidget passlabel xmLabelWidget password xmTextWidget failsafeline xmFormWidget failsafe xmToggleButtonWidget cancelline xmFormWidget cancel xmPushButtonWidget message xmLabelWidget The authentication client reads a name password pair from the keyboard Resources for this client should be put into the file named by DisplayManager DISPLAY resources All of these have reasonable default values so it is not necessary to specify any of them See usr lib X11 xdm Xresources for more information on default values for authentication client resources as well as the appropriate widget class documentation The following resources are also supported by the authentication client Xlogin foreground Specifies the color used for the foreground Xlogin background Specifies the color used for the background Xlogin greeting Specifies a string that identifies this window The default is AIXwindows environment Xlogin greetFont Specifies the font used to display the greeting xdm Command 204 Xlogin frameColor Xlogin titleMessage Xlogin titleFont Xlogin namePrompt Xlogin passwdPrompt Xlogin promptFont Xlogin failPrompt Xlogin failFont Xlogin cancelPrompt Xlogin cancelFont Xlogin fail Xlogin messageF ontlist Xlogin failColor Xlogin failTimeout Xlogin sessionArgument Commands Reference Volume 6 Specifies the background color used to display the greeting S
512. ward one screen Ctri E Scrolls the window down one line Ctrl Y Scrolls the window up one line Z Pages up z Pages down vi or vedit Command 44 Commands Reference Volume 6 Searching for Patterns Enter the following subcommands in command mode You can cancel an incomplete subcommand by pressing the Esc key If you need information about the format of vi subcommands see vi General Subcommand Syntax Number G Places the cursor at the line number specified by the Number parameter or at the last line if the Number parameter is not specified Pattern Places the cursor at the next line containing the character string specified by the Pattern parameter Pattern Places the cursor at the next previous line containing the character string specified by the Pattern parameter n Repeats the last search for the text specified by the Pattern parameter in the same direction N Repeats the last search for the text specified by the Pattern parameter in the opposite direction Patternl Number Places the cursor the specified number of lines after the line matching the character string specified by the Pattern parameter Pattern Number Places the cursor the specified number of lines before the line matching the character string specified by the Pattern parameter Finds the parenthesis or brace that matches the one at current cursor position Editing Text The subcommands for editing enable you to perform the following tasks e Mar
513. work File System NFS Overview for System Management in AIX Version 4 3 System Management Guide Communications and Networks NIS Maps in AIX Version 4 3 Network Information Services NIS and NIS Guide Remote Procedure Call Overview for Programming in AIX Version 4 3 Communications Programming Concepts How to Configure NIS in AIX Version 4 3 System Management Guide Communications and Networks Network Information Services NIS Overview for System Management in AIX Version 4 3 Network Information Services NIS and NIS Guide NIS Reference ypserv Daemon 336 Commands Reference Volume 6 ypset Command Purpose Directs a client machine to a specific server Syntax yeom Conran usrisbiniypaet d f Sarver d Domai V1 h Most 4 usr sbin ypset V1 dDomain hHost Server Description The ypset command directs the ypbind daemon on the client to the ypserv daemon on the server The ypbind daemon goes to the server you specify in the Server parameter to get Network Information Services NIS services for the domain you specify in the Domain parameter The ypbind daemon gets the NIS services from the ypserv daemon on the server Once the binding is set it is not tested until a client process such as the ypcat command or the ypwhich command tries to get a binding for the domain If the attempt to bind fails the specified server is down or is not running the ypserv daemon the ypbind daemon makes
514. x_rm_fpe command x_rm_net command x_rm_trm command x_chg_trm_160 Command 165 Commands Reference Volume 6 x_def_net Command Purpose Defines an Xstation network type Syntax x_del net Command g def net b Fie d Owectory Alype nTppeName gt x_def_net bFile dDirectory gAddress hType mMask nTypeName sNumber uAddress Description The x_def_net command defines for the current host the Xstation network type specified by the TypeName parameter and stores the definition in the etc bootptab file The TypeName parameter must contain x_st_mgr as a prefix for example x_st_mgr ether Use the n flag with the TypeName parameter You can use this network type when you add an Xstation to the host with the x_add_trm_120 command or the x_add_trm_130 command Flags bFile Specifies the name of the bootfile Because the bootfile program is downloaded into the Xstation the bootfile entry differs for each Xstation model The valid option for an Xstation 120 is bootfile3 The option for an Xstation 130 is bootfile4 dDirectory Specifies the directory where the Xstation Network Type configuration files reside This directory must exist with root having write permission The default home directory is letc x_st_mgr gAddress This optional parameter specifies the gateway address The default option is the Internet address of the host system that establishes a communication connection to another Et
515. x_st_mgrd tmty Contains the terminal type file etc bootptab Contains the boot protocol table Related Information The aixterm command bootpd daemon login command pclient command x_add_nfs_fpe command x_add_trm_130 command x_add_trm_140 command x_add_trm_150 command x_add_trm_160 command x_add_xst_fpe command x_chg_net command x_chg_trm_120 command x_chg_trm_130 command x_chg_trm_140 command x_chg_trm_150 command x_chg_trm_160 command x_def_net command x_Is_net command x_Is_net_fp command x_Is_trm command x_rm_fpe command x_rm_net command x_rm_trm command x_add_trm_120 Command 127 Commands Reference Volume 6 x_add_ trm_ 130 Command Purpose Adds an Xstation 130 to the host L_odd_wrme 120 Command y edd imn 130 199 Name TypeName Address Severn b Time Devke PonName Disk Pinmags FomAscess D b coiffe PanSbhape Mode Noa Language Keyboard b fie font Leceton LPF kappor x_add_trm_130 130NameTypeName Address ServerTime Device PortName Disk Pixmaps FontAccess Bootfile Pan Mode Host Language Keyboard File Font Location LPFkeyport Description The x_add_trm_130 command adds the Xstation 130 specified by the Name parameter to the current host and stores the configuration in the etc x_st_mgr x_st_mgrd cf file the etc x_st_mgr x_st_mgrd tmty file and the etc bootptab file Parameters Mandatory parameters are 130 Specifies th
516. xterm geometry 1 1 n login display 0 If no specific server program is given on the command line the xinit command follows these steps 1 The xinit command looks for a file to run as a shell script to start up the server The xinit command looks for files first in the XSERVERRC environment variable 2 If the file is not there it looks for the SHOME xserverrc file 3 If it still does not find the SHOME xserverrc file it looks next to usr Ipp X11 defaults xserverrc file 4 And finally if it does not find any of the previous files the xinit command runs the X command to start the X server and uses the following as a default X 0 Note that this assumes that there is a program named X in the current search path However servers are usually named Xdisplaytype where displaytype is the type of graphics display which is driven by this server The site administrator should therefore make a link to the appropriate type of server on the machine or create a shell script that runs the xinit command with the appropriate server xinit Command 219 Commands Reference Volume 6 Note If you attempt to start AIXwindows without an available pointer device such as a mouse or a tablet AIXwindows will not open Some devices can be plugged in but not defined and thus not available to the system as well as the reverse An important point is that programs which are run by xinitre should be run in the background if they do not exit right
517. y address is selected h7ype Specifies the type of physical network connection used for the terminal Ethernet or token ring or IEEE802 3 Press the F4 key in SMIT to select a network type Valid options are ethernet or tokenring or ieee802 The default is ethernet An Xstation network type must be defined for each network The same Xstation can be on multiple networks but must be configured with a different name and Internet address for each x_chg_net Command 146 Commands Reference Volume 6 network mMask Specifies the subnet mask A network subnet mask is required for each gateway entry to tell the system what the subnet partitioning scheme is This 4 byte bit mask in dotted decimal format consists of the Network Address portion and the Subnet Address portion of the Internet address The Xstation uses the subnet mask to determine if the destination address is on the local network If the destination address is not local then the Xstation directs the packet to the gateway The gateway then forwards the packet n7TypeName Specifies the name you choose to identify a network type for a specific network Xstation model subnet combination An example is x_st_mgr ether130 for an Ethernet Xstation 130 combination sNumber Specifies the number of the server port This number must be in the etc services file The default value is 9000 uAddress Specifies the full Internet address of the machine that performs name resoluti
518. y sequence that by default ends the AIXwindows session and all windows opened from it Specifies the mouse threshold The default is 2 pixels Acceleration takes effect only if the mouse is moved beyond the mouse threshold in one time interval and only applies to the amount beyond the threshold Specifies the number of minutes to elapse between connection checks The default is 60 minutes A specified value must be greater than 0 Specifies that the display be replaced with the current background color after the time specified by the s flag expires By default if the v flag is not used the entire display is painted with the background tile after the time specified by the s flag expires Forces the default backing store of all windows to have the WhenMapped value This is a convenient way of applying backing store to all windows Specifies a white pixel display color The default depends on the display Specifies the behavior of the mouse when its hotspot reaches the left or right border or the top or bottom of any root window If this flag is set and the hotspot of the mouse reaches the left border of the leftmost root window the mouse is automatically positioned at the right border of the rightmost root window at the same y position Conversely if this flag is set and the hotspot of the mouse reaches the right border of the rightmost root window the mouse is automatically positioned at the left border of the leftmo
519. ys your login name Identifies a user by user ID or alias Commands List Performance Tuning 394 Commands Reference Volume 6 acct Commands ac acctcms acctcom acctcon1 acctcon2 acctdisk acctdusg acctmerg acctprel acctprc2 accton Prints connect time records Produces command usage summaries from accounting records Displays selected process accounting record summaries Performs connect time accounting Performs connect time accounting Performs disk usage accounting Performs disk usage accounting Merges total accounting files into an intermediary file or a daily report Performs process accounting procedures Performs process accounting procedures Performs process accounting procedures acctwtmp Manipulates connect time accounting records to change formats and to make corrections in the records chargefee Charges users for the computer resources they use ckpacct diskusg dodisk fwtmp lastlogin monacct nulladm prctmp prdaily prtacct remove runacct shutacct startup turnacct wtmpfix Checks data file size for process accounting Generates disk accounting data by user ID Initiates disk usage accounting Manipulates connect time accounting records to change formats and to make corrections in the records Reports the last login date for each user on the system Performs monthly or periodic accounting Creates active accounting data files Displays session record files

86A243JX02-AIX 4.3 - Commands Reference

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents